contentDocumentsProductsiacs Vg71 Monitoring Applications Ifu 3703497 en PDF

Instructions for use
Infinity® Acute Care System
WARNING Monitoring Applications

To properly use this medical device, Software VG7.1
read and comply with these instructions
for use.
Typographical conventions
1 Consecutive numbers indicate steps of action, > The greater-than symbol indicates the
with the numbering restarting with "1" for each navigation path in a dialog.
new sequence of actions. Bold, italicized text indicates labels on the
 Bullet points indicate individual actions or device and texts that are displayed on the
different options for action. screen.
– Dashes indicate the listing of data, options, or
objects.
Figures
(A) Letters in parentheses refer to elements in the
related figure. Images of products and screen content in this
A Letters in figures denote elements referred to in document may differ from the actual products
the text. depending on configuration and design.
Trademarks
Trademarks owned by Dräger The following web page provides a list of the
countries in which the trademarks are registered:
Trademark www.draeger.com/trademarks
Apollo®
Babylog®
Evita®
Infinity®
Innovian®
MCable®
Medical Cockpit®
MPod®
Monolead®
PatientWatch®
Perseus®
Primus®
Tcore®
Zeus®
Instructions for use – Infinity® Acute Care System – Monitoring Applications – VG7.1 3
Trademarks owned by third-party Trademark Trademark owner
manufacturers
Klorsept Medentech
Trademark Trademark owner BIS VISTA Medtronic
Surfa'Safe ANIOS Laboratories Medtronic
Wip'Anios Nellcor
Descogen Antiseptica OxiMax
Oxygenon SatSeconds
SteriMax Aseptix Internet Explorer Is either a registered
Dismozon BODE Chemie trademark or trademark of
BruTab 6S Brulin Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other
Citrix XenApp Citrix Systems, Inc. and/or countries.
one or more of its
subsidiaries, and may be CapnoLine Oridion Medical 1987 Ltd.
registered in the United Capnostream
States Patent and
FilterLine
Trademark Office and in
other countries. Microcap
Dispatch Clorox MicroPod
Cleanisept Dr. Schumacher Microstream
Actichlor Ecolab USA Oridion
Incidin acryl-des Schülke & Mayr
OxyCide Mikrozid
Edwards Edwards Lifesciences, Perform
EV1000 LLC. Tuffie 5 Vernacare
Vigilance All devices referenced in these instructions for use
Vigileo may not be approved for sale in all countries.
Please check with your local Dräger representative.
SERVO-i Maquet, Inc.
Masimo Masimo Corporation
Masimo rainbow
SET
Pulse CO-Oximeter
Signal Extraction
PVI
SET (Signal
Extraction
Technology)
SpHb
SpMet
4 Instructions for use – Infinity® Acute Care System – Monitoring Applications – VG7.1
Microstream® MicroPod® External Capnography Module patents
The capnography component of this product is

covered by one or more of the following US patents:
6,437,316; 6,428,483; 6,997,880; 7,488,229;
8,414,488; 8,412,655 and their foreign equivalents.
Additional patent applications pending.
Open-source software
Dräger devices that use software may use open- license. Additional information regarding the open-
source software, depending on their setup. Open- source software used in this device is available at
source software may be subject to different terms of the following web page:
www.draeger.com/opensource
Safety information definitions
WARNING Abbreviations and symbols

A WARNING statement provides important in-
For explanations, refer to sections "Abbreviations"
formation about a potentially hazardous
and "Device symbols" in chapter "System
situation which, if not avoided, could result in
overview".
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
A CAUTION statement provides important infor-
mation about a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in minor or mod-
erate injury to the user or patient or in damage to
the medical device or other property.
NOTE
A NOTE provides additional information intended
to avoid inconvenience during operation.
User group requirements
The term "user group" describes the personnel Service personnel has specialist knowledge in
responsible who have been assigned by the electrical and mechanical engineering and
operating organization to perform a particular task experience in the servicing of medical devices.
on a product.
Where product-specific knowledge or tools are
required, the service activities must be carried out
by specialized service personnel. The specialized
Duties of the operating organization service personnel was trained by Dräger for these
service activities on this product.
The operating organization must ensure the
following:
– Every user group has the required qualifications
(e.g., has undergone specialist training or ac-
quired specialist knowledge through experi-
ence).
– Every user group has been trained to perform
the task.
– Every user group has read and understood the
relevant chapters in this document.
User groups
Clinical users
This user group operates the product in
accordance with the intended use.
Users have medical specialist knowledge in the
application of the product.
Reprocessing personnel
This user group carries out the necessary activities
to reprocess the product.
Reprocessing personnel has specialist knowledge
in the reprocessing of medical devices.
Service personnel
This user group installs the product and performs
the service activities.
Contents
Contents
For your safety and that of your patients. . . 13 Profiles/status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Managing profiles and views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Privacy mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Screen lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Intended use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Contraindications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Environments of use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Turning the IACS on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Viewing demographic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Admitting a patient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Discharging a patient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Infinity Medical Cockpit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Patient categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Infinity PS250 power supply unit (PS250) . . . . 27
Infinity P2500 power supply unit (P2500) . . . . . 27 Assembly and preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Infinity M540 patient monitor (M540) . . . . . . . . 28
Infinity M500 docking station (M500) . . . . . . . . 28 Assembly overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Additional hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Docking/undocking the M540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Device interface kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Locking/unlocking the M540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Device symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Additional M540 accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Connecting the system cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Mounting the Infinity MCable – Masimo
Operating concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 SET/Masimo rainbow SET/ Nellcor OxiMax . . . 113
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
The IACS components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
M540 and Cockpit communication . . . . . . . . . . 49 Overview of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Communicating with the Infinity network . . . . . 51 Alarm priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Remote control and remote view . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Alarm processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Communication management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Activating or deactivating alarm validation . . . 119
Loss of power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Optical alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Locked options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Acoustic alarm signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
External display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Testing optical and acoustic alarm signals . . . 124
Export protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Viewing current alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . 124
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Special alarm behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Header bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Pre-silencing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Monitoring area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Pausing acoustic alarm signals
Supported messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 (audio pause) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Main menu bar and quick access toolbar . . . . . 73 Activating or deactivating acoustic alarm
Filtering the parameter content. . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Auto and manual display modes . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Pausing alarm monitoring temporarily. . . . . . . 134
Auto view setup toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Activating or deactivating alarm monitoring . . . 135
Customizing the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Configuring the alarm settings for a patient. . . 136
Parameter priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Configuring the alarm setup for an individual
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Contents
Configuring the alarm setup for multiple Connecting the lead sets for 12-lead
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Configuring the alarm message behavior. . . . . 142 Connecting the lead wires for neonatal
Configuring the arrhythmia alarm setup . . . . . . 145 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Alarm setup for ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Patient preparation for ECG monitoring . . . . . 216
Auto setting all alarm limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 ECG display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Alarm history and stored events. . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ECG colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Viewing a snapshot of a single event . . . . . . . . 152 Electrode placement for adult and pediatric
Viewing current alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Configuring alarm settings temporarily . . . . . . . 153 Electrode placement for neonates. . . . . . . . . . 223
Configuring the SpO2 alarm priority . . . . . . . . . 154 12-lead monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Remote alarm control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Accessing the ECG functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Infinity MCable – Nurse call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 ECG parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . 225
External device disconnection alarm . . . . . . . . 158 Monitoring paced patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
The Code function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Pacemaker precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
The Timer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Optimizing pacer processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Alarm ranges and defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Arrhythmia monitoring overview . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Selecting arrhythmia leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Trends/data dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Arrhythmia processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Arrhythmia modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Trending behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Arrhythmia display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Graphical trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Accessing the arrhythmia functions. . . . . . . . . 239
Interacting with the graphical trends pages . . . 178 Arrhythmia parameter setup functions . . . . . . 239
Analysis tool page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Monitoring ST overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Interacting with the Analysis tool page . . . . . . . 182 Standard ST monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Tabular trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 TruST 12-lead monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Interacting with the tabular trend . . . . . . . . . . . 186 12-lead ST monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Mini-trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Connecting lead sets for ST monitoring . . . . . 241
Data review pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ST display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Reports tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Reviewing ST complexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
ST measuring points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 ST reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
ST alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Accessing the ST settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Accessing the calculation functions . . . . . . . . . 195
ST setup functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Viewing the calculation results . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Learning/relearning QRS pattern . . . . . . . . . . 249
Laboratory data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Calculation equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Impedance respiratory rate (RRi). . . . . . . . . 251
Drug calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Accessing the drug calculation functions . . . . . 203 Overview of respiration monitoring . . . . . . . . . 252
Customized drug list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Respiration precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Drug calculator equations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Connecting the 3-, 5-, 6-wire lead sets for
respiration monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
ECG, arrhythmia, and ST segment . . . . . . . . 209 Connecting the lead sets for 12-lead
monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Overview of ECG and heart rate monitoring . . . 211
Connecting the lead wires for neonatal
ECG precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Connecting the 3-, 5-, 6-wire lead sets for
Patient preparation for respiration monitoring . . . 256
ECG monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Respiration display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Contents
Activating the breath marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Patient preparation for non-invasive blood
Respiration measuring modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 pressure monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Accessing the respiration settings . . . . . . . . . . 260 Non-invasive blood pressure display. . . . . . . . 304
Respiration parameter setup functions. . . . . . . 260 Non-invasive blood pressure measurement
modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox monitoring with Venous stasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Masimo SET MCable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Accessing the non-invasive blood pressure
Overview of SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Non-invasive blood pressure parameter setup
SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox precautions . . . . . . . . 266 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Connecting the Masimo SET MCable . . . . . . . 268
Connecting the Masimo rainbow SET Invasive pressure (IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
MCable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Overview of invasive pressure monitoring. . . . 312
Patient preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Invasive pressure precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox display . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Patient preparation for invasive pressure
Reviewing the SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Invasive pressure display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Accessing the SpO2 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Labeling invasive pressure channels . . . . . . . 315
SpO2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Standard labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Masimo rainbow SET Pulse CO-Ox Pressure label conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Zeroing a pressure transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Password-protected Masimo rainbow SET Pulmonary wedge pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Starting wedge measurements from the pods . . . .321
Starting wedge measurements from the
SpO2 and pulse rate with Nellcor OxiMax Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
MCable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Accessing the invasive pressure settings . . . . 324
Overview of SpO2 monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Invasive pressure parameter setup functions. . . 325
SpO2 precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Measuring pulse pressure variation (PPV) . . . 327
Connecting the Nellcor OxiMax MCable. . . . . . 286 Measuring systolic pressure variation (SPV) . . . 328
Patient preparation for SpO2 monitoring . . . . . 287
SpO2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Cardiac output (C.O.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Accessing the SpO2 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Overview of cardiac output monitoring . . . . . . 330
SpO2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . 290 C.O. precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Connecting the cardiac output hardware. . . . . 331
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Patient preparation for cardiac output
Overview of temperature monitoring . . . . . . . . 294 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Cardiac output display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Cardiac output computation constant . . . . . . . 336
Accessing the temperature dialog . . . . . . . . . . 296 Cardiac output measuring modes . . . . . . . . . . 338
Temperature parameter setup functions. . . . . . 297 Saving the cardiac output value . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Reviewing the cardiac output averages . . . . . 342
Non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP) . . . . . . 299 Accessing the cardiac output settings . . . . . . . 343
Cardiac output parameter setup functions . . . 344
Overview of non-invasive blood pressure
monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Mainstream CO2 monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Non-invasive blood pressure precautions . . . . 301
Connecting the non-invasive blood pressure Overview of Mainstream CO2 monitoring . . . . 346
hose and cuff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 CO2 precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Contents
Connecting the CO2 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 CCO/SvO2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Patient preparation for CO2 monitoring . . . . . . 349 Viewing the CCO/SvO2 parameters . . . . . . . . 410
CO2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Accessing the CCO/SvO2 settings . . . . . . . . . 411
Using the CO2 dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 SvO2 parameter setup functions. . . . . . . . . . . 411
CO2 parameter setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Performing a calibration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 External devices – MEDIBUS.X devices . . . 413
External device monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Microstream CO2 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Overview of Microstream® CO2 monitoring . . . 358 Compatible MEDIBUS.X devices . . . . . . . . . . 415
CO2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Supported MEDIBUS.X ventilator and
Using the CO2 dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 anesthesia data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
CO2 parameter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Viewing MEDIBUS.X parameter data . . . . . . . 424
Calibration Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Parameter fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Viewing loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Scio Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 The Show all pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Overview of Scio monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Accessing parameter setup functions . . . . . . . 427
Using the Scio dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Paw setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
CO2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Ventilator parameter setup functions. . . . . . . . 428
O2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 CO2 setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Agent display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
xMAC (MAC multiple). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 External devices – Servo-i ventilator. . . . . . 433
Zeroing the gas analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Overview of ventilation monitoring . . . . . . . . . 434
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Dual SpO2 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Device compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Overview of Dual SpO2 monitoring . . . . . . . . . 388 Supported Servo-i parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Viewing parameter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
External Device – Bispectral index (BIS) . . . 391 Parameter fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Viewing loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Overview of BIS monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
The Show all page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
BIS precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Accessing the parameter setup functions . . . . 440
BIS display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Ventilator Paw setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Accessing the BIS settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Ventilator parameter setup functions. . . . . . . . 442
BIS parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
CO2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . 443
External Device – Neuromuscular
External devices – Evita 2D, Evita 4, Evita
transmission (NMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
XL (Medibus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Overview of NMT monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Overview of ventilation monitoring . . . . . . . . . 446
NMT precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
NMT display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Device compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Printing NMT information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Supported Medibus ventilator data . . . . . . . . . 448
Accessing the NMT settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Viewing Medibus parameter data . . . . . . . . . . 450
The NMT page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Parameter fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Viewing loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
External device – continuous cardiac
The Show all page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
output (CCO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Accessing the parameter setup functions . . . . 453
Overview of CCO monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Ventilator Paw setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
CCO precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Ventilator parameter setup functions. . . . . . . . 454
Contents
CO2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

ARR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
System configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Respiration (RRi). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Screen setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP) . . . . . . . . 548
Screen setup – general settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Screen setup – auto view functions . . . . . . . . . 459 Invasive pressure (IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Configuring parameters for display. . . . . . . . . . 461 Mainstream CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Screen setup – configuring views. . . . . . . . . . . 464 Microstream CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Screen setup – configuring main menu bar Cardiac Output (C.O.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Recording status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Screen setup – configuring the multi-tab split Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Screen setup – the View editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Configuring the alarm setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Configuring the recording and report settings . . . 481 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Biomed setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Biomed IT setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Inspection / safety checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Profile setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Saving profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Maintenance Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Configuring profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Transferring profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Reprocessing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Importing and exporting profiles using a USB Reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
flash drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Information on reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Reports/recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Classification for reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Before reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
R50N recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Validated reprocessing procedures . . . . . . . . . 590
Timed recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Other agents and reprocessing procedures. . . . 591
Continuous recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 After reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Requesting recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Available reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Printing reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Configuring a case summary report . . . . . . . . . 516 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
IT applications (options) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Device combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 Infinity PS250 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Configuring IT tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 Infinity P2500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Accessing an IT tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Infinity MCable – Nurse call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Supported IT applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 Infinity R50N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Connecting to the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Sound pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Secondary display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 EMC declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Device communication messages . . . . . . . . . . 526 Operating characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
This page has been left blank intentionally.
For your safety and that of your patients
Mandatory reporting of adverse events . . . . . . 14

Strictly follow these instructions for use . . . . . . 14
Storing the instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installing accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sterile accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Restriction of distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Restrictions for use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connected devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Safe connection with other electrical
equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connection to hospital network . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Patient safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Patient monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Not for use in areas of explosion hazard . . . . . 18
Information on electromagnetic compatibility . . . 18
Operating location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Defibrillator precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Electrosurgery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Virus protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Security recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Mandatory reporting of adverse events Storing the instructions for use
Serious adverse events with this product must be WARNING

reported to Dräger and the responsible authorities.
Risk of incorrect use.
Instructions for use must be kept accessible
Strictly follow these instructions for use for the user.
NOTE
The Infinity Acute Care System provides the
following additional instructions for use: Training
– Infinity Acute Care System – Infinity M540 Training for users is available from the responsible
patient monitor (describes the M540 user Dräger organization, see www.draeger.com.
interface)
– Infinity Acute Care System – Medical Cockpit
(describes the hardware of the Cockpit) Maintenance
– Infinity Acute Care System – Monitoring
accessories (describes all of the IACS WARNING
accessories). Risk of medical device failure and of patient
injury.
Please refer to these additional instructions for
use for device-specific information. The medical device must be inspected and
serviced regularly by service personnel.
WARNING Repair and complex maintenance carried out
Risk of incorrect operation and use. on the medical device must be performed by
experts.
Any use of the medical device requires full
understanding and strict observation of all If the above is not complied with, medical
sections of these instructions for use. The device failure and patient injury may occur.
medical device must only be used for the Observe the chapter "Maintenance".
purpose specified under "Application" and in A service contract with Dräger is
conjunction with appropriate patient recommended. It is recommended that
monitoring. original Dräger parts are used for repairs and
Strictly observe all WARNING and CAUTION that Dräger performs these repairs.
statements throughout these instructions for
use and all statements on medical device
labels. Failure to observe these safety
information statements constitutes a use of
the medical device that is inconsistent with its
intended use.
Accessories Restrictions for use
WARNING CAUTION
Risk due to incompatible accessories. Device for use in health care facilities only and
exclusively by persons as defined in the user
Dräger has only tested the compatibility of
groups (see "User group requirements"
accessories listed in the current list of
on page 6).
accessories. If other accessories are used,
there is a risk of patient injury due to medical
device failure. Dräger recommends that the
medical device is only used with accessories Connected devices
listed in the current list of accessories.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and of device
Installing accessories malfunction.
Any connected devices or device
CAUTION combinations not complying with the
Risk of device failure requirements mentioned in these instructions
Install accessories to the basic device in for use can compromise the functional
accordance with the instructions for use of the integrity of the medical device and lead to
basic device. Make sure that there is a safe electric shock. Before operating the medical
connection to the basic device. device, strictly comply with the instructions
for use of all connected devices and device
Strictly observe instructions for use and assembly combinations.
instructions.
WARNING
To avoid electric shock, the equipment should
Sterile accessories only be connected to a power source that is
properly grounded (protective earth ground).
CAUTION
Risk of medical device failure and of patient injury.
Do not use sterile-packaged accessories if the
Safe connection with other electrical
packaging has been opened, is damaged or if equipment
there are other signs of non-sterility. Single-use
accessories must not be reused, reprocessed, or WARNING
resterilized. Risk of patient injury.
Electrical connections to equipment which are
not listed in these instructions for use should
Restriction of distribution
only be made following consultation with the
respective manufacturers. Equipment
Federal Law (U.S.) restricts this device to sale by or
malfunction may result with the risk of patient
on the order of a physician.
injury.
WARNING Connection to hospital network

The leakage current increases when multiple
Many medical devices manufactured by Dräger use
medical devices are connected to a patient.
networks to transmit patient data in real-time and to
Make sure that the galvanic isolation of each
notify clinical users of alarm conditions. Hospitals
device is suitable for the intended application.
should refer to IEC 80001-1 before attempting to
Connect only equipment that is set up and
connect such medical devices to their IT networks.
tested according to IEC standards to the
analog and digital signal inputs and outputs.
Connect only passive USB devices to the
IACS (Infinity Acute Care System) Cockpit. Patient safety
To protect the patient from possible injury due The design of the medical device, the
to electrical shock, peripheral devices should accompanying documentation, and the labeling on
only be connected to a monitor within the the medical device are based on the assumption
same room. The installer or service provider that the purchase and the use of the medical device
should verify that the leakage current of the are restricted to persons familiar with the most
interconnected system meets the electrical important inherent characteristics of the medical
safety requirements of IEC 60601-1. device. Instructions and WARNING and CAUTION
statements are therefore largely limited to the
specifics of the Dräger medical device.
Electrical safety
These instructions for use do not contain any
information on the following points:
WARNING
Because of the risk of electric shock, never – Risks that are obvious to users
remove the cover of a device while it is in use – Consequences of obvious improper use of the
or plugged into a power socket. medical device
– Potentially negative effects on patients with dif-
CAUTION ferent underlying diseases
Connect the PS250 or the P2500 with an attached
Medical device modification or misuse can be
power cable only to hospital-grade electrical
dangerous.
power sockets to make sure that it is properly
grounded.
Patient monitoring
CAUTION
To avoid injuring the patient, do not touch any The user of the medical device is responsible for
connector or mounting screw on the device when choosing a suitable patient monitoring system that
you are touching the patient. Do not allow the provides appropriate information on medical device
conductive parts of electrodes and cables to performance and patient condition.
contact other conductive parts or the ground.
Patient safety may be achieved by a wide variety of
means ranging from electronic surveillance of
medical device performance and patient condition
to direct observation of clinical signs.
The responsibility for selecting the best level of
patient monitoring lies solely with the user of the
medical device.
General safety information
The following WARNING and CAUTION CAUTION

statements apply to general operation of the
Read all cleaning instructions (for example,
medical device.
originating from the disinfectant manufacturer and
WARNING and CAUTION statements specific to the hospital) carefully before cleaning the device.
subsystems or particular features of the medical Refer to the chapter entitled "Reprocessing" on
device appear in the respective sections of these page 587 for device-specific cleaning
instructions for use or in the instructions for use of instructions. Moisture may damage the circuits,
another product being used with this medical compromise critical performance and present a
device. safety risk.
WARNING
WARNING
Dräger recommends using the Infinity Acute
Risk of explosion and of chemical burns.
Care System or the M540 (if on wireless
Improper handling of batteries can result in transport) for primary diagnosis and the (ICS)
explosions and chemical burns. Infinity CentralStation for patient viewing only.
Do not throw batteries into fire. Do not force
batteries open. For countries subject to the EU directive
2002/96/EC
Observe the applicable laws and regulations for
battery disposal. This device is subject to EU directive 2002/96/EC
(WEEE). In order to comply with its registration
WARNING according to this directive, this device may not be
To avoid electric shock, inspect all cables disposed of at municipal collection points for waste
before use. Never use cables that appear of electrical and electronic equipment. Dräger has
cracked, worn, or damaged in any way (doing authorized a company to collect and dispose of this
so may compromise performance or put the device.
patient at risk). To initiate collection or for further information, visit
Dräger on the Internet at www.draeger.com. Use
WARNING the Search function with the keyword "WEEE" to
Do not cover the device with blankets or bed find the relevant information. If access to the
sheets. To prevent burns to the patient, avoid Dräger website is not possible, contact the local
direct contact between external surfaces and Dräger organization.
the patient.
CAUTION
To avoid injuring the patient, disconnect all
sensors that will not be used during transport,
before moving the patient.
Not for use in areas of explosion hazard Operating location
WARNING Only use devices (monitor, MPod, MCable, and

Risk of explosion accessories) in areas that meet the environmental
requirements outlined in the technical data section.
This medical device is neither approved nor
certified for use in areas where oxygen WARNING
concentrations greater than 25% To avoid interfering with device operation, do
(combustible or explosive gas mixtures) are not operate devices (monitor, MPod, MCable,
likely to occur. and accessories) within equipment that emits
microwave or other high-frequency
emissions. For recommended separation
Information on electromagnetic distances, see page 609.
compatibility
WARNING
General information on electromagnetic Make sure that the device is properly mounted
compatibility (EMC) according to international EMC and secured to prevent injury. Make sure the
standard IEC 60601-1-2: requirements for maximum load and slope of
Medical electrical equipment is subject to special floor are met. Consult the documentation of
precautionary measures concerning the mounting manufacturer for detailed
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and must be information.
installed and put into operation in accordance with
the EMC information provided on page 606. WARNING
Portable and mobile radio frequency To minimize the risk of patient strangulation,
communications equipment can affect medical carefully position and secure sensor cables.
electrical equipment. Also position the sensor cables to minimize
inductive loops.
WARNING
Do not connect connectors with WARNING
an ESD warning symbol and do To avoid patient injury as the result of a falling
not touch their pins without monitor when using a rolling trolley, universal
implementing ESD protective bed hook, or handle hook mount, do not apply
measures. Such protective excessive force to the monitor or mount when
measures may include antistatic clothing and entering or exiting elevators or passing over
shoes, touching a potential equalization pin thresholds and other uneven surfaces.
before and during connection of the pins, or
using electrically insulating and antistatic CAUTION
gloves. All users concerned must be
To prevent overheating, do not place the device in
instructed in these ESD protective measures.
direct sunlight or near radiant warmers.
CAUTION
After extended exposure in a cold environment,
acclimate the device carefully so that
condensation does not form on the electronic
parts and damage the device.
CAUTION Electrosurgery
To avoid damaging the touch-sensitive screen, do
Observe the following precautions during
not allow sharp instruments to touch the front of
electrosurgery to reduce electrosurgical unit (ESU)
the devices.
interference and improve user safety and patient
safety.
CAUTION
To avoid short-circuiting and otherwise damaging WARNING
the device, Dräger recommends that no fluids For better performance and to reduce the
come in contact with the IACS devices when they hazard of burns during surgery, always use
are connected to a power socket. If fluids are accessories designed for ESU environments.
accidentally spilled on the equipment, remove the
affected device from service as soon as possible
WARNING
and have service personnel verify that patient
safety is not compromised. To reduce the hazard of burns during
electrosurgery, keep the sensor or transducer
(ECG, pressure, SpO2) and their associated
cables away from the surgical site, the ESU
Defibrillator precautions
return electrode, and earth ground.
The IACS and the peripheral devices are protected
against high-frequency interference from NOTE
defibrillators and electrosurgical units and against Cover internally placed reusable temperature
50-Hz and 60-Hz power line interference. sensors with temperature sensor sheaths.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, always remove Virus protection
accessories that are not resistant to
defibrillation before defibrillating a patient. CAUTION
The IACS does not have virus protection software
CAUTION and relies therefore on the firewall of your
To prevent burns and electric shock due to institution to prevent access to infected files.
rerouting of electrical current through electrodes, While setting up IT applications to access
do not position the defibrillator pads near any websites, evaluate each website with regard to
electrodes or sensors. possible virus infection.
CAUTION
Only defibrillate across the chest.
CAUTION
To protect the patient during defibrillation and to
ensure accurate ECG information, use only ECG
electrodes and cables specified by Dräger.
Removal of applied parts that are not rated
defibrillation-proof such as disposable SpO2
sensors may be required to prevent sensor
breakdown and energy shunting.
Security recommendations
Dräger makes the following security

recommendations:
– Physical security of the patient monitors is
recommended and is the responsibility of the
operating organization.
– Physical security of the telecommunications
closet is recommended and is the responsibility
of the operating organization.
– Dräger recommends that operating
organizations restrict physical access to
unused ethernet ports on the IACS.
– Dräger recommends that operating
organizations restrict physical access to
unused USB and serial ports on the IACS.
– Dräger relies on the medical device isolation
mechanism of the VLANs and the proper
configuration, implementation, and use of the
operating organization's security measures to
prevent the introduction of malware onto the
Infinity network.
CAUTION
Dräger recommends that all documents opened
for viewing from the hospital LAN are from a
secure source.
Application
Application
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Contraindications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Environments of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Application
Intended use
The IACS is intended for multi-parameter, The IACS and any connected optional hardware
physiologic patient monitoring of adult, pediatric, are not intended for use in the following hospital
and neonatal patients in environments where environments:
patient care is provided by trained health care
– Hyperbaric chambers
professionals.
– Environments containing MRI equipment
The IACS obtains the physiologic, multi-parameter
data from the connection to the M540 monitor and
optional medical devices and displays. The transfer
of this data is accomplished by the Infinity network.
Indications
The M540 monitors the following parameters: – Carboxyhemoglobin saturation (SpCO) (adult
and pediatric patients only)
– Heart rate
– Methemoglobin saturation (SpMet)
– Arrhythmia (adult and pediatric patients only)
– Pleth variability index (PVI)
– 12-lead analysis
® – Carbon dioxide (CO2)
– ST segment analysis including TruST (adult
and pediatric patients only) – Oxygen (O2) (adult and pediatric patients only)
– Apnea – Nitrous oxide (N2O) (adult and pediatric
patients only)
– Respiratory rate derived from impedance
measurement (RRi) – Anesthetic agents (Sevoflurane, Desflurane,
Isoflurane, Halothane, Enflurane) (adult and
– Invasive pressure (IP)
pediatric patients only)
– Non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP)
– xMAC (adult and pediatric patients only)
– Temperature
The IACS is also capable of connecting to third-par-
– Cardiac output, only available when the M540 is ty devices to display physiologic, multi-parameter
docked in an IACS configuration (adult and data, store trends, and send data across a network.
– Arterial oxygen saturation (SpO2)
– Pulse rate
– Perfusion index (PI)
– Total arterial hemoglobin (SpHb) (adult and
– Total oxygen content (SpOC) (adult and
Application
Contraindications
The IACS and any connected optional hardware

are not intended for use in the following hospital en-
vironments:
– Hyperbaric chambers
– Environments containing MRI equipment
Environments of use
The IACS is intended for multi-parameter, physio-

logic patient monitoring of adult, pediatric, and neo-
natal patients in environments where patient care is
provided by trained healthcare professionals.
System overview
System overview
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Infinity Medical Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Infinity PS250 power supply unit (PS250) . . . 27
Infinity P2500 power supply unit (P2500). . . 27
Infinity M540 patient monitor (M540) . . . . . . 28
Infinity M500 docking station (M500) . . . . . . 28

Front view of the M500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Rear view of the M500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Additional hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Device interface kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Third party devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Dräger devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Device symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
System overview
Overview
These instructions for use describe the Cockpit – Undocking the M540 – refers to removing the
(Medical Cockpit), the primary display and user M540 from the M500 for patient transport.
interface of the Infinity Acute Care System –
The following diagram shows the basic
Monitoring Applications – M540 patient monitor
components of the IACS. In addition, you can
(IACS). Specifically, these instructions for use
connect various hardware to expand the viewing
describe the setup tasks and features available on
and monitoring capabilities (see "Additional
the Cockpit. For detailed information on the M540
hardware" on page 29).
patient monitor, refer to the Instructions for use
Infinity Acute Care System – Infinity M540.
Some terms used in these instructions for use:
– Cockpit – refers to the Infinity C700 Medical
A B
Cockpit or the Infinity C500 Medical Cockpit.
– M540 – refers to the Infinity M540 transport
component and patient connection point of the
IACS.
– M500 – refers to the Infinity M500 docking sta- D
tion that secures the M540, provides communi-
cation between the M540 and the Cockpit, and
charges the battery in the M540.
C
001
– PS250 – refers to the Infinity PS250 power sup- A C500 / C700
ply Com Hub (power supply unit).
B PS250 or P2500
– P2500 – refers to the Infinity P2500.
C M500
– Docking the M540 – refers to placing the M540
on the M500. D M540
Infinity Medical Cockpit
The Infinity Medical Cockpit (referred to in this IFU NOTE

as Cockpit) is the primary display and user inter-
On the second-generation Cockpit, the yellow key
face for the IACS and is available in the sizes listed
on the front has changed to .
in "Overview" on page 47.
For detailed description regarding the front and
back panel of the Cockpit, refer to the Instructions
for use Infinity Acute Care System – Infinity Medical
Cockpit.
System overview
Infinity PS250 power supply unit (PS250)
The following diagram shows the bottom of the A Infinity network connectors
PS250.
B Nurse call connector
C Export protocol connector
A BC D D Power cable connection
E Two interchangeable system cable connectors
– one for the M540, one for the Cockpit
F F Network connection LEDs
F The front of the PS250 has the following two LEDs:
– Power mains – lights up green when the
device is connected to AC power.
E – Battery indicator – yellow LED that
004 lights up briefly during startup or fault
conditions such as a faulty battery.
Infinity P2500 power supply unit (P2500)
The following diagram shows the bottom of the A Two interchangeable system cable connectors
P2500. – one for the M540, one for the Cockpit
B Power cable connection
A
C Infinity network connector
D Nurse call connector
E Export protocol connector
The front of the P2500 has the following two LEDs:
– Power mains – lights up green when the
device is connected to AC power.
– Battery indicator – yellow LED that
ED C B lights up briefly during startup or fault
conditions such as a faulty battery.
357
System overview
Infinity M540 patient monitor (M540)
The following diagram shows the M540 when it is A M540 patient monitor
docked in the M500 docking station.
B M500 docking station
The M540 acquires patient signals, processes
them, and relays them to the Cockpit for display.
The M540 also provides patient monitoring when it
is undocked during patient transport. For more
detailed information on the M540, refer to the
A Instructions for use Infinity Acute Care System –
Infinity M540.
B
M540IFUcoverVG6
Infinity M500 docking station (M500)
The M500 is the mechanical device that secures A Locking mechanism – secures the M540 (for
and powers the M540. It also charges the battery more detailed information, see "Locking/unlock-
and controls the communication between the M540 ing the M540" on page 110)
and the Cockpit through an optical Ethernet link.
B Release buttons for undocking the M540 (you
only have to press one button to release the
M540)
Front view of the M500
C Optical Ethernet links
A D Pins for charging the battery of the M540 and

B B for providing power to the M540 when it is
docked
D
301
System overview
Rear view of the M500
A System cable connector

B Nurse call connector
C LED – lights up green when connected to the
network
A
B
C
Additional hardware 302
The following table lists the additional devices that

can be connected to the IACS.
Device Description Connection

Infinity MCable – Masimo SET Measures the percentage of Connects directly to the SpO2
functional hemoglobin saturated connector of the M540 (see
with oxygen (%SpO2) and reports page 268 and page 286).
the perfusion index (PI) and the
pulse rate (PLS*).
Infinity MCable – Masimo SET Measures the percentage of
rainbow functional hemoglobin saturated
with oxygen (%SpO2) and reports
the perfusion index (PI) and the
pulse rate (PLS*). In addition, it
measures total arterial
hemoglobin (SpHb), total oxygen
content (SpOC), pleth variability
index (PVI), Carboxyhemoglobin
saturation (SpCO),
methemoglobin saturation
(SpMet).
Infinity MCable – Nellcor OxiMax Measures the percentage of
functional hemoglobin saturated
with oxygen (%SpO2) and the
pulse rate (PLS*).
System overview

Hemo4 pod Measures up to 4 pressures, Connects directly to the Hemo
cardiac output, core and body connector of the M540.
Infinity MPod – QuadHemo
temperature.
Hemo2 pod Measures up to 2 pressures,
cardiac output, core and body
temperature.
Infinity MCable – Dual Hemo Measures up to 2 pressures.
Infinity MCable – Mainstream Measures mainstream CO2. Connects directly to the CO2
CO2 connector of the M540 (see
page 348).
Infinity MCable – Microstream Measures Microstream CO2. Connects directly to the CO2
CO2 connector of the M540 patient
monitor (see page 358).
Scio Four Measures the concentration of Connects directly to the CO2

CO2, N2O, and anesthetic agents connector of the M540 or the
(Sevoflurane, Desflurane, M500 docking station (see the
Isoflurane, Halothane, and instructions for use Infinity Acute
Enflurane) in the breathing gas. Care System – Infinity M540).
Scio Four Oxi Measures the concentration of
CO2, N2O, O2, and anesthetic
agents (Sevoflurane, Desflurane,
Isoflurane, Halothane, and
Enflurane) in the breathing gas.
Scio Four plus Measures the concentration of
CO2, N2O, and anesthetic agents
(Sevoflurane, Desflurane,
Scio Four Oxi plus Measures the concentration of
CO2, N2O, O2, and anesthetic
agents (Sevoflurane, Desflurane,
Infinity MCable – Nurse call Provides remote notification of Connects to the PS250 / P2500
medium and high-priority alarm (see page 27) or to the M500
conditions. (see page 28).
System overview

Infinity MCable – Analog/Sync Provides a sync pulse to Connects to the Temp/Aux
synchronize defibrillators to the connector of the M540 or to the
heart beat of the patient during CO2 connector with a Y-cable.
cardioversion. The cable’s analog
out function provides an ECG and
arterial blood pressure signal to a
device such as intra-aortic
balloon pump.
Secondary video display Extends the viewing capabilities Connects to a Cockpit using the
of a Cockpit to an additional video DVI 1 connector located on the
display. Secondary displays back panel (see the instructions
mirror the content of the Cockpit. for use Infinity Acute Care
System – Medical Cockpit).
R50N recorder Produces timed and continuous Connects to the Infinity network
recordings. or the PS250 / P2500.
Laser printer Prints various reports and Cockpit Connects to the Infinity network.
print screens.
Device interface kits
The following device interface cables are available Device Part No.
for the Infinity Acute Care System and are used to (cable)
connect to the corresponding devices.
Dräger V500 ventilator MS34116
Device Part No. Dräger Babylog VN500
(cable) Dräger V300 ventilator
Edwards EV1000/Vigi.II/Vigileo MS34114
Dräger Evita 2D/4/XL ventilator Dräger Perseus A500
Dräger Savina 300 ventilator Dräger Zeus IE
Dräger Carina ventilator Maquet Servo-I ventilator MS34117
Bis Vista monitor MS34115 TOFscan monitor MS34118
Dräger Primus/IE/Apollo
Dräger Fabius Family Dräger Oxylog 3000+ ventilator N/A
Masimo SpO2
Nellcor SpO2 MS34239
System overview
Additional devices that can display physiologic, multi-parameter data, provide trends and transmit
information across a network, are listed below. (Availability is subject to in-country approval.)
Third party devices
– BIS Vista (Medtronic) – Vigileo (Edwards)

– Lifescience EV1000 (Edwards) – ToFScan (IDMed)
– Vigilance II (Edwards) – Servo-i (Marquet)
Dräger devices
Dräger Ventilators Dräger Anethesia devices

– Evita 2D – Perseus A500
– Evita 4 – Fabius OS
– Evita XL – Fabius Tiro Military
– Evita V500 – Fabius MRI
– Babylog VN500 – Zeus IE
– Evita V300 – Primus
– Savina 300 – Primus IE
– Carina – Primus US (Apollo)
– Oxylog 3000 plus – Fabius GS / Fabius Ti ro
– Fabius GS Premium
– Fabius plus
– Fabius plus XL
System overview
Device symbols
Warning! Strictly follow these Lower alarm limits

instructions for use
Consult instructions for use Upper alarm limits
Caution! Observe the Autoset alarm limits

accompanying documentation!
Medical Device Alarm monitoring deactivated

temporarily
Access to trend pages Alarm monitoring deactivated

permanently
The button next to this symbol Acoustic alarm signal paused

accesses special procedure pages temporarily
Access to alarm functions Acoustic alarm signal turned off

permanently
Access to the standby and privacy Change clinical password

modes, and access to patient
Change biomed password
discharge
System overview
Access to pre-configured views Lung symbol that pulsates with each

and layouts detected breath
Access to parameter pages Heart blip that flashes with each

detected pulse
Adult patient category Pediatric patient category
Neonatal patient category Pacer detection is activated; the

heart symbol flashes with each
detected paced pulse
Battery status LED Scrolls to additional tabs and pages
Battery charging error Power on/off
AC power mains WEEE - dispose electrical-electronic

equipment properly
Function/setting is unlocked Component number and revision
System overview
Function/setting is locked Device serial number
Data entry with numeric keypad Date of manufacture
Trend configuration Complete screen calibration

procedure
Keyboard access Repeat screen calibration procedure
Nurse call Display filter. When selected, only the

connected parameters and
associated setup pages are
displayed. When deselected, all
parameters and associated setup
pages are displayed.
Manufacturer Zeroing all pressures
Parameter is excluded from Parameter is represented as a

display parameter field only
Parameter is represented as a Import functions (for example,

waveform and a parameter field importing profiles)
System overview
Save modifications (for example, ESD warning

changes to a view)
Save as symbol IPXx Degree of protection against solid

particle and liquid ingress, e.g., IPX1,
IPX4, etc.
Navigates forward on a web page Refreshes a web screen
Displays the main screen Navigates backward on a web page
Defibrillation-proof Type CF Stops loading the web page

equipment
Gas in Defibrillation-proof Type BF

equipment
Gas out Caution: Federal law restricts this

device to sale by or on the order of a
physician.
Not made with natural rubber latex Not made with natural rubber latex
Not made with natural

rubber latex
System overview
Do not re-use, single patient use Keep away from sunlight
Do not
re-use
China RoHs marking for Control of Use by: Symbol indicates shelf life. YYYY-
pollution caused by Electronic mm-dd indicates date by which
Information Products. device needs to be used to remain
safe.
yyyy-mm-dd
Caution: This product contains Contains DEHP

natural rubber latex which may
cause an allergic reaction
Medical device European Union Representative
Importer Importer
Abbreviations
The following table lists the abbreviations used in Abbreviation Description

these instructions for use and those that are
displayed on the Cockpit. For any abbreviations of % leak Relative leakage
parameters originating from external devices, refer % MVspon Spontaneous minute volume,
to the corresponding instructions for use. fractional
%PACED Percentage of paced beats
System overview
Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description

AAMI Association for the Advancement C20/Cdyn Ratio of compliance during last
of Medical Instrumentation 20% of inspiration over dynamic
ABD Abdominal pressure compliance
AHA American Heart Association CaO2 Arterial oxygen content
Air cons Cumulated air consumption CCI Continuous cardiac index
AIVR Accelerated idioventricular CCO Continuous cardiac output

rhythm Cdyn Dynamic lung compliance
alv Alveolar CI Cardiac index
AOR Aortic arterial blood pressure CISPR International special committee
APP Abdominal perfusion pressure on radio interference
APR Arterial pulse rate CO2 Carbon dioxide
ARR Arrhythmia CPP Cerebral perfusion pressure
ART Arterial blood pressure CPP2 Cerebral perfusion pressure 2
ART D ART diastolic value CPP3 Cerebral perfusion pressure 3
ART M ART mean value CPP4 Cerebral perfusion pressure 4
ART S ART systolic value CPT Ventricular couplet
ARTF Artifact Cs Static lung compliance
ASY Asystole Cstat Static lung compliance
aVF ECG lead aVF CvO2 Venous oxygen content
aVL ECG lead aVL CVP Central venous blood pressure
aVR ECG lead aVR DCO2 CO2 elimination coefficient during

HFO
AW-Temp Gas temperature (airway)
Des Desflurane
AXL Axillary arterial blood pressure
Des cons Cumulated desflurane
BCT Burst count consumption
BDP Bladder pressure DHCP Dynamic host configuration
BGM Bigeminy protocol
BIS Bispectral index DNS Domain name system
BPP Bladder perfusion pressure DO2 Oxygen delivery
BRA Brachial arterial blood pressure DO2I Oxygen delivery index
BRADY Bradycardia dV1 to dV6 Derived chest leads
BSA Body surface area DVI Digital visual interface
BSR Suppression ratio E Lung elastance
C.O. Cardiac output E (I:E) Inspiratory:expiratory ratio,
expiratory component
System overview

E (I:Espon) Inspiratory:expiratory ratio, GPM Mean general pressure
spontaneous, expiratory Hal Halothane
component
Hal cons Cumulated halothane
ECG Electrocardiogram consumption
EDV End-diastolic volume HFO High-frequency oscillation
EDVI End-diastolic volume index Hgb Hemoglobin
EF Ejection fraction HR Heart rate
EIP End inspiratory pressure Ht Height
Enf Enflurane I ECG lead I
Enf cons Cumulated enflurane I (I:E) Inspiratory:expiratory ratio
consumption (inspiratory component)
ESO Esophageal pressure I (I:Espon) Inspiratory:expiratory ratio,
ESV End-systolic volume spontaneous, inspiratory
ESVI End-systolic volume index component
et End-tidal (in combination with gas I:E Inspiratory to expiratory ratio

values) IACS Infinity Acute Care System –
etDes End-tidal desflurane Monitoring Applications
concentration IP Invasive pressure
etEnf End-tidal enflurane concentration ICI Intermittent cardiac index
etHal End-tidal halothane concentration ICO Intermittent cardiac output
etIso End-tidal isoflurane concentration ICP Intracranial pressure
etN2O End-tidal N2O concentration ICP2 Intracranial pressure 2
etO2 End-tidal oxygen concentration ICP3 Intracranial pressure 3
etSev End-tidal sevoflurane ICP4 Intracranial pressure 4
concentration ICS Infinity CentralStation
FEM Femoral arterial blood pressure IEC International Electrotechnical
FEMV Femoral venous blood pressure Commission
FiO2 Fractional inspired O2 II ECG lead II
FV Flow-Volume loop III ECG lead III
GP1 D to GP4 General pressure 1-4 diastolic in Inspiratory (in combination with
D value gas values)
GP1 M to GP 1 to 4 mean value inCO2 Inspiratory CO2 concentration
GP4 M inDes Inspiratory desflurane
GP1 S to GP4 GP 1 to 4 systolic value concentration
S inEnf Inspiratory enflurane
GP5 to GP8 General pressure 5 to 8 concentration
System overview

inHal Inspiratory halothane MVmand Minute volume, mandatory
concentration MVspon Minute volume, expired
inIso Inspiratory isoflurane spontaneous
concentration N2O Nitrous oxide
inj Injectate temperature N2O cons Cumulated N2O consumption
inN2O Inspiratory N2O concentration NIBP Non-invasive blood pressure
inSev inspiratory sevoflurane NIBP D NIBP diastolic value
concentration
NIBP M NIBP mean value
Insp. term. Inspiratory termination criterion
based on peak inspiratory flow NIBP S NIBP systolic value
inxMAC MAC factor NIF Negative inspiratory force
iO2 Inspired O2 NMT Neuromuscular transmission

ISO Isoelectric point O2 cons Cumulated O2 consumption
Iso Isoflurane OR Operating room
Iso cons Cumulated Isoflurane P0.1 Occlusion pressure

consumption P2500 Power supply unit
LA Left arm (ECG) PA Pulmonary arterial blood pressure
LA Left atrial blood pressure PA D PA diastolic value
LHCPP Left heart coronary perfusion PA M PA mean value
pressure
PA S PA systolic value
LV Left ventricular blood pressure
PaCO2 Arterial CO2 pressure
LV D LV diastolic value
PaO2 Arterial O2 pressure
LV M LV mean value
Pause Pause pressure
LV S LV systolic value
Paw Airway pressure
LVSW Left ventricular stroke work
PAW min Minimum airway pressure
LVSWI Left ventricular stroke work index
Pb Ambient pressure
MV Total minute volume
PeCO2 Mixed expired CO2 pressure
MV ds Minute volume, dead space
PEEP Positive end expiratory pressure
MValv Alveolar minute volume
PEEPi Intrinsic positive-end expiratory
MVe Minute volume, total expiratory pressure
MVe s Minute volume, spontaneous Phigh Upper pressure level during
expiratory APRV
MVi Minute volume, total inspiratory PI Perfusion index (SpO2)
MVi s Minute volume, spontaneous Pinsp Inspiratory pressure
inspiratory
PIP Peak inspiratory pressure
MVleak Minute volume leakage
System overview

Plow Lower pressure level during RRapn Rate for apnea ventilation
APRV RRc Respiratory rate (CO2)
PLS Pulse rate from SpO2 or arterial RRi Respiratory rate (impedance)
pressure
RRmand Mandatory respiratory rate
PLS* Pulse rate from external SpO2*
device RRs Respiratory rate, spontaneous
APR Arterial blood pressure – pulse RRspon Respiratory rate, spontaneous
rate RSB Rapid shallow breathing index
Pmax Maximum inspired pressure RUN Ventricular run
Pmean Mean airway pressure RV Right ventricular blood pressure
Pmin Minimum airway pressure RV D RV diastolic value
Pplat Plateau pressure RV M RV mean value
PS250 Power supply unit RV S RV systolic value
PTC Post tetanic count RVSW Right ventricular stroke work
PV Pressure-Volume loop RVSWI Right ventricular stroke work
PVC/min Rate of PVC (pre-ventricular index
contractions) per minute SaO2 Arterial oxygen saturation
PVI Pleth variability index SC-duration Duration of patient session
PVR Pulmonary vascular resistance (SmartCare)
PVRI Pulmonary vascular resistance SC-etCO2 etCO2 (SmartCare)
index SC-RRspon Spontaneous frequency
PWP Pulmonary wedge pressure (SmartCare)
PWR Total signal power SC-VT Tidal volume (SmartCare)
Qs/Qt Intrapulmonary right-left shunt SC-∆Psupp Pressure support goal

goal (SmartCare)
R Resistance (airway)
SC-∆Psupp Pressure support by internal
r2 Parameter correlation factor rated controller (SmartCare)
R50N Strip recorder SEF Spectral edge frequency
RA Right arm (ECG)
RA Right atrial blood pressure
Sev cons Cumulative sevoflurane
RAD Radial arterial blood pressure consumption
Raw Resistance (airway) SpCO Carboxyhemoglobin saturation
Raw exp Expiratory resistance (airway) SpHb Total arterial hemoglobin
Raw insp Inspiratory resistance (airway) SpHbv Total venous hemoglobin
Resp. Respiration SpMet Methemoglobin saturation
RPP Rate pressure product SpO2 Oxygen saturation measured by
RR Respiratory rate, ventilation pulse oximetry
System overview

SpO2/CO-Ox CO-oximetry Tispon Spontaneous inspiratory time
SpO2* SpO2 from external device TL Left temperature
SpOC Total oxygen content Tlow Time of low pressure level in
SQI Signal quality index APRV
ST(x) ST deviation of lead (x) TNasal Nasal temperature
STdV1 ST-segment deviations of derived TOF Cnt Train of four (NMT)

STdV3 leads TOral Oral temperature
STdV4 TPR Total pulmonary resistance
STdV6
TR Right temperature
SV Stroke volume
Trapped VOL Trapped volume
SVI Stroke volume index
TRect Rectal temperature
SvO2 Venous oxygen saturation
TruST Algorithm that provides a TruST
SVR Systemic vascular resistance 12-lead-ECG (including derived
SVRI Systemic vascular resistance chest leads dV1, dV3, dV4, dV6)
index using a 6-wire lead set that
SVT Supraventricular tachycardia provides leads I, II, III, aVL, aVR,
aVF, V2, V5.
SVV Stroke volume variation
TSkin Skin temperature
T1a Temperature 1A
TVd aw Tidal volume, dead space
T1b Temperature 1B
TVR Total vascular resistance
Ta Temperature A
UAP Umbilical arterial blood pressure
TACH Tachycardia
UVP Umbilical venous pressure
Tb Temperature B
V Chest lead from a 5- or 6-wire
TBlad Bladder temperature lead set.
TBld1 Blood temperature V'CO2 CO2 production
TBlnkt Blanket temperature V+ Second chest lead from a 6-wire
Tblood Blood temperature lead set
TC Time constant V1 - V6 ECG chest leads V1 to V6
Tcase Therapy case duration VCO2 CO2 production
Tcore Body core temperature Vds Dead space
TEso Esophageal temperature Vds/VTe Tidal volume, relative dead space
Thigh Time of upper pressure level in VESA Video Electronics Standard
APRV Association
Ti Inspired time VF Ventricular fibrillation
Ti set Inspired time setting VO2 Oxygen consumption
Tinj Injectate temperature VO2I Oxygen consumption index
System overview
Abbreviation Description
VT Tidal volume
VT/Wt Tidal volume per kg body weight
VTACH Ventricular tachycardia
VTe Tidal volume, expired
VTemand Mandatory expiratory tidal volume
VTespon Spontaneous expired total volume
VTespon Spontaneous expired mean total
mean volume
VThf Tidal volume for HFO
VTi Tidal volume, inspired
VTimand Mandatory inspired tidal volume
VTispon Spontaneous inspired tidal
volume
VTispon Spontaneous inspired mean total
mean volume
VTmand Tidal volume, mandatory
Vtrap Trapped volume
VTspon Spontaneous tidal volume,
leakage-corrected
VTspon mean Spontaneous mean tidal volume
∆O2 Inspiratory/expiratory oxygen
concentration difference
∆Phf ∆ pressure amplitude during HFO
∆Psupp Pressure amplitude above PEEP
in pressure support
ΔT Temperature difference
ΔT1 Temperature difference 1
Operating concept
Operating concept
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Supported messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
The IACS components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Dialogs and pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
M540 and Cockpit communication . . . . . . . . 49 Main menu bar and quick access toolbar . . . 73
Docking the M540. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Main menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Undocking the M540. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Quick access toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Communicating with the Infinity network . . . 51 Filtering the parameter content . . . . . . . . . . 75
Loss of connection to the network . . . . . . . . . . 51 Auto and manual display modes . . . . . . . . . 75

M540 in standalone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Auto view mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Network data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Manual view mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Remote control and remote view . . . . . . . . . 54 Auto view setup toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Remote view from the Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Central monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Customizing the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Network communication interruptions . . . . . . . 56 Screen brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Touchscreen versus mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IT applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Calibrating the touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Cockpit screen in split screen mode . . . . . . . . 77
Communication management . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Cockpit split screen mode with mini-trends . . . 78
Loss of power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Cockpit split screen mode with multi-tab split
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Locked options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Cockpit split screen mode with mini-trends
and IT tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Temporary options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Parameter priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
External display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Configuring the parameter priority and
To connect to an external display . . . . . . . . . . . 61
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Clone display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Parameter priority list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Independent display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
To configure independent display . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Export protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Selecting a view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
The view editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Profiles/status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Header bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Patient and default profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Monitoring area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Settings included in a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Settings not included in a profile . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Parameter fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
System profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Freezing/stopping waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Managing profiles and views . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Transferring profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Operating concept
Standby mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Privacy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Screen lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Operating concept
Overview
The IACS is a fully networked solution that offers

patient monitoring, therapy, and IT applications at
the point of care.
Dräger developed the IACS to solve problems
common in the acute care environment. As a result,
the IACS provides standardized user interfaces,
improves workplace ergonomics and flexibility, and
centralizes patient data at the point of care. The
IACS also provides the ability to backfill information
automatically after patient transport. An M540 on
wireless transport transmits the data to the ICS
(Infinity CentralStation) during transport.
The central component of the IACS is the Cockpit.
This medical-grade workstation provides
centralized viewing and control of Infinity
monitoring systems and IT applications at the point
of care. The Cockpit is available in the following
sizes:
Display Screen width

C500 (2 generation)
nd
17-inch (43.2 cm)
C500 (3 generation)
rd
17.3-inch (43.9 cm)
C700 (2nd generation) 20-inch (50.8 cm)
C700 (3rd generation) 21.5-inch (54.6 cm)
Both offer a large viewing angle, extended screen

layout capabilities, and a fan-less design.
The common Dräger-standardized user interface
offers intuitive operation via a touchscreen and a
rotary knob. A 360-degree alarm bar alerts the user
to the alarm conditions of a patient.
Operating concept
The IACS components
The following diagram shows a possible IACS

configuration.
O C
N B
A
D
I E
F
I
M P P
H
L K J
005
A C500/C700 K AC power
B DVI cable / DisplayPort cable L Infinity network
C Secondary display (option) M Infinity MCable – Nurse call (option)
D USB cable N P2500 / PS250
E Keyboard and mouse (option) O Hospital network
F Device connectivity cable (option) P Ethernet cable
G M540 patient monitor
H M500 docking station
I System cables
J *R50N recorder (option)
*Not available in the EU
Operating concept
M540 and Cockpit communication
Communication between the M540 and the Cockpit Docking the M540
starts as soon as the M540 is docked in the M500
(see page 109). The M540 acquires physiological As soon as the user docks the M540 in the M500,
signals from the patient and relays them to the the following happens at the Cockpit:
Cockpit for display. The Cockpit then makes the
patient data available to the Infinity network. – The message Connecting to M540 appears in
the center of the Cockpit screen.
When the M540 is docked, the Cockpit assumes
the annunciation of all acoustic alarm signals. – The Cockpit makes the data of the M540
However, alarms are always reported optically at available to the Infinity network.
the Cockpit and at the M540. When the M540 is
NOTE
undocked for transport, it provides acoustic alarm
signals. In addition, the ICS can assume the If the user docks an M540 with a patient category
annunciation of acoustic alarm signals for an M540 that differs from the one selected on the Cockpit,
on wireless transport. the patient category setting of the Cockpit
changes to match the one of the M540.
NOTE
For alarms to also sound at the M540 when it is Docking to the same Cockpit
docked, select the alarm volume at the M540
manually. For information, refer to the M540 If the user undocks an M540 from a Cockpit and
instructions for use. later docks the M540 to the same Cockpit, the data
collection continues seamlessly. The Cockpit
The only exceptions are Cockpit-specific alarm automatically retrieves any data the M540 collected
messages such as External device disconnected while on patient transport and merges it with the
for which the M540 does not report any acoustic data set for that patient.
and optical alarm signals.
When the M540 is docked, any changes to the
patient setup such as alarm limits made on the
Cockpit are automatically transferred to the M540
(and vice versa).
NOTE
If the M540 cannot communicate with the Cockpit,
the Cockpit sounds an alarm. In addition, an
alarm indicating a loss of communication is
broadcast over the network to the Infinity
CentralStation (ICS) provided the patient is
admitted there. The M540 continues to monitor
the patient.
Operating concept
Docking to a different Cockpit Undocking the M540

CAUTION When the user undocks the M540, the following
Before connecting the M540 to a different happens:
Cockpit, make sure that the units of measure align
– The message Disconnected from M540
between the two devices. Differing units of
appears in the center of the Cockpit screen.
measure could result in loss of data or a patient
discharge. – When the M540 is not in wireless mode, a
message appears at the ICS that the bed is
If the user undocks an M540 from a Cockpit and disconnected. When the wireless option for an
later docks the M540 to a different Cockpit, the M540 is activated and configured properly, the
original data are automatically retrieved over the ICS displays the wireless symbol.
network by the new Cockpit. The new Cockpit then
automatically merges this data with any data the – Data are no longer trended at the Cockpit.
M540 collected while on patient transport. The – With each docking or undocking of an M540,
original Cockpit automatically discharges the there is a short transition period. One minute of
patient once all patient data are transferred. trend data collected during this transition period
When moving the M540 between Cockpits in may not be displayed at an ICS equipped with
different monitoring units, the time stamps may software version VG1. However, this trend data
differ occasionally between the Cockpit and the can be reviewed at the Cockpit.
M540. – Several buttons remain active on the main
If not all patient data was transferred, the message menu bar of the Cockpit:
Transfer of Data Incomplete appears in the – Alarms... for accessing the alarm history.
header bar of the new Cockpit. In this case, the
original Cockpit does not discharge the patient. – Trends/ Data... for accessing the trend
data.
– Start/Standby... for accessing the Start tab
from where the user can initiate a patient
discharge.
– The current patient data from the Cockpit are no
longer available to the Infinity network.
However, when the wireless option for an M540
is activated and configured properly, it
continues to make the data available to the
Infinity network.
– Parameter values acquired using the device
connectivity option are no longer available to
the Infinity network.
Operating concept
Communicating with the Infinity network
When the M540 is docked on the M500 and the Loss of connection to the network
IACS is connected to the network, the patient data
are available on the Infinity network. When the When the Cockpit loses connection to the Infinity
setting, Enable Central Station is activated, the network and the feature Offline detection is
Cockpit provides additional messages and alarm activated (see page 490), the following happens:
tones for central monitoring. For more information,
see page 49. – A single notification alarm of low alarm priority
sounds once within 25 seconds of the offline
Communicating with the Infinity network has the condition until the communication with the
following benefits: network is restored or the alarm is
– Patient data are sent across the Infinity network acknowledged. The alarm tone sounds even if
to connected devices. alarms are paused or the alarm volume has
been deactivated.
– The alarm status of the patient is reported to the
Infinity network and its connected devices. If – The alarm volume is automatically adjusted to
multiple alarm conditions are present, the alarm 100% until the network connection is restored.
with the highest alarm priority is reported. Once the Cockpit re-establishes
communication with the network, the previous
– The patient can be admitted at the ICS for alarm volume is restored.
central monitoring. The IACS is fully compatible
with ICS software VGx (not compatible with ICS – The message Offline appears on cyan
software VFx). background in the network message area of the
Cockpit until the connection to the network is
– You can view the Cockpit from other Infinity restored.
monitors within the same monitoring unit using
the remote view function (see page 56). When the wireless option is activated and
configured properly, the M540 switches to wireless
– From the Cockpit you can view other bedside transport mode automatically within ten seconds of
monitors (including other Cockpits) in the same being undocked from the M500 (see "Undocking
monitoring unit using the remote view function the M540" on page 50). For detailed information on
(see page 54). how an M540 behaves on wireless transport, refer
to the instructions for use Infinity Acute Care
NOTE System – Infinity M540.
Two IACS monitoring devices in the same
monitoring unit on the network, may result in a
perceived time drift of a maximum of 80 seconds M540 in standalone mode
between each other.
When the wireless option is activated and
configured, a standalone M540 communicates
wirelessly with the Infinity network when undocked.
When docked, a wireless M540 transitions back to
a wired connection, and the wireless symbol is
replaced by the network symbol .
For detailed information on how the M540 behaves
in standalone mode, see the Instructions for use
entitled Infinity Acute Care System – Infinity M540.
Operating concept
Network data transfer
The IACS supports the transfer of patient data to – Hemodynamic, oxygenation, and ventilation
and from the following devices assigned to the calculation results
same monitoring unit:
– Laboratory data values are not transferred
– Infinity Delta/Delta XL/Kappa (software version during a network transfer. The following
VF7 to VF9.x) diagram shows the Transfer page which is
used for patient data transfers.
– Other IACS monitoring Cockpits
NOTE
CAUTION
Due to a possible time variation between cockpits,
A loss of network connectivity during a network the trend time stamp may vary by one minute after
transfer could result in the loss of patient data on a network transfer.
both the source monitor and the target monitor.
NOTE
If the M540 is undocked during a network transfer, A
the transfer will fail, and the M540 does not exit
the transferring data screen. Press the touch
screen to resume data transfer.
B
C D
NOTE
You can also transfer patient data by undocking
and redocking an M540.
The following data are included in a patient data

transfer:
– Demographic data (see page 101 for
information of what demographic data is
included)
– Trends (up to 60 trended parameters)
NOTE
The amount of data being transferred over the
network depends on how much data is available
at the source device. A maximum of 60 trend
parameters can be transferred over the network
based on the parameter priority of the Cockpit. E
006
For Delta series monitors, the maximum amount

of data is 24 hours. For a network transfer A Transfer tab
between IACS Cockpits, the maximum of data is B Care area selection arrow
96 hours.
C Current patient column
– Events containing up to 32 parameters for D Device name column
(C500) or up to 40 parameters for (C700)
E Start transfer button
Operating concept
To transfer data over the network 9 Select one of the following buttons:
The IACS network supports the transfer of patient – Cancel – to prevent the data transfer and
data from a source device, such as an Infinity Delta, return to the Transfer page.
Delta XL/Kappa or an IACS Cockpit, to another
– Transfer – to discharge the patient from the
Cockpit.
Cockpit and initiate the data transfer. During
1 Place the source device in standby mode. the transfer, the Cockpit and M540 display
the message Transferring data....
2 Go to the Cockpit to which you wish to transfer
data.
CAUTION CAUTION
To prevent mixing the data of two patients, first During a network transfer, do not touch either
discharge the patient admitted at the destination device until the transfer is completed.
Cockpit. If the patient is not discharged, the new
A successful transfer results in the following:
data is appended to the existing data stored at the
destination Cockpit. – The Cockpit returns to the main screen.
3 Select the Start/Standby... button on the main – The message Transfer Complete appears in
menu bar. the Cockpit header.
4 Select the Transfer tab (if not already A failed transfer results in the following:
selected). The Transfer page (see page 57) – The Cockpit returns to the Transfer page.
lists all of the devices in the currently selected
care area who are in standby mode. – The messageTransfer of data incomplete
displays in the network message header of the
5 Use the care area selection arrow (B) on the Cockpit.
Transfer page to select the care area from the
list in which the source device is located. – The M540 returns to the last monitoring screen
before the transfer started.
6 Select the source device in the Device name
column (D).
7 Select the Start transfer button (E).
8 Press the rotary knob. A Confirm transfer
dialog appears with the following message: The
network transfer will delete existing patient
data on this device.
Operating concept
Remote control and remote view
When a Cockpit is connected to the Infinity When there are multiple alarms in the same p-box,
network, data can be shared among Infinity devices the p-box in remote view for the selected bed on
that are connected to the network. From the IACS does not match the bed when Quiet Mode is
Cockpit, the user can view other Infinity devices set to Off.
and perform several remote functions. The user
can also allow other Infinity devices to view a NOTE
Cockpit and perform remote functions by activating When there are multiple alarms of different states
the remote control function (see page 489). and/or priorities in the same parameter field, the
remote view parameter fields may not display
correct color and flashing when Quiet mode is set
Remote view from the Cockpit to Off. However, when Quiet mode is set to On,
remote view updates the correct alarm status for
The remote view function of the Cockpit allows the
all parameters from the remote bed.
user to view patient data from other Infinity
monitors within the same monitoring unit. If the user In the remote view of the Cockpit, the message
is viewing another Cockpit, the remote view window Pacer off does not appear when the pacer
shows the Auto view (see page 75) of the remote detection is deactivated on the source monitor.
Cockpit.
NOTE
For the Cockpit and M540, when viewing the
patient monitor in Remote View, the HR label
displays instead of the PLS label when the HR
source is set to anything other than ECG. The
value reported is the PLS label.
The remote view function also allows the user to

pause acoustic alarm signals and request timed
and continuous recordings of the remote device
from the Cockpit.
To access the remote view

1 Select the Views... button on the main menu
bar to access the Views dialog.
2 Select the Remote view tab. This dialog lists all
of the beds in the monitoring unit of the Cockpit.
3 Select a bed from the list in the Views... dialog
to access the remote view of an individual
patient.
4 Select the Connect button.
Operating concept
The following diagram shows a Remote view.
Views...
A B C D
007
A Disconnect button
B Audio Pause button
C Continuous Recording button
D Timed Recording button
Operating concept
Using remote view functions Network communication interruptions

From the Remote view dialog, the user can
perform the following functions: When the Cockpit loses communication with the
ICS, the following happens at the Cockpit when the
– Select the Disconnect button (A) to exit the Enable Central Station setting is activated (see
remote view. page 489):
– Select the Audio Pause button (B) to pause – The message Not Monitored By Central
acoustic alarm signals at the remote device. appears on cyan background in the network
– Select the Continuous Recording (C) or message area of the Cockpit.
Timed Recording (D) buttons to request a – A single notification alarm of low alarm priority
recording of the remote device. The recordings sounds within 25 seconds until communication
are printed on the recorder that is assigned to with the ICS is restored or the alarm is
the Cockpit. acknowledged. The alarm tone sounds even
when alarms are paused or the alarm volume
has been deactivated.
Central monitoring
– The alarm volume is adjusted automatically to
100% until the condition clears. Once the
When a Cockpit communicates with the Infinity
Cockpit re-establishes communication with the
network, the user can admit the patient at the ICS
ICS, the previous alarm volume is restored.
for central monitoring. A Cockpit patient is
represented on the ICS with a viewport and a bed – The message System not monitored by ICS is
view. A viewport consists of the top Cockpit recorded in the alarm history.
waveform and the associated parameter field. The
When the communication between the Cockpit and
ICS also provides a bed view which is a window
the ICS is restored, the Cockpit displays the
displaying the content of the Cockpit in greater
message System monitored by ICS in the alarm
detail. When the Cockpit is communicating with the
history. The patient data are again accessible at the
ICS, the waveforms and parameter fields are
ICS.
assigned to the bed view based on the parameter
priority order. When the setting Enable Central Station is
deactivated (see page 489), none of the above
NOTE features are supported.
Due to potential time drifts between the IACS and
the ICS, when an alarm is generated from the
IACS, the waveform displayed on the ICS event
disclosure may not align with the timestamp of the
event. Place the cursor at the timestamp of the
event and then go to the ICS's Full Disclosure for
a more complete view of the waveforms.
NOTE
When you select an event disclosure at the ICS
for a parameter with a decimal value, the
parameter rounds to the nearest whole number.
Operating concept
Remote control
If the remote control feature is activated (see – Request timed and continuous recordings
page 489), the user can perform the following
– Audio pause acoustic alarm signals
Cockpit functions remotely from the ICS:
If several devices modify the patient settings of a
NOTE single Cockpit, the last update is always
Remote control of arrhythmia settings from ICS is implemented. For detailed information on
only possible if the full arrhythmia option is performing these functions at the ICS, refer to the
enabled on the Cockpit. instructions for use Infinity CentralStation.
– Autoset alarm limits

– Initiate a relearning phase IT applications
– Audio pause acoustic alarm signals (see Several optional IT applications provide remote
page 132) access to patient data from the Cockpit. For
– Configure alarm limits and ST and arrhythmia example, the PatientWatch application (accessible
settings with the Infinity Gateway) allows viewing of up to
four different bedside monitors that are connected
– Request timed and continuous recordings to the Infinity network. If configured accordingly, IT
If the remote control feature is activated (see applications are accessible by selecting a tab on
page 489), the user can perform the following the Cockpit. For more information, see "IT
Cockpit functions remotely from one of the applications (options)" on page 517.
following devices: Delta XL or Kappa, Vista XL,
Gamma X XL:
Communication management
The following table summarizes how the Cockpit,

the M540, and the M500 function under specific
circumstances.
What happens if... Behavior
the user switches on the M540? The M540 emits a high-pitched tone followed by two
power-up tones, performs a selftest, and displays the
New patient? prompt.
Docking/undocking an M540
the user docks an M540? Certain functions such as trends, alarm history,
profiles, and biomed setup are not accessible for a
brief period of time.
Operating concept

the user docks an M540 and it is unable to – An alarm of medium priority sounds at the Cockpit,
communicate with the Cockpit? at the M540, and at the ICS (provided the patient is
admitted there).
– The message M540 communication failure
appears at the Cockpit.
– The M540 continues to monitor the patient and
provides acoustic and optical alarm signals.
Alarm behavior
an M540 whose acoustic alarm signals have All acoustic alarm signals are paused for two minutes
been paused docks to a Cockpit? on both devices.
the user docks an M540 with a different Both devices observe the remaining alarm pause
alarm pause state than that of the Cockpit? interval.
Connection/power problems
there is a power supply failure? – The LEDs on the front indicate that the Cockpit and
the M540 are on battery charge.
– The Cockpit sounds an alarm of medium priority
and switches to battery charge for up to five
minutes before performing a safe shutdown.
– The M540 switches to battery charge for up to three
hours before shutting down.
the system cable is disconnected from the – The Cockpit sounds an alarm tone of low priority.
power supply or the M500?
– The Cockpit displays the message Please plug in
system cable in the header bar and the message
Disconnected from M540 appears in the
monitoring area.
– The Cockpit no longer displays any parameters
and waveforms.
Operating concept

the Cockpit loses communication with the When the setting Enable Central Station is activated
ICS? (see page 489), the following happens at the Cockpit:
– On the Cockpit the Alarm volume setting (see
page 471) changes to 100% volume regardless of
whether an alarm condition exists or not. The
setting Off for the Alarm volume selection is no
longer available. For more information on adjusting
the alarm volume, see page 123. Once the
communication is restored, the previously selected
Alarm volume setting is restored.
– The M540 produces one alarm tone.
– The Cockpit displays the message Not Monitored
By Central.
When the setting Enable Central Station is
deactivated (see page 489), none of the above
features are supported.
the Cockpit loses communication with an – The Cockpit tries to restore the link.
external device?
– If the corresponding function is activated, an alarm
sounds and the message External device
disconnected appears on the Cockpit and ICS
(see "External device disconnected alarm control"
on page 474).
Miscellaneous
the Cockpit and the M540 are monitoring a Both devices are put in standby mode.
patient and the user puts either device in
standby mode?
the Cockpit and the M540 are monitoring a – The patient is discharged from both devices.
patient and the user discharges the patient
– The patient discharge is annotated at the Cockpit in
on either device?
the Alarm history page with the message Patient
transferred.
a function such as initiating a non-invasive The function is canceled on both devices.
blood pressure measurement is requested at
the M540 and almost simultaneously on the
Cockpit?
Operating concept
Loss of power
A loss of power has the following effect: – A medium-priority alarm is triggered at the
Cockpit and the message Please plug in
– The Cockpit switches to battery charge for up to
power supply appears.
five minutes before performing a safe shutdown
that preserves the integrity of the patient data – The M540 switches to battery charge for up to
and reverts to the user-defined patient default three hours before performing a safe shutdown
profile. that preserves the integrity of the patient data
and the user settings.
Locked options
The IACS supports several locked options. For a

list of options, refer to the instructions for use
Infinity Acute Care System – Monitoring
Accessories.
Temporary options
Temporary options make it possible for an M540 in

an IACS configuration to perform the intended
functions together with the Cockpit when the
devices do not share the same option setup. For
example, when an M540 with permanent options
docks to an IACS Cockpit that does not have the
same options activated, the M540 options
temporarily loans these options to the Cockpit.
Temporary options are deactivated when a patient
is discharged. However, they are retained if the
user turns the Cockpit or the M540 off and on.
Operating concept
External display
To extend the display capabilities of a Cockpit,

connect an external display to the DVI connector of Display Resolution
the Cockpit using a DVI to DVI to VGA cable type,
C500 (2nd generation) 1440 x 900 pixels
or via the DisplayPort connection on a third-
generation Cockpit. C500 (3rd generation) 1920 x 1080 pixels
The first-generation Cockpit and the second- C700 (2 generation)
nd
1680 x 1050 pixels
generation Cockpit have DVI connections. The C700 (3 generation)
rd
1920 x 1080 pixels
third-generation Cockpit has a DisplayPort
connection.
Independent display
To connect to an external display Independent display provides a visual display of
patient monitoring data on a secondary monitor,
1 Connect the monitor that will be used for separate from the primary monitor. The user
external display to the Cockpit via the DVI selects and configures patient data, such as patient
connection or the DisplayPort connection. demographics, waveforms, parameters, and
2 Press the System setup... button on the main trends, to provide specific visual information.
screen. Independent display is only supported by the
DisplayPort connection. A locked option must be
3 Enter the clinical password. purchased separately to use this feature.
4 Press the Patient monitor tab on the System
setup dialog.
WARNING
5 Press the Clone button next to External Independent display is for use as a secondary
display. display only, and not intended for alarm
Or annunciation.
Press the Indep. display button next to Exter- CAUTION

nal display.
Independent display does not provide audio,
The monitor that is connected to the Cockpit acoustic alarm output or optical alarm output.
now displays data.
NOTE
Independent display requires a DisplayPort
Clone display connection to a third-generation Cockpit.
The clone display duplicates the content of the NOTE

Cockpit screen. It does not produce any acoustic Only one external display (either one clone
alarm signals and does not support any user display or one independent display) can be
interaction. Clone display is supported by the DVI configured to a Cockpit.
connection as well as the DisplayPort connection.
A clone display has to meet certain technical
specifications (see page 605):
Operating concept
To configure independent display 4 Select the Pressure overlap on or off (default)

button to activate or deactivate pressure
1 Press the Views... button on the main screen. overlap mode. This feature works only if the
pressure waveforms are displayed in adjacent
2 Press the Independent display tab. channels.
The following tabs provide the available settings 5 Select the Parameter boxes button and use
available for independent display. the rotary knob to select the desired number of
– Auto view parameter fields for display. The available
selections are: Off, 1, 2, 3 (default), 4.
– General settings
6 Select the Layout button. Then select the Top
– Timers or Bottom (default) button to determine if the
– Parameter colors parameter fields appear along the bottom or the
top of the screen.
– Pressure colors
7 Select the Mini trends button to activate or
– Profiles deactivate the mini-trend display or select a
trend display time (see page 80). The available
Auto view settings tab selections are: Off, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min,
30 min (default), 45 min, 1 h, 90 min, 2 h, and
You can perform various functions in the Auto view 4 h.
page. The following settings describe the general
settings of the Auto view page. For detailed 8 Select the NIBP trend button to choose
information on setting up the display attributes of a between the graphic or numeric representation
parameter, see "Configuring parameters for of the NIBP mini-trend display.
display" on page 461. 9 Select the Profile button to choose the desired
profile.
To configure the available settings 10 To configure parameters for display and to
1 Select the display mode by selecting one of the prioritize parameters, see "Configuring
following two buttons next to Display mode: parameters for display" on page 461.
– Auto to select the auto display mode (see
page 82).
– Manual to select the manual display mode
(see page 76).
2 Select the Waveforms button to determine the
number of waveforms that can be selected in
the parameter selection window. The available
options range from 2 waveforms to 8
waveforms.
3 Select the Layout button. Then select the Left

or Right (default) button to determine if the
waveforms appear to the left or to the right of
the parameter fields.
Operating concept
General settings tab

The following table lists the available settings for
the General settings dialog page.
Selection Available settings Description
ECG waveforms 1, 2, 3 Sets up to three leads.
IP grids On, Off Displays or hides the grid.
Large mean On, Off Displays a value in large font size or
regular font size.
Monitoring sweep 6.25, 12.5, 25 (default), 50 Sets the sweep speed of the wave-
speed [mm/s] forms.
Respiratory sweep 6.25 (default), 12.5, 25, 50 Sets the sweep speed of the respiratory
speed [mm/s] waveform.
Anesthesia sweep 0.62, 6.25 (default), 12.5, 25, 50 Sets the sweep speed of the
speed [mm/s] anesthesia waveform.
0.62 mm/s is not supported on the
network and is transmitted as 6.25
mm/s on the network
Timers tab
There are two timers available for independent
display. The following table lists the available
settings for the Timers dialog page.
Timer A Start, Stop, Reset Starts and stops the timer, and resets to zero.
Timer A Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the timer function.
Timer A color various color selections Color selection for the timer banner.
Timer B Start, Stop, Reset Starts and stops the timer, and resets to zero.
Timer B Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the timer function.
Timer B color various color selections Color selection for the timer banner.
Operating concept
Parameter colors tab Profiles tab

On the parameter colors dialog page, the user may The following table lists the available settings for
select the color in which the parameter field and the Profiles dialog page.
waveform appear on the independent display.
To change the parameter color on the independent
display: Profile Select the pull- Lets a user
down button to store five
1 Select the color button next to the desired view stored custom
parameter. profiles. profiles.
2 Select the desired color for the parameter field Save Save Lets a user
and waveform. Profile save a new
profile or
Pressure colors tab save a
modified
On the pressure colors dialog page, the user may existing
select the color in which the parameter field and profile.
waveform appear on the independent display.
Set as Default Lets a user
To change the pressure color on the independent Default select a
display: default
profile.
1 Select the color button next to the desired
pressure. Profile Select the button Lets a user
name next to Profile create a new
2 Select the desired color for the pressure field name and type the profile
and waveform. name of a new name.
profile.
Operating concept
The following list includes all of the settings that are – IP grids
saved in an independent display profile.
– Large mean for invasive pressures
– Parameter priority list
– Parameter colors
– Display mode in Auto view
– Timer settings
– Number of waveforms
– Mini-trends (on/off)
– Number of ECG waveforms
– NIBP mini-trend settings
– Order of signals
See page 492 for instruction on how to import and
– Parameter field layout (left/right) export independent display profiles.
– Sweep speed
– Number of parameter fields
– Position of parameter fields (top/bottom)
– Invasive pressure overlap
Export protocol
This function allows sharing data with other Dräger

and third-party devices such as clinical information
and anesthesia record systems and data loggers.
The export protocol connector is located on the
P2500/PS250 (see page 27).
Refer to the section "Connected devices" on page
15 when connecting third-party devices.
NOTE
Exporting temperatures is only supported in
Celsius, and exporting blood pressure values is
only supported in mmHg. However, these values
can be converted to the desired unit of
measurement once exported.
NOTE
Export does not indicate parameters that are no
longer on display.
Operating concept
User interface
The following sections describe the user interface

of the Cockpit when it is connected to an M540.
The screen of a monitoring Cockpit is divided into
the following main areas:
D B
C
008
A Header bar
B Main menu bar
C Auto view toolbar (if activated)
D Monitoring area
For a more detailed overview of general user
interface components of the IACS, refer to the
instructions for use Infinity Acute Care System –
Medical Cockpit.
Operating concept
Header bar
The blue header bar appears along the top of the The patient name field
Cockpit screen. It is always visible regardless of
The patient name field (C) of the header bar
what is displayed in the monitoring area.
displays the patient name. Selecting this field
opens the Demographics page (see page 101).
A B C D E F The content of the patient name field changes
009
when the Code button is selected on the main
A Patient category field
menu bar to activate a set of user-defined
B System data field emergency monitoring functions. In this case, the
patient data field displays a timer along with a Stop
C Patient name field
and a Reset button. For more information on the
D Time and date field Code function, see page 158.
E Alarm message field
The date and time field
F Alarm status field
The data/time field (D) of the header bar displays
the current date and time. Selecting this field opens
The patient category field
the System setup dialog with the Biomed
The patient category field (A) of the header bar activation code keypad.
identifies the currently selected patient category. It
contains one of the following symbols:
The alarm message field
– Adult
The alarm message field (E) of the header bar is
– Pediatric reserved for alarm and technical messages. The
background color of the alarm message
– Neonate
corresponds to the alarm priority (see page 120).
Touching this field opens the Start/Standby...
The following table illustrates how the alarm
dialog for accessing the Demographics page (see
message field is further subdivided.
page 102).
More... Alarm message Alarm message
The system data field Local technical Network-related
The system data field (B) of the header bar contains messages messages
the following information:
A maximum of two messages can be displayed
– Product label side by side. If more than two patient alarm
– Care unit messages are active simultaneously, the More...
button appears. Selecting this button accesses the
– Monitoring mode (for example, OR Alarms) or Current alarms page (see "Viewing current alarm
the battery symbol indicating the battery status messages" on page 124).
for the PS250 or the P2500.
Touching this field opens the System setup dialog
with the Biomed activation code keypad.
Operating concept
The alarm status field

The alarm status field (F) of the header bar (see
"Messages" on page 529) indicates the current
alarm status. The following are some examples of
alarm-related symbols and messages that can
appear in this field.
Symbol Label Description
Audio paused Appears with a timer when the yellow key located next to the rotary
knob is pressed.
n% The alarm volume percentage corresponding to the selected alarm

volume. The higher the alarm tone, the more the symbol is filled in
where n is the
(50% in the example). If the symbol appears empty, the alarm
numeric
volume has been turned off (see next message).
percentage
Audio off Indicates that the alarm volume has been turned off, the Cockpit is
set to OR alarms or monitored by the ICS.
All alarms Indicates that all alarms are paused after selecting the Alarms... >
paused All alarms paused buttons.
All alarms off Indicates that all alarms are off after selecting the Alarms... > All
alarms off buttons.
Pressures off Indicates that all invasive pressure alarms are off
Pressures Indicates that all invasive pressure alarms are paused

paused
For a complete list of supported messages, see For more detailed information on alarm monitoring,
page 526. see the "Alarms" chapter.
Monitoring area
The monitoring area of the Cockpit screen contains The appearance of the monitoring area also
waveforms and parameter fields that report the depends on whether or not the split screen mode or
current vital signs of the patient. The monitoring mini-trend display is selected (see page 471).
area can also contain dialogs, mini-trends, an auto
view toolbar, ST parameters, vent loops, and so on.
The appearance of the monitoring area depends on
the selected view, which controls the layout and
content of the screen (see "Views" on page 82).
Operating concept
When opening a dialog, the waveform channels

and parameter fields are reduced to fit on the right
side of the screen (see figure on page 72). This
display behavior prevents the vital signs from being
obscured while the user is performing setup tasks.
Selecting the Home button on the main menu bar
or pressing the rotary knob closes any open dialogs
and refreshes the screen.
Operating concept
Parameter fields
Each parameter field contains real-time values of a The following example shows how the same
parameter and a combination of the following parameter field changes when more parameters
information: occupy the main screen. Each parameter field has
less space to display its content. The primary
– Parameter labels (including dynamic pressure
parameter value (A) still appears bigger than the
labels)
subordinate parameters (B, C) which now all
– Alarm limits (or crossed triangle symbols when appear on one line. The parameter labels (D) still
the alarm functions are deactivated) appear above the respective values.
– Units of measure (can be
activated/deactivated)
D D D
– ECG heart blip (and pacer blip for paced
pulses), RRi blip, and SpO2 blip
– Time stamps
– Timers and time stamps for non-invasive blood
pressure
– Special source labels (for example, PLS* for
heart rate signal source for pulse oximetry) A B C
– Parameter-specific message fields for non-
invasive blood pressure and SpO2
479
The amount of information on a screen affects the When a parameter is in alarm, the parameter field
parameter field display. For example, the following flashes in the color of the alarm priority and a
diagram shows a typical expanded SpO2 corresponding alarm message appears in the
parameter field when enough space is available for header bar (see "Troubleshooting" on page 525).
the larger parameter field. The primary parameter The parameter fields displayed on the Cockpit for
value (A) appears bigger than the other each parameter are described in detail in each
subordinate parameters who are displayed below parameter chapter.
each other (B, C). The parameter labels (D) appear
above the respective parameter values.
Waveforms
D D
The Cockpit displays a minimum of six seconds of
waveform data per waveform channel at a sweep
speed of 25 mm/s when no dialogs are open. The
B amount of displayed waveforms depend on the size
of the Cockpit.
A D When the waveform option is activated, the Cockpit
displays up to 16 waveforms.
The following functions allow customization of the
waveforms:
C
480
Operating concept
– Changing the colors for individual parameters NOTE

(see, for example, how to change the color for
If the acquired signal does not fit in the waveform
ECG on page 228)
channel, the top of the waveform may appear
– Changing the sweep speeds (see page 457) clipped.
Waveforms are drawn from left to right and can
contain the following information:
Freezing/stopping waveforms
– Signal scales
– Grids  Select the Freeze waveforms button on the
main menu bar.
– Units of measure
All waveforms stop and the message Waveforms
– Parameter labels stopped appears on each waveform channel. After
– Pacer spikes approximately 60 seconds, the waveforms start
scrolling again. To restart the waveforms earlier,
– QRS synchronization markers select the Freeze waveforms button again.
– Respiration waveform markers to indicate Freezing waveforms does not affect continuous
breath detection monitoring of all parameters and does not freeze
– Messages (see page 71) waveforms on the M540.
Supported messages
The Cockpit displays numerous messages that

indicate a special monitoring state that may affect
certain functionality. For example, when cardiac
bypass monitoring is activated, alarms are turned
off. The alarm message field of the header bar turns
red and the message Bypass All alarms off
appears.
For a complete list of these messages, see
"Messages" on page 529.
Operating concept
Dialogs and pages
The following diagram shows how the monitoring Selecting the corresponding button followed by
area appears when the user accesses a dialog. dots on the main menu bar opens the
The left side is reserved for the dialog while the corresponding dialog. For example, the Alarms...
right side displays the monitoring area (F) with real- button opens the Alarms dialog. The user can also
time data. A dialog contains horizontal tabs (B) that access parameter-specific dialogs and pages
open pages. Some pages also contain vertical tabs directly by selecting the corresponding parameter
(E) which access subordinate pages. fields on the main screen. For example, if the user
selects the heart rate (HR) parameter field, the
Sensor parameters dialog with the ECG page
appears.
A C
B B B B B B D
E
E
E
E
G E F
E
010
A Dialog title F Monitoring area showing vital signs in real time.

B Horizontal tabs – the selected tab appears light G Page that contains groups of related settings in
blue. the selected tab.
C Button that closes the dialog.
D Display filter on/off button for switching between
a display that shows only connected
parameters or one that shows all parameters.
E Vertical tabs for accessing additional pages –
the selected tab appears light blue.
Operating concept
Main menu bar and quick access toolbar
The following diagram shows the main menu bar The following buttons appear on the main menu
with the quick access symbols and a quick-access bar.
toolbar. The main menu bar and the quick-access
symbols are located along the right edge of the Alarms... Opens the Alarms dialog.
screen and are always visible. The quick-access Mark event Stores an event in the alarm
toolbars remain visible after the user selects the history.
corresponding quick access symbol.
Code Executes pre-configured
functions during an emergency.
A Views... Opens the Views dialog.
B Print screen 1)
Prints the contents of the
B current screen on a connected
C B laser printer.
B Freeze Stops all waveforms for

waveforms 60 seconds.
B
Trends/ Data... Opens the Trends/Data dialog.
B
Procedures... Opens the Procedures dialog.
B Sensor Opens the Sensor
B parameters... parameters dialog.
011
A Quick access symbols NIBP start/stop Starts or stops an NIBP

measurement. The button
B Main menu bar buttons
remains selected during a
C Quick access toolbar measurement. To cancel the
measurement, select the
button again.
Main menu bar Zero all 1) Zeroes all pressures
The content of the main menu bar can be System setup... Opens the System setup
customized. By adding and removing buttons, the dialog.
menu bar can contain the most frequently used Start/Standby... Opens the Start/Standby
buttons. However, several buttons with essential dialog.
functionality are permanently placed on the menu Home Returns to the main screen and
bar and cannot be moved. This key configuration closes any dialog.
becomes part of a profile. For more information,
see page 465.
1)
This button only appears on the main menu bar
of the C700.
Operating concept
Quick access toolbar
Functions that are commonly used are grouped on ECG report

quick access toolbars for easy access. These quick
access functions are accessible by selecting the Rest ECG report
corresponding quick access symbols on the main Located next to the ST report
menu bar. Trends/ Data... button
Alarm history report
Trend graph report
To activate a quick access function
Trend table report
1 Select the symbol to open the associated
Calculations report
toolbar.
Timed wvf. report
2 Select the desired button from the toolbar to
activate the function directly. Continuous wvf. report
The following table lists the quick access symbol Timed recording
and the associated toolbar they open when Continuous recording
selected. Print case summary
Quick access Associated Toolbar
Zero all
symbol
NIBP continuous
All alarms off or All alarms
paused (depending on Located next to the Venous stasis
configuration) Sensor parameters...
Located next to the
button
Alarms... button Pressures paused
Standby
Pressures off
Discharge
ECMO
Located next to the Privacy
Auto set all
Start/Standby... button
Show all ECG
1)
This selection is only available for independent
Remote view
display and the independent display option must
Located next to the Print screen (C700 only) be installed.
Views... button
Timer A start/stop 1)
Timer A reset 1)
Timer B start/stop 1)
Timer B reset 1)
Operating concept
Filtering the parameter content
To filter the content of the displayed parameters, The filter button toggles between an unfiltered and
use the display filter button which appears in filtered display. The filter is activated when the
the following dialogs: display filter button appears on the light green
background. Any parameter that is not being
– Parameter field of the Trends/Data dialog (see
actively monitored is removed from the screen,
page 174).
including parameter-specific setup buttons or tabs.
– Sensor parameters dialog where it appears to
Selecting the button again changes the background
the right of the parameter tabs.
to dark green and deactivates the display filter. All
– Alarms dialog (see page 140). parameters, whether monitored or not, including
associated setup buttons or tabs are displayed.
– Setup page for configuring the trend pages
(see page 179).
Auto and manual display modes
The user interface has two display modes: Auto Manual view mode
view and manual view.
In manual view mode, parameters for display can
be selected even if they are not yet connected. In
Auto view mode this mode, the parameter pick list in the Auto view
page (see page 82) contains all parameters. The
Auto view mode is a plug-and-play concept where parameters that are not connected appear gray in
the content of the main screen depends on the the parameter pick list. In addition, the display filter
connected parameter signals. For example, as button is deactivated.
soon as an SpO2 MCable is connected, the
associated parameters become available for
To select the desired display mode
display. When the MCable is disconnected, the
parameters are removed from the screen 1 Select System setup... from the main menu
automatically. bar.
NOTE 2 Select the Screen setup tab.

The NIBP parameter is always displayed. The 3 Select the Auto view tab located along the right
M540 does not detect the connection status for side of the System setup dialog.
this parameter.
4 Select the Auto or Manual button next to the
Display mode menu selection.
Operating concept
Auto view setup toolbar
When the auto view mode is activated (see It functions dynamically with the Auto view page
page 459), the auto view setup toolbar appears (see page 459) where the user selects the
along the bottom of the screen. The auto view setup maximum number of waveforms and parameter
toolbar is for configuring the parameter priority and fields and determines the parameter priority. Any
display status of a parameter. The auto view setup changes made on the auto view setup toolbar are
toolbar is also visible whenever the user selects a reflected on the Auto view page and vice versa.
view that contains an auto view component.
Customizing the display
To suit clinical workflow needs, the following Calibrating the touchscreen

changes can be made to the display:
– Screen brightness If the touchscreen of the Cockpit is out of alignment,
it can be calibrated. During the calibration of the
– Method of interaction with the Cockpit screen, no waveforms are displayed on the
– Touchscreen calibration Cockpit. Therefore, never calibrate the screen
while monitoring a patient.
– Monitoring area customization
To calibrate the touchscreen

Screen brightness 1 Press the rotary knob until the Calibrate Touch
Screen popup appears (requires several
Control the brightness of the Cockpit screen by seconds).
selecting night and day mode (see page 457).
2 Select the Calibrate button in the popup or
Night mode reduces the luminance of the screen so
press the rotary knob again to access the
it is less disturbing to a patient while providing
calibration screen.
enough contrast for the clinical staff. During night
time mode, the entire background of the screen 3 Touch the red dots that appear on the screen in
appears almost black. All buttons turn dark gray. sequence.
4 Select the green check mark symbol to
complete the calibration procedure.
Touchscreen versus mouse
Use the touchscreen or a mouse to interact with the

Cockpit. If the cursor is not visible after the mouse
has been connected, press the Alt and F10
keyboard keys simultaneously to display the cursor.
Operating concept
Cockpit screen in split screen mode
The following diagram shows the Cockpit display parameters while the left panel displays either a
when the following options/features are activated: tabular trend, loops, ECG show all page,
ECG/ventilation, ECG/ST, or ST parameters (see
– The web-enabled layouts option is unlocked.
page 459). If the web-enabled IT option is also
– The split screen mode is activated (see activated, this panel also displays IT applications
page 460). that are accessible using IT tabs (see page 80).
The monitoring area of the Cockpit is reduced to The following diagram shows how the split screen
accommodate an additional panel (E). The larger mode divides up the screen.
right side continues to display the real-time
E D B
012
A Header bar
B Main screen menu bar
C Auto view setup toolbar (if activated)
D Monitoring area with real-time vital signs
E Split screen panel (content depends on user-
selection, and activation of web-enabled
layouts option)
Operating concept
Cockpit split screen mode with mini-trends
The following diagram shows the Cockpit display If the split screen mode is not activated, the mini-
when the following options/features are activated: trend panel shifts to the left edge of the screen.
– The web-enabled layouts option is unlocked Mini-trends are updated continuously. NIBP mini
and the Split screen feature is activated (see trends can either be represented in tabular or
page 460). graphical format (see "Trending behavior"
on page 174). All other parameters appear only as
– The Mini trends feature is activated (see
graphical mini-trends.
page 460).
E F D B
C
013
A Header bar
E Split screen panel (content depends on
user-selection)
F Mini-trend panels
Operating concept
Cockpit split screen mode with multi-tab split screen
The following diagram shows the Cockpit display

when the Multi-tab split screen feature is
activated by itself (see page 460).
D C B
567
A Header bar
C Monitoring area with real-time vital signs
D Multi-tab split screen – three tabs whose
content is configurable. To configure the Multi-
tab split screen, see page 468.
Operating concept
Cockpit split screen mode with mini-trends and IT tabs
The Cockpit supports IT applications that are Once the application is configured and the IT
accessible via tabs. application feature is activated (see page 493), the
corresponding tab appears to the left of the
The following diagram shows the Cockpit display
monitoring area. The Patient tab (G) always
when the following options are unlocked and the
appears as the top tab. It always returns to the main
features are activated:
screen of the Cockpit for viewing the real-time
– The web-enabled layouts option is unlocked parameter display. For detailed information on
and the Split screen feature is activated (see setting up IT tabs, refer to the specializedservice
page 460). technical documentation.
– The web-enabled IT tabs option is unlocked
– The Mini trends feature is activated (see
page 460).
F E D B
C
014
A Header bar F Split screen panel (content depends on the

user-selection)
G IT tabs
E Mini-trend panel
Operating concept
Parameter priority
The parameter priority determines what position a The following list shows the default parameter
parameter occupies on the screen. The number of priority list. Pressures without assigned labels
parameters appearing as waveforms and appear as GP1, GP2, GP3, GP4, GP5, GP6, GP7,
parameter fields depends also on the selected or GP8.
Waveforms setting (see page 460).
1 ECG
Use the Auto view page (see page 459) to
2 SpO2
determine the display location and display status of
each parameter. Also, use the auto view setup 3 SpO2*
toolbar in auto view mode to change the parameter
4 RRi
priority (see page 462). In manual mode, the
parameter priority can be changed only in the Auto 5 ART
view page.
6 AOR
7 FEM
Configuring the parameter priority and 8 AXL
display
9 RAD
The location of a parameter in the window 10 UAP
determines not only where a parameter appears on
the screen but also how it is displayed. Parameters 11 BRA
are arranged in descending order in the window 12 PA
and occupy the same position on the screen. For
example, the top parameter in the parameter 13 CVP
selection window occupies the top spot on the main 14 RA
screen. For more information see, "Configuring
parameters for display" on page 461. 15 LV
16 LA
Parameter priority list 17 RV

18 ICP
The priority list appears in the parameter selection
19 GPM
window of the Auto view page (see page 459).
Change the parameter priority by switching the 20 FEMV
position of the parameters in the Auto view page.
21 UVP
For more information, see "To configure the
parameter priority and display from the Auto view 22 ABD
setup toolbar" on page 462.
23 BDP
24 ESO
25 GP1
26 GP2
27 GP3
Operating concept
28 GP4 38 C.O. (not available in neonatal mode)

29 GP5 39 SvO2
30 GP6 40 T (temperature)
31 GP7 41 T1
32 GP8 42 CO2 (MEDIBUS.X)
33 NIBP 43 Vent
34 CO2 (from Infinity MCable – Mainstream CO2, 44 O2 (MEDIBUS.X)
Infinity MCable – Microstream CO2 and Scio
45 Agent (MEDIBUS.X)
(Scio not available in neonate mode))
46 BIS (not available in neonate mode)
35 CO2 (non-MEDIBUS.X ventilators)
47 NMT
36 O2 (Scio, not available in neonate mode)
48 CO-Ox
37 Agent (Scio, not available in neonate mode)
Views
Each Cockpit supports eight pre-configured Dräger Selecting a view

views and, as an option, up to eight custom views.
Views control the content and appearance of the Reconfigure the screen by selecting a different
screen. view.
To adjust the screen layout to the needs of the
current monitoring session, switch to a different To select a view
view.
1 Select the Views... button on the main menu
Views can be shared among various profiles which bar.
are pre-configured setups. This sharing of views
eliminates time-consuming setup tasks. Views can 2 Select the Views tab if it is not already selected
be assigned to each profile (see page 502). to open a popup with pre-configured views.
3 Select the desired view from the Custom views
(option) or the Draeger views pick lists.
The monitoring area is configured accordingly.
The view editor
The view editor (option) allows authorized

personnel to create and modify customized views.
Dräger views cannot be modified. Access to the
view editor is password-protected. For more
information, see page 469.
Operating concept
Profiles/status
Cockpits are adaptable to different care areas. This Profiles are divided into the following two
adaptability is partially due to profiles which allow categories:
clinical personnel to create unique setups for the
– Patient and default profiles
patient population of specific care areas.
– System profiles (see page 90)
Patient and default profiles
A patient profile consists of user-defined settings The selected patient profile remains unchanged
which are customized for each patient category under the following circumstances:
(adult, pediatric, neonate). For example, a profile
– When the Cockpit is turned off and on again
may be unique to an adult patient population in a
high-acuity OR setting, while another caters to – When a patient is discharged
neonatal patients in a low-acuity OR setting. A
– When a monitor transitions out of standby mode
profile remembers patient and device settings for
future use. With a profile, time-consuming setup – When a monitor transitions out of privacy mode
tasks that would otherwise have to be repeated for
Whenever an M540 is docked in an IACS
each monitoring session are eliminated.
configuration, the profile of the connected Cockpit
For each patient category, five unique profiles can overwrites any M540 profile settings. The only
be set up and saved. Included in the five profiles is exceptions are the following profile settings which
a Dräger default profile that cannot be changed. remain unchanged on the M540:
The Dräger default profile is activated when the – Cable type
Cockpit is booted up for the first time, new software
– etCO2 Atm. pressure
is installed, or factory defaults are restored.
– SpO2 alarm delay
The user-defined patient default profile is activated
whenever a new patient category is selected. In – Patient category (adult, pediatric, neonatal)
addition, the patient default profile is activated after
– Demographic data
patient data are transferred physically or over the
network. – Invasive pressure labels
– Temperature labels
– QRS detection threshold
– M540 offline detection
– M540 battery alarm
After a patient discharge, all patient data are
deleted and the most recently used profile is
restored.
Operating concept
Settings included in a profile
The following table lists all of the settings included Parameter Included settings
in a patient profile. For details on each setting, such
as available selections and detailed descriptions of ST ST monitoring
the setting, refer to the cross-referenced pages. (see page 247) ST lead1
Parameter Included settings ST lead2
Parameter-specific profile settings ST lead3

ECG Size [mV/cm] ST Mini Trend
(see page 225) Size all ECG [mV/cm] TruST 12-lead
Pulse tone volume Event duration [s]
Tone source Selected isoelectric point
HR source Selected ST measuring
point
Waveforms
Alarm on/off setting
Leads
Alarm limits
Filter
Alarm archive setting
Pacer detection
Temperature Color
QRS sync marker
(see page 297) Alarm on/off setting
ARR Processing
Alarm limits
Resp. monitoring
Color
SpO2 (Nellcor) Pulse tone volume
Alarm limits
(see page 290) Tone source
Waveform size [%]
SatSeconds alarm
Arrhythmia ARR mode
(see page 239) Color
Alarm priority (high,
medium, low or off) Alarm limits
Arrhythmia alarm Alarm priority Archive setting and alarm
settings priority for SpO2 check
Rate
(see page 145) sensor alarm
Count
Operating concept
Parameter Included settings Parameter Included settings

SpO2 (Masimo SET Pulse tone volume Invasive pressure Scale
and Masimo Tone source Filter
Rainbow SET)
Averaging time Large mean
Fast SAT mode Min. scale (ICP)
Waveform size [%] Color
Color Alarm on/off setting
Alarm on/off setting Alarm limits
Alarm limits Alarm archive setting
Alarm archive setting Grids
Archive setting and alarm Pressure overlap
priority for SpO2 sensor off Respiration Resp. lead
alarm (see page 252) Mode
SpO2 Masimo SpHb averaging time
rainbow SET Size [%]
Pulse CO-Ox mini trend
(see page 278) Resp. marker
SpHb Cal
Resp. monitoring
Show parameters
Coincidence detect
PVI averaging time
RRi apnea time [s]
Color
Apnea archive
Color
Alarm limits
Alarm limits
SpO2* (from Color
external device) Alarm archive setting
SpO2 label
Cardiac output Catheter type
Mini-trend (see page 344) Catheter size
Non-invasive blood Interval time [min]
pressure Injectate volume [cc]
Inflation mode
(see page 310) C.O. mode
Chime
Alarm on/off setting (Tblood
Color only)
Alarm on/off setting Alarm limits (Tblood only)
Alarm limits Alarm archive setting
Alarm archive setting (Tblood only)
Operating concept

CO2 Scale Scio Agent Agent selection (for variants
RRc apnea time [s] (see page 373) with manual identification
only)
RRc Apnea archive
Agent parameter field
Color configuration
Airway adapter Agent/xMAC mini trend
Averaging configuration
Alarm on/off setting Alarm status
Alarm limits Alarm limits
Alarm archive setting Alarm archive settings
Scio CO2 CO2 parameter field Trend scales
configuration Trends Graphical trend setup
Alarm status Tabular trend setup
Alarm limits Reports Case summary setup
Alarm archive settings External device profile settings
Apnea settings External devices – Parameter 1
Waveform scales CCO/SvO2 Parameter 2
(see page 410)
Trend scales Parameter 3
CO2 color Mini trends
Scio O2 O2 parameter field External devices – Parameter 1 (paw)
configuration Paw Parameter 2 (paw)
O2 mini trend configuration (see page 453)
Parameter 3 (paw)
Alarm status
Paw scale
Alarm limits
Vol scale
Alarm archive settings
Color
Waveform scales
External devices – Parameter 1 (vent, paw)
Trend scales ventilator (Medibus Parameter 2 (vent, paw)
- Servo I)
(see page 454) Parameter 3 (vent, paw)
Paw scale
Flow scale
CO2 Scale
Vol scale
Color (vent, paw, CO2)
Operating concept

External devices – Vent parameter display Alarm profile settings
ventilator (Medibus setting (see page 428) Alarm system All alarms paused
X) Parameter 1 (vent, paw) settings
(see page 413) Show alarm limits
Parameter 2 (vent, paw) (see page 471)
Cardiac bypass
Parameter 3 (vent, paw) OR Alarms
Paw scale Alarm bar enabled
Flow scale Alarm validation
CO2 Scale Pacer detection mode
Vol scale ASY/VF alarms
Color (vent, paw, CO2) NIBP/SpO2 interlock
All parameters of the Config. (see Alarm type
Configure show all page page 471)
(see page 426) Alarm priority (high,
Alarm volume and medium, low or off)
External devices – Agent parameter field
tone settings Pulse tone volume
Anesthesia O2 parameter field (see page 474)
workstation Attention tone volume
(see page 413) etCO2 parameter field
Alarm volume
External devices – CO2 Scale
Alarm attention tones
CO2 Color
(see page 446) Show remote alarms
External devices – Loop draw Code settings Continuous recording
PV Loop (see page 477) Alarm volume off
Paw scale
Vol scale Continuous NIBP mode
External devices – Loop draw All alarms off
FV Loop Flow scale Pressure settings Pressures paused
(see page 451)
Vol scale Pressures off
External devices – Loop draw
Loops (see
page 451)
External devices – Scale[uV]

BIS (see page 391) BIS secondary parameter
External devices – Display temperature

NMT (see
page 397)
Operating concept

Screen profile settings PPV/SPV Arterial waveform
Auto display Auto view mode (see page 327) Reference waveform
settings Waveforms Scale (Reference
(see page 459) waveform)
Layout (right/left)
Pressure overlap Sweep speed
Parameter boxes Waveform Grid
Layout Biomed profile settings
Split screen Bedside setup Airway adapter

(see page 487) Patient profile selection
Mini trends
NIBP trend
Toolbar
Selected parameter priority
Configurable views Up to eight available,
(see page 464) configurable views
Config. buttons Button setup
(see page 465)
Multi-tab split Tab 1, Tab 2, or Tab 3
screen (see
page 468)
Screen system Monitoring sweep speed
settings [mm/s]
(see page 457)
Respiratory sweep speed
[mm/s]
Show parameter units
General profile settings
Anesthesia and BIS Configuration order of
graphical trend parameters
Open lung tool
Procedures profile settings
Wedge Scale
(see page 322) Sweep speed [mm/s]
Reference waveform
Analysis tool Parameter selection
(see page 181)
Duration
Operating concept
Settings not included in a profile
The following settings are not included in a profile

and must be configured separately. These settings
remain unchanged until they are manually changed
again by the user.
Parameter/system fea- Setting

ture
Non-invasive blood Venous stasis
pressure Continuous mode
(see page 305)
ST ST relearn
(see page 247)
Arrhythmia Relearn
(see page 239)
Respiration Relearn
(see page 252)
Invasive pressure Selected labels from

(see page 325) M540
etCO2 (Infinity MCable – Atm. pressure
Mainstream CO2)
(see page 353)
Alarm history Filter settings (All,

(see page 150) Arrhythmia, High-
priority, Medium-
priority, Low-priority,
Time, Priority,
Message)
System setup... > All alarms paused
General settings
(see page 471) SpO2 alarm delay
Alarms > Settings Alarm group
Volume/ Tone "Audio off" reminder
(see page 474)
Operating concept
System profiles
System profiles are system-wide settings. System Most system settings can be shared and are also
profiles are divided into the following two install persist settings. However, some settings are
categories: install persist settings only which are identified in
the following table. For details on each setting,
– Shared settings – these settings can be
such as available selections and detailed
exported and imported using a USB flash drive
descriptions of each setting, refer to the cross-
(see page 504 for information).
referenced pages.
– Install persist settings – these settings are not
affected by a patient discharge, software
upgrade,or by turning the Cockpit off and then
on again.
Setting Shared and install persist settings Install persist only settings
Screen layout settings (see page 457)
Brightness X
Night time X
General alarm settings (see page 471)
External device X
disconnected alarm
control
M540 alarm settings (see page 479)
Keep bed label X
Transport alarm volume X
Transport pulse tone X
volume
Tone and volume alarm settings (see page 471)
Audio pause: Quiet mode X
Minimum alarm volume X
Audio off X
All alarms off X
Tone set X
Recorder settings (see page 482)
Delay X
Duration X
Speed X
Waveform Selection X
Waveform 1 X
Waveform 2 X
Operating concept
Alarm Waveform X
Primary Recorder X
Secondary Recorder X
Report setup settings (see page 484)
Waveform delay [s] X
Waveform duration [s] X
Trend duration [hr] X
Table interval [min] X
Biomed printer settings (see page 491)
Printer IP address X
HP Universal Print Driver X
Paper Size X
Biomed patient monitor settings (see page 487)
Line frequency X
French NFC mode X
OR Alarms X
Cardiac bypass
Biomed country settings (see page 485)
Language X
Time zone X
Biomed unit of measurement settings page (see page 486)
Pressure X
etCO2 X
Temperature X
ST X
SpHb X
Agent X
Weight X
Height X
Biomed patient monitor settings page (see page 487)
External display X
Clinical password X
Biomed password X
Operating concept
Biomed Infinity network settings (see page 490)
IP address X
Subnet mask X
Gateway X
Offline detection X
Primary DNS X
Duplicate IP check X
IP check interval [s] X
Biomed hospital network settings (see page 490)
DHCP X
IP address X
Subnet mask X
Gateway X
Primary DNS X
Biomed network settings (see page 489)
Monitoring unit ID X
Monitoring unit label X
Care unit label X
Bed label X
Hospital name X
Enable Central Station X
Enable Remote Control X
Enable Remote Silence X
Biomed IT tab settings (see page 496)
(identical for the Innovian, PatientWatch, Symphony, Web browser, and Application pages)
IT tabs X
Name X
URL X
Block Popups X
Full Trust X
Tab visible X
Biomed Citrix settings (see page 495)
Name of up to 32 X
applications
Operating concept
Value of up to 32 X
applications
Auto logoff X
Tab visible X
Graphical trend settings (see page 176)
View X
Graphs X
Grids X
Tabular trend settings (see page 176)
View X
Calculation parameters (see the ’Calculations’ chapter starting on page 196)
All hemodynamic X
parameters
All oxygenation/ventilation X
parameters
Laboratory calculation parameter selections (see page 198)
PaCO2 X
PaO2 X
SaO2 X
Hgb X
Body size calculations selections (see page 194)
BSA X
Wt (weight) X
Ht (height) X
Drug profile settings (see page 205)
For all 40 pre-configured
drug profiles, the following
settings are stored as part of
each individual drug profile:
Name of the drug:
Amount X
Volume X
Dose units X
Concentration X
Operating concept
Managing profiles and views
Each patient category (adult, pediatric, neonatal) Transferring profiles

has its own unique profile. For example, if the
neonatal patient category is activated, only the Profiles can be transferred to other Cockpits in the
profiles defined for the neonatal patient category password-protected Profile transfer page. This
are selectable. This is unlike views which can be transfer eliminates time-consuming duplicate setup
shared among all patient categories. tasks. Profiles can be transferred either over the
The following profile functions are available (for network or with a USB flash drive (see page 504).
detailed instructions, see "Profile setup" on
page 498):
– Selecting a profile
– Saving a profile (password-protected)
– Transferring a profile (password-protected)
– Deleting a profile
– Entering a profile name and description
– Assigning a profile to a default view (default
profiles are automatically activated after a
restart or a patient discharge).
Operating concept
Standby mode
Temporarily interrupt patient monitoring by placing To place the Cockpit in standby mode
the Cockpit and the M540 in standby mode.
1 Select the symbol next to the
Selecting standby mode on the Cockpit
Start/Standby... button on the main menu bar
automatically activates standby mode on the M540
to display the Standby toolbar.
and vice versa. Likewise, taking a patient out of
standby on one device does the same at the other 2 Select the Standby button on the toolbar.
device.
or
Standby mode has the following effect:
1 Select the Start/Standby... button on the main
– All patient data are removed from display on the menu bar to display the Standby dialog.
Cockpit and the M540.
2 Select the Start tab if it is not already selected.
– All monitoring (including acoustic and optical
3 Select the Standby button next to the menu
alarm signals) are suppressed.
selection Monitor.
– Active alarms are considered acknowledged.
NOTE
– All recordings are canceled.
If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the
– The message Standby –Touch Screen to Standby button is also accessible on the main
resume monitoring is displayed in the center menu bar. For more information, see page 465.
of the screen.
The message Standby – Touch Screen to
resume monitoring appears in the center of the
Cockpit screen.
To take the Cockpit out of standby mode

 Touch the screen to resume monitoring the vital
signs of the patient.
Operating concept
Privacy mode
Privacy mode is possible only when the patient is To place the Cockpit into privacy mode
admitted at the Infinity CentralStation (ICS). In
1 Select the symbol next to the
privacy mode, patient monitoring continues but the
Start/Standby... button on the main menu bar.
patient data are removed from the Cockpit and the
M540 and only appears on the ICS. 2 Select Privacy on the toolbar.
Selecting privacy mode on the Cockpit or
automatically activates privacy mode on the M540
and vice versa. Likewise, taking a patient out of
menu bar.
privacy mode on one device does the same at the
other device. Privacy mode is canceled 2 Select the Start tab if it is not already selected.
automatically when the connection to the Infinity
3 Select Privacy next to the menu selection
network is disrupted.
Display.
Activating privacy mode has the following effect:
NOTE
– All patient data are removed from the Cockpit
and the M540 displays, but continue to be
Privacy button is also accessible on the main
displayed at the ICS.
menu bar. For more information, see page 465.
– The alarm bar is deactivated.
The message Privacy – Touch Screen to resume
– Acoustic alarm signals are only provided at the monitoring is displayed in the center of the Cockpit
ICS. screen.
– The message Privacy – Touch Screen to
resume monitoring is displayed in the center To take the Cockpit out of privacy mode
of the screen.
 Touch the screen to activate the display of the
patient data.
Operating concept
Screen lock
The screen lock feature allows the user to disable

the touchscreen via a screen lock control. Screen
lock enables the user to move or clean the Cockpit
without unintentionally triggering changes on the
touchscreen.
To activate screen lock

menu bar to display the Standby dialog.
2 Select the Start tab if it is not already selected.
3 Select the On button next to the menu selection
Screen lock.When screen lock is activated, the
touchscreen does not respond to touch and the
rotary knob LED flashes.
Screen lock automatically deactivates after one
minute. However, the user can manually deactivate
screen lock at any time.
To deactivate screen lock

 Press the rotary knob.
Getting started
Getting started
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Turning the IACS on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Viewing demographic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Admitting a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Admitting a patient using Get HIS . . . . . . . . . . 103
Discharging a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Patient categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Selecting the patient category . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Getting started
Overview
This chapter describes the necessary steps to start Specifically, this chapter describes how to:
monitoring a patient on the IACS.
– Turn the IACS on/off
– Admit/discharge a patient on the Cockpit
– Change the patient category
Turning the IACS on/off
Before monitoring a patient on the IACS, the To turn the M540 on

Cockpit and the M540 must be turned on. The
 Press the on/off key (C) of the M540.
following steps assume that the M540 has been
docked in the M500 (for information see,
"Docking/undocking the M540" on page 109).
To turn the Cockpit on

 Press the on/off key (B) of the Cockpit.
D-M5401
The M540 emits a high-pitched tone followed by
two power-up tones, performs a self-test, and
displays the New patient prompt. Select
B Discharge to delete the previous patient data
C700_withBlueMan
or Cancel to continue monitoring the patient

and append the new data to the previous data
A set. The main screen appears.
The LEDs (A) and the on/off key light up green. The acoustic alarm signals are paused for
The Cockpit emits a power-up tone and 2 minutes.
performs a self-test. After a brief moment, the
Dräger startup screen appears before the
Cockpit main screen appears.
Getting started
To turn the Cockpit off To turn the M540 off

1 Press the on/off key located in the lower left 1 Press and hold the on/off key. The power off
corner of the Cockpit dialog appears.
2 Select the Shutdown button in the dialog. 2 Select the Shutdown button in the dialog.
Viewing demographic data
The following diagram shows the Demographics A Demographics tab

page of the Cockpit where you can perform the
B Patient name keyboard symbol
following functions:
C Patient ID keyboard symbol
– Admit a patient manually (see page 102)
D Physician name keyboard symbol
– Admit a patient over the network via the Get
HIS function (see page 103) E Get HIS button
– Discharge a patient (see page 103) F Patient category buttons (Adult, Pediatric,
Neonate)
– Change the patient category (see page 105)
G Birth date fields
H Admit date fields
A
I Gender fields
B
J Weight keypad symbol
C E
K Height keypad symbol
D
F F F All demographic data entered on the
Demographics page are available to the network.
Demographic data are not deleted when you turn
the Cockpit off and on. To delete demographic data,
G G G discharge the patient.
H H H
I I I
J
K
015
Getting started
Admitting a patient
You can admit a patient at the Cockpit manually by 4 Enter the patient ID – use the symbol (C) next
entering the demographic data on the to the Patient ID field to activate a keyboard for
Demographics page. entering the ID number (up to 12 alphanumeric
characters).
You can also admit a patient over the network by
pulling the data from an HL7/ADT interface (see 5 Enter the name of the physician – use the
"Admitting a patient using Get HIS" on page 103). symbol (D) next to the Physician name field to
This is only possible if the M540 is docked, the activate a keyboard for entering the name of the
IACS is connected to the Infinity network, and an physician (up to 12 alphanumeric characters).
Infinity Gateway Suite (Gateway) is present. The
6 Select the desired patient category (F) – Adult,
Gateway communicates with the network and the
Pediatric, or Neonate.
HL7/ADT server.
7 Enter the birthday (G) – day, month, year.
When a patient is admitted, the profile for the
selected patient category is assigned with patient 8 Enter the admit date (H) – day, month, year.
settings already setup. Profiles eliminate repetitive
9 Select the gender (I) – unknown, male, female.
and time-consuming setup tasks.
10 Enter the weight of the patient – use the keypad
WARNING symbol (J) to activate an onscreen numeric
Monitors in a care area may seem identical but keypad for entering the weight of the patient
may use different default alarm settings (see page 104 for supported weight ranges).
because of different profile assignments. 11 Enter the height of the patient – use the keypad
After admitting a patient, always verify that the symbol (K) to activate an onscreen numeric
set alarm limits are appropriate for the patient. keypad for entering the height of the patient
(see page 104 for supported height ranges).
To admit a patient manually
In the following steps, the letters in parentheses
refer to the diagram of the Demographics page
(see page 101).
 Touch the left most field on the header bar of the
Cockpit to access the Demographics page.
or
1 Select Start/Standby... on the main menu bar.
2 Select the Demographics tab (if not already
selected).
3 Enter the patient name – use the symbol (B)
next to the Patient name field to activate a
keyboard for entering the patient name (up to
25 alphanumeric characters).
Getting started
Admitting a patient using Get HIS To admit a patient via Get HIS
 Touch the left most field on the header bar to
You can populate the Demographics page access the Demographics page directly.
automatically, by pulling the demographic data of a
patient from the network. Prerequisite for this or
network data transfer is the Infinity gateway with an 1 Select Start/Standby... on the main menu bar.
interface to the hospital Admit, Discharge, Transfer
(ADT) system. The Hospital Information System 2 Select the Demographics tab (if not already
(HIS) searches the database for the demographic selected).
data of the patient by using the patient ID. 3 Enter the patient ID – use the symbol (C) next
to the Patient ID field to activate a keyboard for
entering the ID number (up to 13 alphanumeric
characters).
4 Select the Get HIS button (E) in the
Demographics page (see page 101). The Get
HIS button appears grayed out and is not
selectable when the HIS is not available or
when the Cockpit is not connected to it.
Discharging a patient
You can discharge a patient from the Cockpit or

from the M540. Discharging a patient from either
device causes a discharge at the other device.
Refer to the instructions for use Infinity Acute Care
System – Infinity M540, for detailed information on
how to discharge a patient from the M540.
Discharging a patient has the following effect on the

Cockpit:
– All demographic data are removed from the
screen
– All trend and event data are deleted
– Any active recordings are canceled
– The profile with defined patient settings is
restored
– The message Touch Screen to initiate
monitoring appears
Getting started
To discharge a patient 3 Select the Start button. A pop-up window with

the message Caution discharge will delete
1 Select the left most field on the header bar of
patient data appears.
the Cockpit to access the Demographics page.
4 Select the Discharge button in the pop-up
2 Select the Start tab (if not already selected).
window.
3 Select the Discharge button.
Discharging a patient may take some time
or during which the message Please wait...
appears on the screen. Once the patient is
NOTE discharged, the message Touch Screen to
If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the initiate monitoring appears in the center of the
Discharge button is also accessible on the main screen. The message Patient transferred
menu bar. For more information, see page 465. appears in the Alarm history page.

Patient categories
Each patient category has specific profiles The Cockpit supports the following patient
associated with it. Profiles are a set of patient and categories:
user settings that have been pre-configured by the
factory or the hospital (for more information, see
"Patient and default profiles" on page 83).
Patient Typical Age Weight Height

category Range
Adult 12 to 140 years 0.1 to 350.0 kg (0.1 to 772.0 lbs) 10 to 250 cm (5 to 100 in)
Pediatric 0 to 16 years 0.1 to 350.0 kg (0.1 to 772.0 lbs) 10 to 250 cm (5 to 100 in)
Neonate 0 to 2 years 1 to 10,000 g (0.1 oz to 351 oz) 10 to 250 cm (5 to 100 in)
If an M540 docks with a different patient category – As soon as the Cockpit has switched to the new
from the one selected on the Cockpit, the following patient category, the patient data are
happens: automatically transferred to the Cockpit from
the M540 that has been monitoring the patient.
– The Cockpit aligns its patient category to the
M540 patient category setting.
– During the patient category alignment, the
M540 continues to monitor the patient.
– The profile changes to the default profile for the
new patient category and the message Please
wait ... is displayed.
Getting started
Selecting the patient category
If the Patient profile selection function is activated 5 Select a profile using the down arrow next to the
(see page 487), you can change the patient selection Profile.
category and select a profile from a list of pre-
The Cockpit switches to the new patient category
configured profiles from the Start page. If the
and the selected profile.
function is deactivated, you can only change the
patient category from the Demographics page.
To change the patient category in the
After changing the patient category, the new patient
Demographics page
category label and symbol appear in the left most
field of the header bar (see page 83).  Select the left most field on the header bar to
access the Demographics page directly.
A patient category change does not affect the
following settings: the patient and physician names, or
patient ID, birth date, admit date, and height. The
weight is affected by a change in patient category
as follows: 2 Select the Demographics tab (if not already
selected).
– Changing from adult to pediatric patient
category and vice versa does not affect the 3 Select the desired patient category button
weight. (Adult, Pediatric, or Neonate), next to the
selection Patient category.
– Changing from adult or pediatric patient
category to neonatal patient category causes 4 Press the rotary knob to confirm the setting.
the weight to appear blank.
The Cockpit switches to the new patient category
– Changing from neonatal patient category to and the default profile for the new patient category.
adult or pediatric causes the weight to appear
blank.
To change the patient category from the Start

page
The following steps are only possible when the
Patient profile selection function is activated (see
page 487).
 Select the left most field on the header bar to
access the Demographics page directly.
or
3 Select the desired patient category button
(Adult, Pediatric, or Neonate), next to the
selection Patient category.
4 Press the rotary knob to confirm the setting.
Assembly and preparation
Assembly overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Docking/undocking the M540 . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Front view of the M500 (M540 docked) . . . . . . 109
Side view of the M500 (M540 undocked) . . . . . 109
Locking/unlocking the M540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Additional M540 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Connecting the system cables . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Connecting the system cable to the PS250 /
P2500 and the Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Connecting the system cable to the PS250 /
P2500 and the M500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Mounting the Infinity MCable – Masimo

SET/Masimo rainbow SET/ Nellcor OxiMax. . . 113
Assembly overview
This chapter describes the following basic Commercially available mounting

assembly tasks: solutions
– Docking/undocking the M540 from the M500 Various mounting solutions are available. It is the
– Locking/unlocking the M540 into the M500 responsibility of the hospital to install, test, and
ensure the proper and safe operation of any
– Connecting/disconnecting the system cables mounting solution.
CAUTION Contact your Dräger representative for specific
Avoid mounting solutions that could impede air approved mounting solutions.
flow since the M500, PS250 / P2500 require ade-
CAUTION
quate airflow to dissipate heat. In addition, when
mounting the PS250 / P2500, always position it Check the weight ratings of the commercially
vertically for adequate heat dissipation. available mounts to avoid injuring the patient or
damaging the device.
IACS components are compatible with
commercially available mounting solutions.
Docking/undocking the M540
The following diagram shows the front and side of To dock the M540
the M500 which holds the M540 in place.
1 Align the curved portion of the M540 with the
curved portion of the M500.
Front view of the M500 (M540 docked) 2 Press the M540 (C) into the M500 (D) until it
‘clicks’ into place.
3 Push the locking tab (A) of the M500 towards
A B the front, to the locked position to fasten the
B
M540 into place.
To lock the M540 into place permanently, see
C "Locking/unlocking the M540" on page 110.
To undock the M540

1 Push the locking tab (A) of the M500 towards
D the back. If the locking tab does not move, it has
been permanently locked. See page 110 for
information on how to unlock the locking tab.
300
2 Hold the M540 firmly and press one of the

release buttons (B - see arrow) of the M500.
Side view of the M500 (M540 undocked)
3 Pull the M540 (C) out of the M500 (D).
B
A
B
E
C D D
C
305
306
A M500 locking tab

B Release buttons for removing the M540
C M540 patient monitor
D M500
E Swivel mount (optional) and mounting clamp
Locking/unlocking the M540
You can lock the M540 in the M500 to prevent any- To unlock the M540
one from undocking it.
1 Insert the 2 mm hex wrench tool (A) into the
middle hole (B) on the locking tab and turn it
To lock the M540 into place counterclockwise to the unlocked position .
1 Push the locking tab (D) of the M500 towards 2 Push the locking tab (D) back to unlock the re-
the front. This prevents you from undocking the lease buttons (C) on the M500 to undock the
M540. If you push the locking tab back, you can M540.
undock the M540 again.
2 Insert the 2 mm hex wrench tool (A) into the
middle hole (B) on the locking tab and turn it
clockwise to the locked position .The locking
tab is fixed and you cannot remove the M540
unless you unlock it again using the hex wrench
tool.
Top view of the M500
A
B
C C
D
307
A Hex wrench tool (2 mm)

B Center hole on locking tab for locking/unlocking
the M540
C Release buttons for undocking the M540
D Locking tab
Additional M540 accessories
The M540 patient monitor supports a variety of more information about these specialized
accessories that include transport hardware, accessories, refer to the Infinity Acute Care System
clamps, cable hooks, trolleys, and so forth. For – Monitoring Accessories instructions for use.
Connecting the system cables
Connecting the system cables involves 2 main

steps:
– Connecting a system cable to the PS250 /
P2500 and the Cockpit.
– Connecting a system cable to the PS250 /
P2500 and the M500.
Connecting the system cable to the PS250 / P2500 and the Cockpit
1 Connect one end of the system cable to the sys-

Bottom view of the P2500
tem connector on the back of the Cockpit (refer
to the instructions for use Infinity Acute Care
System – Medical Cockpit).
2 Connect the other end of the system cable to
one of the two PS250 / P2500 system connec-
tors (A).
Bottom view of the PS250
357
A
004
Connecting the system cable to the PS250 / P2500 and the M500
1 Connect one end of the system cable (B) to the

M500 system connector.
2 Connect the other end of the system cable to
one of the two PS250 / P2500 system connec-
tors (see diagram on page 111).
Side view of the M500
B
306
Mounting the Infinity MCable – Masimo SET/Masimo rainbow SET/ Nellcor

OxiMax
The following diagram shows how a Masimo

MCable can be mounted to the M540. The Nellcor
OxiMax MCable can be mounted in the same way.
A
Side view (connectors)
E
G
D
B
Bottom view C
B
D
F F
477
A M540 E Blue SpO2 connector
B Tabs of the MCable mount adapter that lock into F Indentations for locking the MCable mount
the side of the M540 adapter
C MCable mount G Intermediate cable or reusable SpO2 sensor
which connects directly to MCable
D Cable end of the MCable
To attach the MCable mount adapter

Follow these steps to attach the MCable to the
M540:
1 Make sure the cable end of the MCable (D)
mount adapter (C) points in the same direction
as the connector side of the M540.
2 Align the tabs on the mount adapter (B) with the
indentations on the M540 and push firmly until
the mount adapter clicks in place.
3 Connect the MCable (D) to the blue SpO2 con-
nector on the M540.
To remove the MCable mount adapter

1 Insert a flat head screwdriver (or equivalent
tool) between the indentations for locking the
MCable mount adapter (F).
2 Gently lift to unhinge the adapter.
Alarms
Alarms
Overview of alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Configuring the alarm setup for

Alarm priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 multiple parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
High-priority alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Configuring the alarm message behavior . . . . 136
Medium-priority alarm conditions . . . . . . . . 111 Configuring the arrhythmia alarm setup . . . . . 139
Low-priority alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Configuring ARR alarm settings . . . . . . . . 139
Alarm processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Alarm setup for ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Multiple alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Configuring ST alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . 142
Activating or deactivating alarm validation . . . . 113 Auto setting all alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Optical alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Alarm history and stored events . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Alarm bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Viewing the alarm history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Acoustic alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Viewing a snapshot of a single event . . . . . . . 146
Attention tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Viewing current alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Adjusting the alarm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Configuring alarm settings temporarily . . . . . . 147
Special conditions affecting the Configuring the SpO2 alarm priority . . . . . . . . 148
alarm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Configuring the alarm priority for a
Deactivating the alarm volume . . . . . . . . . . 118 Masimo sensor off message . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Testing optical and acoustic alarm signals . . . . 118 Configuring the alarm priority for a
Viewing current alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Nellcor check sensor message . . . . . . . . . 149
Special alarm behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Remote alarm control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
ASY/VF alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Alarm groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
SpO2 desaturation alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Configuring remote patient
NIBP/SpO2 interlock alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 monitor alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Zeroing invasive pressures. . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Infinity MCable – Nurse call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Privacy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 External device disconnection alarm. . . . . . . . 152
Standby mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 The Code function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
OR alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 The Timer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
French NFC mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Alarm ranges and defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
ECMO mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Arrhythmia ranges and defaults. . . . . . . . . 165
Pressures off and Pressures
paused functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Pre-silencing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Initiating a pre-silence period . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Pausing acoustic alarm signals
(audio pause) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Quiet mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Activating or deactivating acoustic
alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Pausing alarm monitoring temporarily . . . . . . . 128
Activating or deactivating alarm monitoring . . . 129
Configuring the alarm settings for a patient . . . 130
Activating/deactivating alarms . . . . . . . . . . 130
Setting the upper and lower alarm limits. . . 131
Configuring the alarm setup for an
individual parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Alarms
Overview of alarms
The Cockpit and the M540 produce acoustic and The color of an alarm message corresponds to the
optical alarm signals. These alarm signals alert you priority of the associated alarm condition (see
to alarm conditions ranging from limit violations, "Alarm priorities" on page 117).
arrhythmia events, and network issues.
The alarm settings for a patient can be set up to
Persistent alarms generate acoustic and optical generate automatic recordings and/or store alarms
alarm signals and will re-alarm as long as the alarm for later event review in the alarm history. A
condition continues to exist. One-shot alarms are physiological alarm can also activate an external
only reported until the alarms are acknowledged by alarm device such as a nurse call. Special
the user, even if the alarm condition continues to monitoring modes (see page 125), such as cardiac
exist. bypass mode, affect the regular alarming behavior.
Each alarm condition is assigned one of three When connected to the Infinity network, the Cockpit
alarm priorities: high, medium, and low. Each alarm and the M540 can be configured to report alarm
priority has unique acoustic and optical alarm conditions occurring at other monitors that are also
signals. connected to the Infinity network. For more
information, see "Remote alarm control" on page
In addition to the optical and acoustic alarm signals,
155.
alarm messages appear in the header bar of the
Cockpit and in the alarm message field of the For detailed instructions regarding the alarm
M540. For some parameters such as NIBP and functions of the M540, refer to the instructions for
SpO2, certain alarm messages are displayed in the use Infinity Acute Care System – Infinity M540.
parameter field of the Cockpit. All alarm conditions
and associated alarm messages are described in WARNING
detail in the "Troubleshooting" chapter starting on The user must remain within the hearing
page 525. distance of the acoustic alarm signal to
ensure quick detection and an appropriate
response. The distance of the user to the
medical device must be appropriate for the
volume of the alarm signal.
Alarms
Alarm priorities
Every alarm condition is assigned to one of three Medium-priority alarm conditions

priorities: high (life-threatening), medium (serious),
or low (advisory) optical and acoustic alarm signals Most medium-priority alarms report physiological or
indicate the level of the alarm priority. For more technical alarm conditions that require prompt
information on how alarm priorities affect alarm attention but may not be life-threatening.
reporting, see "Optical alarm signals" on page 120
and "Acoustic alarm signals" on page 122. An example of a medium-priority physiological
alarm condition is a respiratory rate limit violation.
An example of a medium-priority technical alarm
condition is a hardware failure of a pressure
High-priority alarm conditions
transducer.
High-priority alarms are typically physiological
alarm conditions that can be life-threatening and
require immediate intervention.
Low-priority alarm conditions
An example of a high-priority alarm condition is an Low-priority alarms typically alert you to technical
asystole. issues that may compromise the ability of the
system to monitor the patient.
An example of a low-priority alarm condition is an
artifact on the ECG waveform.
Alarm processing
When you dock an M540 on the M500 (see

(
NOTE
page 109), all optical and acoustic alarm signals
Alarm monitoring is not available for the following
are transferred to the Cockpit automatically.
parameters: cardiac output (C.O.), injectate
Acoustic alarm signals only sound at the Cockpit
temperature (Tinj), pulmonary wedge pressure
not at the M540 by default. If you also want alarms
(PWP), paced beats (%PACED), perfusion index
to sound at the M540 when it is docked, select the
(PI) and SpOC for the Masimo SET MCable and
alarm volume at the M540 manually (refer to the
Masimo rainbow SET MCable, and any
parameter displayed on the Cockpit using the
Infinity M540).
device connectivity option.
The Cockpit provides acoustic and optical alarm
signals for parameters originating from monitors in When you undock the M540 from the M500 (see
its alarm group (see page 156). In addition, the page 109), all alarm monitoring stops at the Cockpit
Cockpit reports technical alarms affecting the but continues on the M540.
Infinity network.
Alarms
Latching and non-latching alarm behavior
When an alarm condition no longer exists, the To acknowledge a latched alarm condition
associated acoustic and optical alarm signals
Press one of the following two keys:
behave in one of two ways:
– The yellow key or on the front of the
– The alarm signals automatically stop when the
Cockpit.
alarm condition ceases to exist. This type of
alarm is called a non-latching alarm condition. – The yellow key on the front of the M540.
– The alarm signals continue until you or
acknowledge the alarm even though the alarm
– Select the All alarms off or All alarms paused
condition has ceased to exist. This type of alarm
button (the name and function of the button
is called a latching alarm condition.
depends on the Cockpit configuration – see
In general, high-priority alarms are latching alarm page 472). To access the button, press the
conditions while low-priority alarm conditions are quick access symbol next to the Alarms...
non-latching. Exceptions to this alarm behavior are button on the main menu bar.
listed on page 125.
The latched alarm signals clear and all acoustic
The alarm priority of a latching alarm condition and optical latched alarm signals disappear.
determines how the alarm signals behave after the
alarm condition ceases to exist: NOTE
When OR alarms are activated (see page 473),
– A latched alarm condition of high priority is
high-priority alarms are no longer latching alarms.
identified by the standard acoustic and optical
The alarm signals stop automatically when the
alarm signals (see page 122 and page 120).
alarm condition clears. Only when OR alarms are
– A latched alarm condition of medium priority is deactivated do high-priority alarms conditions
downgraded to a status message which produce latching alarms.
appears in the header bar. The background of
the alarm message in the alarm header and the
parameter field no longer flash in the alarm Multiple alarm conditions
color. In addition, and there are no acoustic
alarm signals. During multiple alarm conditions, the Cockpit and
the M540 report the most recently detected alarm
condition of highest priority. When several alarm
conditions occur simultaneously, the parameter
fields flash for all alarming parameters. The alarm
condition with the highest priority determines which
acoustic alarm signal is generated, how the alarm
bar and the parameter field appear, and what alarm
message appears in the header bar. If more than
two alarms are active simultaneously, the
corresponding messages appear in the header bar
along with the More... button which provides
access to additional messages. For more details,
see "Communicating with the Infinity network"
on page 51.
Alarms
Activating or deactivating alarm validation
When the alarm validation function is activated (see validation delay. For HR, adding the delay time may
page 457), an alarm condition must exist for a exceed the maximum of 10 seconds allowed per
certain time before acoustic and optical alarm AAMI/ANSI/IEC 60601-2-27.
signals are triggered. This feature reduces false
The following table lists which parameters have an
alarms.
alarm validation time. Parameters that do not
When the alarm validation feature is activated, the appear in the table have no validation times and
time between the detection and annunciation of a acoustic and optical alarm signals are triggered
parameter falling outside the set alarm limits equals almost immediately.
the time of detection plus the assigned alarm
Parameter Upper alarm limit Lower alarm limit

ECG/Heart rate (HR) 6s 6s
Pulse rate (PLS*) 6s 10 s
ST segment analysis (ST) 15 s to 60 s 15 s to 60 s
(selectable) 1) (selectable) 1)
Respiratory rate (RRi) 14 s 14 s
Respiratory rate (RRc) 8s 10 s
Pulse oximetry (SpO2) 2)
6s 10 s
Invasive pressure (IP) 10 s 4s
Total hemoglobin (SpHb and SpHbv) 6s 10 s
Carboxyhemoglobin saturation (SpCO) 6s 10 s
Pleth variability index (PVI) 6s 10 s
Methemoglobin saturation (SpMet) 6s 10 s
NOTE
1)
Select the validation period for the ST limit alarm in the ST dialog (see "Configuring ST alarm settings"
on page 148).
2)
For Nellcor OxiMax SpO2: the SatSeconds alarm time overrides the alarm validation setting (see
"SatSeconds alarm" on page 291).
Alarms
Optical alarm signals
Each alarm priority has its own distinct optical The alarm message in the header bar is the only
alarm signals. When the M540 is docked on the optical alarm signal if an alarming parameter is not
M500, only the Cockpit provides acoustic alarm included in the current screen view or the alarm bar
signals. However, optical alarm signals appear on is deactivated.
the Cockpit and the M540.
Alarm priority Parameter field Alarm message Alarm bar Alarm
field 1) in header bar (if activated, see message in
page 473) header bar
(refer to
"Messages"
on page 529
High (life-threatening) Flashing red Red background Flashing red White alarm
(for example, background message on
asystole, red
ventricular background
fibrillation)
Medium (serious) Flashing yellow Yellow background Flashing yellow Black alarm
(for example, alarm background message on
limit violations) yellow
background
Low (advisory) Solid cyan Cyan background No optical alarm Black alarm
(for example, background signal on first- message on
disconnected generation and cyan
electrode) second-generation background
Cockpits.
Solid cyan on third-
generation Cockpit
NOTE
1)
Cockpit alarm messages are designed to be legible from a distance of 1 meter (3.3 feet) to 2 meters
(6.6 feet). M540 alarm messages are legible at arm’s length.
Alarms
Optical alarm indicators on the Cockpit Optical alarm indicators on the M540
A B C B
C
016
309
A Alarm message field in the blue header bar
B Alarming parameter field
C Alarm bar
Alarm bar
The alarm bar on the Cockpit and the M540 NOTE

optically announces high and medium-priority
The alarm bars on the first-generation Cockpit,
alarm conditions (see page 117); low-priority alarm
the second-generation Cockpit, and the M540 do
conditions are announced on the alarm bar only on
not support cyan for low-priority alarms. However,
the third-generation Cockpit. The color of the alarm
the alarm bar on the third-generation Cockpit
bar always reflects the priority of the alarm
does support cyan for low-priority alarms.
condition. It may change between yellow, red and
cyan depending on the latest alarm condition. The
alarm bar appears in solid color for any Header bar
unacknowledged single notification alarm.
The header bar displays the alarm message on the
background color corresponding to the alarm
However, the alarm bar is inactive when:
priority. During multiple alarm conditions, the
– The alarm bar is deactivated (see page 473) optical alarm signals always reflect the condition
corresponding to the highest alarm priority. The
– Cardiac bypass or Privacy modes are activated
header bar accommodates up to two messages
(see page 127)
simultaneously (see page 118).
– Alarm monitoring is deactivated (see page 136)
NOTE
The color of the alarm bar always corresponds to
the highest priority alarm condition for all active or
audio pause alarms in audio pause.
Alarms
Acoustic alarm signals
During an alarm, the Cockpit also provides distinct

NOTE
acoustic alarm signals for each alarm priority in
addition to optical alarm signals (see page 120). Normally, acoustic alarm signals only sound at the
The specific characteristics of these acoustic alarm Cockpit not at the M540. Therefore, all acoustic
signals depend on the selected alarm tone pattern. alarm signals are transferred automatically from
The available alarm tone patterns are: Infinity, IEC the M540 to the Cockpit once you dock the M540.
fast, IEC slow, and Hybrid. However, if you want alarms to sound at both
devices, select the alarm tone at the M540
manually.
When acoustic alarm signals are paused, the alarm
bar and the parameter field stop flashing but remain
lit up in the respective alarm color. .
If multiple alarm conditions exist simultaneously, an

acoustic alarm signal sounds for the alarm
condition with the highest priority.
Alarm priority IEC fast IEC slow Infinity Hybrid

High The following acoustic The following Continuous Continuous
alarm signal is repeated acoustic alarm signal two-tone two-tone
every 4.5 s: is repeated every 8 s: sequence sequence
Three beeps > one beep Three beeps > one
> one beep with higher beep > one beep with
pitch > short pause higher pitch > short
pause
Medium The following acoustic The following Two tones > The following
alarm signal is repeated acoustic alarm signal short pause acoustic alarm
every 7 s: is repeated every signal is repeated
15 s: every 7 s:
Two beeps > one lower
pitched beep Two beeps > one Two beeps > one
lower pitched beep lower pitched
beep
Low Two beeps repeated Two beeps repeated Low tone Two beeps
every 16 s every 30 s repeated every repeated every
30 s 16 s
Alarms
Attention tones Special conditions affecting the alarm

volume
The Cockpit also provides an attention tone to alert
you to special information such as: There are several conditions that affect the alarm
– Start of venous stasis volume of the Cockpit.
– End of zeroing a transducer

Minimum alarm volume setting
– CO2 calibration is required
The alarm volume is tied to the setting Minimum
– CO2 MCable maintenance is due alarm volume (see page 474 for more
– Arrival of laboratory data information). If the minimum alarm volume is set to
a higher volume than the selected alarm volume,
– Alarm messages from a remote bed within the the alarm volume is adjusted to the higher setting.
same alarm group If the minimum alarm setting is set to a lower setting
An attention tone sounds once as a chime (that is, than the current alarm volume, the alarm volume
two tones in the same pitch). To set the attention does not change.
tone volume, refer to page 153.
NOTE
NOTE If the Alarm volume off feature is enabled in the
Unlike attention tones, pulse tones for ECG or Code setup page (see page 477), the alarm
SpO2 consist of a single tone. volume is automatically reduced to its minimum
alarm volume setting when you select the Code
button on the main menu bar.
Adjusting the alarm volume
Cockpit and ICS lose connection
The volume of the alarm tone is adjustable. Make
If the Cockpit was assigned to the ICS and it loses
sure you set the alarm volume so that it is suitable
its connection to the ICS, you can no longer turn the
for the clinical environment.
alarm volume off at the Cockpit. In this case, the
The alarm status indicating the alarm alarm tone setting goes automatically to 100%.
volume displays in the Cockpit alarm Once the Cockpit restores its connection to the
message header. In the following ICS, the previous setting for the alarm volume is
example the alarm volume is set at 50% which is reinstated.
indicated by the percentage.
However, if the connection to the ICS is lost while
the Cockpit is set to OR alarms and the Minimum
To adjust the alarm volume alarm volume setting is set to Off, you can still turn
the alarm volume off at the Cockpit.
1 Select the Alarms... button on the main menu
bar. For more information about the network
communication, see page 51.
2 Select the Settings tab.
3 Select the button Alarm volume [%] and select
the desired volume (5%, 10 to 100% in
increments of 10%).
Alarms
Deactivating the alarm volume To deactivate the alarm volume

Make sure the Minimum alarm volume is set to
You can only deactivate the alarm volume under Off (see page 474), before you execute the
the following two circumstances: following steps:
– If the patient is assigned to an ICS and the 1 Select the Alarms... button on the main menu
setting Minimum alarm volume is set to Off. bar.
– If the Cockpit is set to OR alarms and the setting 2 Select the Settings tab.
Minimum alarm volume setting is set to Off.
3 Select Off under the Alarm volume [%] setting.
These two system settings are configured under
the password-protected Volume/ Tone page (see The message Audio off and the
page 474). corresponding symbol displays in the
alarm message header.
The alarm history records a message when the
alarm volume is set to Off, and the alarm volume
changes from Off to another setting.
Testing optical and acoustic alarm signals
At startup, the Cockpit alarm bar illuminates and creating an alarm condition (for example, by
two speaker tones sound separately. These two lowering the upper alarm limit of the heart rate). To
distinct tones help the user identify if a speaker is end the test, restore the alarm limits to the previous
malfunctioning. The user should also test the setting (see "Configuring the alarm settings for a
optical alarm signals and acoustic alarm signals by patient" on page 136).
Viewing current alarm messages
The Cockpit identifies each alarm condition Specifically, you can review the following
according to the alarm priorities low, medium, and information for each alarm condition:
high (see page 117). In addition to optical and
– How long the alarm has been active (duration).
acoustic alarm signals, alarm messages in the
header bar identify each alarm condition. The – The alarm priority of the alarm condition (! =
header bar can display two messages low-priority; !! = medium-priority; !!! = high-
simultaneously. If more than two patient alarm priority).
conditions are active simultaneously, the button
– Alarm message (for detailed information on the
More... appears to the left of the alarm message
cause and possible remedies, see the chapter
field (see page 95). Selecting this button activates
“Troubleshooting" on page 525).
the Current alarms page. This page lists all of the
currently active alarms.
Alarms
To access the current alarm messages or

 Select the More... button to the left of the alarm 1 Select the Alarms... button on the main menu
message field in the header bar (only visible bar.
when more than two patient alarm conditions
2 Select the Current alarms tab.
are active).
Special alarm behavior
Activating any of the following features alters the

normal alarm annunciation behavior: NOTE
– ASY/VF alarms When Arterial is selected as the HR source, the
first valid pressure is derived from the following
– SpO2 desaturation alarm list in priority order: ART, AOR, FEM, AXL, RAD,
– NIBP/SpO2 interlock function UAP, BRA.
– Zeroing invasive pressures To make sure that asystole and ventricular

– Privacy, Standby, Cardiac bypass, and OR fibrillation alarms are always reported do one of the
alarms following:
– French NFC mode – Turn arrhythmia monitoring on
– ECMO mode or
– Pressures pause and Pressures off functions – Set the HR source to ECG (see page 226)
when the ARR mode setting is set to Off (see
page 239)
ASY/VF alarms If you select Follow HR alarm, deactivate HR and
arrhythmia alarm monitoring, the message HR,
You can control the alarming behavior for ASY, VF off appears.
ventricular fibrillation (VF) and asystole (ASY)
alarms.
SpO2 desaturation alarms
CAUTION
Alarm signals are not generated for The alarm priority is upgraded to high-priority if the
ventricular fibrillation and asystole events SpO2 value falls below the Desat. alarm limit.
when the following conditions are met: Deactivating the SpO2 alarm automatically
– The ASY/VF alarms setting is set to Always deactivates the desaturation alarm. The
on or Follow HR alarm (see page 471). desaturation alarm can be activated only if SpO2
– The ARR mode is set to Off. alarms are activated (see page 159, page 275, and
– The HR source is set to Arterial or SpO2 page 289). When using the Infinity MCable –
with ECG available as a heart rate source. Nellcor OxiMax, this feature is only available if the
SatSeconds alarm function is set to Off (see page
291).
Alarms
NIBP/SpO2 interlock alarms – Unplugged transducers

– Disconnected hemodynamic pods
To avoid SpO2 nuisance alarms when the blood
pressure cuff and the SpO2 sensor are placed on – A wedge pressure measurement that ends
the same limb during an active non-invasive blood before the 30-second zeroing period ends will
pressure measurement, select the NIBP/SpO2 activate the alarm limit for the parameter PA M
interlock function in the General settings page only
(see page 471).
When the function is activated, all SpO2 alarms are
Privacy mode
deactivated during an active non-invasive blood
pressure measurement. To activate or deactivate
When privacy mode is activated, the following
this function, see page 473.
happens at the Cockpit:
– All patient data are removed from the Cockpit
Zeroing invasive pressures and the M540 but continue to be visible at the
ICS (Infinity CentralStation).
Zeroing all invasive pressures from the Zero all – The Cockpit and at the M540 display the alarm
button on the Cockpit menu bar or from the key message Privacy – Touch Screen to resume
on the hemodynamic pods (see page 319) has the monitoring.
following effects:
– The alarm bar is deactivated.
– All invasive pressure and CPP limit alarms and
static alarms are suppressed from the time the – Acoustic alarm signals are only provided at the
button/key is pressed until 30 seconds after the ICS.
zeroing procedure is completed. This includes – Home is the only active button on the main
an alarm for a disconnected arterial catheter. menu bar of the Cockpit; all other buttons are
Zeroing an individual pressure from a specific inactive.
invasive pressure page on the Cockpit (see You can activate privacy mode only if the patient is
page 319) has the following effects: also admitted at the ICS. To activate or deactivate
– The invasive pressure limit alarm for that this feature, see page 96.
parameter is suppressed from the time the
button is pressed until 30 seconds after the
zeroing procedure is completed. Standby mode
– If the zeroed parameter is ICP or ART, the CPP
When Standby mode is activated, the following
limit alarm is also suppressed from the time the
button is pressed until 30 seconds after the
zeroing procedure is completed. – All patient data are removed from the screen.
The following alarm conditions cancel the – All monitoring (including acoustic and optical
suppression of alarms caused by zeroing invasive alarm signals) is suppressed.
pressures:
– Active alarms are considered acknowledged by
– The invasive pressure parameter is outside (too the user.
high/low) the measuring range.
– The message Standby, Touch Screen to
– Invasive pressure hardware failures such as a resume monitoring appears at the ICS, at the
transducer failure Cockpit, and at the M540.
Alarms
– Home is the only active button on the main – All recordings are canceled.
menu bar of the Cockpit; all other buttons are
To activate or deactivate this function, see page 95.
inactive.
Cardiac bypass mode
Cardiac bypass mode is only available when the OR alarms

Cockpit is set to OR alarms. When cardiac bypass
mode is activated (see page 473), the following When OR alarms are activated, alarm messages
happens at the Cockpit: for medium and high-priority alarms clear when the
– All alarm monitoring (including arrhythmia alarm condition no longer exists. In addition, you
alarms), and the alarm bar are deactivated. can deactivate the acoustic alarm signal. For
detailed information, see page 122.
– Alarm reminders are not activated.
NOTE
– The message All alarms off: bypass and the
symbol appear in the message area in the RRi and 12-lead ECG monitoring are unavailable
upper-right corner of the header (in white text when the M540 is set to OR alarms.
on red background). This message also
displays at the ICS and on a remote device.
French NFC mode
– Pressing the All alarms paused or the All
alarms off %0 button deactivates cardiac When this mode is activated, the following happens
bypass mode. at the Cockpit:
– Pressing the yellow key on the Cockpit does not – Heart rate alarms cannot be deactivated.
pause any alarms.
– The alarm pause period cannot last longer than
– The non-invasive blood pressure interval mode 3 minutes.
is deactivated. The interval timer is restored to
the last value. To restart the interval – You cannot activate Cardiac bypass mode
measurements, press the NIBP start/stop when French NFC mode is activated. If
button or the start/stop key. Cardiac bypass mode was activated before
French NFC mode was activated, Cardiac
– The alarm history records either the message bypass mode is deactivated.
Cardiac bypass on or Cardiac bypass off.
To activate or deactivate this function, see page
When the Cockpit is in cardiac bypass mode and 487.
the M540 is undocked, cardiac bypass mode is not
supported on the M540. Cardiac bypass is
activated on the M540 after it docks to a Cockpit
that is in cardiac bypass mode.
To activate or deactivate this function, see page
473. If French NFC mode is activated, Cardiac
bypass mode is not available.
Alarms
ECMO mode To deactivate ECMO mode
When a patient undergoes ECMO (extracorporeal NOTE

membrane oxygenation), pressure tracings change All systolic, diastolic, static pressure, and Art.
from pulsatile to non-pulsatile. cath. disconnect alarms are re-enabled when
exiting ECMO mode, regardless of patient
ECMO mode supports a patient undergoing the profile settings.
ECMO procedure by suppressing alarms.
 Press the ECMO button (toggles to On/Off).
WARNING – The ECMO banner on the Cockpit and

M540 is removed, and all pulsatile pressure
All systolic, diastolic, static pressure, and Art.
alarms are enabled.
cath. disconnect alarms are disabled in ECMO
mode, which reduces the number of invasive
pressure alarms to mean pressure limit
alarms only.
NOTE
The Art. cath. disconnect alarm can be
manually re-enabled if desired.
To activate ECMO mode on the Cockpit

1 Press the Alarms... button on the main screen
to open the Alarms dialog.
2 Press the Settings tab.
3 Press the ECMO button.
Or
1 Press the Sensor parameters... button on the
main screen.
2 Press the Invasive pressures tab.
Or
1 Press the quick access symbol (see page
74).
ECMO mode turns on, and the following
message appears on the main screen indicating
that systolic and diastolic alarms are disabled.
ECMO S/D
Alarms
Pressures off and Pressures paused WARNING

functions Selecting Pressures off impacts all invasive
pressure alarms including the Art. cath.
The user can set pressure alarms to Off, set disconnect alarm.
pressure alarms to Pause, and configure pause
durations.
NOTE
Audio pause has priority over Pressures pause.
To enable Pressures off. Initiating audio pause during pressure pause will
1 Press System setup... on the main screen. automatically cancel Pressures pause.
2 Press the Alarms tab.

3 Enter the clinical password.
4 Press the Pressure settings tab.
5 Next to Pressures off, press the Enabled
button.
To set Pressures off

1 Press the Alarms... button on the main screen.
3 Press the Pressures off button next to
Intervention.
Or
1 Select an invasive pressure parameter field on
the main screen.
2 Press the General settings tab.
Intervention.
The following status message is displayed in a
red banner on the main screen:
Pressures off
Intervention to deactivate.
CAUTION
The Pressures off setting will remain in effect
until canceled by the user.
To configure Pressures pause durations when the Pressures pause button is available for
selection in the Alarm settings dialog.
The user can configure pressure pause durations
Alarms
1 Press the System setup... button on the main

screen.
2 Press the Alarms tab.
3 Enter the clinical password.
4 Press the pressure settings tab.
5 Press the button next to Pressures paused
[min] and select one of the following:
– 1 min
– 2 min (default)
– 3 min
– 4 min
– 5 min
– Disabled
To pause pressure alarms

1 Press the Alarms... button on the main screen.
3 Press the Pressures paused button next to
Intervention.
Or
1 Select an invasive pressure parameter field on
the main screen.
2 Press the General settings tab.
Intervention.
The following status message is displayed in a
red banner on the main screen:
Pressures paused
Intervention to deactivate.
WARNING
Selecting Pressures pause impacts all
invasive pressure alarms including the Art.
cath. disconnect alarm.
Alarms
Pre-silencing alarms
This function allows you to pre-silence (audio Initiating a pre-silence period

pause in advance) potential alarm conditions
before they occur. Pre-silencing allows you to You can initiate a pre-silence in several ways:
concentrate on a procedure without being
interrupted by continuous acoustic alarm signals – From the Cockpit
arising from potential alarm conditions. – From an M540 on wireless transport
NOTE – From an ICS

Pre-silencing alarms is not possible when quiet – From the remote view of another Infinity monitor
mode is deactivated. within the same monitoring unit
A pre-silence period lasts two minutes. To pre-silence alarms remotely is only possible if
the remote control feature of the remote device is
Pre-silencing alarms has the following effect: activated and quiet mode is enabled on the Cockpit
– Any alarm conditions are reported optically by a (see "Alarm setup – Code functions" on page 477).
corresponding alarm message and a blinking Refer to the corresponding instructions for use for
parameter field (see page 120). information on how to activate the remote control
feature.
– The alarm message Audio paused appears in
the far right field of the header bar along with a
timer and the following symbol: To pre-silence alarms from the Cockpit
– A single acoustic alarm signal is generated for  Press the yellow or key on the
the first occurrence of an alarm condition of low, Cockpit. The appearance of the yellow key
medium or high alarm priority. For subsequent depends on the Cockpit hardware version (see
alarm conditions of equal alarm priority, no page 26).
further acoustic alarm signals are generated. or
Only for subsequent alarm conditions of higher
alarm priority, a single acoustic alarm signal is  Press the F1 keyboard key.
generated. Pressing the key that initiated the pre-silence
– If multiple alarm conditions arise during an period again, cancels the pre-silence state and
active pre-silence period, the Cockpit triggers a all alarm events are reported as usual.
single acoustic alarm signal for the alarm
condition corresponding to the highest priority.
The Cockpit remains silent for any subsequent
alarm conditions of equal or lower alarm priority.
Alarms
To pre-silence alarms remotely

 Press the yellow key on the main menu  Refer to the instructions for use of other remote
bar of the ICS to pre-silence alarms for all devices within the same monitoring unit for
assigned patients. Press the same button in the detailed instructions on how to initiate an audio
viewport area to pause alarm tones for an pause remotely.
individual patient. For more information, refer to
Pressing the key that initiated the pre-silence
the ICS instructions for use.
period again, cancels the pre-silence state and all
 Press the yellow key on the M540 when it alarm events are reported as usual.
is not docked in an IACS configuration.
Pausing acoustic alarm signals (audio pause)
Acoustic alarm signals can be paused, or silenced, Activated quiet mode

at the Cockpit for two minutes. In addition to
If a new alarm condition with a priority higher than
silencing alarms, the setting of the quiet mode
the currently paused alarm occurs, a truncated
feature determines how subsequent alarm
alarm tone sounds. In addition, the alarm is
conditions are announced.
represented by optical alarm signals corresponding
You can initiate an audio pause from the Cockpit, to the alarm priority. If the new alarm is of equal or
the M540, the ICS, or from the remote view of lower priority than the paused alarm, the new alarm
another Infinity monitor within the same monitoring condition is only represented by an optical alarm
unit. Pausing alarms from a remote device is signal. No acoustic alarm signal tones sound.
possible when remote control is activated at the
If the alarm bar is enabled when the audio pause
remote device and the Cockpit (see page 155).
button is pressed for active One-shot or persistent
low-priority alarms, the solid alarm bar clears.
Quiet mode If the patient is also admitted at the ICS, any high-
priority alarm condition will sound at the ICS. For
This feature gives you the flexibility to decide if you any subsequent alarm condition of equal or lesser
want restricted or full annunciation of future alarm priority, no further alarm tones sound.
conditions after you have already paused alarms.
This feature affects the audio pause behavior of the Deactivated quiet mode
IACS and the ICS. To activate or deactivate the
quiet mode feature, refer to "Alarm setup – Any new alarm condition breaks through the audio
configuring the alarm volume and tones" on pause period with full acoustic and optical alarm
page 474. When this mode is activated, the number annunciation. The same is true if the patient is
of acoustic alarm signals is reduced to eliminate admitted at the ICS.
unnecessary noise while still alerting the clinician to If the alarm bar is enabled when the audio pause
important alarm conditions button is pressed for active One-shot or persistent
low-priority alarms, the solid alarm bar clears.
Alarms
Initiating an audio pause
The following happens when you pause active To initiate an audio pause from the Cockpit
alarms:
 Press the yellow or key on the
– The alarm tone is paused for two minutes Cockpit. The appearance of the yellow key
depends on the Cockpit hardware version (see
– The Audio paused message appears in the
page 26).
alarm message header along with the timer and
the following symbol: or
– The alarm message appears in the color  Press the F1 keyboard key.
corresponding to the alarm priority.
Pressing the key that initiated the audio pause
– The parameter field no longer flashes in the period again, cancels the audio pause state,
color corresponding to the alarm priority. It and all alarm events are reported as usual.
appears in solid color.
– The alarm bar no longer flashes for high and To initiate an audio pause from the M540
medium-priority alarm conditions.
Press the yellow key on the M540 in an IACS
If a new alarm condition occurs, the selected configuration. You can audio pause alarms on the
setting of the quiet mode feature determines the M540 when it is docked or while it is on transport.
alarm annunciation behavior (see page 132).
NOTE To initiate an audio pause remotely

If an alarm condition remains unchanged after the Refer to the instructions for use of any remote
alarm pause period expires, the acoustic and device within the same monitoring unit for
optical alarm signals are reactivated. The only instructions on how to initiate an audio pause.
exception are single notification alarms which are
Pressing the key that initiated the audio pause
only reported once and are cleared when you
period again, cancels the audio pause state, and all
pause alarms.
alarm events are reported as usual.
Alarms
Activating or deactivating acoustic alarm signals
Deactivating acoustic alarm signals is a password- After deactivating acoustic alarm signals
protected function (see page 471). permanently, you can activate them again (see
page 471). When you activate acoustic alarm
You can deactivate alarm tones permanently.
signals, the following happens when an alarm
When you deactivate alarm tones, the following
condition occurs:
happens:
– Acoustic alarm signals sound (see page 122).
– Alarm tones no longer announce alarm
conditions. – Alarm messages appear in the header bar (see
page 120).
– The message Audio off appears in the far right
field of the header bar and the following symbol: For information about configuring alarm volumes
and the Audio off reminder feature, refer to "Alarm
setup – configuring the alarm volume and tones"
on page 474.
Pausing alarm monitoring temporarily
If the password-protected alarm pause feature is – Alarm messages are removed from the alarm
activated (see page 472), you can pause alarm message field in the header bar.
monitoring temporarily. The alarm pause duration is
– The far right field of the header bar turns yellow
adjustable from 1 minute to 5 minutes (default is
and displays the alarm message All alarms
2 minutes).
paused, a timer, and the following symbol:
NOTE – The message All alarms paused is recorded in
If the French NFC mode is activated (see the alarm history (see page 150).
page 487), you cannot pause alarm monitoring for
more than 3 minutes. NOTE
If the Cockpit is connected to the network and the
The following happens when you pause alarm patient is admitted at the ICS, a message also
monitoring: appears at the ICS that alarms are paused.
– Acoustic and optical alarm signals for new
alarm conditions are suppressed for all
parameters until alarm monitoring begins again.
– Alarm signals for any active alarm condition
stop immediately.
– The alarming parameter field and alarm bar
return to the pre-alarm state.
Alarms
To pause alarm monitoring temporarily To activate alarm monitoring after pausing

1 Select the symbol next to the Alarms... 1 Select the symbol next to the Alarms...
button on the main menu bar of the Cockpit. button on the main menu bar of the Cockpit.
2 Select the All alarms paused button. 2 Select the All alarms paused button again.
NOTE NOTE
If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the
All alarms paused button is also accessible on All alarms paused button is also accessible on
the main menu bar. For more information, see the main menu bar. For more information, see
page 465. page 465.
As soon as the alarm pause period ends, the

Cockpit generates acoustic and optical alarm
signals as needed.
Activating or deactivating alarm monitoring
WARNING – The alarming parameter field and alarm bar

return to the pre-alarm state.
If No timeout is assigned to the alarm off
period, no counter appears and alarms remain – Alarm messages are removed from the alarm
deactivated until you enable them again. message field of the header bar.
– The far right field of the header bar turns yellow
WARNING and displays the message All alarms off and
Never leave a patient unattended when alarm the following symbol: .
monitoring is permanently deactivated.
– The message All alarms off is recorded in the
Always activate alarm monitoring again as
alarm history (see page 151).
soon as possible.
NOTE
If the password-protected alarm pause feature is If the Cockpit is connected to the network, a
set to No timeout (see page 472), the following message also appears at the ICS that all alarms
happens when you deactivate alarm monitoring: are turned off.
– All acoustic and optical alarm signals for new
alarm conditions are suppressed for all
parameters until alarm monitoring is manually
activated again.
– Acoustic alarm signals for any active alarm
condition stop immediately.
Alarms
To deactivate alarm monitoring permanently To activate alarm monitoring after deactivating

1 Select the symbol next to the Alarms... 1 Select the symbol next to the Alarms...
button on the main menu bar of the Cockpit. button on the main menu bar of the Cockpit.
2 Select the All alarms off button on the toolbar. 2 Select the All alarms off button again on the
toolbar.
NOTE
If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the NOTE
All alarms off button is also accessible on the If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the
main menu bar. For more information, see All alarms off button is also accessible on the
page 465. main menu bar. For more information, see
page 465.
The Cockpit provides acoustic and optical alarm

signals again when it detects a new alarm
condition.
Configuring the alarm settings for a patient
The following section describes the available alarm – Injectate temperature (Tinj)
features and settings. You can adjust the alarm
– Pulmonary wedge pressure (PWP)
settings for an individual parameter in the
respective parameter-specific setup page. Or, you – Paced beats (%PACED)
can set up the alarm settings of multiple
– Perfusion index (PI)
parameters in one page. When setting alarm limits,
make sure that they are appropriate for the – Total oxygen content (SpOC) for the Masimo
patient’s condition. rainbow SET MCable
– Parameters originating from a device that is
displaying its values on the Cockpit using the
Activating/deactivating alarms device connectivity option.
Except for the following parameters, you can

activate or deactivate the alarm function for
individual parameters:
– Asystole and ventricular fibrillation (for these
arrhythmia events you cannot deactivate
alarms unless the ASY/VF alarms feature is set
to Follow HR alarm)
– Cardiac output (C.O.)
Alarms
When you deactivate alarms, no acoustic and Setting the upper and lower alarm limits
optical alarm signals are triggered for that
parameter. When alarm monitoring is deactivated, You can configure the upper and lower alarm limits
a crossed out triangle (A) appears in the parameter of a parameter manually to trigger acoustic and
field. optical alarm signals if a parameter goes above or
below the set limits. You can also auto set the alarm
limits of all parameters quickly based on a
percentage. For more information on the Auto set
function, see page 150.
WARNING
Setting alarm limits to extreme values may
prevent certain alarm conditions from being
detected and from being annunciated with
acoustic and optical alarm signals.
A WARNING
030 To ensure authorized changes are made to
When you activate the alarm function for a alarm settings, make the clinical, biomedical,
parameter, the set alarm limits replace the crossed and service passwords only available to
out triangle, provided the alarm limits display is appropriately trained individuals.
activated (see page 471).
For information regarding special SpO2 alarm limit
behavior, refer to the chapters SpO2 and Pulse
CO-Ox monitoring with Masimo SET MCable on
page 272, and SpO2 and pulse rate with Nellcor
OxiMax MCable on page 289.
Archive function
Depending on the active archive setting, the
following happens in response to an alarm limit
violation:
– An automatic strip recording (see chapter
"Reports/recordings").
– An electronic event storage in the alarm history
for later review (see page 150). For information
on configuring the archive function, see
"Changing general alarm settings" on
page 141.
Alarms
Configuring the alarm setup for an individual parameter
If you are only changing the alarm settings of an A Alarm on/off buttons for each parameter
individual parameter, use the parameter-specific
B Auto set button
setup page which includes the alarm setup.
C Buttons setting the upper limits for each param-
The following diagram shows an example of a
eter
parameter-specific setup page. Regardless of the
parameter, buttons for adjusting the alarm settings D Buttons setting the lower limits for each param-
always appear at the top. The alarm setup portion eter
looks different depending on the parameter.
E Archive buttons
For example, the following diagram shows a setup
F Parameter-specific monitoring settings
page for a composite parameter such as non-
invasive blood pressure. There are separate alarm
settings for each composite parameter (systolic,
diastolic, and mean).
Sensor parameters
A A A B
C C C
D D D
E E E
F
017
Alarms
Changing alarm settings for a single parameter
In the steps below, the letters in parentheses refer 3 Select the Alarm on/off button (A), to activate or
to the diagram of the parameter-specific setup deactivate alarm monitoring. A crossed-out
page. triangle appears in the parameter field when
alarm monitoring is deactivated.
WARNING
Setting alarm limits to extreme values may NOTE
prevent certain alarm conditions from being If French NFC mode is activated (see page 487),
detected and from being annunciated with you cannot deactivate HR alarms.
4 Select the setup button (C) to adjust the upper
alarm limits.
To configure the alarm settings
5 Select the setup button (D) to adjust the lower
1 Select Sensor parameters... on the main menu alarm limits.
bar.
6 Select one of the following settings for the
2 Select the desired parameter tab (for example, Archive buttons (E) to determine what happens
ECG). in response to an alarm:
or – Off – no event is stored and no recording is
 Select the parameter field to access the generated.
parameter setup page directly. – Store – stores the event for later review
(see page 151).
– Record – generates a timed recording.
– Str/Rec – stores an event for later review
and generates a timed recording.
Alarms
Configuring the alarm setup for multiple parameters
The following diagram shows the General page A Limits tab

where you configure alarm settings for all available
B Parameter labels column
parameters. The page consists of a table with setup
rows for each parameter. Each setup row consists C Alarm on/off column
of several fields for configuring the individual alarm
D Lower limits column
settings. When you select a field to configure a
setting, an orange border highlights the selected E Actual parameter values
row.
F Upper limits column
Alarms G Archive column
A H General, ARR, and ST tabs
B C D E F G H I Display filter button
H
J Auto set all button (see "Auto setting all alarm
H limits" on page 149)
J I
018
Alarms
Changing general alarm settings
In the following steps, the letters in parentheses 7 Select the corresponding button in the Upper
refer to the diagram of the General page (see column (F) to adjust the upper alarm limits.
page 140). Alarm ranges and defaults are listed
8 Use one of the following settings in the Archive
starting on page 171.
column (G) to determine what happens in
response to an alarm:
WARNING – Off – no event is stored and no recording is
Setting alarm limits to extreme values may generated.
prevent certain alarm conditions from being
– Store – stores the event for later review
(see page 151).
– Record – generates a timed recording
To configure the alarm settings of multiple – Str/Rec – generates a timed recording and
parameters stores the event.
1 Select the Alarms... button on the main menu 9 Select the Auto set all button (J), to auto adjust
bar. the alarm limits of all parameters. For more
2 Select the Limits tab (if not already selected).
Con
3 Select the General tab along the right edge of NOTE

the page. If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the
Auto set all button is also accessible on the main
4 Use the display filter button (I) to determine
whether the table displays all parameters or
only parameters that are currently connected.
5 Select the corresponding button in the Alarm
on/off column (C) to activate or deactivate alarm
monitoring. A crossed-out triangle appears in
the parameter field when alarm monitoring is
deactivated.
6 Select the corresponding button in the Lower
column (D) to adjust the lower alarm limits.
Alarms
Configuring the alarm message behavior
The Config. tab allows you to set up the acoustic The alarm setting:
and optical alarm signal reporting behavior in
– is supported on the ICS
response to certain SpO2 sensor and messages
related to leads-off conditions. – is supported in any remote view
– is stored in the patient profile
To access the Config. tab
Regardless of the selected setting, the acoustic
1 Select the Alarms... button on the main menu alarm signal can be audio paused but resumes if
bar. the condition persists beyond the two minute audio
pause time. The message appears in the header
bar of the Cockpit until the condition disappears or
3 Select the Config. tab you acknowledge.
4 Refer to the following table for available
settings. The selected alarm priority affects how
the alarm event is reported optically and
acoustically (see page 122).
Message Available settings Description
SpO2 sensor off 1)
Alarm settings
SpO2 check sensor 2) – High Assigns an alarm priority to the sensor alarm or
deactivates the sensor alarm.
– Medium
– High: The event is treated as a high-priority
– Low (default for
alarm.
SpO2 check sensor)
– Medium: The event is treated as a medium-
– One-shot
priority alarm.
– (off) – default for
– Low: The event is treated as a persistent low-
SpO2 sensor off
priority alarm.
– One-shot: The event is treated as a low priority,
single notification alarm.
– : No optical or acoustic alarm signals are
triggered; however, if the sensor is no longer
attached to the patient, a corresponding
message appears in the SpO2 parameter field.
1)
Message originating from a Masimo rainbow SET or a Masimo SET MCable.
2)
Message originating from a Nellcor MCable.
Alarms

Archive settings
SpO2 sensor off 1)
– Off (default) The archive settings cannot be configured for these
two alarm messages. The archive setting follows
SpO2 check sensor – Store
the general archive status for the parameter. For
– Record details on how to change the archive settings of a
parameter, refer to page 138.
– Str/Rec
ECG leads off Alarm settings
Alarm column Determines what happens when the corresponding
alarm occurs: – generates a timed recording and
– High
stores the event.
– Medium
– High: The event is treated as a latching alarm.
– Low (default)
– One-shot priority alarm.
– (off) – Low: The event is treated as a persistent low-
priority alarm.
– One-shot: The event is treated as a single
notification alarm of low priority. The message
ECG leads off appears briefly in the header bar
until the user acknowledges the condition or the
condition disappears.
triggered.
Archive settings
– Off (default) These archive settings cannot be configured for this
alarm message. The archive setting follows the
– Store
general archive setting for the parameter. For
– Record details on how to change the archive settings of a
– Str/Rec
1)
Message originating from a Masimo rainbow SET or a Masimo SET MCable.
Alarms

RRi lead off Alarm settings
– High Assigns an alarm priority to the RRI lead-off alarm
or deactivates it.
– Medium
– Low (default)
alarm.
– One-shot
– (off) priority alarm.
– Low: The event is treated as a persistent low
alarm.
– One-shot: The event is treated as a low priority,
single notification. The message RRi lead off
appears briefly in the header bar until the user
acknowledges the condition or the condition
disappears.
triggered.
Archive settings
– Off (default) These archive settings cannot be configured for this
– Store
general archive status for the parameter. For details
– Record on how to change the archive settings of a
– Str/Rec
Arterial catheter Alarm settings
disconnected Alarm column Assigns an alarm priority to the Arterial catheter
disconnected alarm or deactivates it. The selected
– High (default)
alarm priority affects how the alarm event is
– (off) reported optically and acoustically (see page 120
and page 122.
alarm.
– : no optical or acoustic alarm signals are
triggered.
Archive settings
– Off (default) This archive setting cannot be configured for this
– Store
general archive status for mean arterial blood
– Record pressure parameter. For details on how to change
the archive settings of a parameter, refer to
– Str/Rec
page 138.
Alarms
Configuring the arrhythmia alarm setup
The following diagram shows the Limits > ARR A Limits tab
page for configuring the alarm settings for
B Arrhythmia category column for identifying the
arrhythmia parameters. This page consists of a
ARR label
table with setup rows for each arrhythmia
parameter. Each setup row consists of several C Alarm priority column for selecting an alarm pri-
fields for configuring the individual ARR alarm ority
settings. When you select a field on this page, an
D Rate column for setting the rate
orange frame highlights the selected row.
E Count column for setting the count
Alarms
F Archive column
A
G ARR tab
B C D E F
H Arrhythmia mode buttons
G
I Relearn button
Configuring ARR alarm settings
In addition to ARR alarm settings, the Limits >

ARR page also allows you to select the arrhythmia
mode (see page 236) and initiate the relearn
process of ECG leads (see page 249). In the
following steps, the letters in parentheses refer to
the diagram of the Limits > ARR page. Alarm
ranges and defaults are listed starting on page 171.
H H H
I
019
Alarms
To change ARR alarm settings

1 Select the Alarms... button on the main menu 7 Use one of the following settings in the Archive
bar. column (F) to determine what happens in
– Off – no event is stored and no recording is
3 Select the ARR tab along the right side.
generated.
4 Select the corresponding setup button in the
Alarm priority column (C) to select the alarm
(see page 151).
priority. A crossed-out triangle appears when
alarm monitoring is deactivated. The priority for – Record – generates a timed recording.
asystole and ventricular fibrillation events
– Str/Rec – generates a timed recording and
cannot be changed. The alarm priority ’high’ is
stores the event.
always assigned to these categories.
8 Select the desired arrhythmia mode using the
Arrhythmia mode buttons (H).
Rate column (D) to set the rate.
Count column (E) to set the count.
Alarm setup for ST
The following diagram shows the Limits > ST page

where you configure alarm settings for ST
parameters. This page consists of a table with
setup rows for each ST parameter. Each setup row
has several fields for configuring the individual ST
alarm settings. When you select a field on the page,
an orange frame highlights the selected row to
mark your place on the setup page.
Alarms
Alarms A Limits tab

A B Parameter label column
B C D E F G C Alarm on/off column

D Lower limits column
H E Actual parameter values
F Upper limits column
G Archive column
H ST tab
I Auto set all button
J Event duration [s] button
K ST relearn button
I
J
K
020
Alarms
Configuring ST alarm settings
Some of the ST alarm settings described are also 6 Select the corresponding setup button in the
available on the ST alarms page (see page 246). Upper column (F) to adjust the upper alarm
In the following steps, the letters in parentheses limits.
refer to the diagram of the Limits > ST page (see
7 Use one of the following settings in the Archive
page 146). Alarm ranges and defaults are listed
column (G) to determine what happens in
starting on page 160.
To change ST alarm settings
generated.
bar.
(see page 151).
3 Select the ST tab (H) on the right side of the
– Str/Rec – generates a timed recording and
page.
stores the event.
4 Select the setup button in the Alarm column (C)
8 Use the Auto set all (I) button to adjust the
to activate or deactivate alarm monitoring. A
alarm limits for all ST parameters (see
crossed-out triangle appears in the parameter
page 150).
field when alarm monitoring is deactivated.
9 Use the Event duration [s] button (J) to select
a time an upper ST alarm limit has to be in
Lower column (D) to adjust the lower alarm
violation before an alarm is triggered (see
limits.
page 119).
Alarms
Auto setting all alarm limits
The auto set function allows you to adjust alarm You can either auto set:
limits quickly based on preset percentages listed in
– individual parameters (see page 150)
the following table.
– all parameters (see page 150)
– all ST parameters (see page 150)
Parameter Upper limit Lower limit

Ta, Tb, T1a, T1b, ≤107% of current value ≤93% of current value
Tblood
∆T, ∆T1, PVC/min, Not affected Not affected
inCO2
SpO2 Adult/pediatric: 100% saturation 95% of current value
Neonate: 98% saturation
ST Current value + 2.0 mm Current value – 2.0 mm
FiO2 (via Scio) 100% 21%
etCO2 (via Scio) 100% 18%
inHal 5% (+/-0.1) above parameter value 5% (+/-0.1) below parameter value
etHal
inIso
etIso
inEnf
etEnf
inSev
etSev
inDes
etDes
etCO2 125% of current value 80% of current value
RRc and all others Alarm limit that is closest to but not Alarm limit that is closest to but not
more than 25% above the current value more than 20% below the current value
of the parameter. of the parameter.
NOTE
If the Auto set function forces the alarm limits of a parameter outside the allowable limit range of the
monitor, the alarm limits remain unchanged.
Alarms
To auto set an individual parameter To auto set all parameters

1 Select the parameter field of the desired  Select the symbol next to the Alarms...
parameter. button on the main menu bar > Auto set all.
2 Select the Auto set button located in the upper- or
right corner of each parameter setup page.
or bar
1 Select Sensor parameters... on the main menu 2 Select the Limits tab.
bar.
3 Select the Auto set button which is located in
2 Select the tab of the desired parameter. the lower right corner below the parameter
setup table.
3 Select the Auto set button located in the upper
right corner of each parameter setup page.
To auto set all ST parameters
bar
2 Select the Limits tab.
3 Select the ST side tab to access the ST page.
4 Select the Auto set button which is located
below the ST table.
Alarm history and stored events
The alarm history is an electronic record of alarms – You activate Cardiac bypass mode (see
and events. The alarm history records an entry page 127).
under the following circumstances:
– You activate Standby mode (see page 95).
– An alarm occurs for a parameter whose archive
– You select a different patient category (see
function is set to Store or Str/Rec. These alarm
page 102).
events are marked with the symbol and
can be viewed in greater detail (see page 152). – You transfer a patient.
– Whenever an arrhythmia event occurs (even – You audio pause an alarm.
when the alarm function is deactivated). Only
– Whenever a maintenance restart event occurs.
the archive function has to be set to Store or
Str/Rec. The alarm history stores up to 150 events. When
the storage capacity of 150 events is reached, new
– You select the Mark event button from the main
events replace the oldest events.
menu bar. These alarm events are also marked
with the symbol and can be viewed in If a higher priority alarm occurs less than 5 seconds
greater detail (see page 152). from a previous alarm, the higher priority alarm
event is stored while the previous one is deleted.
– You pause alarms using the All alarms
paused/All alarms off button (see page 132).
Alarms
Alarm history after shutdown A Alarm history tab
The alarm history is maintained until the patient is B Identifies an event

discharged. If the Cockpit is turned off and turned C Date of the alarm
back on, the patient’s alarm history is not affected.
However, the alarm history will not record the time D Time the alarm was stored
of the shut down. E Duration of the alarm
F Alarm priority
Viewing the alarm history G Alarm message
The following diagram shows an alarm history. H Print button for printing an alarm history report
When you select any field on the table, a frame I Button for filtering the alarm history according to
highlights the selected row. For information on what time, priority, or message
conditions prompt an entry to be stored in the alarm
history, see page 150. J Button for filtering the alarm history according to
category
To access the alarm history

To filter the alarm history
bar. The alarm history can be filtered according to
different categories as follows:
2 Select the Alarm history tab.
Alarms bar.
A 2 Select the Alarm history tab.
B C D E F G
J I
H
021
3 Use the left button (J) to restrict the alarm
history to one of the following alarm conditions:
– All
– Arrhythmia
– High-priority
– Medium-priority
– Low-priority
4 Use the second left button (I) to restrict the
alarm history to one of the following settings:
– Time
J I – Priority
H – Message
021
Alarms
Viewing a snapshot of a single event
20 seconds of waveform and parameter data are The following diagram shows the event snapshot
stored automatically in the alarm history under the screen.
following circumstances:
Alarms
– A parameter whose recording archive feature is
set to Store or Str/Rec (see page 137) violates
set alarm limits. A
– You select the Mark event button on the main
menu bar.
In both instances, events with stored waveform and
parameter data are identified on the alarm history
by the following symbol . Such an event
consists of a snapshot of all connected parameter
values and waveforms. Of the 20-second event
capture, 10 seconds were recorded before and H B
10 seconds were recorded after the event
occurred.
To view a snapshot of a stored event

1 Select Alarms... on the main menu bar.
2 Select the Alarm history tab.
3 Select the row of the event marked with the
symbol that you wish to view.
NOTE G F F E D C
022
To return to the alarm history, select the Select
Event button. A Event header showing the date, time, duration,
priority, and alarm message
B Parameter values area
C Print button for printing the alarm event report
D Zoom out button
E Zoom in button
F Navigation arrows for scrolling through events
G Select Event button
H Waveform area
Alarms
Viewing current alarms
The Current alarms page displays all alarms that To view current alarms
occur during a patient’s monitoring session. The
page is cleared when the patient is discharged.
Each alarm displays the alarm priority, the duration, 2 Select the Current alarms tab.
and the corresponding message.
Configuring alarm settings temporarily
The following table contains several commonly To configure alarm settings temporarily
used alarm settings that can be configured for a
patient temporarily. These features revert to the
password-protected configuration settings (see 2 Select the Settings tab.
chapter System configuration starting on page 455)
when the patient is discharged.
Alarm volume Off, 5%,10 to 100% (in Determines the volume of the alarm tone. You
increments of 10%); default is can never turn the alarm volume lower than the
50% selected setting for Minimum alarm volume.
NOTE: The 5% setting is only NOTES:
available when the Minimum
Make sure the alarm volume is set so it can be
alarm volume setting is set to
heard in the monitoring environment.
5%.
The setting Off for the alarm volume is only
available under the following circumstances:
– When the Cockpit is set to OR alarms or
assigned to an ICS.
– When the Minimum alarm volume feature
is set to Off.
Pulse tone volume – Off Determines the volume of the pulse tone.
– 5, 10 (default) to 100% (in
increments of 10%)
Attention tone – Off Determines the volume of the attention tone or
volume deactivates the attention tone.
– 5, 10 (default) to 100% (in
increments of 10%)
Alarms

Show alarm limits – On (default) Determines whether alarm limits appear in the
parameter fields.
– Off
Cardiac bypass – On Activates/deactivates cardiac bypass mode.
Alarm functions are affected when cardiac
– Off (default)
bypass mode is activated (see page 127).
This mode is not available when the French
NFC mode is enabled (see page 487).
To configure remote patient monitor alarms, see

page 156.
Configuring the SpO2 alarm priority
The following two SpO2 alarm messages can be For information on how to configure the alarm
configured for the alarm priority that is most priority for the setting SpO2 sensor off, see
appropriate for your care environment. Depending page 471.
on which MCable is used, the message reporting
the underlying alarm condition differs:
– Masimo rainbow SET or Masimo SET:
SpO2 sensor off
– Nellcor: SpO2 check sensor
Both alarm settings are saved as part of the patient
profile.
Configuring the alarm priority for a

Masimo sensor off message
The SpO2 sensor off message appears when the

MCable detects that the sensor is no longer
attached to the patient. The alarm priority for this
message can be configured separately for each
patient category. It is available for the following
SpO2 cables:
– Masimo rainbow SET MCable
– Masimo SET MCable
Alarms
On the Cockpit and the M540, the following SpO2 Configuring the alarm priority for a
parameters can generate this alarm message Nellcor check sensor message
according to the selected alarm priority:
This alarm setting is for configuring the alarm
Masimo rainbow SET Masimo SET MCable priority and the alarm archiving behavior of certain
MCable Nellcor SpO2 parameters. The message SpO2
SpO2 SpO2 check sensor appears when the Nellcor OxiMax
PLS PLS MCable detects that the sensor is no longer
attached to the patient or other technical issues that
SpHb or SpHbv interfere with the functional integrity of the sensor.
SpCO This feature can be configured separately for each
patient category. For information on how to
PVI
configure the SpO2 check sensor setting, see
SpMet page 456.
The following SpO2 parameters generate an alarm
message according to the selected alarm priority:
– SpO2
– PLS
Remote alarm control
When the Cockpit is connected to the Infinity – If the alarm volume was deactivated, the
network, it communicates with other Infinity Cockpit Alarm volume setting (see page 471)
monitors (including other monitoring Cockpits) that changes to 100% when the Cockpit is offline
support remote viewing functions. Furthermore, the from the Infinity network and defaults to 50%
patient of any monitor that is connected to the when the Cockpit no longer communicates with
network can be admitted at the ICS for central the ICS. Once communication is restored, the
monitoring. alarm volume returns to the previous setting.
If you are viewing another monitor in remote view,
you can audio pause alarms at the remote bed. You
can also allow remote devices to audio pause
alarms at the Cockpit provided the remote control
feature is activated (see page 489).
A Cockpit that is connected to the Infinity network
automatically relays alarms to the ICS. A network
interruption causes the following to happen:
– A message indicating that there is a network
interruption appears in the message field of the
Cockpit.
Alarms
Alarm groups Configuring remote patient monitor

alarms
The Cockpit can receive alarm messages from
other monitors that are connected to the Infinity The following table contains settings that enable
network. However, these monitors must be in the remote patient monitor alarms that are on the IACS
same monitoring unit and in the same alarm group network to be viewed at the Cockpit. To display
as the Cockpit. To configure alarm settings and remote patient alarms requires the following
groups for remote monitors, refer to Configuring conditions:
alarm settings temporarily, page 153.
– the remote monitor resides in the same
The alarm group feature allows you to configure monitoring unit as the Cockpit
several monitors as members of a group. All alarms
that occur at any of the monitors within the group – the remote monitor resides in the same group
are broadcast to all the members in the alarm as the Cockpit.
group, typically in less than two seconds.
If multiple monitors in the alarm group are in alarm To configure remote patient monitor alarms:
simultaneously, each alarm message rotates in the 1 Select Alarms... on the main menu bar.
header bar of the Cockpit and in the alarm message
field of each monitor. 2 Select the Settings tab.
The display of remote alarm messages requires

configuration (see page 156); whereas, the color
scheme corresponds to the priority of the alarm
from the Cockpit. For information about alarm
priorities, see page 117.
The remote alarm messages display in the
following format:
<bed label> -- <alarm message> up to 40
characters
Alarms

Alarm group Keypad for configuring an alarm Allows you to configure several monitors as
group. members of a group. All alarms that occur at
any of the monitors within the group are
broadcast to all other members in the alarm
group.
Remote alarm – On Determines whether remote alarms on the
attention tones network that are configured for the alarm group
– Med. and high only
annunciate with an attention tone.
– Off (default)
Show remote – All alarms off (default) Determines which remote alarm messages
alarms display based on the configured alarm priority.
– Med. and high only
– High only
Infinity MCable – Nurse call
You can attach a Nurse Call MCable to the PS250

or the P2500 (see page 27) and connect it to an
external nurse call. Whenever the M540, the
Cockpit or a connected external device produces a
medium or high-priority alarm, a nurse call is
activated to provide remote notification of the alarm
condition.
Alarms
External device disconnection alarm
If the external device alarm feature is activated at – An alarm tone of low priority sounds.
the Cockpit (see page 474) and an external device
– The message External device disconnected
is disconnected from the Cockpit, the following
appears.
happens at the ICS and at the Cockpit:
The Code function
You can configure a set of monitoring functions that In addition to activating the pre-configured features,
can be activated during emergency care by a timer with a red background appears in the
selecting the Code button on the main menu bar. header bar with the following two buttons:
Depending on which of these settings are activated
– Stop for stopping the timer. The label of the
(see page 477), any of the following happens when
button changes to Start.
you select the Code button:
– Reset button for resetting the timer to zero.
– A continuous recording starts
The Code button does not function unless the
– NIBP measurements start in continuous mode
M540 is docked.
– The alarm volume of the alarm condition with
the highest priority is automatically reduced to NOTE
the minimum setting. When the All alarms off setting is set to Off (see
page 474), the message Audio alarms off and
NOTE the symbol appear in the Cockpit header bar
When the Audio off setting is set to Off (see when you invoke the Code function.
page 474), the message Audio off and the
symbol appear in the Cockpit header bar
To activate the Code function
when you invoke the Code function.
 Press the Code button on the main menu bar.
– The pre-configured All alarms off setting
determines if the alarm annunciation is
deactivated and the All alarms off message To deactivate the Code function
appears in the header bar when you press the  Press the Code button on the main menu bar a
Code button (see page 478). second time. All functions are deactivated.
NOTE CAUTION
The All alarms off button works independently of Always deactivate the Code function before
the pre-configured Code setting. You can powering off the Cockpit. If the Code function is
therefore activate or deactivate the All alarms off active and the Audio off setting related to Code
button even after pressing the Code key. is set to On, there will be no audio alarms at the
ICS after the Cockpit is powered back on.
Alarms
The Timer function
The Timer function appears similar to the Code

function but serves as a stopwatch only. No other
functions are tied to the Timer button.
When the Timer function is activated, a timer

appears in the header bar with the following two
buttons:
– Stop for stopping the timer. The label of the
button changes to Start.
– Reset button for resetting the timer to zero.
To activate the Timer function

 Press the Timer button on the main menu bar.
 Press the Start button to start the Timer.
To deactivate the Timer function

 Press the Timer button on the main menu bar a
second time. The timer box is removed.
NOTE
Pressing Code while the Timer is active replaces
the Timer with Code. However, the Timer cannot
be activated while Code is active.
Alarms
Alarm ranges and defaults
Parameter Alarm Alarm limit range Upper limit Lower limit Archive
default defaults defaults default
status setting
HR adult On Upper: 25 to 300 bpm 120 (adult) 45 (adult) Str/Rec
(adult/
Increment: Lower: 20 to 295 bpm 150 (pediatric) 50 (pediatric)
pediatric)
5 bpm
170 (neonate) 80 (neonate)
Off
(neonate)
STVM/STCVM Upper: 0.1 to 45.0 mm 1.0 mm (0.1 mV) 0.0 mm Off
(0 mV)
Increment: 0.01 to 4.50 mV
0.1 mm or
Lower: 0.0 to 44.9 mm
0.01 mV
0.00 to 4.49 mV
ST Upper: –14.9 to +15.0 mm 1.0 mm –1.0 mm Off
Increment: –1.49 to +1.50 mV (0.1 mV) (–0.1 mV)
0.1 mm or
Lower: –15.0 to +14.9 mm
0.01 mV
–1.50 to +1.49 mV
RRi (adult) Upper: 6 to 100 30 5 Off
Increment: 1 Lower: 5 to 99 (adult)
RRi (pediatric, Upper: 6 to 145 80 20 Off
neonate)
Lower: 5 to 144
Increment: 1
PLS* Upper: 35 to 235 120 (adult) 45 (adult) Off
Increment of 5 Lower: 30 to 230 150 (pediatric) 50 (pediatric)
180 (neonate) 80 (neonate)
Alarms
status setting
SpO2 On Upper: 21 to 100% 100% (adult, 85% Off
pediatric)
Increment: 1 Lower: 20 to 99% NOTE:
95% (neonate) Changing
this set-
ting auto-
matically
changes
the
Desat.
archive
setting to
the same
setting.
Desat. Lower: 19 to (SpO2 lower N/A 75% Off
limit - 1)% (within the
maximum measurement
Increment: 1 NOTE:
(Adult/ range of 19 to 98%)
Changing
pediatric)
If the SpO2 low alarm limit this set-
On is lowered to or below the ting auto-
(neonate) SpO2 desat alarm limit, matically
then the SpO2 desat changes
alarm automatically the
adjusts to 1% less than the SpO2
SpO2 low alarm limit. The archive
SpO2 desat alarm limit setting to
cannot be raised to or the same
above the SpO2 low alarm setting.
limit
SpHb / SpHbv Upper: 1.2 to 25.0 g/dL 17.0 g/dL 7.0 g/dL Off
(0.7 to 15.5 mmol/L) (10.6 mmol/L) (4.3 mmol/L)
Increment
0.2 g/dL Lower: 1.0 to 24.8 g/dL
(0.1 mmol/L) (0.6 to 15.4 mmol/L)
PVI Upper: 1 to 100 100 0 Off
Increment: 1 Lower: 0 to 99
SpCO Upper: 1 to 99 10 0 Off
Increment: 1 Lower: 0 to 98
SpMet Upper: 0.1 to 99.9 3.0 0 Off
Increment: 0.1 Lower: 0.0 to 99.8
Alarms
status setting
NIBP S adult On Upper: 11 to 250 mmHg 160 mmHg 90 mmHg Off
Increment: 1.5 to 33.3 kPa 21.3 kPa 12.0 kPa
1 mmHg or
Lower: 10 to 249 mmHg
0.1 kPa
1.3 to 33.2 kPa
NIBP S pediatric On Upper: 11 to 170 mmHg 120 mmHg 50 mmHg Off
Increment: 1.5 to 22.7 kPa 16 kPa 6.7 kPa
1 mmHg or
0.1 kPa
1.3 to 22.6 kPa
NIBP S neonate On Upper: 11 to 130 mmHg 80 mmHg 50 mmHg Off
1 mmHg or
0.1 kPa
1.3 to 17.2 kPa
NIBP D adult On Upper: 11 to 250 mmHg 110 mmHg 50 mmHg Off
1 mmHg or
0.1 kPa
1.3 to 33.2 kPa
NIBP D pediatric On Upper: 11 to 170 mmHg 80 mmHg 35 mmHg Off
1 mmHg or
0.1 kPa
1.3 to 22.6 kPa
NIBP D neonate On Upper: 11 to 130 mmHg 60 mmHg 25 mmHg Off
Increment: 1.4 to 17.3 kPa 8 kPa 3.3 kPa
1 mmHg or
0.1 kPa
1.3 to 17.2 kPa
NIBP M adult On Upper: 11 to 250 mmHg 125 mmHg 60 mmHg Off
1 mmHg or
0.1 kPa
1.3 to 33.2 kPa
Alarms
status setting
NIBP M pediatric On Upper: 11 to 170 mmHg 85 mmHg 40 mmHg Off
1 mmHg or
0.1 kPa
1.3 to 22.6 kPa
NIBP M neonate On Upper: 11 to 130 mmHg 70 mmHg 40 mmHg Off
1 mmHg or
0.1 kPa
1.3 to 17.2 kPa
∆Tx Upper: 0.1 to 39.0 °C 2.0 °C 0.0 °C Off
Increment: 0.2 to 70.2 °F 3.6 °F 0.0 °F
0.1 °C or
Lower: 0.0 to 38.9 °C
0.1 ± 0.2 °F
0.0 to 70.0 °F
Txa/b Upper: 0.1 to 50.0 °C 39.0 °C 34.0 °C Off

Increment: 32.2 to 122.0 °F 102.2 °F 93.2 °F
0.1 °C
Lower: 0.0 to 49.9 °C
or 0.1 °F
32.0 to 121.8 °F
IP S adult Upper: –49 to +400 mmHg – 160 mmHg – 90 mmHg Off
(21.3 kPa) (12.0 kPa)
Increment: 1 –6.5 to +53.3 kPa
for GP1 S to for GP1 S
mmHg or
(GP1 S to Lower: –50 to +399 mmHg GP8 S, to GP8 S,
0.1 kPa
GP8 S, systolic systolic
–6.6 to +53.2 kPa
LV S, arterial arterial
RV S) pressure, LV pressure
S
On – 75 mmHg
– 35 mmHg (10.0 kPa)
(systolic
(4.7 kPa) for for LV S
arterial
PA S, RV S
pressure, – 10 mmHg
PA S) (1.3 kPa)
for PA S,
RV S
Alarms
status setting
IP S pediatric/ Upper: –49 to +400 mmHg – 120 mmHg – 75 mmHg Off
neonate (16.0 kPa) (10.0 kPa)
–6.5 to +53.3 kPa
for GP1 S to for GP1 S
Increment: 1
(GP1 S to Lower: –50 to +399 mmHg GP8 S, to GP8 S,
mmHg or
GP8 S, systolic systolic
0.1 kPa –6.6 to +53.2 kPa
LV S, arterial arterial
RV S) pressure, LV pressure
S
On – 50 mmHg
– 35 mmHg (6.7 kPa)
(systolic
(4.7 kPa) for for LV S
arterial
PA S, RV S
PA S) (1.3 kPa)
for PA S,
RV S
IP D adult Upper: –49 to +400 mmHg – 110 mmHg – 50 mmHg Off
(14.7 kPa) (6.7 kPa)
for GP1 D to for GP1 D
mmHg or
(GP1 D to Lower: –50 to +399 mmHg GP8 D, to GP8 D,
0.1 kPa
GP8 D, diastolic diastolic
–6.6 to +53.2 kPa
LV D, arterial arterial
RV D) pressure pressure
On – 25 mmHg – 2 mmHg
(3.3 kPa) for (0.3 kPa)
(diastolic
LV D for PA D,
arterial
LV D,
RV D
PA D) (1.7 kPa) for
PA D, RV D
IP D pediatric Upper: –49 to +400 mmHg – 80 mmHg – 35 mmHg Off
(10.7 kPa) (4.7 kPa)
mmHg or
0.1 kPa
–6.6 to +53.2 kPa
(3.3 kPa) for (0.3 kPa)
(diastolic
LV D for PA D,
arterial
LV D,
RV D
PA D) (1.7 kPa) for
PA D, RV
Alarms
status setting
IP D neonate Upper: –49 to +400 mmHg – 80 mmHg – 30 mmHg Off
(10.7 kPa) (4.0 kPa)
mmHg or
0.1 kPa
–6.6 to +53.2 kPa
(3.3 kPa) for (0.3 kPa)
(diastolic
LV D for PA D,
arterial
LV D,
RV D
PA D) (1.7 kPa) for
PA D, RV D
IP M adult On Upper: –49 to +400 mmHg – 125 mmHg – 60 mmHg Off
(16.7 kPa) (8.0 kPa)
for GP1 M to for GP1 M
mmHg or
Lower: –50 to +399 mmHg GP8 M, to GP8 M,
0.1 kPa
mean arterial mean
–6.6 to +53.2 kPa
pressure arterial
pressure
– 80 mmHg
(10.7 kPa) – 40 mmHg
for LV M (5.3 kPa)
for LV M
– 20 mmHg
(2.7 kPa) for – 7 mmHg
LA, ICP, (0.9 kPa)
CVP, ABD, for PA M,
BDP, ESO, RV M
FEMV, UVP,
– 2 mmHg
GPM
(0.3 kPa)
– 17 mmHg for RA,
(2.3 kPa) for ICP, ABD,
PA M, RV M BDP,
ESO,
– 12 mmHg
FEMV,
(1.6 kPa) for
UVP
RA
– 0 mmHg
(0.0 kPa)
for LA,
CVP, GPM
Alarms
status setting
IP M pediatric On Upper: –49 to +400 mmHg – 85 mmHg – 50 mmHg Off
(11.3 kPa) for (6.7 kPa)
GP1 M to for GP1 M
mmHg or
0.1 kPa
mean arterial mean
–6.6 to +53.2 kPa
pressure, LV arterial
M pressure
– 20 mmHg – 40 mmHg
(2.7 kPa) for (5.3 kPa)
LA, ICP, for LV M
CVP, ABD,
– 7 mmHg
BDP, ESO,
(0.9 kPa)
FEMV, UVP,
for PA,
GPM
RV M
– 17 mmHg
– 2 mmHg
(2.3 kPa) for
(0.3 kPa)
PA, RV M
for RA,
– 12 mmHg ICP, ABD,
(1.6 kPa) for BDP,
RA ESO,
FEMV,
UVP
– 0 mmHg
(0.0 kPa)
for LA,
CVP, GPM
Alarms
status setting
IP M neonate On Upper: –49 to +400 mmHg – 80 mmHg – 40 mmHg Off
(10.7 kPa) (5.3 kPa)
for GP1 M to for GP1 M
mmHg or
0.1 kPa
mean arterial mean
–6.6 to +53.2 kPa
pressure, LV arterial
M pressure,
LV M
– 20 mmHg
(2.7 kPa) for – 7 mmHg
LA, ICP, (0.9 kPa)
CVP, ABD, for PA,
BDP, ESO, RV M
FEMV, UVP,
– 2 mmHg
GPM
(0.3 kPa)
– 17 mmHg for RA,
(2.3 kPa) for ICP, ABD,
PA, RV M BDP,
ESO,
– 12 mmHg
FEMV,
(1.6 kPa) for
UVP
RA
– 0 mmHg
(0.0 kPa)
for LA,
CVP, GPM
CPP, BPP, APP On Upper: –24 to +300 mmHg 100 mmHg 70 mmHg Off
(13.3 kPa) (9.3 kPa)
Increment: –3.2 to +40.0 kPa
1 mmHg
Lower: –25 to +299 mmHg
or 0.1 kPa
–3.3 to +39.9 kPa
Tblood Upper: 25.1 to 43.0 °C 39.0 °C 34.0 °C Off
(102.2 °F) (93.2 °F)
Increment of 77.1 to 109.4 °F
0.1 °C
Lower: 25.0 to 42.9 °C
or 0.1 °F
77.0 to 109.2 °F
FiO2 On Upper: 19 to 100% 100% 20% Store
Increment of 1% Lower: 18 to 99%
Alarms
status setting
etO2 Upper: 11 to 100% 100% 10% Off
Increment of 1% Lower: 10 to 99%
inN2O On Fixed at 82% 82% Not applicable Store

(fixed) (fixed)
RRc Upper: 6 to 150 /min 30 /min (adult) 5 /min (adult) Off

(when no CO2 device is
Increment of 60 /min 20 /min
connected)
1/min (pediatric/ (pediatric/
(Adult/
6 to 100 /min (when Scio neonate) neonate)
pediatric)
is connected)
On
(neonate)
Lower: 5 to 149 /min
(when no CO2 device is
connected)
5 to 99 /min (when Scio is
connected)
NOTE
Scio is not available in
neonate mode.
inCO2 On Upper: 2 to 10 mmHg 4 mmHg Not applicable Off
(0.5 kPa, 0.5%)
Increment of 0.3 to 1.3 kPa
1 mmHg,
0.3 to 1.3%
0.1 kPa, or 0.1%
Lower: not user-selectable
etCO2 On Upper: 6 to 99 mmHg 50 mmHg 30 mmHg Off
(6.7 kPa, 6.6%) (4.0 kPa,
Increment of 0.8 to 13.3 kPa
3.9%)
1 mmHg,
0.8 to 13.3%
0.1 kPa, or 0.1%
Lower: 5 to 99 mmHg
0.7 to 13.2 kPa
0.7 to 13.2%
PVC/min On Upper: 1 to 50 10 Not applicable Off
Increment of 1
Alarms
status setting
inHal On Upper: 0.1 to 8.5 kPa 1.6 kPa, 1.6% 0.0 kPa, 0.0% Store
(adult)
Increment of 0.1 to 8.5%
0.1 kPa or 0.1% 1.9 kPa, 1.9%
Lower: 0.0 to 8.4 kPa
(pediatric)
0.0 to 8.4%
etHal Upper: 0.1 to 8.5 kPa 8.5 kPa, 8.5% 0.0 kPa, 0.0% Off
0.1 kPa or 0.1%
0.0 to 8.4%
inIso On Upper: 0.1 to 8.5 kPa 2.4 kPa, 2.4% 0.0 kPa, 0.0% Store
(adult)
0.1 kPa or 0.1% 2.8 kPa, 2.8%
(pediatric)
0.0 to 8.4%
etIso Upper: 0.1 to 8.5 kPa 8.5 kPa, 8.5% 0.0 kPa, 0.0% Off
0.1 kPa or 0.1%
0.0 to 8.4%
inEnf On Upper: 0.1 to 10.0 kPa 3.6 kPa, 3.6% 0.0 kPa, 0.0% Store
(adult)
0.1 kPa or 0.1% 4.1 kPa, 4.1%
(pediatric)
0.0 to 9.9%
Alarms
status setting
etEnf Upper: 0.1 to 10.0 kPa 10 kPa, 10% 0.0 kPa, 0.0% Off
0.1 kPa or 0.1%
0.0 to 9.9%
inSev On Upper: 0.1 to 10.0 kPa 4.4 kPa, 4.4% 0.0 kPa, 0.0% Store
(adult)
0.1 kPa or 0.1% 5.1 kPa, 5.1%
(pediatric)
0.0 to 9.9%
etSev Upper: 0.1 to 10.0 kPa 10 kPa, 10% 0.0 kPa, 0.0% Off
0.1 kPa or 0.1%
0.0 to 9.9%
inDes On Upper: 0.1 to 20.0 kPa 12.5 kPa, 12.5% 0.0 kPa, 0.0% Store
(adult)
0.1 kPa or 0.1% 14.5 kPa, 14.5%
(pediatric)
0.0 to 19.9%
etDes Upper: 0.1 to 20.0 kPa 20 kPa, 20% 0.0 kPa, 0.0% Off
0.1 kPa or 0.1%
0.0 to 19.9%
Alarms
status setting
xMAC high On The user can not configure Not applicable Not applicable Store
the xMAC limits.
Arrhythmia ranges and defaults
Parameter Alarm priority Rate (default) Count (default) Alarm archive

default factory default
ASY High Not adjustable Not adjustable Str/Rec
VF High Not adjustable Not adjustable Str/Rec
VTACH High ≥100 to 200 (≥120) ≥5 to 15 (≥10) Str/Rec
Increments of 10 Increments of 1
ARTF Off Not adjustable Not adjustable Off
RUN Medium not adjustable (Rate = 3 to VT count – 1 (3 to Str/Rec
VTACH) 9) changes based on
VTACH
AIVR Medium Not adjustable = Not adjustable (≥3) Off
VTACH rate – 1 (≤119)
SVT Medium ≥120 to 200 (≥150) ≥3 to 10 (≥3) Str/Rec
CPT Low Not adjustable Not adjustable Str/Rec
BGM Low Not adjustable Not adjustable Str/Rec
TACH Off ≥100 to 200 (≥130) ≥5 to 15 (≥8) Off
BRADY Off ≤30 to 105 Not adjustable Off
(adult ≤ 50; pediatric (≥8)
≤60)
Increment of 5
Pause Off 1 to 3.5 (2.5) Not adjustable Off
Increments of 0.5
Trends/data dialogs
Trends/data dialogs
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Mini-trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Configuring the mini-trend display. . . . . . . . . . 188
Trending behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Supported parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Data review pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Special characters and symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Reports tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Graphical trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
The layout of the graphical trends pages . . . . . 177
Interacting with the graphical trends

pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Configuring the parameter content of the
graphical trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Navigating through the graphical trends. . . . . . 179
Using the cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Changing trend scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
General graphical trend display features . . . . . 180
Printing a graphical trend report . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Analysis tool page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

The layout of the Analysis tool page. . . . . . . . . 181
Interacting with the Analysis tool page . . . . 182

Configuring the parameter content . . . . . . . . . . 182
Using the cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Freezing the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Selecting an interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Printing an Analysis tool graphical trend
report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Tabular trend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

The layout of the tabular trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Interacting with the tabular trend . . . . . . . . . 186

Tabular trends in split screen mode . . . . . . . . . 186
Navigating through the tabular trend . . . . . . . . 186
Configuring the tabular trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Configuring the parameter content of the
tabular trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Printing a tabular trend report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Trends/data dialogs
Overview
The Trends/Data dialog provides numerous trend, – Ventilator – displays respiratory/ventilation

data review, and report pages. loops (see page 451). When a Perseus
A500 is connected, the name of this tab
changes to Anesthesia/ Ventilation to
To access Trends/Data dialog
display anesthesia/ventilation parameters.
1 Select the Trends/ Data... button on the main
– Hemo – accesses the hemodynamic
menu bar.
calculations and results data (see
2 Select one of the following tabs to access the page 189).
desired page:
– Labs – accesses the laboratory results (see
– Trends – accesses the graphical and page 189).
tabular trends and associated functions.
– Reports – accesses the tabs for configuring
– ECG – displays all connected ECG leads and requesting reports (see "Printing
(see page 230) and ST complexes (see reports" on page 512).
page 243).
Trending behavior
The Cockpit stores up to 96 hours of continuous new trend data collected during patient transport
and discrete trend values. Trend data are sampled are transferred to the Cockpit. Transferring the
every 30 seconds at the Cockpit where the trend trend data may take a brief moment during which
display is updated automatically. Trend updates at time trends are not accessible.
the Cockpit are reflected on connected network
devices every 60 seconds. NOTE
After docking/undocking the M540, one minute of
Trend data can be viewed in graphical or tabular
trend data collected during this transition period
format. Additional customization of the trend
may not be displayed at the ICS equipped with
display includes:
software version VG1. However, these trends are
– selecting which parameters are displayed visible at the Cockpit.
– selecting the time period of the trended
Refer to the instructions for use Infinity Acute Care
parameters. System – Infinity M540 for a detailed description of
The Cockpit maintains one trend database per the M540 trend functions.
patient. If the user docks an M540 that was
previously docked on another Cockpit, the trend
data from the previous Cockpit are transferred over Supported parameters
the network to the new Cockpit, provided a patient
ID was entered. A trended parameter can either be represented in
tabular or graphical form. The following sections
If the user undocks an M540, trending is
explain how the different parameter groups are
suspended on the Cockpit but the trend data
plotted on the graphical trends.
remain intact. When he user redocks the M540, any
Trends/data dialogs
Continuous parameters – Pulse oximetry parameters with Nellcor OxiMax

MCable: SpO2, PLS*
The following parameters are continuously trended
and appear as a single, continuous line, or as a NOTE
band on the graphical trends (see page 37 for
The color of the SpO2 graphical trend changes
definitions of abbreviations):
based on how the current value compares to the
– ECG parameters: HR, %PACED, ST, PVC/min upper trend scale and the lower alarm limit. The
color changes from green to yellow to orange to
– Ventilation parameters: RRi
red as the SpO2 trend value progresses further
– Anesthesia parameters: FiO2, etO2, inN2O, below the upper trend scale. The color changes to
etN2O inSev, N2O, inHal, etHal, inIso, etIso, red when the SpO2 trend value goes below the
inEnf, etEnf, inSev, etSev, inDes, etDes, xMAC lower alarm limit.
– IP parameters: for a complete list of invasive
pressure parameters, see page 312 Discrete parameters
– CO2 parameters: etCO2, inCO2, RRc The following discrete parameters are plotted
uniquely in graphical trends:
– C.O. parameter: Tblood
– NIBP consists of a line with three dots
– Temperature parameters: Ta, Tb, ∆T, T1a, T1b,
representing the diastolic, mean, and systolic
and ∆T1
values
– Continuous cardiac output parameters using
– PWP and C.O. appear as a’+’ symbol
the device connectivity option: SvO2, Tblood,
CCO, CCI, VO2, DO2, SaO2, SVR, SVRI, EDV, – Laboratory data are represented as a’+’ symbol
EDVI, ESV, ESVI, EF, SV, SVI, SVV and include time stamps
– Medibus X-compatible devices: Dräger Evita – NMT parameters: Single, PTC, TOF Ratio or
V500, Dräger Babylog VN500, Savina 300, TOF Cnt
Carina, Dräger Evita V300, Oxylog 3000+,
Infinity Perseus A500, Zeus IE, Primus family,
Apollo: for a list of trended parameters, see
page 416.
– Medibus-compatible devices: Dräger Evita 2D,
Dräger Evita 4, Dräger Evita XL, for a list of
trended parameters, see page 448.
– Maquet SERVO-i: for a list of trended
parameters, see page 436.
– BIS VISTA – BIS, EMG, SQI, BSR, PWR, SEF,
BCT
– NMT – T NMT
– Pulse oximetry parameters with Masimo SET:
SpO2, PLS*, PI
– Pulse oximetry parameters with Masimo
rainbow SET: SpO2, PLS*, PI, SpHb, SpHbv,
SpOC, PVI, SpCO, SpMet
Trends/data dialogs
Special characters and symbols
In addition to parameters, certain conditions, such

as disconnected leads, artifact, and so on, are also
identified on graphical and tabular trends.
Event Character/symbol
Asystole ASY
Ventricular fibrillation VF
Apnea Apnea
No parameter values are ***
available
Out of range value +++ (high) - - - (low)
Relearning LEARN
Interruption in power or No values
monitor is placed into
standby
Graphical trends
A graphical trend plots the behavior of parameters Window 1 (top) HR, SpO2, and RRi
over time. Graphical trends are continuously
updated, with the most recent data appearing on Window 2 NIBP
the right side of the screen. The Trends/Data Window 3 Ta, Tb
dialog consists of the following graphical trend
Window 4 CO2
pages:
– Graph page
To access the graphical trend pages
– Graph vitals page
– Ventilation / Anesthesia page menu bar.
All graphical trend pages look almost identical. In 2 Select the Trends tab (if not already selected).
the Graph and the Ventilation / Anesthesia pages
you can change the parameter content. 3 Select one of the following graphical trend
pages:
However, the Graph vitals is a pre-configured
– Graph tab to view general trends
display consisting of the following set of commonly
trended parameters which are displayed in four – Graph vitals tab to view a set of
graphical windows: pre-configured parameters
– Ventilation / Anesthesia tab to view
ventilation/anesthesia-related parameters
– BIS tab to view BIS trends
Trends/data dialogs
The layout of the graphical trends pages
The graphical trends pages share a common A Trends tab

layout. They contain up to four separate trend
B Graph tab – accesses graphical trends
windows. Each trend window can accommodate
the graphical trends of up to five selectable C Table tab – accesses the tabular trends
parameters. For each parameter, the trend panel
D Graph vitals tab – accesses the graphical
also displays trend scales, units of measure, and
trends of a set of pre-configured trend
the parameter label.
parameters.
The following diagram shows the layout of the
E Ventilation / Anesthesia tab – accesses the
graphical trends pages.
graphical trends of a set of pre-configured trend
parameters for critical care or anesthesia
Trends/Data
ventilation.
A
F BIS tab – accesses the graphical trends for the
B BIS VISTA device.
C
M D
G Trend setup symbol for selecting up to five
parameters
E
H Scroll keys
F
I Print button
M
J Grids on/off button
K Graphs button
G L View button for selecting how much time is
M displayed
M Graphical trend panels
Directly below the trend windows is a time scale
M that correlates to the selected interval.
H
L K J I
023
Trends/data dialogs
Interacting with the graphical trends pages
You can interact with the graphical trends pages by

manipulating several display functions.
Configuring the parameter content of the graphical trends
Except for the Graph vitals page whose parameter A Display filter button
assignments are fixed, you can customize the
B Button that closes the setup window
parameter content for the Graph and the
Ventilation / Anesthesia graphical trend pages. C Group of parameter buttons entitled Medibus.X
for selecting parameters originating from
The following diagram depicts the setup window for
Medibus X devices using the device
customizing the parameter content of each
connectivity option (for a list of supported
graphical trend page.
Medibus X devices, see page 415).
A
D OK button
J K L B
E Cancel button
F Clear all button – deselects any buttons that
are currently selected
G Group of parameter buttons entitled Other for
selecting miscellaneous parameters such as
SpO2, temperature, and so on.
H Group of parameter buttons entitled CO2 for
selecting CO2-related parameters.
I Group of parameter buttons entitled More
devices for selecting parameters such as NMT,
BIS, and CCO. These parameters originate
from external devices using the device
G C connectivity option.
J Group of parameter buttons entitled ECG for
selecting ECG-related parameters.
K Group of parameter buttons entitled Pressures
I for selecting pressure-related parameters.
H
L Group of parameter buttons entitled Vent
F E D devices for selecting ventilation parameters
489
originating from Medibus devices using the

device connectivity option.
Trends/data dialogs
To modify the parameter selection for a Navigating through the graphical trends
graphical trend page
In the following steps, the letters in parentheses The trend database for a patient may contain more
refer to the diagram of the trend setup page (see data than can be displayed on a single graphical
page 178). trend page.
1 Access the Graph or the Ventilation / Anes- One way to navigate through the entire trend data
thesia tab (see page 174). is by using the scroll bar. It is located at the bottom
of the graphical trends pages. The scroll bar
2 Select the trend setup symbol next to a consists of single and double arrows and a
graphical trend panel in the selected trend page moveable navigation bar. The double arrows scroll
to activate the Setup dialog. through larger portions than the single arrows. If
3 Use the display filter button (A) to toggle more trend data are stored than are currently
between the filtered or unfiltered display. When displayed, the navigation bar located between the
the button is on a light green background arrows can also be dragged to the desired location.
only the buttons of the connected parameters During navigation through the trend data, the time
are displayed. When the symbol appears on a line above the scroll bar changes to display the time
dark green background the buttons of all and date corresponding to the displayed graphs.
parameters, whether monitored or not, are
displayed.
Using the cursor
4 Select the parameters to display in the selected
trend window. Up to five parameters can be The cursor is a vertical line that pinpoints a specific
selected for each trend panel. time for all parameters. It extends through all
graphical trends. Whenever the cursor is displayed,
NOTE
popups appear next to each trend window. They
Buttons with ellipses such as More ventilation... display the parameter labels, units of measure and
or More gases... access additional parameters. the parameter values that correspond to the
position of the cursor. The top popup displays the
5 Select the OK button (D) to confirm the exact time and date the cursor pinpoints on the
selection and reconfigure the trend page. Select graphs.
the Cancel button (E) to exit the screen without
accepting the changes.
To display the cursor
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to configure the parameter
setup for other graphical trend panels. 1 Access the desired graphical trend page (see
page 176).
2 Touch a point on the page to display the cursor.
3 Use the rotary knob to move the cursor to a
specific point on the trend data.
To hide the cursor

The cursor and the associated popups disappear
automatically after a brief time of no user
interaction. To hide the cursor immediately:
 Press the rotary knob.
Trends/data dialogs
Changing trend scales Printing a graphical trend report
The trend scales appear to the left of each trended The content of a graphical trend report depends on
parameter. The scales can be changed at any time the user setup (see page 178). The duration of a
provided the trend cursor is not displayed. Hide the graphical trend report depends on the reports setup
cursor by pressing the rotary knob before changing (see page 484).
the trend scales.
To print a graphical trend report
To change the trend scales
1 Access the desired graphical trend pages (see
1 Access the desired graphical trend page (see page 176).
page 176).
2 Scroll to the desired trend data.
2 Touch the trend scale value to be changed. A
3 Select the Print button (G) – see page 181.
trend scale window appears.
3 Select the buttons in the popup to adjust the NOTE
upper and/or lower trend scale. If configured to appear on the main menu bar, a
Trend graph report button is also accessible on
4 Use the rotary knob to dial to the desired
the main menu bar. For more information, see
setting.
page 465.
5 Press the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
For details on requesting a graphical trend report
from other pages, see page 512.
General graphical trend display features
NOTE
The following sections list the various ways Alternatively, select the Print screen button on
available for customizing the content of the the main menu bar to request a printout of the
graphical trends pages. Refer to the diagram current trends display. The screenshot prints on
depicting the graphical trend (see page 177) for the the connected laser printer.
locations of the buttons used to perform the setup
functions.
To access the general display features

1 Access the desired graphical trend page (see
page 176).
2 Select the Grids on/off button (I) to display or
hide the background grid.
3 Select the Graphs button (J) and use the rotary
knob to select how many trend windows are
displayed. One to four trend windows can be
selected.
4 Use the View button (K) to select how much
time is displayed on the Graph page. The
available settings are: 1 h, 2 h, 4 h, 8 h, 12 h,
1 day, 2 day, 4 day.
Trends/data dialogs
Analysis tool page
The Analysis tool page is a comprehensive trend Procedures B

page for visualizing information necessary to
perform a recruitment maneuver. The page shows A
the effects on lung mechanics and hemodynamic
parameters on a single, integrated display. The J J J J J J J
Analysis tool page displays a duration of data
configured by the user on three graphical trend C
panels simultaneously. The page is divided into
three separate graphical trend panels with the I
following initial default setup which is configurable:
– The top graphical trend panel displays PIP,
PEEP, ART M
– The middle graphical trend panel displays VT,
C
Cdyn
I
– The bottom graphical trend panel displays
SpO2, etCO2
Each graphical trend panel displays up to three
parameters and associated values. Use the cursor
C
buttons to reference separate data points on the I
graphs. The corresponding values are displayed
next to the graphs. The current values for the
selected trend parameters are always displayed
across the top of the screen. H G F E D
490
A Analysis tool tab
To access the Analysis tool page
B Button that closes the page
1 Select the Procedures... button from the main
menu bar. C Trend setup symbols for selecting up to three
parameters per panel
2 Select the Analysis tool tab.
D Print button
E Freeze button for freezing the trend display
The layout of the Analysis tool page
F Duration button for setting duration interval for
The following diagram depicts the Analysis tool the trend display
page. G Cursor button for marking the end point
H Cursor button for marking the initial point
I Graphical trend parameter fields
J Current parameter values originating from the
device (parameter value, parameter label)
Trends/data dialogs
Interacting with the Analysis tool page
Configuring the parameter content
Although the Analysis tool page comes with an To configure the parameter content
initial default parameter setup, the page can be
customized for the current monitoring session.
menu bar.
The following diagram depicts the setup window for
customizing the parameter content of the Analysis
tool page. 3 Select the trend setup symbol next to a
A graphical trend panel.
B 4 Use the display filter button (A) to toggle

between the filtered or unfiltered display. When
the button is on a light green background
only the buttons of the connected parameters
are displayed. When the symbol appears on a
dark green background the buttons of all
displayed.
5 Select the parameters to display in the selected
trend window. Up to three parameters can be
selected for each trend panel.
NOTE
Buttons with ellipses such as More ventilation...
or More gases... access additional parameters.
6 Select the OK button (C) to confirm the

selection. Select the Cancel button (D) to exit
the screen without accepting the changes.
7 Select the Clear all button (E) to deselect any
buttons that are currently selected.
E D C 8 Repeat steps 3 to 6 to configure the parameter
489
setup for other graphical trend panels.
Trends/data dialogs
Using the cursors
The Analysis tool page has two cursors for In addition to values, symbols appear next to the
marking a portion of the graphical trends for closer values to indicate how the parameters inside the
analysis. The letters in parentheses refer to the cursors have trended:
diagram on page 181. Whenever the cursors are
– An equal (=) sign means that the values have
used, the screen freezes.
remained the same.
– An arrow pointing up indicates that the values
To set the cursors
are trending higher than the first cursor position.
– An arrow pointing down indicates that the
menu bar.
values are trending lower than the first cursor
2 Select the Analysis tool tab. position.
3 Select the left cursor button (H). NOTE
4 Use the rotary knob to move the orange cursor These symbols also appear in the current
to the desired place on the graphical trends to parameter values row of the Analysis tool page.
mark the initial point.
5 Press the rotary knob to set the initial point.
Freezing the display
6 Select the right cursor button (G).
7 Use the rotary knob to move the orange cursor Freeze the display to temporarily stop the Analysis
to the desired place on the graphical trends to tool page from updating.
mark the end point.
8 Press the rotary knob to set the end point. To freeze the display
The trend parameter fields to the right of the 1 Select the Procedures... button from the main
graphical trends show the following information for menu bar.
each parameter corresponding to the cursor 2 Select the Analysis tool tab.
positions:
3 Select the Freeze button (E).
– ∆value – time elapsed between the two cursors
– Initial value To unfreeze the display
– End value  Select the Freeze button (E) again.
The screen is updated with the most current data.
Trends/data dialogs
Selecting an interval Printing an Analysis tool graphical trend

report
The interval that applies to the three graphical
trends can be set. A graphical trend report for recruitment contains the
initial and end cursor values and the ∆value for
To set the interval each parameter. graphical trend report for
recruitment can be printed only after you set the
1 Select the Duration button (F). cursors. Otherwise the Print button remains grayed
2 Choose one of the following durations: Off, out and cannot be selected.
1 min, 5 min, 10 min (default), 15 min,
20 min, 30 min, 45 min, 1 h, 90 min, 2 h, 4 h. To print a recruitment graphical trend report
3 Select the OK button (C) to confirm the 1 Select the Procedures... button from the main
selection. Select the Cancel button (D) to exit menu bar.
the screen without accepting the changes.
3 Set both cursor buttons (see page 183).
4 Select the Print button.
Tabular trend
The tabular trend displays trend data in data

columns. Trend data are updated according to the
selected time scale. For example, if the current time
scale is 15 minutes, the trend display is updated
every 15 minutes. A time stamp above each
column marks the interval during which the data in
that column was collected. The displayed value is
the last acquired value during that interval. The
column on the right side is reserved for the most
recent data. Certain parameters and special
conditions, such as artifact, are represented in
unique ways (see page 174).
To access the tabular trend

menu bar.
2 Select the Trends tab (if not already selected).
3 Select the Table tab (if not already selected).
Trends/data dialogs
The layout of the tabular trend
The following diagram shows the tabular trend A Trends tab

page. Configuring the tabular trend page also
B Parameter label column
determines how the information appears on the
tabular trend report. C Parameter columns
D Latest trend data
Trends/Data
A E Graph tab (see page 181)
B C C C D E F Table tab
F G Graph vitals tab (see page 181)
G H Anesthesia workstation tab accesses the
H tabular trends of a set of pre-configured trend
I parameters for critical care or anesthesia
ventilation.
I BIS tab for accessing the tabular BIS trends
J
J Scroll keys and scroll bar
K Print button
L Setup button for selecting which parameters
are displayed and in what priority
M View button for selecting how much time is
displayed
M L K
024
Trends/data dialogs
Interacting with the tabular trend
Interaction with the trend screen involves Navigating through the tabular trend
manipulating several display functions.
The trend data base for a patient may contain more
data than can be displayed on the tabular trend.
Tabular trends in split screen mode Use the scroll bars to navigate through the entire
trend data. They are located at the bottom and
To display the tabular trends on the main screen, along the right side of the tabular trend.
activate the split screen mode for tabular trends in
The scroll bars consists of single and double arrows
the Auto view page.
and a movable navigation bar. The double arrows
When this split screen mode is activated, a tabular scroll through larger portions than the single
trend panel occupies the left side of the monitoring arrows. If more trend data are stored than is
area. The same setup and viewing functions as for currently displayed, use the rotary knob or drag the
the regular tabular trends can be performed. navigation bar located between the arrow keys to
the desired location.
To activate split screen mode
1 Select the System setup... button from the Configuring the tabular trend
main menu bar.
2 Select the Auto view tab. The following sections list the various methods for
customizing the content of the tabular trend. Refer
3 Select the button next to the Split screen menu to the diagram depicting the Table (see page 187)
selection. for the locations of the buttons used to perform the
4 Dial to the Trend table selection using the setup functions.
rotary knob.
The layout of the monitoring area changes and To change the intervals
displays the tabular trend panel. 1 Access the Trends > Table page (see
page 187).
2 Use the View button (L) to change the intervals
of the trend columns. The available settings are:
1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min (default), 30 min,
1 h.
NOTE
In the trend table, the time interval automatically
changes to one minute when a user selects a
discrete parameter in a tabular trend column.
Trends/data dialogs
Configuring the parameter content of the tabular trend
The following diagram depicts the setup page for K Group of parameter buttons entitled Other for
modifying the parameter content of the tabular selecting miscellaneous parameters such as
trend. SpO2, temperature, and so on
x L Group of parameter buttons entitled CO2 for

A C selecting for selecting CO2-related parameters
B D
M Group of parameter buttons entitled More
devices for selecting additional parameters
To modify the parameter selection for a tabular

trend
K 1 Access the Trends > Table page (see
J page 187).
L 2 Select the trend setup symbol at the

M
bottom of the tabular trend.
3 Use the display filter button (A) to toggle
between the filtered or unfiltered display. When
the button is on a light green background
only the buttons of the connected parameters
are displayed. When the symbol appears on a
dark green background, the buttons of all
I H G F E
491
A Group of parameter buttons entitled ECG for displayed.

selecting ECG-related parameters 4 Select the Auto-sort button to sort the
B Group of parameter buttons entitled Pressure parameter list according to the parameter
for selecting pressure-related parameters priority list in the Auto view setup page (see
page 75).
C Group of parameter buttons entitled Vent
devices for selecting ventilation parameters or
D Group of parameter buttons entitled Medibus.X Select the parameters to display in the tabular
for selecting MEDIBUS.X parameters available trend.
using the device connectivity option
NOTE
E OK button Buttons with ellipses such as More ventilation...
F Cancel button or More gases... access additional parameters.
G Clear all button – deselects any buttons that 5 Select the OK button (D) to confirm the
are currently selected selection and reconfigure the tabular trend.
H Select all button – selects all buttons at once Select the Cancel button (E) to exit the screen
without accepting the changes.
I Auto-sort button
J Window for sorting the parameters
automatically
Trends/data dialogs
Printing a tabular trend report NOTE

If configured to appear on the main menu bar, a
The content of a tabular trend report depends on Trend table report button is also accessible on
the system setup (see page 481). the main menu bar. For more information, see
page 465.
To print a tabular trend report
For details on requesting a tabular trend report from
1 Access the Trends > Table page (see other pages, see page 512.
page 176).
NOTE
2 Scroll to the desired trend data.
Alternatively, select the Print screen button on
3 Select the Print button (J). the main menu bar to request a printout of the
current trends display. The print screen prints on
the connected laser printer.
Mini-trends
When the mini-trend display is activated (see NOTE

page 459), a panel appears to the left of the
If the mini-trends are displayed, change the mini-
monitoring area of the main screen. The colors of
trend scale and the duration by touching the
the mini-trend correspond to the selected
displayed values. A popup appears allowing
parameter color. The mini-trend display is updated
these settings to be changed directly.
every five seconds.
NOTE To configure the mini-trend display

Although CCO, CCI, and Tblood are trended,
1 Select the System setup... button on the main
there are no CCO parameters included in the
menu bar to activate the System setup dialog.
mini-trend display.
2 Select the Auto view tab along the right side of
If split screen mode is activated (see page 460), the the System setup dialog.
mini display is not affected and shifts to the right
along with the real-time parameter display. 3 Select the button next to Mini trends.
4 Select one of the following settings: Off
(deactivates the mini-trend display), 10 min,
Configuring the mini-trend display 15 min, 20 min, 30 min (default), 45 min, 1 h,
90 min, 2 h, 4 h.
Use the System setup dialog to activate or
5 Select the button next to NIBP trend.
deactivate the mini-trend display, select the
mini-trend display duration, or select how the NIBP 6 Use the rotary knob to select either Graphic or
parameter appears in the mini-trends. Numeric. The selected setting determines how
the parameter is represented on the mini-trend
display.
Trends/data dialogs
Data review pages
In addition to trend data, the Trends/Data dialog NOTE

also provides several data review pages which are
The horizontal tab Ventilator changes to
outlined in the following table. Some of these
Anesthesia/ Ventilation when a anesthesia
review pages are also available under different
machine is connected.
tabs.
To access the data reviews

menu bar.
2 Select one of the following tabs to access the
desired data:
Trends, ECG, Ventilator or Anesthesia/
Ventilation, Hemo, Labs, Reports
Data review page Description Available functions

Show all page under the This page shows the – Print button for requesting a Rest ECG
ECG tab waveforms of all connected report
leads along with the scale
– Print button for requesting an ECG report
and the waveform label.
ST complex page under This page shows the ST – Print button for generating an ST report
the ECG tab complexes. The number of
– ST button
displayed ST complexes
depends on the connected – Reference on/off button for displaying
lead set. reference complexes
– ISO button
– Relearn button
Trends/data dialogs

Ventilator or – When an anesthesia Data review page displaying respiration,
Anesthesia/ Ventilation machine is connected, anesthesia or ventilation parameter
> Show all page the tab name is labeled information.
Anesthesia/
Ventilation. The page
displays current
measurement values for
ventilation and
anesthesia parameters
and the current
consumption.
– When a V500 ventilator
is connected, the tab
name is labeled
Ventilator. The page
displays current
ventilation values and
tabs for PV/FV loops.
Hemo > Show all page Displays the currently Data review page displaying the currently
monitored hemodynamic monitored hemodynamic parameter values.
parameters; includes
parameters available using
the device connectivity
option.
Hemo > Calc Results Displays calculation results. – Setup button for activating a pop-up
page The same page is also window for selecting which parameters are
available under the included or excluded from the display. The
Calculations tab (see parameters on the dark background are
page 197). selected for display; the ones on a light
background are not.
– Auto-sort button for sorting the parameter
list according to the parameter priority list in
the Auto view page (see page 75). If
parameters are added to the parameter
priority list, these parameters must be
ordered manually.
– Save button for saving the selected
calculation parameters.
Trends/data dialogs

Labs page Laboratory data are sent to Allows laboratory data to be selected and the
the Cockpit over the Infinity associated results to be viewed.
network. Whenever new
laboratory data are
available, the following
– An attention tone
sounds provided the
attention tone feature is
activated (see
page 457).
– The message New lab
data available appears
in the header bar. The
message disappears
when the laboratory
data is accessed.
Laboratory data are made
available to the Infinity
network and are accessible
from the Infinity gateway
and other devices that
support remote viewing
capabilities.
Reports tab
The Reports tab of the Trends/Data dialog

combines the various reports under one tab for
easy access.
The Reports dialog consists of the following pages:
– General reports
– OR report
– Setup
Use the General reports and OR report pages to
request reports (for detailed information on how to
request these reports, see "Printing reports" on
page 512. The Setup page is for configuring the
case summary report (see page 516 for details).
Calculations
Calculations
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Calculating the body surface area . . . . . . . . . . 194
Accessing the calculation functions . . . . . . 195

Performing calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Viewing the calculation results . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Viewing and saving calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Laboratory data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Capturing laboratory data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Calculation equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Hemodynamic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Oxygenation and ventilation parameters . . . . . 201
Drug calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Accessing the drug calculation functions . . . 203

Performing drug calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Customized drug list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Customizing the drug list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Drug calculator equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Calculations
Overview
With the physiological calculations option, the Calculating the body surface area
Cockpit performs physiological calculations using
data acquired by the M540 and other devices. The The Ht (height) and current Wt (weight) values are
Cockpit stores derived parameters and displays used to compute the BSA (body surface area) in
them. m2. For adult and pediatric patients, these values
When the Cockpit is connected to the network, you are pulled automatically from the Demographics
can obtain laboratory data through the Trends/ page which is populated during patient admission
Data... page. (see page 102). Because of changing body weight,
you must enter the weight manually for neonates.
The Cockpit can also be configured to calculate This is to make sure that the most current value is
drug-related parameters, including concentration, used to calculate the BSA.
rate, total dose, and total volume.
The BSA value is required for all indexed calcula-
In addition to the standard calculation features, two tions such as cardiac index (CI). The available units
additional features are available with the for height are cm and inches. The available units for
physiological calculations software option: weight are kg, g, ounces, lb.
– Hemodynamics – the Cockpit calculates The following Boyd or DuBois equations are used
hemodynamic parameters based on cardiac to compute the BSA.
output, invasive pressure, and other data (see
page 199). The Boyd equation is used for patients whose
weight is less than15 kg and whose height is less
– Hemo/Oxy/Vent Calculations – the Cockpit than 80 cm:
calculates oxygenation and ventilation
parameters (see page 201) in addition to Boyd equation
hemodynamic parameters.
BSA = Wt(0.7285 - 0.0188 x log10WT) x Ht0.3 x 0.0003207
DuBois equation
BSA = Wt0.425 x Ht0.725 x 0.007184
Note:
Wt = Weight, Ht = Height, BSA = Body surface area
Calculations
Accessing the calculation functions
The following diagram shows the Calculations A Calculations tab

page for calculating hemodynamic, oxygenation,
B Capture values button
and ventilation parameters.
C Capture labs button (see page 198)
Procedures
D Calculate results button (see page 197)
A
E Results tab
E F Labs parameter buttons

B C D
G Weight and Height buttons
H BSA value
I Oxygenation/Ventilation parameters
F J Hemodynamics parameter values
J I
Performing calculations
G Calculations are based on automatically captured
and manually entered values. In pediatric and adult
H mode, the current height and weight used to
compute the BSA value, are taken from the
Demographics page the first time you capture any
values. In neonatal mode you must enter the weight
manually. The height is taken from the
Demographics page, if available.
NOTE
027
Before performing a calculation, measure

pulmonary wedge pressure and cardiac output (if
desired) because some of the calculated values
cannot be determined without these parameter
values.
Calculations
To perform a calculation
In the following steps, the letters in parentheses 5 Edit or add any value by selecting the button
correspond to the diagram for the Calculations next to a parameter label to activate a popup
page (see page 195). with a keypad. The popup displays the valid
range of the selected parameter. Any modified
value is identified by the symbol #.
menu bar.
6 Select the Enter button on the keypad popup to
2 Select the Calculations tab (if not already
confirm your input. Any value that has been
selected).
altered manually is identified with the symbol #.
3 Select the Capture values button (B). The
7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for additional parameters.
Cockpit populates the available parameter
buttons with the current values. 8 Select the Calculate results button (D). The
calculated values are listed.
4 Select the Capture labs button (C). The
Cockpit populates the available laboratory
parameter buttons with current values.
Calculations
Viewing the calculation results
The following diagram shows the Results page for A Calculations tab
viewing hemodynamic, oxygenation, and
B Parameters column
ventilation parameters.
C Data column with reference values
Procedures
D Data columns with date and time stamp
A
E Calculation tab (see page 195)
B C D E
F Results tab
F
G Scroll bar
H Save button
I Setup button
Viewing and saving calculations

G
The Results page allows you to configure the
display and save calculations. You can save up to
50 calculations before they are overwritten on a
first-in first-out basis. The scroll bar (G) consists of
single and double arrow keys and a moveable bar.
The double arrows scroll through larger portions
than the single arrows. You can also drag the
navigation bar located between the arrow keys to
the desired location. The same page is also
available under the Hemo tab (see page 190).
I H
028
Calculations
To view calculations
In the following steps, the letters in parentheses (see page 75). If you add parameters to the
correspond to the diagram for the Results page parameter priority list, you must order these
(see page 197). parameters manually.
1 Select the Procedures... button from the main 5 Select the OK button in the pop-up window to
menu bar. confirm your selection. The list of parameters is
adjusted accordingly on the Results page.
2 Select the Calculations tab (if not already
selected).
To save calculations
3 Select the Results tab (if not already selected).
4 Select the Setup button (I) to activate a pop-up
menu bar.
window for selecting which parameters are
included and excluded from display. The 2 Select the Calculations tab if not selected.
parameters on the dark background are
3 Select the Results tab.
selected for display, the ones on light
background are not. 4 Select the column of calculations you wish to
save as reference values. An orange frame
The Auto-sort button in the dialog allows you to
highlights the selected column.
sort the parameter list according to the
parameter priority list in the Auto view page 5 Select the Save button (H) to save the selected
calculations.
Laboratory data
You can include laboratory data in calculations of To capture laboratory data

derived parameters.
1 Select the Procedures... button on the main
menu bar.
Capturing laboratory data 2 Select the Calculations > Calculations tabs.
3 Select the Capture labs button (C) on the
The blood-analysis device available on the network Calculations page (see page 195).
determines which laboratory parameters are
available. You can review the results on the NOTE
Results page (see page 197). From there you can The IACS does not send the following lab data to
also save the calculations and configure the the network: PaCO2, SvO2, SaO2, PaO2, PvO2,
display. pH, HCO3, Hct, and Hgb.
Calculations
Calculation equations
The following section describes which monitored NOTE

parameters and equations the Cockpit uses to
It is possible that some Hemodynamics and
calculate hemodynamic, oxygenation and
Oxygenation/Ventilation calculations results
ventilation calculations.
might be missing on the network. All calculations
NOTE will still be available on the patient monitor.
The IACS does not send the following lab data to
the network: PaCO2, SvO2, SaO2, PaO2, PvO2,
pHHCO3, HCO3, Hct, and Hgb.
Hemodynamic parameters
The Cockpit uses the following monitored parameter values for the hemodynamic calculations.
Label Description Available units

ART S Systolic arterial blood pressure mmHg, kPa
ART M Mean arterial blood pressure mmHg, kPa
ART D Diastolic arterial blood pressure mmHg, kPa
C.O. Cardiac output (intermittent) L/min
CCO Cardiac output (continuous) L/min
CVP Central venous blood pressure mmHg, kPa
HR Heart rate bpm
PA M Mean pulmonary arterial blood pressure mmHg, kPa
PWP Pulmonary wedge pressure mmHg, kPa
ICI Intermittent cardiac index L/min/m2
ICO Intermittent cardiac output L/min/m2
Calculations
The Cockpit uses the values in the preceding table plus the BSA value to calculate the following derived
hemodynamic values.
Label Description Equation Available units

CI, CCI Cardiac index (continu- C.O. / BSA, CCO / BSA L/min/m2
ous)
LHCPP Left heart coronary per- ART D – PWP mmHg
fusion pressure
LVSW Left ventricular stroke 0.0136 x (ART M – PWP) x SV gxm
work
LVSWI Left ventricular stroke 0.0136 x (ART M – PWP) x SVI g x m/m2
work index
PVR Pulmonary vascular re- 79.96 x ((PA M – PWP) / C.O.) dyn·s/cm5
sistance
PVRI Pulmonary vascular re- 79.96 x ((PA M – PWP) / CI) dyn·s/cm5/m2
sistance index
RPP Rate pressure product ART S x HR mmHg/min
RVSW Right ventricular stroke 0.0136 x (PA M – CVP) x SV gxm
work
RVSWI Right ventricular stroke 0.0136 x (PA M – CVP) x SVI g x m/m2
work index
SV Stroke volume C.O. x 1000 / HR mL
SVI Stroke volume index 1000 x (CI/ HR) mL/m2
SVR Systemic vascular resis- 79.96 x (ART M – CVP) / C.O. dyn·s/cm5
tance
SVRI Systemic vascular resis- 79.96 x (ART M – CVP) / CI dyn·s/cm5/m2
tance index
TPR Total pulmonary resis- 79.96 x PA M / C.O. dyn·s/cm5
tance
TVR Total vascular resis- 79.96 x ART M / C.O. dyn·s/cm5
tance
Calculations
Oxygenation and ventilation parameters
The Cockpit uses the following parameter values for the oxygenation and ventilation calculations. All of
these calculations are monitored parameter values except for PaO2, PaCO2, Hgb, and SaO2 which are
laboratory values.
Label Description Available units

Hgb Hemoglobin concentration g/dL
inO2, FiO2 Inspired oxygen %
PaCO2 Arterial CO2 partial pressure mmHg
PaO2 Arterial oxygen partial pressure mmHg
Pplat, Pplat Pause (plateau) pressure cmH2, mbar
Pb Ambient pressure mmHg, kPa
PeCO2 Mixed expired CO2 partial pressure mmHg
PEEP Positive end expiratory pressure cmH2, mbar
PIP Peak inspiratory pressure cmH2, mbar
RRc, RR, RRi, RR Respiratory rate /min
SaO2 Arterial oxygen saturation %
SvO2 Venous oxygen saturation %
VTe / VTe Expired tidal volume mL, L
Calculations
The Cockpit uses the values in the preceding table, the laboratory values, and the BSA value to calculate
the following derived oxygenation and ventilation parameter values.
Label Description Derivation Available

units
C(a-v)O2 Arteriovenous oxygen dif- CaO2 – CvO2 mL/dL
ference
CaO2 Arterial oxygen content 0.0134 x Hgb x SaO2 mL/dL
Cdyn Dynamic compliance VTe / (PIP – PEEP) mL/cmH2
Cs Static lung compliance VTe / (Pplat – PEEP) or mL/cmH2
VTe / (Pplat – PEEP)
CvO2 Venous oxygen content 0.0134 x Hgb x SvO2 mL/dL
DO2 Oxygen delivery 10 x CaO2 x C.O. mL/min
DO2I Oxygen index 10 x CaO2 x CI mL/min/m2
DO2 / BSA
MValv Alveolar minute volume (VTe – TVd phy) x RR mL/min
MVe Expired minute volume (VTe x RR) / 1000 L/min
MV/C.O. Ventilation cardiac output MValv / C.O. No units
ratio
O2ER Oxygen extraction ratio (CaO2 – CvO2) / CaO2 No units
P(A-a)O2 Alveolar-arterial oxygen iO2 x (Pb – 47) – PaCO2 – PaO2 mmHg
difference
iO2 / 100 x (Pb – 47) – PaCO2 – PaO2
Qs/Qt Intrapulmonary right-left %
shunt (percentage shunt) Hgb × 1.34 + 0.0031 × PAaO2 – CaO2-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ × 100
Hgb × 1.34 + 0.0031 × PaO2 – CvO2
TVd phy Tidal volume dead space VTe x (1 – PeCO2 / PaCO2) mL
(physiological)
TVd/TV phy Ratio of tidal volume dead TVd phy / VTe No units
space to tidal volume dead
space (physiological)
VO2 Oxygen consumption 10 x C(a-v)O2 x C.O. mL/min
VO2I Oxygen consumption in- 10 x C(a-v)O2 x CI mL/min/m2
dex
VO2 / BSA
NOTE: When multiple sources are available, the RR order of priority is RR, RRc, RRi.
Calculations
Drug calculations
The Cockpit calculates the infusion rates of up to 44 Data pertaining to default drugs is not deleted when
drugs. Forty of these drugs are pre-configured and a patient is discharged. For more information on
four can be customized for a specific patient how to create a customized drug list, see page 204.
session. Information pertaining to patient-specific
drugs is automatically deleted when you discharge
the patient.
Accessing the drug calculation functions
The following diagram shows the Drug calculation A Drug dosage tab
page where you perform drug dosage calculations.
B Select drug list arrow button
Procedures C Drug calculation tab
A D Setup button for customizing the drug list (see
B C page 204)
D E Buttons for entering values
Accessing the drug calculations

menu bar.
E 2 Select the Drug dosage tab (A), if not already
selected.
3 Select the Drug calculation tab (C), if not
already selected.
029
Calculations
Performing drug calculations
You can either select drugs from a pre-configured 3 Select the desired drug. The pre-configured
drug list (see page 204) or enter drugs manually to values for amount, dose, and units show up in
compute the desired dose and rate values. the corresponding buttons.
4 Add the other infusion parameters such as Rate
To perform a drug calculation by selecting the corresponding button and
entering the values on the keypad.
correspond to the diagram for the Drug 5 Select Enter on the keypad to confirm your
calculation page (see page 203). selection.
1 Access the Drug calculation page (see NOTE
page 203).
When performing drug calculations, and the dose
2 Select the arrow key (B) to activate the drug list includes micrograms, a dose precision of 0.01
containing pre-configured drugs. does not allow a measurement that can be used
when rate is used to calculate the dose.
Customized drug list
Customizing a drug list requires a clinical The drug list also contains four untitled drugs which
password. The drug list contains up to 40 drugs are available if the pre-configured drugs do not
with the following pre-configured settings: the meet the current drug calculation needs. These
name, amount, volume, dose, and unit of drugs are place holders for generic drug dosage
measurement. Once configured, a drug and its calculations.
settings are stored as defaults and become
available for selection in the Drug calculation
page (see page 203).
Calculations
The following diagram shows the Drug dosage > Customizing the drug list
Setup page where you customize the drug list.
Accessing the Drug dosage > Setup page
Procedures requires a password. In the following steps, the
A letters in parentheses correspond to the diagram
for the Drug dosage > Setup page.
B
C D
To customize the drug list
E
1 Select the Procedures... button on the main
F menu bar.
G 2 Select the Drug dosage > Setup tabs.
H 3 Enter the password on the keypad.
4 Select Enter to display the Setup page.
5 Use the arrow in the Select drug field (B) to
activate a list of existing drug names. Select an
existing drug name for editing or an ’Untitled’
entry for adding a new drug name. The selected
drug is assigned to the Edit drug name field
(C).
6 Select the pencil symbol next to the Edit drug
name field (C) to activate a keyboard.
7 Edit or enter a drug name using the keyboard.
A maximum of 25 alpha-numeric characters are
available.
031
A Drug dosage tab 8 Select the Enter button on the keyboard.

B Select drug field and selection arrow 9 Select the Amount button (E) to activate a
popup with a keypad for adding the amount.
C Edit drug name field
Use the arrow symbol to activate a list of
D Setup tab assigned units of measure.
E Amount button 10 Select the Enter button. The amount is
assigned to the Amount field (E). The unit is
F Volume button
assigned to the Dose units field (G).
G Dose units field and selection arrow
11 Select the Volume button (F) to activate a
H Save drug button popup with a keypad for adding the volume.
Use the arrow symbol to activate a list of
assigned units of measure.
12 Select the Enter button. The volume is
assigned to the Volume field (F). The unit is
assigned to the Dose units field (G).
13 Select the Save drug button (H) to save all of
the drug and all of its attributes.
Calculations
Drug calculator equations
The following table lists the variables and equations used to perform drug rate calculations.
Variables Description Equation

Amount The weight of the drug Concentration x volume
Volume The volume in which the drug is Drug amount / concentration
dissolved
Concentration Drug quantity / solution volume Drug amount / volume
Rate Infused volume per unit of time Dose / concentration
Duration The time over which the infusion User-selectable
is administered
Dose The amount of a drug the physi- Rate x concentration
cian prescribes, standardized by
or
weight and time
Rate x concentration / weight
Total dose Total dose over duration Dose x duration
Total volume Total volume over duration Rate x duration
The following table lists the available ranges for each category on the Drug calculation page.
Parameter Range and units

Daily weight 0.1 to 350 kg (adult, pediatric)
1 to 10000 g (neonate)
Amount 0.01 to 100,000,000,000 micrograms (µg), m units, mEq, mmol
0.01 to 100,000,000 milligrams (mg), units, mol
0.01 to 100,000 grams (g), k units
0.01 to 100 M units
Volume 0.01 to 10,000 mL
Concentration 0.01 to100,000,000,000 µg/mL, m units/mL, mEq/mL, mmol/mL
0.01 to100,000,000 mg/mL, units/mL, mol/mL
0.01 to100,000 g/mL, k units/mL
0.01 to100 M units/mL
Rate 0.01 to 10,000 mL/h
Duration 0.01 to 10,000 h
Calculations
Parameter Range and units

Dose (per hour) 0.01 to 100,000,000,000 µg/h, mEq/h, m units/h, mmol/h
0.01 to 100,000,000 mg/h, units/h, mol/h
0.01 to 10,000 g/h, k units/h
0.01 to 100 M units/h
Dose (per minute) 0.01 to 1,666,666,666.66 µg/min, mEq/min, m units/min, mmol/min
0.01 to 1,666,666.66 mg/min, units/min, mol/min
0.01 to 1,666.66 g/min, k units/min
0.01 to 1.66 M units/min
Dose/Daily weight Adult and pediatric:
(per hour)
0.01 to 100,000,000,000, µg/kg/h, m units/kg/h, mmol/kg/h
0.01 to 100,000,000 mg/kg/h, units/kg/h, mol/kg/min or h
0.01 to 100,000 g/kg/h, k units/kg/h
0.01 to 100 M units/kg/h
Neonatal:
0.01 to 100,000,000,000, µg/g/h, m units/g/h, mEq/g/h, mmol/g/h
0.01 to 100,000,000 mg/g/h, units/g/h, mol/g/h
0.01 to 100,000 g/g/h, k units/g/h
0.01 to 100 M units/g/h
Dose/Daily weight Adult and pediatric:
(per minute)
0.01 to 1,666,666,666.66 µg/kg/min, mEq/kg/min, m units/kg/min, mmol/min
Neonatal:
0.01 to 1,666,666,666.66 µg/g/min, mEq/g/min, m units/g/min, mmol/min
Adult, pediatric, and neonatal:
0.01 to 1,666,666.66 mg/g/min, units/g/min
0.01 to 1,666.66 g/kg/min, k units/kg/min
0.01 to 1,66 M units/kg/min
Total dose 0.01 to 100,000,000,000 µg, m units, mEq, mmol
0.01 to 100,000,000 mg, units, mol
0.01 to 100,000 g, k units
0.01 to 100 M units
Total volume 0.01 to 10,000 mL
ECG, arrhythmia, and ST segment
Overview of ECG and heart rate Electrode placement for neonates. . . . . . . . 223
monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
12-lead monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
ECG signal processing and display . . . . . . . . . 211
Supported parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Accessing the ECG functions . . . . . . . . . . . 224
ECG precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
ECG parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . 225
Monitoring paced patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
ECG monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Pacemaker precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Connecting the lead sets for 12-lead
monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Pacer fusion mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Device interference with pacemaker
Connecting the lead wires for neonatal monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Optimizing pacer processing . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Patient preparation for ECG monitoring . . . 216
Arrhythmia monitoring overview . . . . . . . . . 233
Electrosurgery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Selecting arrhythmia leads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
ECG display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
ECG parameter field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Arrhythmia processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
ECG waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Arrhythmia modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
ECG colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Arrhythmia display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Electrode placement for adult and Combined heart rate /arrhythmia parameter
pediatric patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Standard configuration, three electrodes Separate arrhythmia parameter field. . . . . . . . 238
(IEC/AHA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Standard configuration, five electrodes
(IEC/AHA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Pacer configuration, five electrodes
(IEC/AHA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Standard configuration, six electrodes
(IEC/AHA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
12-lead configuration, ten electrodes for 12-
lead Rest ECG monitoring (AHA) . . . . . . . . . . . 222
12-lead configuration, ten electrodes for 12-
lead Rest ECG monitoring (IEC) . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Accessing the arrhythmia functions . . . . . . 239
Arrhythmia parameter setup functions . . . . 239
Monitoring ST overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Standard ST monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
TruST 12-lead monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
12-lead ST monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Connecting lead sets for ST monitoring . . . 241
ST display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Reviewing ST complexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Reviewing all ST complexes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Zooming in on an ST complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
ST measuring points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Adjusting ST measuring points. . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
ST reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Saving ST reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
ST alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Accessing the ST settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
ST setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Learning/relearning QRS pattern . . . . . . . . . 249

Manual relearning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Overview of ECG and heart rate monitoring
The M540 calculates and displays the heart rate, heart rate parameter field. For adult and pediatric
identifies paced beats, reports arrhythmia patients, the QRS threshold is adjustable (see
conditions, measures ST deviations, and relays page 230).
these values to the Cockpit for display. ECG and
During dual-channel processing, a weight is
heart rate monitoring is for adult, pediatric, and
assigned to each channel depending on its level of
neonatal patients.
artifact. The channel with less artifact always
3-, 5-, 6-, and 10-wire lead sets are available for receives the greater weight. When a channel
adult and pediatric ECG monitoring (including exceeds a certain level of artifact, it is excluded
TruST). A neonatal ECG adapter cable is available from the composite signal, and the M540 shifts to
for connecting individual ECG leads for neonatal single-channel processing. If both channels
monitoring. experience excessive artifact, an artifact message
appears until at least one channel is sufficiently free
Normal ECG monitoring (including 12-lead ECG
of artifact.
monitoring) is not of diagnostic quality. The only
report of diagnostic quality is an optional Rest ECG During artifact, asterisks (* * *) replace the heart
report which is generated from a 12-lead ECG. To rate value. Once the artifact clears, QRS
generate such a report requires that the patient is processing resumes without initiating a relearning
admitted at the Infinity CentralStation and that the phase.
Rest ECG option is activated (see page 483 for
Arrhythmia monitoring and the selected arrhythmia
setup information).
mode affect the display of the heart rate parameter
Refer to the instructions for use Infinity Acute Care field. For detailed information, see "Arrhythmia
System – Infinity M540 for a detailed description of processing" on page 235.
the M540 ECG functions.
Parameter-specific error messages are listed in the
The ECG monitoring functions are configurable in chapter "Troubleshooting" starting on page 525.
the ECG pages (see page 225).
Before performing any monitoring functions, refer
to the section "For your safety and that of your
Supported parameters
patients" on page 13.
– ECG: HR (heart rate), %PACED (paced beats)
– ST: STI, STII, STIII, STaVR, STaVL, STaVF,
ECG signal processing and display STV, STV+, STV1 to STV6, STVM, STCVM,
STdV1, STdV3, STdV4, STdV6
The M540 identifies QRS complexes of certain
– Arrhythmia: ARR (ASY, VF, ARTF, VTACH,
amplitudes and QRS widths for adult, pediatric, and
RUN, AIVR, SVT, CPT, BGM, TACH, BRADY,
neonatal patients (see the ECG section of the
Pause); see page 236 for a description of these
"Technical data" chapter in the M540 instructions
arrhythmia modes and PVC/min
for use for detailed parameter specifications). It
calculates heart rates within a range of 15 beats to In addition to stored events, the two high priority
300 beats per minute, using the R-R intervals of the alarms ASY and VF are also stored and displayed
last 10 seconds. This calculation excludes the two in the ICS trends.
longest and the two shortest R-R intervals. The
M540 averages the remaining intervals and
displays the result as the current heart rate in the
ECG precautions
Refer to the following sections for general

precautions: WARNING
To prevent patient injury, always verify the
– "Electrical safety" on page 16 timing of the QRS synchronization pulse
– "Electrosurgery" on page 19 before attempting cardioversion using the
Infinity MCable – Analog/Sync.
– "Defibrillator precautions" on page 19
WARNING WARNING
Do not select TruST leads for ECG signal Do not rely solely on the ECG when
processing. If the QRS morphology of a TruST monitoring seizure-prone patients. Electrical
lead differs from that of its equivalent artifacts of non-cardiac origin, such as
conventional lead, always refer to the seizure, may prevent detection of certain
conventional lead. arrhythmias.
NOTE
Use of the rest ECG report is required for an ECG
signal quality that is compliant with IEC 60601-2-
25 diagnostic high frequency specifications.
Connecting the 3-, 5-, 6-wire lead sets for ECG monitoring
The ECG lead sets connect directly to the M540. To connect the ECG lead sets
1 Insert the 3-, 5-, or 6-wire lead set (C) into the
recessed ECG connector (B) on the side of the
M540 that is closest to the non-invasive blood
A pressure connector (A).
B Orient the lead set (C) so the exposed pins face

towards you as you push it firmly into the ECG
port.
D C NOTE
An ECG lead set can rest in the ECG connector of
the M540 without actually being connected. Make
sure that all ECG lead sets are pushed firmly into
the ECG port of the M540.
Almost every MonoLead features a number on
the lead set indicating how many leads connect.
When connecting a MonoLead, make sure the
number faces in the same direction as the M540
312
display.
A Non-invasive blood pressure hose connector
2 Insert the port cover (D) to protect the unused
B M540 ECG port ECG lead pins.
C Lead set 3 Connect the lead wires to the patient. For
D Port cover information on applying the electrodes to the
patient, refer to the figures starting on
page 220.
Connecting the lead sets for 12-lead monitoring
1 Insert the 6-wire lead set (B) and the 4-wire lead
set (C) into the ECG port (A) on the side of the
M540.
Orient lead sets (B and C) so the exposed pins
A face towards you as you push them firmly into
the channel.
NOTE
C B An ECG lead set can rest in the ECG port of the
M540 without actually being connected. Make
display.
311
A M540 ECG port 2 Connect the lead wires to the patient. For
information on applying the electrodes to the
B 6-wire lead set patient, refer to the figures starting on
C 4-wire lead set page 220.
NOTE
When using a 12-lead ECG where the lead wires
are coiled, it is recommended that the 6-wire lead
set is coiled in the same direction as the 4-wire
lead set to prevent artifact. For example, both
lead sets are either coiled towards the patient or
away from the patient.
Connecting the lead wires for neonatal monitoring
The ECG lead sets connect directly to the M540. To connect the ECG lead set
1 Insert the neonatal ECG adapter cable (B) into
the ECG port (A) on the side of the M540.
Orient the neonatal ECG adapter cable (B) so
the exposed pins face towards you as you push
A them firmly into the ECG port.
NOTE
D An ECG lead set can rest in the ECG port of the
B
2 Insert the port cover (D) to protect the unused
ECG lead pins on the M540.
3 Connect the individual neonatal ECG lead wire
(C) to the neonatal ECG adapter cable (B).
For information on applying the electrodes to
the patient, refer to the figures starting on
page 220.
C
313
A M540 ECG port

B Neonatal ECG adapter cable
C Neonatal ECG electrodes
D Port cover
Patient preparation for ECG monitoring
The following tips provide optimal ECG monitoring Electrosurgery

results but must never replace hospital-approved
practices or manufacturer’s recommendations. Integrated ESU suppression improves the
Follow hospital procedures for proper skin performance of the monitor during electrosurgery,
preparation. Dräger recommends Ag/AgCl reduces noise on ECG waveforms, and protects
disposable electrodes. Never use disposable the patient from burns.
electrodes after their expiration date and make sure
that there is enough gel and that the gel has not To minimize interference from the
dried out. electrosurgical unit
P and T waves with amplitudes exceeding 0.2 mV  Select the heart rate parameter field.
can be interpreted as QRS complexes. To allow
detection of low heart rate conditions under these or
circumstances, place the lead with the highest R 1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main
wave in channel ECG1. If P and T waves continue menu bar.
to be misinterpreted, reposition the electrodes or
use an SpO2 sensor to monitor the pulse rate. 2 Select the Settings 2 tab (if not already
selected).
To maintain a clear signal, change electrodes every
24 to 48 hours or more often when the following 3 Select ESU next to the External device
occurs: disconnected alarm control selection.
– ECG signal degradation NOTE

12-lead monitoring is not available when the ESU
– Excessive patient perspiration
filter is enabled. Likewise, the ESU filter selection
– Skin irritation is not available when you are using 12-lead
monitoring.
Consider the following when selecting electrode
sites: If the Filter selection is set to ESU at the Cockpit
and you switch to a 12-lead ECG at the M540, the
– Surgery – keep electrodes as far from the
Filter setting automatically changes to Monitor at
surgical site as possible, while maintaining a
the Cockpit.
clinically useful lead configuration. Place the
cable and lead wires as far from the ESU as
possible and perpendicular to the ESU cables. NOTE
ESU mode provides better HR performance in the
– Burn Patients – use sterile electrodes. Clean presence of electrosurgical interference, but with
the equipment thoroughly and follow hospital possible ECG R-wave amplitude reduction on
infection control procedures. narrow complexes.
– Incorrect placement of electrodes affects the
signal quality.
ECG display
On the Cockpit, the ECG display consists of: – Show all page containing up to 12 leads
– ECG parameter field The ECG parameter field appears differently when
you activate arrhythmia monitoring. For more
– ECG waveforms
ECG parameter field
Parameter fields report parameter values and A Parameter label

indicate the alarm status of parameters. Parameter
B Units of measure – can be
fields can also report technical conditions such as
activated/deactivated
disconnected sensors, and so on. For detailed
information regarding the content of parameter C Upper/lower alarm limits or crossed triangle
fields for each parameter, see the chapter symbol when alarms are deactivated
"Troubleshooting" on page 525.
D Heart rate value
NOTE E Heart symbol that flashes with each detected
The following diagram shows a typical parameter ECG complex (if pacer detection is activated,
field layout. This layout may change when the symbol appears as when a paced beat
additional parameters are put on display. For is detected)
more information, see "Parameter fields" on
During brief artifact episodes, the parameter field
page 70.
does not display a heart rate value.
The ECG parameter field contains the following
elements:
A B
E C
D
030
ECG waveforms
The ECG waveform contains the following Depending on the selected lead set and the ECG
elements: cable type, up to 3 ECG waveforms are displayed.
A B Lead set Available ECG leads

C Three electrodes I, II, or III
Five electrodes I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V 1)
Six electrodes Standard: I, II, III, aVR, aVL,
042
aVF, V, V+ 1)
A Lead label
TruST: I, II, III, aVR, aVL,
B Selected waveform scale aVF, dV1, V2, dV3, dV4, V5,
C Message field indicating the filter and pacer dV6 2)
setting. For example, the message Pacer off 6 + 4 electrodes I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to
appears when you deactivate pacer detection. V6 3)
NOTE:
If pacer detection is activated (see page 229), blue
pacer spikes identify paced beats. Pacer spikes are 1)
V and V+ are chest leads
printed on strip recordings. 2)
The letter ’d’ indicates a derived lead
3)
Using a 6-wire lead set and a 4-wire lead set
provides a 12-lead ECG
To select the number of leads and the lead set, see

page 225.
NOTE
When admitting a new patient, re-loading a
patient profile, or changing a patient category, the
ECG waveform size will return to the last
configured setting instead of matching the Size all
ECG [mV/cm] setting, or returning to the default
value. Manually change the ECG waveform sizes.
ECG colors
Lead wire connectors to the electrodes are labeled

and color-coded according to IEC and AHA.
IEC AHA/US
L Yellow LA Black
F Green LL Red
R Red RA White
C/C2 White/white and yellow V/V2 Brown/brown and yellow
N Black RL Green
C+/C5 Gray and white/white and black V+/V5 Gray and brown/brown and orange
C6 White and violet V6 Brown and violet
C4 White and brown V4 Brown and blue
C3 White and green V3 Brown and green
C1 White and red V1 Brown and red
Electrode placement for adult and pediatric patients
Standard configuration, three electrodes (IEC/AHA)
314
315
Standard configuration, five electrodes (IEC/AHA)
316
317
Pacer configuration, five electrodes (IEC/AHA)
318
319
Standard configuration, six electrodes (IEC/AHA)
320
321
12-lead configuration, ten electrodes for 12-lead Rest ECG monitoring (AHA)
324
12-lead configuration, ten electrodes for 12-lead Rest ECG monitoring (IEC)
322
Electrode placement for neonates
– For neonates, place the RA and LA electrodes

at the midaxillary line. Position the LL electrode
below the diaphragm and umbilicus. Avoid the
liver area and ventricles of the heart to prevent
blood flow artifact.
IEC electrode AHA electrode

placement
(neonates)
(neonates)
328
495
12-lead monitoring
Standard 12-lead monitoring is only available when You can view all ECG waveforms, including TruST,
you use a 6-wire lead set and a 4-wire lead set. 12- on the Show all page (see page 230). For
lead monitoring using a 10-wire lead set is a locked information on how to activate TruST, see
option that must be purchased separately. Place page 247.
the chest electrodes in positions 1 through 6 as
shown on page 222. WARNING
Do not select TruST leads for ECG signal
TruST 12-lead monitoring offers real-time
processing. If the QRS morphology of a TruST
assessment of ST segment deviations with only six
lead differs from that of its equivalent
electrodes. TruST uses the conventional 6-lead
conventional lead, always refer to the
standard electrode placement (see page 221),
conventional lead.
measuring 8 leads and interpolating 4 chest leads.
TruST is available for adult and pediatric patients,
but not for neonatal patients.
Accessing the ECG functions
 Select the heart rate parameter field to select 3 Select the Settings 1, Settings 2, Show all
the ECG page directly. tabs.
or The top portion of the page contains the Auto set
and Alarm buttons for configuring the alarm
1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main
functions. For detailed alarm setup information, see
menu bar.
"Configuring the alarm settings for a patient" on
2 Select the ECG tab to access the ECG page. page 136.
If you cannot see the tab, select the following
two symbols located in the upper right corner of
the dialog: symbol and the display filter
button.
ECG parameter setup functions
All ECG setup functions take place in the ECG NOTE

pages.
When the HR source on the M540 is set to ECG
and is then changed to Auto, if the actual HR
source is still ECG but at some point the ECG
NOTE
signal becomes invalid, then the HR parameter
If excessive line frequency artifact is seen on the field remains blank instead of looking for another
ECG waveform, confirm that the correct Line HR source (such as SpO2 or Arterial pressure if
frequency has been set in the Biomed dialog. available). If this is due to ECG electrodes being
For more information, refer to "Configuring the disconnected, then there will be a technical
biomed settings" in Instructions for use - Infinity condition whose alarm grade is user configurable.
Acute Care System - Infinity M540 VG7.n. As a workaround, select an unavailable source
and then change it back to Auto.
WARNING NOTE
When the setting HR source is set to Auto, no A momentary Cockpit disconnection from the
acoustic alarm signal is issued and no M540 occurs when there is a network outage
message appears in the header bar when an during a Rest ECG report generation.
ECG lead wire is disconnected from the
patient.
When the HR source is set to ECG and
changed to Auto, if the actual HR source is
still ECG but becomes invalid, then the HR
parameter field remains blank instead of
looking for another HR source (such as SpO2
or ART if available). When due to
disconnected ECG electrodes, there will be a
technical condition whose alarm grade is
user configurable. Select an unavailable
source and change it back to Auto.
NOTE
For the Cockpit and the M540, a bradycardia
(BRADY) alarm in neonatal mode only
annunciates when an HR alarm is set to On. If the
HR alarm is set to Off, the BRADY alarm will be
Off, but displays as On. When the ASY/VF
alarms setting is set to Always on or Follow HR
alarm, the BRADY alarm also annunciates, even
if HR alarms are still Off. Deactivate the BRADY
alarm by manually turning it Off.

Settings 1 page
Pulse tone Off, 5, 10 (default) to 100% in increments of Sets the volume of the pulse
volume 10% tone.
Tone source – ECG (default) Sets the source of the pulse
tone.
– SpO2
HR source – ECG (default) – derives the heart rate from Selects a different source for
the ECG signal. the heart rate when the ECG
channel is unavailable due to
artifact resulting from surgical
– Arterial – derives the heart rate from the procedures.
arterial blood pressure signal. The heart rate
parameter field label changes to APR and
appears in the color of ART.
– SpO2 – derives the heart rate from the pulse

oximetry signal. The heart rate parameter
field label changes to PLS* and appears in
the color of SpO2.
– Auto – derives the heart rate either from the

ECG signal or other available sources. If an
ECG signal is not available, the M540
switches to ART, and then to SpO2.
Waveforms 1, 2 (default), 3 Selects the number of
displayed waveforms.

Leads – Three electrodes: I, II, III Assigns specific leads for
each waveform depending on
which lead mode is selected.
– Five electrodes: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V
– Six electrodes: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V+
– Six electrodes (with TruST activated): I, II,

III, aVR, aVL, aVF, dV1, V2, dV3, dV4, V5,
dV6
– Ten electrodes: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1

to V6
– Default for lead 1: II
– Default for lead 2: V (with TruST and a 6-

wire lead set plus a 4-wire lead set, the
default is: V2)
– Default for lead 3: aVF

Size [mV/cm] 0.25, 0.5, 1 (default), 2, 4, 8 mV/cm Sets the scale of individual
ECG waveforms.
Color Red, green (default), blue, yellow, light blue, Determines the color of the
purple, orange, white waveforms and parameter
labels and values.

Settings 2 page
Filter – Off – provides the greatest sensitivity to Controls the sensitivity to
noise or artifact (the message Filter off various artifact sources.
appears in the waveform channel).
– Passband: 0.08 – 40 Hz
None of these filter settings
are of diagnostic quality. The
diagnostic passband range of
– Monitor (default) – recommended for
0.05 – 150 Hz is used for
standard monitoring; reduces wandering
diagnostic ECG, regardless of
isoelectric line, muscle artifact, and power
whether the filter is set to Off
line interference. No message appears in
or Monitor.
the waveform channel.
– ESU – reduces signal distortion during

electrosurgery (the message Filter ESU
appears in the waveform channel).
NOTE: 12-lead monitoring is not available when
the ESU filter is enabled. Likewise, the ESU
filter selection is not available when you are
using 12-lead monitoring.
NOTE: The hardware-based low-pass ESU filter

is activated when OR alarms are activated and
the filter is set to Monitor or ESU. The
hardware-based low-pass ESU filter is separate
from the ESU filter setting, which is a software-
based filter.
NOTE: Pacer detection is unavailable when the

filter is set to ESU.
NOTE: It is recommended to activate both OR

alarms and to set the filter to ESU during
electrosurgery to reduce artifact.
NOTE: RRi and 12-lead ECG monitoring are

unavailable when the M540 is set to OR alarms

Pacer detection – On (default) Determines whether pacer
impulses are detected. See
"Pacer fusion mode" on
(Not available in – Off – the message Pacer off appears in the page 232 for precautions
neonatal mode) waveform channel before you start this mode.
– Fusion – the message Pacer fusion

appears in the waveform channel
QRS sync – On – displays QRS synchronization markers Determines whether vertical
marker white markers appear on the
waveform to identify QRS
– Off (default) complexes. The markers help
determine when it is safe to
perform synchronized
cardioversion.
Cable type – Auto detect (default) When set to Auto detect, this
feature detects the number of
connected lead wires
(TruST is only – 3-, 5-, 6-electrodes, and 12 leads automatically. If auto detect
available with a 6- mode does not detect the
wire lead set) connected lead set, it allows
When using the ECG extension cable, the you to select the cable type
system always assumes the cable is a 6-wire manually. "12" denotes a
lead set. combination of a 6-wire lead
set and 4- wire lead set for 12-
lead monitoring.
ARR Processing – ECG1 ECG1 setting – arrhythmia

processing occurs only on the
lead displayed in waveform
– ECG1 & 2 (default) channel 1.
The ECG1 & 2 selection is not available if the ECG1 & 2 setting –
neonatal patient category is selected. arrhythmia processing occurs
on the leads displayed in the
waveform channels 1 and 2.
Size all ECG 0.25, 0.5, 1 (default), 2, 4, 8 mV/cm Sets the amplitude of all
[mV/cm] displayed ECG leads.

QRS threshold – Normal (default) This function is only available
for adult and pediatric
patients.
– Low
Normal – detects QRS
WARNING complexes ≥0.5 mV.
Risk of inaccurate HR value
If the QRS setting is set to Low in the pres-
ence of HR artifact, the associated HR value Low – detects QRS
may be inaccurate. complexes ≥0.2 mV.
To avoid an inaccurate HR value for adult
and pediatric patients, it is recommended to
set the QRS threshold setting to Normal.
Resp. monitoring – On (default for neonate) Activates/deactivates
respiration monitoring.
– Off (default for adult/pediatric)

Show all page
This page displays all available leads (up to 12).
Monitoring paced patients
When pacer detection is activated, the M540 uses When pacer detection is deactivated, the message
the following specifications to identify a pulse as a Pacer off, appears in the top ECG channel.
pacer pulse:
To optimize pacer monitoring, follow the guidelines
– Amplitude (ap): ±2 to ±700 mV on page 233.
– Width (dp): 0.2 to 2.0 ms
To activate/deactivate pacer detection
– A paced beat is identified in the heart rate
parameter field by the letter P that appears next  Select the heart rate parameter field to select
to the flashing heart symbol when a pacer pulse the ECG page directly.
is detected.
or
– On the ECG waveform, blue spikes appear to
identify pacer spikes.
menu bar.
NOTE
When the M540 is docked, pacer detection is 2 Select the ECG tab to access the ECG page.
deactivated automatically in neonatal mode or 3 Select the Settings 2 tab.
when the ESU filter is activated. When the M540
is undocked, the M540 automatically activates the 4 Select On next to Pacer detection.
pacer detection.
Pacemaker precautions
The M540 has been tested for pacemaker pulse WARNING

detection. However, it is impossible to anticipate
Make sure pacer detection is deactivated for
every clinically possible waveform characteristic.
patients without pacemakers. Make sure it is
For paced patient, the M540 could therefore
activated for patients with pacemakers.
miscount heart rates and misinterpret rate-
Deactivating pacer detection for paced
dependent arrhythmias.
patients may result in pacemaker pulses
False low-rate alarms can result under the following being counted as regular QRS complexes,
conditions: which could prevent an asystole alarm from
being detected. Always verify that the pacer
– 700-mV pacer pulses followed by QRS
detection status is correct for the patient. Be
complexes smaller than 0.5 mV
aware that setting the ECG filter option to ESU
– Asynchronous pacemaker pulses with deactivates pacemaker detection
overshoot automatically.
– Asynchronous pacemaker with large amplitude
pace pulses with no overshoot and at low heart WARNING
rate (30 bpm) Interference from a monitor may cause some
rate-adaptive implantable pacemakers to pace
False low-rate and asystole alarms can result in the
at unnecessarily high rates. Be extra vigilant
following conditions:
with patients when using these types of
– Fused beats and asynchronous pacemakers, pacemakers.
when coupling intervals are in the range of
+10 to –90 ms WARNING
As well, false high-rate alarms can result under the Always keep pacemaker patients under close
following condition: surveillance and monitor their vital signs
carefully.
– Asynchronous pacemaker with large pace
– Do not assess the patient’s condition
pulse tails and at low heart rate (30 bpm)
exclusively from the heart and respiratory
– Large atrial pacemaker pulse is preceded by a rate values the monitor displays and the
large ventricular pacemaker pulse (both having rate alarms that are generated. Heart rate
identical amplitude and durations) meters may continue to count the
pacemaker rate during cardiac arrest or
some arrhythmias.
– Some pacemakers (especially external
pacemakers with body surface electrodes)
emit pulses with amplitudes far exceeding
the 700 mV maximum amplitude specified
for the M540. The M540 may incorrectly
detect these large pacemaker pulses as
valid QRS complexes and may fail to
detect cardiac arrest.
WARNING NOTE
Impedance respiration and pacemaker The displayed heart rate may be incorrect if the
detection are inoperative when the ESU filter pacemaker pulse wanders through the ECG
is selected. Refer to "Electrosurgery" on waveform (ineffective pacing). During the
page 19 for general safety precautions. wandering pacemaker test required by
AAMI/ANSI/IEC 60601-2-27, the displayed heart
NOTE rate varied between 15 and 30 bpm (rather than
consistently being 30 bpm).
Full arrhythmia processing does not occur on
detected paced beats.
Device interference with pacemaker

Pacer fusion mode monitoring
Pacer fusion mode offers increased detection The following devices can interfere with pacemaker
sensitivity to fused paced beats, thereby reducing monitoring.
false asystole and low heart rate alarms.
Impedance-derived rate response pacemakers
WARNING
These pacemakers emit pulses that adjust the
Pay close attention to pacemaker patients
pacemaker rate to the respiratory rate. These
being monitored in Fusion mode because this
pulses could be falsely interpreted as pacer pulses.
mode may increase the risk of falsely
For impedance-derived rate response
counting pacemaker spikes as QRS
pacemakers, modify the electrode placement until
complexes, thus failing to detect cardiac
the blue spikes on the waveform disappear since
arrest.
they are not related to real pacer impulses.
CAUTION
Fusion mode pacer detection is not intended for Infusion or roller bypass pumps
use with large-signal, unipolar pacemakers. It is Interference from these devices can cause pacer
intended for use only with bipolar pacemakers. spikes to appear on the waveform although the
Observe the following: ECG appears normal. To determine if the pump is
– Select Fusion mode only in situations where the cause of the artifact, turn it off, if possible. To
it becomes necessary to suppress repeated minimize the artifact, choose the lead with the best
false asystole and/or false low heart rate signal or replace the electrodes. Rerouting
alarms. pressure tubing away from the infusion tubing can
– Before selecting Fusion mode, be certain that also improve the ECG signals.
the patient has a bipolar pacemaker (external
or implanted) and that it is accurately
programmed as appropriate for that patient. Line isolation devices
– Do not use Fusion mode if you are uncertain To minimize the effect of line isolation devices,
as to what type of pacemaker is being used. which can cause temporary disturbances in the
ECG signal, follow these precautions:
– Choose the lead with the best signal for ECG
monitoring.
– Check the ECG electrodes; replace them, if
necessary.
Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulators valid QRS complexes, which follow misinterpreted
TENS signals. If TENS signals continue to register
Signals from transcutaneous electrical nerve
as pacer spikes, deactivate pacer detection (see
stimulators (TENS) often resemble pacer signals
page 229).
and can be labeled as such. The M540 can reject
Optimizing pacer processing
You can minimize interference and optimize ECG 1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main
signal acquisition and processing for paced menu bar.
patients.
2 Select the ECG tab to access the ECG page.
3 Select the Settings 2 tab.
To optimize pacer processing
4 Select On next to Pacer detection. Select the
 Select the heart rate parameter field to select
lead with the least interference and highest R
the ECG page directly.
wave for display in ECG channel 1.
or
5 Select the Filter setting Monitor or Off and
determine which setting provides the clearest
signal.
Arrhythmia monitoring overview
WARNING The selected arrhythmia mode (see page 236)

controls which arrhythmia parameters are
When HR alarm and arrhythmia monitoring
monitored and how they are displayed. Each
are deactivated and the ASY/VF alarms setting
occurrence of an arrhythmia event is stored in the
is set to Follow HR alarm, the monitor does
Alarm history page provided the archive setting is
not generate asystole or ventricular fibrillation
configured (see page 150).
alarms. To make sure that ASY/VF alarms are
always generated, set the ASY/VF alarms Refer to the instructions for use Infinity Acute Care
setting to Always on. System – Infinity M540 for a detailed description of
the M540 arrhythmia functions.
The M540 performs arrhythmia monitoring on adult
and pediatric patients and relays these values to
the Cockpit for display. Arrhythmia monitoring is not
available for neonates. To make sure that asystole
and ventricular fibrillation alarms are reported even
when heart rate alarm monitoring and arrhythmia
monitoring is deactivated, set the ASY/VF alarms
selection in the General settings page to Always
on (see page 471).
The arrhythmia monitoring functions have NOTE

configurable parameter-specific setup pages (see
If French NFC mode is activated (see page 487),
page 239).
you cannot deactivate heart rate alarms.
WARNING
The message HR alarms off appears in the to the section "For your safety and that of your
right most field in the header bar whenever patients" on page 13.
you deactivate heart rate alarms.
The HR, ASY, VF off message appears
when arrhythmia monitoring is deactivated,
the ASY/VF alarms feature is set to Follow HR
alarm, and heart rate alarms are deactivated.
Selecting arrhythmia leads
Appropriate lead selection is essential for accurate To select arrhythmia leads

arrhythmia monitoring. Ideally, the two best leads
should be assigned to the top two waveform
channels.
or
The following two selections are available:
– ECG1 (single channel selection) – dedicates
menu bar.
processing to the lead in the top channel.
– ECG1 & 2 (dual channel selection) –
determines the heart rate and ARR based on 3 Select the Settings 2 tab.
the leads in the two top channels.
4 Select the button next to ECG1 or ECG1 & 2
and select the desired lead.
Arrhythmia processing
Arrhythmias are identified using an internal NOTE

detection process. This process does the following:
Except for asystole and ventricular fibrillation
– Filters out ECG signal artifacts events, no other arrhythmia events appear in the
trends of any ICS equipped with software version
– Detects the beat pattern
VG1.
– Classifies the beat pattern
An arrhythmia with a high grade alarm
– Detects the rhythm configuration has a higher priority than an
When arrhythmia analysis is enabled, multiple arrhythmia with a medium, low or disabled alarm
arrhythmia alarm conditions may occur grade configuration.
simultaneously. Announcing all the alarm An arrhythmia with a medium grade alarm
conditions could result in alarm fatigue and prevent configuration has a higher priority than an
the clinician from addressing the most serious arrhythmia with a low or disabled alarm grade
condition. For this reason, priorities are set for the configuration.
arrhythmia conditions so that only the highest
priority alarm event annunciates. Although the An arrhythmia with a low grade alarm configuration
priority of arrhythmia events cannot be modified, has a higher priority than an arrhythmia with a
the clinician can modify the alarm grade to allow disabled alarm configuration.
enabled alarms of lower priority to annunciate. The priority for arrhythmia events configured with
The priority for arrhythmia events is: the same alarm grade follows the arrhythmia
hierarchy list.
1 Asystole
When arrhythmia artifact is present (ARTF) at
2 VF (Ventricular fibrillation) 100% artifact level, no arrhythmia events are
3 VTACH (ventricular tachycardia) recognized except for bradycardia and ventricular
fibrillation.
4 RUN (ventricular run)
If sinus tachycardia and ventricular tachycardia are
5 AIVR (accelerated idioventricular rhythm) configured at the same alarm grade, a ventricular
6 SVT (supraventricular tachycardia) tachycardia will take priority if the rate is high
enough and the beats are classified as ventricular
7 CPT (ventricular couplet) beats.
8 BGM (bigeminy)
9 TACH (tachycardia) NOTE
10 Brady (Bradycardia) Arrhythmia processing does not occur on
detected paced beats.
11 Pause (user selectable interval)
12 ARTF (artifact, background rhythm)
For a description of the arrhythmias and associated
events, see "Arrhythmia modes" on page 236.
Arrhythmia modes
If arrhythmia monitoring is activated, the selected When the ASY/VF alarms setting is set to Always
arrhythmia mode determines how many events are on, asystoles and ventricular fibrillation events are
monitored. Arrhythmia modes include Basic, always reported, even when arrhythmia monitoring
Advanced, and Off. is deactivated.
NOTE The following table lists Basic and Advanced

arrhythmia events that are reported with each
The Advanced arrhythmia mode is only available
monitoring mode. The table also lists detected
when the full arrhythmia option is activated.
events when the Arrhythmia mode is Off.
Arrhythmia monitoring off (the following events are detected, if at least one ECG is displayed)
ASY Asystole 4 seconds pass without the detection of a valid QRS complex.
VF Ventricular fibrillation Sinusoidal waveform with fibrillation characteristics. 1)
Basic arrhythmia monitoring mode (the following additional events are detected)
VTACH Ventricular N or more PVCs are detected in a interval T = (60 * (N – 1)) / R,
Tachycardia where N is the VTACH count and R is the VTACH rate. 2), 4)
PVC Premature Ventricular PVC alarm limit exceeded. The PVC parameter value represents
Contraction the number of QRS complexes classified as PVCs over a 1-minute
interval.
ARTF Artifact More than 50% of beats in the last minute were classified as
questionable.
Advanced arrhythmia monitoring mode (includes Basic mode events plus the following additional
events)
RUN Ventricular RUN Series of 3 to N-1 consecutive PVCs with a beat-to-beat rate ≥ the
VTACH rate. 2)
AIVR Accelerated Series of 3 or more PVCs with a rate less than the VTACH rate.
Idioventricular
Rhythm
SVT Supraventricular N or more consecutive normal beats, with a beat-to-beat rate
Tachycardia greater than or equal to the SVT setting. 2)
CPT Ventricular Couplet Sequence of beats with the pattern: normal, PVC, PVC, normal.
BGM Ventricular Bigeminy Sequence of beats with the pattern: normal, PVC, normal, PVC,
normal.
TACH Tachycardia N or more consecutive normal beats, with a beat-to-beat rate
≥ TACH rate setting. 2), 4)
BRADY Bradycardia Eight or more consecutive normal beats, with an average rate
≤bradycardia rate setting. 3)
PAUSE Pause Sequence of two beats classified as normal or PVC, with an
interval ≥ pause rate value in seconds (±100 ms).
1)
Certain ventricular tachycardias have sinusoidal waveforms closely resembling ventricular fibrillation. Because of the sim-
ilarities between these waveforms, such types of ventricular tachycardia can be classified as ventricular fibrillation, the
more serious of the two conditions.
2)
N is the event count set in the count column of the arrhythmia setup table (see page 239).
3)
A bradycardia (BRADY) alarm in neonatal mode only annunciates when an HR alarm is set to On. If the HR alarm is set
to Off, the BRADY alarm will be off, but displays as On. When the ASY/VF alarms setting is set to Always on or Follow
HR alarm, the BRADY alarm also annunciates, even if HR alarms are still off. Deactivate the BRADY alarm by manually
turning it off. In neonatal mode, you set alarm limits for BRADY in the alarm setup page. The M540 alarms for this event
as a limit violation.
4)
A PVC or another abnormal beat breaks the analysis sequence and restarts analysis.
To select the arrhythmia modes 3 Select the ARR settings tab.

 Select the heart rate parameter field to select 4 Select one of the following modes next to ARR
the ECG page directly. mode button, located below the arrhythmia
alarm setup table:
or
– Off
1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main – Basic
menu bar. – Advanced (only available when the full
2 Select the ECG tab to access the ECG page. arrhythmia option is unlocked)
Arrhythmia display
When arrhythmia monitoring is activated,

arrhythmia events appear in the heart rate
parameter field or in a separate parameter field,
depending on how many leads are selected for
display.
When arrhythmia monitoring is deactivated (see
page 237) and at least one ECG waveform is
displayed, asystole and ventricular fibrillation
events are still reported.
NOTE
To make sure that asystole and ventricular
fibrillation alarms are reported even when HR
monitoring is turned off, set the ASY/VF alarms
selection in the Alarms > General settings page
to Always on (see page 473).
Combined heart rate /arrhythmia parameter field
Parameter fields report parameter values and H Heart rate

I Heart symbol that pulsates with each detected
beat (if pacer detection is activated, the symbol
appears as when a paced beat is detected)
information regarding the content of parameter
fields for each parameter, see the chapter
Separate arrhythmia parameter field
The following diagram shows a typical parameter
field layout. This layout may change when When three ECG channels are selected for display
additional parameters are put on display. For more and arrhythmia monitoring is activated, all values
information, see "Parameter fields" on page 70. and labels appear in a separate parameter field
below the heart rate parameter field.
When one or two ECG leads are selected for
display and arrhythmia monitoring is activated, all
arrhythmia values and labels appear in the heart
A B
rate parameter field. The arrhythmia parameter
field contains the following elements:
A B C
C
D
B E D
I
033
E A Arrhythmia label
B PVC/min label
H G F C Upper/lower alarm limits or crossed triangle
symbol when alarms are deactivated
032
A Heart rate parameter label D Number of premature ventricular contractions

B Units of measure – can be (PVC) per minute
activated/deactivated E Area reserved for arrhythmia event call (for
C Arrhythmia label example, Brady) or the message LEARN
D Area reserved for actual event calls (for

example, Brady) or the message LEARN
E Upper/lower alarm limits or crossed triangle
symbol when alarms are deactivated
F Number of Premature Ventricular Contractions
(PVC) per minute
G PVC/min label
Accessing the arrhythmia functions
 Select the heart rate parameter field to select 1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main
the ECG page directly. menu bar > ECG tab to access the ECG page.
or 2 Select the ARR settings tab.
Arrhythmia parameter setup functions
All arrhythmia setup functions take place in the

ARR settings page.

ARR mode – Off Selects which events are
reported (see page 236 for
– Basic (default),
more details).
– Advanced (requires the full arrhythmia
locked option)
Relearn None Establishes a new QRS
templates.
See "Configuring the arrhythmia alarm setup" on page 145 for details on available arrhythmia alarm
functions.
Monitoring ST overview
ST analysis examines normal QRS complexes C ST measurement point

from up to 12 ECG leads. The M540 learns each
D QRS offset
ST lead, combines the measurements into an
average QRS complex, and derives the ST E QRS onset
segment deviation. ST monitoring is available for
F Isoelectric point
adult and pediatric patients.
The ST segment deviation is defined as the NOTE
displacement (in mm or mV) above or below the ST analysis is always performed using a
isoelectric line. The deviation measurement dedicated filter which ensures diagnostic quality.
compares the isoelectric point to the ST The ECG filter settings (ESU, Monitor, and Off)
measurement point. The following figure identifies are not of diagnostic quality, and as a result, the
the measured elements of a QRS complex. ST segment of the ECG waveform may appear
differently from the ST segment of the ST
complex. An ECG report is not of diagnostic
quality. Therefore, the ST segment of the ECG
A waveform on the report may appear differently
from the ST segment of the ST complex. The only
report of ECG diagnostic quality is a Rest ECG
report.
B Refer to the instructions for use Infinity Acute Care

System – Infinity M540 for a detailed description of
F ED C the M540 ST functions.
The ST monitoring functions are configurable on
parameter-specific setup pages (see page 247).
326
A Fiducial point Before performing any monitoring functions, refer

B ST level patients" on page 13.
Standard ST monitoring
The 6-wire lead set monitors eight ECG leads, of

which two are chest leads (V and V+). 12-lead ST
analysis provides the most comprehensive view of
a patient’s condition. However, with optimal
placement of the V and V+ leads and using only
eight leads, you can achieve an ST analysis that is
almost as comprehensive but with fewer
electrodes.
TruST 12-lead monitoring
This feature offers real-time assessment of 12 ST NOTE

segment deviations, with only six electrodes, which
ST values and complexes of derived leads will be
provide eight measured ECG leads and four
missing after discharging and entering the
derived chest leads. The derived leads are
bedside with TruST turned on, and when ECG
identified by adding the letter ‘d’ before the lead
cable type is not set to Auto. You can either set
label. When TruST monitoring is activated, the V-
the cable type to Auto or unplug the ECG cable.
lead defaults to V2 and the V+ lead defaults to V5.
Although you can select derived leads for display,
they are excluded from arrhythmia and QRS
processing.
ECG and ST reports contain the label ’d’ to identify
a derived lead.
12-lead ST monitoring
During 12-lead ST monitoring, the M540 acquires To activate or deactivate ST monitoring

12 ST leads in addition to the following:
You can activate/deactivate ST monitoring at any
– ST Vector Magnitude (STVM) – the magnitude time as follows:
(mm or mV) of the ST vector. It is a summary
vector, combining the ST values from all 12
leads. STVM is trended and has its own alarm
limits. or
– ST Change in Vector Magnitude (STCVM) – the 1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main
change of magnitude (mm or mV) between the menu bar.
current ST vector and the ST vector at the time
of the last reference. STCVM values also show
a change in the location of the ST vector over 3 Select the ST settings tab.
time.
4 Select On or Off next to ST monitoring.
Connecting lead sets for ST monitoring
ST monitoring uses the following lead – Standard ST monitoring – uses the standard 3-
configurations for each available ST monitoring 5-, and 6-wire lead sets. For more information
mode: see the diagrams starting on page 220.
– TruST – provides 12-lead ST monitoring with a – 12-lead ST monitoring – uses the standard 12-
6-wire lead set (see page 213). lead ECG configuration with a 6-wire lead set
plus a 4-wire lead set (see page 213).
ST display
When ST alarms are activated, the Cockpit alarms The ST parameter field contains the following
for all ST leads whether they are displayed or not. elements:
In either case, the ST parameter field flashes and
the alarming lead is identified in the header bar.
When ST monitoring is activated, current ST values A A A
display in a separate parameter field below the
heart rate parameter field.
NOTE D
field layout. This layout may change when B
additional parameters are put on display. For
page 70.
Parameter fields report parameter values and C C C
034
A Selected ST lead labels
disconnected sensors, and so on. For detailed B Upper/lower alarm limits or crossed triangle
information regarding the content of parameter symbol when alarms are deactivated
C Selected ST deviation values
D Units of measure – can be
activated/deactivated
Reviewing ST complexes
You can view all ST complexes or zoom in on a – Saving a reference complex

single complex.
– Requesting an ST report
The following functions are available in either view:
In all trends, a solid white vertical line on the ST
– Changing the isoelectric point
graphical trends marks changes in ST measuring
– Changing the ST measuring point points along with a time stamp.
– Relearning the QRS morphology
Reviewing all ST complexes
The following diagram shows the ST complex A ECG tab

page. The number of displayed ST complexes
B ST complex tab
depends on the connected lead set.
C Save reference button
D Print button for generating an ST report
A
E ST button
J
F Reference on/off button
G ISO button
I
H Relearn button
I ST panels for each monitored ST lead
(including waveform scale, ST measuring point,
B isoelectric point, and reference point)
J ST label (unique for each ST lead)
To access ST complexes
or
menu bar.
H G E C 2 Select the ECG tab to access the ECG page.
F D 3 Select the ECG tab (if not already selected).
035
4 Select the ST complex tab (if not already

selected).
Zooming in on an ST complex
The following diagram shows a single ST complex A ECG tab

screen when you zoom in on one ST complex. To
B Waveform scale
zoom in on a single ST complex, select an ST panel
on the ST complex page (see page 243). C ST complex tab
Sensor parameters D Save reference button – saves the displayed

ST complex as a reference point
A
E Print button for printing an ST report
L B
F Reference on/off button
G ST button
H Lead button for selecting the desired lead
I ISO button
J Show all button – accesses the general ST
C complexes screen
K Relearn button (see page 249)
L ST label (unique for each ST lead)
K I G D
J H F E
036
ST measuring points
You can change the ST measuring points and To change ST measuring points
isoelectric point from the general or from the single
ST complexes page (see figures on page 243). In
both pages, the setup buttons for changing the
measuring points are located at the bottom of the or
screen. Changing the measuring point of one
complex adjusts the measuring points for all ST
menu bar.
complexes.
3 Select the ST complex tab (B) to display the
Adjusting ST measuring points general ST complex page.
Whenever you adjust the isoelectric and ST 4 Select an individual ST panel to zoom in on a
measuring points, the ST deviation is recomputed. single ST complex.
During this computation, the changing ST deviation 5 Select the ISO button (I) and use the rotary
values appear yellow. The values appear green knob to dial to the desired setting.
when the computation is completed.
6 Select the ST button (G) and use the rotary
knob to adjust the ST measuring point.
ST reference
You can save ST reference complexes as

reference points for future ST deviation
measurement comparisons. The first time you
relearn QRS complexes, the current ST data are
saved as a reference data. The original ST
reference data are updated each time you save ST
references.
Saving ST reference points
You can save the ST reference from the general ST

complexes page (see page 243) and the single ST
complex page (see page 243). Saving a reference
point in either screen, saves all currently displayed
ST complexes as reference points.
To save ST reference points 4 Select an individual ST panel to zoom in on a

single ST complex.
the ECG page directly. 5 Select the ISO and ST buttons at the bottom of
the screen and use the rotary knob to dial the
or
desired values. Click on the rotary knob to
1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main accept the new values.
menu bar.
6 Select the Save reference button (in either ST
2 Select the ECG tab to access the ECG page. complex page).
3 Select the ST complex tab to display the
general ST complex page.
ST alarm settings
The ST alarms page allows you to configure the To access the ST alarms page
following ST-specific alarm settings:
– Activating or deactivating individual ST alarms the ECG page directly.
– Setting upper and lower ST alarm limits or
– Configuring the alarm archive function 1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main
menu bar.
– Auto setting all ST limits
For more detailed information on how to configure
these functions, see "Alarm setup for ST" on 3 Select the ST alarms tab to display the ST
page 146. alarms page.
Accessing the ST settings

or
menu bar.
3 Select the ST settings tab.
ST setup functions
All ST setup functions take place in the ST settings

page.

ST monitoring – On (default) Activates/deactivates ST
monitoring and determines
– Off
whether an ST parameter field
Not available in is displayed and ST
neonatal mode parameters are trended.
TruST 12-lead – On – TruST monitoring is available Determines whether TruST
(Not selectable in monitoring is available (see
– Off (default) – TruST monitoring is not
neonatal mode. page 233).
available
TruST is only
available when a 6-
wire lead set is
connected)
ST relearn None Purges stored average ST
complexes, blanks displayed
(not available if ECG
average ST complexes, and
is not connected, in
learns the arrhythmia and
neonatal mode, or
dominant QRS pattern.
ST monitoring is
disabled)

ST lead1 – Three electrodes: STI, STII, STIII Selects an ST lead for analysis
and display.
ST lead2 – Five electrodes: STI, STII, STIII, STaVR,
STaVL, STaVF, STV
ST lead3
– Six electrodes: STI, STII, STIII, STaVR,
STaVL, STaVF, STV, STV+
– Six electrodes (with TruST activated): STI,
STII, STIII, STaVR, STaVL, STaVF, STdV1,
STV2, STdV3, STdV4, STV5, STdV6
– Ten electrodes: STI, STII, STIII, STaVR,
STaVL, STaVF, STV1, STV2, STV3, STV4,
STV5, STV6, STCVM, and STVM
– Default for ST lead1: STI
– Default for ST lead2: STaVL
– Default for ST lead3: STV (with TruST and a
10-wire lead sets, the default is: STV2)
Event duration [s] Off, 15, 30, 45, 60 (default) seconds Defines a period an alarm
condition must persist, before
alarm signals are generated.
ST Mini Trend – Three electrodes: STI, STII, STIII Selects an ST lead for
inclusion in the ST mini-trend
– Five electrodes: STI, STII, STIII, STaVR,
display.
STaVL, STaVF, STV
– Six electrodes: STI, STII, STIII, STaVR,
STaVL, STaVF, STV, STV+
– Six electrodes (with TruST activated): STI,
STII, STIII, STaVR, STaVL, STaVF, STdV1,
STV2, STdV3, STdV4, STV5, STdV6
– Ten electrodes: STI, STII, STIII, STaVR,
STaVL, STaVF, STV1, STV2, STV3, STV4,
STV5, STV6, STCVM, and STVM
– Default: STII
Learning/relearning QRS pattern
The M540 creates a reference template by learning – The neutral lead is changed
the dominant QRS pattern of a patient. The
– A lead set is physically connected, if that lead
reference template is stored for reference and all
set provides the neutral or processed lead(s)
subsequent beats and rhythms are compared
against it and classified either as normal or – The cable type is changed
irregular.
– The OR alarms setting is changed
The M540 can only learn the QRS pattern of the
– The M540 is docked in an IACS configuration
leads that are selected for arrhythmia processing. If
whose profile has a different ECG lead
only one lead is available, the M540 only learns on
configuration
one lead. If no lead set is connected, the M540
cannot perform a learning phase. In this case, an – A standalone M540 is docked on an M500
error message is displayed. whose profile has a different ECG lead
configuration
The M540 starts a learning phase automatically
when: During the learning phase, which lasts
approximately 30 to 40 seconds, a relearning
– Exiting discharge or standby
message appears in the message field. In addition,
– Patient category is changed to Adult or the message LEARN appears in the ECG
Pediatric parameter field.
– Arrhythmia monitoring is activated If ST monitoring is activated, ST deviations are also
recomputed during the learning phase.
NOTE
During the learning phase, only ASY and VF
arrhythmia events are reported. Manual relearning
– A different arrhythmia mode is selected Relearn the QRS pattern of a patient when:
– Different ECG leads are selected for arrhythmia – Leads are reconnected or electrodes are
processing repositioned
NOTE – Eight hours have passed since the last learning

The relearn is initiated only on the available phase
assigned lead(s). – Questionable ARR calls appear on the ECG
– The ARR processing setting is changed from – Other significant changes appear on the ECG
ECG1 to ECG1&2, if the leads selected for You can initiate a relearning phase from the
processing are available arrhythmia and the ST pages.
– The ARR lead 1 setting is changed to an
available lead
– The ARR lead 2 setting is changed to an
available lead, if the ARR processing setting is
ECG1&2
– A lead-off condition of a processed lead is
resolved
To relearn from the arrhythmia setup page

the ECG page.
or
menu bar.
3 Select the ARR settings tab.
4 Select Relearn.
NOTE
Relearn ARR button is accessible on the main
To relearn from the ST page

the ECG page.
or
menu bar.
3 Select the ST settings tab.
4 Select Relearn.
NOTE
Relearn ST button is accessible on the main
Impedance respiratory rate (RRi)
Overview of respiration monitoring . . . . . . . 252

Supported parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Respiration precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

respiration monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Connecting the lead sets for 12-lead

monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Connecting the lead wires for neonatal

monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Patient preparation for respiration

monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Respiration display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Respiration parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Breath markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Activating the breath marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Respiration measuring modes . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Accessing the respiration settings. . . . . . . . 260
Respiration parameter setup functions . . . . 260
Overview of respiration monitoring
The M540 measures respiratory rate derived from Refer to the Instructions for use Infinity Acute Care
impedance measurement by passing a harmless System – Infinity M540 for a detailed description of
high-frequency current between two ECG the M540 respiration functions. The respiration
electrodes on the patient's chest. Electrical monitoring functions are configurable in the
resistance (impedance) between the electrodes parameter-specific setup page (see page 260).
varies with the expansion and contraction of the
chest during inspiration and expiration. The M540 Before performing any monitoring functions, refer
displays a respiration waveform and respiratory to the section "For your safety and that of your
rate value from these impedance changes and patients" on page 13. Parameter-specific error
relays this information to the Cockpit for display. messages are listed on page 538.
The M540 uses ECG leads I or II regardless of the
lead selected for 5-, 6-, and 12-lead configurations.
RRi processing is dependent on the QRS
Supported parameter
processing lead for 3-lead configurations. RRi
works only on leads I and II. RRi – respiratory rate measured by impedance
(RRi values are not displayed when the ESU filter
Respiration monitoring is for adult, pediatric, and is activated – see page 228).
neonatal patients. The M540 can use the
respiration signal for central apnea monitoring. NOTE
RRi and 12-lead ECG monitoring are unavailable
when the M540 is in OR alarms and the ECG filter
is set to Monitor.
Respiration precautions
WARNING WARNING
The safety and effectiveness of the respiration Large amplitude pacemaker pulses (100 mV or
measurement method in apnea detection, greater) may interfere with the monitor’s
particularly the apnea of prematurity and ability to measure or detect respiration.
apnea of infancy, has not been established.
WARNING
This device does not monitor obstructive
apnea. Patients at risk for respiratory crises
should be observed closely.
WARNING WARNING
The monitor reports an apneic event when no RRi and pacer detection are inoperative when
breaths are detected within the established the ESU filter is selected. Refer to
apnea alarm time period. Therefore, do not "Electrosurgery" on page 19 for general
rely on RRi monitoring as the sole method for safety precautions.
detecting cessation of breathing. Dräger
recommends the monitoring of additional
parameters that indicate the patient’s
oxygenation status, such as etCO2 and SpO2.
Heart rate limit alarms should also be enabled
and set appropriately.
Connecting the 3-, 5-, 6-wire lead sets for respiration monitoring
The following diagram shows how to attach the lead To connect the ECG lead sets
sets to the M540:
1 Insert the 3-, 5-, or 6-wire lead set (C) into the
ECG port (B) on the side of the M540 that is
closest to the non-invasive blood pressure
connector (A).
A Orient the ECG adapter cable lead set (C) so
B the exposed pins face towards you as you push
it firmly into the ECG port.
NOTE
D C An ECG lead set can rest in the ECG port of the
display.
312
A Non-invasive blood pressure hose connector 2 Insert the port cover (D) to protect the unused
ECG lead pins.
B M540 ECG port
3 Connect the lead wires to the patient. For
C Lead set information on applying the electrodes to the
D Port cover patient, refer to the figures starting on
page 220.
Connecting the lead sets for 12-lead monitoring
1 Insert the 4-wire lead set (B) and the 6-wire lead
set (C) into the ECG port (A) on the side of the
M540.
Orient the ECG adapter cable lead sets (B and
A C) so the exposed pins face towards you as you
push it firmly into the ECG port.
NOTE
C B An ECG lead set can rest in the ECG port of the
display.
311
A M540 ECG port 2 Connect the lead wires to the patient. For
information on applying the electrodes to the
B 6-wire lead set patient, refer to the figures starting on
C 4-wire lead set page 220.
NOTE
When using a 12-lead ECG where the lead wires
are coiled, it is recommended that the 6-wire lead
set is coiled in the same direction as the 4-wire
lead set to prevent artifact. For example, both
lead sets are either coiled towards the patient or
away from the patient.
Connecting the lead wires for neonatal monitoring
The ECG lead sets connect directly to the M540. To connect the ECG lead set
1 Insert the ECG adapter cable (B) into the
recessed ECG connector (A) on the side of the
M540.
Orient the neonatal ECG adapter cable (B) so
A the exposed pins face towards you as you push
them firmly into the ECG channel.
C B NOTE
An ECG lead set can rest in the ECG port of the
sure that all lead sets are pushed firmly into the
ECG port of the M540.
2 Insert the port cover (C) to protect the unused

D ECG lead pins on the M540.
3 Connect the individual neonatal ECG lead wires
(E) to the neonatal ECG adapter cable (D).
For information on applying the electrodes to the
patient, refer to the figures starting on page 220.
E
313
A ECG connector on the M540

B ECG adapter cable
C Port cover
D Neonatal ECG adapter cable
E Neonatal ECG lead wires
Patient preparation for respiration monitoring
The following tips regarding skin preparation and IEC electrode placement (adult)
proper electrode placement provide strong signals
with minimal artifact but must never replace
hospital-approved practices or manufacturer’s
recommendations. Because ECG electrodes are
used for respiration monitoring, see the figures
starting on page 213 for information on electrode
placement.
Follow the same precautions for respiratory
monitoring as for ECG monitoring (see page 213)
and observe the following general
recommendations:
314
– Place the electrodes so they generate the
clearest possible signals with minimal artifact. AHA electrode placement (adult)
– Electrodes that adhere tightly and have a large

conductive area provide the best results. Use a
5-wire lead set to improve the respiration signal
(where the N electrode for IEC or RL electrode
for AHA is the neutral electrode).
– For adult and pediatric patients, position the
electrodes to span the maximum expansion and
contraction of the lungs. This is especially
important in the case of deep abdominal
breathers.
327
– For neonates, place the RA and LA electrodes

at the midaxillary line. Position the LL electrode
below the diaphragm and umbilicus. Avoid the
liver area and ventricles of the heart to prevent
blood flow artifact.
IEC electrode AHA electrode

(neonates) placement
(neonates)
495
328
Respiration display
On the Cockpit, the respiration display consists of: The respiration parameter field contains the
following elements:
– Respiration parameter field
– Respiration waveform A
Respiration parameter field
NOTE
The following diagram shows a typical parameter D B
field layout. This layout may change when
page 70. C
037
Parameter fields report parameter values and A Label for respiratory rate derived from
indicate the alarm status of parameters. Parameter impedance measurement (RRi)
disconnected sensors, and so on. For detailed B Upper/lower alarm limits or crossed triangle
information regarding the content of parameter symbols when alarms are deactivated
fields for each parameter, see the chapter C Respiratory rate value
D Lung symbol that blinks with each detected
breath
Breath markers
Breath markers indicate the time of breath The following diagram shows how white vertical
detection, not the beginning, or end of respiration. markers on the respiration waveform can identify
If breath markers also appear during artifact, set each detected breath.
the respiration measuring mode to manual and
adjust the breath detection threshold so only valid
breaths are counted.
356
Breath markers are not sent to the Infinity network.

To activate or deactivate the display of breath
markers, see page 260.
Activating the breath marker
 Select the respiration parameter field to select 3 Select the Settings 1 tab (if not already
the Resp. page directly. selected).
or 4 Select On next to Resp. marker.
menu bar.
2 Select the Resp. tab to access the Resp. page.
Respiration measuring modes
The following respiration measuring modes are

NOTE
available:
In manual mode, when the detection threshold
– Auto (default) – appropriate for patients with exceeds in amplitude the waveform channel, only
regular breathing patterns. It uses the optimal the vertical bracket is displayed.
breath-detection threshold calculated at the
beginning of respiration monitoring.
– Manual – appropriate for adult or pediatric
patients whose breathing patterns show
excessive variation. Also appropriate for
neonates with irregular breathing rhythms
whose respiration signals may otherwise not be
reliably evaluated.The M540 does not set a
breath-detection threshold at the beginning of
respiration monitoring. Instead, adjustments
made alter the breath detection sensitivity of the
monitor. When manual mode is selected, a
vertically centered respiration threshold bracket
is displayed on the waveform to indicate the
threshold at which a breath is detected.
– To select the desired respiration mode, see
page 261.
WARNING
If the respiration waveform size is set too low
in manual mode, shallow breaths may not be
counted. If it is set too high, cardiac artifact
will be counted as breaths. Therefore, use the
breath marker to verify breath detection at the
desired amplitude.
Accessing the respiration settings
 Select the respiration parameter field to select 3 Select the Settings 1 and Settings 2 tabs.
the Resp. page directly.
The top portion of the Settings 1 page contains
or the Auto set and Alarm buttons for configuring
the alarm functions. For detailed alarm setup
information, see "Configuring the alarm settings
menu bar.
for a patient" on page 136.
2 Select the Resp. tab to access the Resp. page.
button.
Respiration parameter setup functions
All respiration setup functions take place in the

Resp. page.

Settings 1 page
RRi apnea time [s] Off, 10, 15 (default), 20, 25, 30 seconds Determines how long an apnea
has to last before an alarm is
triggered.
Apnea archive – Off Determines what happens in
response to an apnea.
– Str./ Rec. – a recording and an event
storage is triggered automatically in In case of false apnea alarms, it
response to an apnea. is advised to observe the
patient’s breathing pattern
– Store (default) – a waveform segment is
(belly or chest), and reposition
stored in response to an apnea.
electrodes accordingly, or to
– Record – a recording is triggered adjust the detection threshold
automatically in response to an apnea. manually.
Relearn None Initiates a relearning of the
respiration signal, only in Auto
mode.
Resp. lead I, II (default) Selects the lead for respiration
monitoring.

Resp. marker – On Superimposes a vertical line on
the respiration waveform when
– Off (default) a breath is detected (see
page 258).
Resp. monitoring – On (default in neonatal mode) Activates/deactivates
respiration monitoring.
– Off (default in adult/pediatric mode)
Size [%] 10% to 100% (in 10% increments) – default: Adjusts the waveform size.
50%
Color Red, green, blue, yellow, light blue, purple, Determines the color of the
orange, white (default). waveforms, parameter labels,
and values.
Settings 2 page
Coincidence – On Determines whether or not you
detect are alerted when the respiratory
– Off (default)
rate is within 20% of the heart
rate, which is an indication that
the M540 is counting heart
beats as respiration.
Mode Auto (default), Manual (see page 259 for Determines the processing
more details). mode for the breath-related
impedance change.
Resp. threshold 10% to 100% (in 10% increments) – default: Adjusts the breath detection
50% threshold.
In case of false apnea alarms, it is advised to

observe the patient's breathing pattern (belly or
chest), and reposition electrodes accordingly, or to
adjust the detection threshold manually.
SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox monitoring with Masimo SET MCable
Overview of SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox

monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox precautions . . . . . . 266
Connecting the Masimo SET MCable . . . . . . 268
Connecting the Masimo rainbow SET

MCable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Patient preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Applying the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox display . . . . . . . . . . 271
Reviewing the SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox

parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Accessing the SpO2 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
SpO2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . 276
Masimo rainbow SET Pulse CO-Ox

parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Password-protected Masimo rainbow

SET setup functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Overview of SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox monitoring
SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox monitoring is only possible SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox measurements are for
with the corresponding MCable. The following adult, pediatric, and neonatal patients (with the
hardware is available from Masimo for monitoring following exceptions).
SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox parameters.
NOTE
– Infinity MCable – Masimo SET (Masimo SET
The Masimo rainbow SET MCable parameters
MCable)
SpHb and SpOC are not approved for neonatal
– Infinity MCable – Masimo rainbow SET monitoring.
(Masimo rainbow SET MCable)
The values and the waveform are displayed on the NOTE
M540 and on the Cockpit. Information about wavelength range may be
useful during photodynamic therapy. For details,
The Masimo SET MCable and Masimo rainbow see the technical data chapter of the instructions
SET MCable support motion tolerant pulse for use Infinity Acute Care System – Infinity M540.
oximetry using Signal Extraction Technology (SET).
This technology enhances the quality of SpO2 Refer to the instructions for use Infinity Acute Care
monitoring and also measures the percentage of System – Infinity M540 for a detailed description of
functional hemoglobin saturated with oxygen the M540 SpO2 functions. The SpO2 monitoring
(%SpO2) in the arterial blood of the patient functions are configurable in the parameter-specific
accurately and effectively. setup page (see page 276).
A sensor applied to the patient measures the Before performing any monitoring functions, refer
absorption levels of red and infrared light. The to the section "For your safety and that of your
Masimo SET MCable or Masimo rainbow SET patients" on page 13. Parameter-specific error
MCable uses the difference between the two messages are listed on page 541.
measurements to calculate the percentage of
saturated hemoglobin (SpO2). Because light NOTE
absorption varies with blood volume and blood This device is covered under one or more of the
volume varies with pulse rate, both types of following USA patents: 5,758,644, 6,011,986,
Masimo SET MCable can also derive a pulse rate 6,699,194, 7,214,986, 7,254,433, 7,530,955 and
(PLS*). other applicable patents listed at:
In addition, the Masimo SET MCable also provides www.masimo.com/patents.htm
a perfusion index (PI) value. PI is the ratio of the
pulsatile blood flow to the non-pulsatile blood flow
in peripheral tissue. The PI value provides Supported parameters
information regarding the perfusion status of the
selected application site. This provides a means to The parameters SpO2, PLS*, and PI are available
select the most optimal site. and displayed regardless of which Masimo sensor
and which Masimo SET MCable is being used.
The Infinity MCable – Masimo rainbow SET
measures additional parameters that continuously The availability of additional Masimo rainbow SET
and non-invasively measure blood constituents. parameters depends on the sensor type that is
connected and which parameters are activated on
the Masimo rainbow SET MCable.
Standard parameter set

The Infinity MCable – Masimo SET and the Masimo Various sensors are available for the Masimo
rainbow SET MCable always support the following rainbow SET MCable. The availability of the
parameters: parameters depends on the selected sensor type.
– Functional oxygen saturation (SpO2). The unit Each sensor provides certain parameters which
of measurement is%. must also be activated on the Masimo rainbow SET
MCable.
– Pulse rate (PLS*). The unit of measurement is
beats/min. – CO SpO2 sensor; this type of sensor provides
the following parameters: SpO2, PLS*, PI,
– Perfusion index (PI) which indicates the arterial
SpCO, SpMet, PVI.
pulse signal strength. The measurement is 0-1.
– M-LNCS sensor; this type of sensor provides
the following parameters: SpO2, PLS*, PI.
Expanded parameter set
– Hb sensor; this type of sensor provides the
In addition to the above standard parameters, the
following parameters: SpO2, PLS*, PI, SpHb,
Masimo rainbow SET MCable provides the
SpOC, SpMet, PVI.
following additional optional parameters:
– Total hemoglobin (SpHb) measures the total NOTE
hemoglobin levels in arterial or venous blood. A color band on the Masimo rainbow SET MCable
The unit of measurement is selectable (see indicates which parameters are activated on the
page 486). MCable. If an MCable does not have a label, the
supported parameters are by default SpO2, PLS*,
– Total oxygen content (SpOC) measures the
and PI.
total blood oxygen content; this value is
calculated from the SpHb and the SpO2 values.
The following figure shows the multi-color band
The unit of measurement is mL/dL.
which appears on the side of the Masimo rainbow
– Pleth variability index (PVI) measures SET MCable (see page 268 for more information).
peripheral perfusion changes secondary to
respiration or the PI amplitude over a
respiration. PVI may be closely related to
478
intrathoracic pressure changes, circulating
If you connect a sensor but the parameter is not
blood volume and vascular tone. The unit of
activated on the MCables, the parameter label
measurement is%.
appears in the parameter field without a value.
– Carboxyhemoglobin saturation (SpCO)
measures the amount of carbon monoxide that
is bound to hemoglobin. The unit of
measurement is%.
– Methemoglobin saturation (SpMet) measures
the methemoglobin concentration in arterial
blood. The unit of measurement is%.
SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox precautions
SpO2 monitoring is only possible with an SpO2 WARNING

MCable.
Elevated levels of methemoglobin (MetHb)
Interfering substances: Carboxyhemoglobin may may lead to inaccurate SpO2 and SpCO
erroneously increase measurement values. The measurements.
level of increase is approximately equal to the
Elevated levels of total bilirubin may lead to
amount of carboxyhemoglobin present. Dyes, or
inaccurate SpO2, SpMet, SpCO, SpHb, and
any substance containing dyes that change arterial
SpOC measurements.
pigmentation, may cause erroneous measurement
values. Motion artifact may lead to inaccurate SpMet,
SpCO, SpHb, and SpOC measurements.
WARNING
Very low arterial oxygen saturation (SaO2)
High oxygen levels may predispose a
levels may cause inaccurate SpCO and SpMet
premature baby to retinopathy of prematurity.
measurements.
If this is a consideration do NOT set the high
alarm limit to 100%, which is equivalent to Hemoglobin synthesis disorders may cause
switching the alarm off. Transcutaneous SpO2 erroneous SpHb readings.
monitoring is recommended for premature
babies receiving supplemental oxygen. WARNING
------------------------------------------------------------------- To reduce the hazard of burns during surgery,
WARNING keep the sensor or transducer and their
An SpO2 sensor should not be used as an associated cables away from the surgical site,
apnea monitor. the electro-surgical unit return electrode, and
earth ground.
WARNING
Use only Masimo-specified sensors. Other WARNING
sensors may not provide adequate protection Inspect the application site every two to three
against defibrillation and may put the patient hours to ensure skin quality and correct
at risk. optical alignment. If the skin quality changes,
move the sensor to another site. Change the
WARNING application site at least every four hours. The
misapplication of an SpO2 sensor with
A Pulse CO-Oximeter should be considered
excessive pressure for prolonged periods can
an early warning device. If a trend towards
induce pressure injury.
patient hypoxemia is observed, blood
samples should be analyzed by laboratory
instruments to completely understand the CAUTION
condition of the patient. Do not immerse the sensor or patient cable in any
liquid. Moisture may present a safety risk.
WARNING
The pulsations from an intra-aortic balloon
support can elevate the pulse rate. Verify the
pulse rate of the patient against the heart rate.
CAUTION NOTE
When using the maximum sensitivity setting, the Purchase of this device confers no express or
performance of the sensor off detection may be implied license under any Masimo patent to use
compromised. If the device is in this setting and this instrument with any oximetry sensor that is
the sensor becomes dislodged from the patient, not manufactured or licensed by Masimo. For a
the potential for false readings may occur due to list of approved sensors, see the instructions for
environmental ‘noise’ such as light, vibration and use Infinity Acute Care System – Accessories.
excessive air movement. In addition, when a
sensor becomes detached from a patient, it will NOTE
have compromised protection against erroneous Do not use a functional tester to assess the
pulse rate and arterial saturation readings. accuracy of an SpO2 sensor or an SpO2 sensor
monitor. Since SpO2 sensor measurements are
NOTE statistically distributed, only about two-thirds of
An SpO2 sensor can be used during defibrillation, those measurements can be expected to fall
but the readings may be inaccurate for up to within ±A rms of a CO-oximeter's measured value.
20 seconds.
NOTE
NOTE A functional tester can be used to measure the
Possession or purchase of the Masimo SET total error of an SpO2 sensor monitor if a
MCable or the Masimo rainbow SET MCable particular calibration waveform has been
does not convey any expressed or implied license independently demonstrated to be accurate for
to use the device with unauthorized sensors or that system. The functional tester can then
cables which would, alone, or in combination with measure how accurately a particular SpO2
this device, fall within the scope of one or more of sensor is in reproducing the calibration waveform.
the patents relating to this device.
Connecting the Masimo SET MCable
The Masimo SET MCable connects directly to the A SpO2 port on the M540
M540. The logo on the MCable identifies if you are
B MCable connector
using a Masimo rainbow SET or a Masimo SET
MCable. C MCable 14-pin connector
D Intermediate cable connector to MCable
E Connector for various sensors (3 options)
A
To connect the Masimo SET MCable
1 Attach the Masimo SET MCable connector (B)
to the blue SpO2 port (A) of the M540.
B 2 Attach the sensor intermediate cable (D) to the
Masimo SET MCable 14-pin connector (C).
3 Attach the appropriate Masimosensor to the
end of the sensor cable (E).
D D D
E E E
Connecting the Masimo rainbow SET MCable
The Masimo rainbow SET MCable connects

directly to the M540. The logo on the MCable
identifies if you are using a Masimo rainbow SET or
a Masimo SET MCable. A
A color band located on the side of the Masimo
rainbow SET MCable indicates which parameters
are activated.
478
– Fields appearing in color represent parameters
that are already activated
– Fields that appear empty denote parameters
that might be activated later
A Masimo MCable can be mounted to the back of
an M540 (see page 113).
C
To connect the Masimo rainbow SET MCable
1 Attach the MCable connector (B) to the blue
SpO2 port (A) of the M540. D D D
2 Attach the intermediate cable (D) to the 20-pin
connector of the MCable (C).
3 Attach the appropriate Masimo sensor to the
end of the intermediate cable (E). E E E
For detailed information on which sensors support
which parameters, refer to the supported
parameter sections in the Instructions for use
Infinity Acute Care System – Monitoring
Accessories. A SpO2 port on the M540
B MCable connector
C MCable 20-pin connector
D Masimo rainbow SET intermediate cable con-
nector to MCable
E Connector for various sensors (3 options)
Patient preparation
The following tips provide optimal SpO2 monitoring The message SpO2 Low Perfusion appears when
results but must never replace hospital-approved the monitor detects low amplitude arterial
practices or manufacturer’s recommendations. pulsations. In this case, do the following:
The accuracy of SpO2 monitoring depends largely 1 Check the patient and treat if necessary.
on the strength and quality of the SpO2 signal.
2 Move the sensor to a site that is more
If a finger is used as a monitoring site, remove any adequately perfused.
nail polish. Cut the finger nails of the patient, if
3 Select maximum sensitivity mode.
necessary.
The signal may vary due to the following conditions:
– Placement of a sensor that is too tight Applying the sensor
– Patient experiences hypotension, severe If you are using a reusable sensor, make sure it is
vasoconstriction, severe anemia, or clean before applying it to the patient.
hypothermia
NOTE
– Arterial occlusion proximal to the sensor
Only use Masimo sensors with the Masimo SET
– Patient is in cardiac arrest or is in shock MCable and the Masimo rainbow SET MCable.
– Bright light causing erratic measurement or Read the instructions provided with the sensor for
missing values. Cover the sensor with opaque optimal application techniques and for safety
material if it is likely to be exposed to direct information. Never use damaged sensors.
bright light.
Follow the recommendations of the manufacturer.
– Significant levels of dysfunctional hemoglobins
(HbCO or MetHb) WARNING
– Intravascular dyes such as indocyanine green Inspect the application site every two to three
or methylene blue hours to ensure skin quality and correct
optical alignment. If the skin quality changes,
– Excessive patient movement move the sensor to another site. Change the
– Venous pulsations application site at least every four hours.
– Placement of a sensor on an extremity with a

blood pressure cuff, arterial catheter, or
intravascular line
The maximum sensitivity mode for Masimo MCable
is recommended for patients with low perfusion or
when the low perfusion or low signal quality
message is displayed on the screen in APOD or
normal sensitivity mode. This mode is not
recommended for care areas where patients are
not monitored visually, such as general wards. It is
designed to interpret and display data at the
measuring site when the signal may be weak due
to decreased perfusion.
To apply the sensor 3 Connect the sensor to the Masimo SET MCable
or the Masimo rainbow SET MCable.
1 Select the size and type of sensor that is best
suited for your patient. Follow the
recommendations of the manufacturer. NOTE
2 Position the sensor correctly and attach it to After connecting the sensor, if the sensor-LED
your patient. does not light up:
– observe the monitor for any message and act
accordingly, or
– replace the sensor.
330
SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox display
On the Cockpit, the SpO2 display consists of: The following table lists the maximum times the
M540 requires to report the parameter values after
– SpO2 parameter field
connecting the sensor to the MCable.
– A user-configurable Pulse CO-Ox parameter
field when a Masimo rainbow SET MCable with Parameter Maximum time
additional parameters activated is connected. SpO2, PLS*, PI Up to 35 s
– SpO2 pulse plethysmogram waveform SpMet, PVI, SpCO Up to 60 s
NOTE SpHb, SpOC Up to 90 s

The pulse plethysmogram waveform is directly PVI Up to 150 s
proportional to the strength of the pulse
amplitude.
Masimo SET MCable parameter field NOTE

NOTE The alarm limits for SpO2 are always visible at the
Cockpit, the M540, the ICS, and on remote
devices even if the setting Show alarm limits is
deactivated (see page 473). For PLS the limits
area in the parameter field appears blank.
page 70. If SpO2 and/or PLS alarms are deactivated, the
usual symbol appears next to the parameter
Parameter fields report parameter values and label.
fields can also report technical conditions such as I Message area for SpO2 messages (see
disconnected sensors and so on. For detailed page 541)
information regarding the content of parameter J SpO2 saturation value
"Troubleshooting" on page 525. K SpO2 blip that pulsates with each detected
pulse (only when the selected pulse tone
SpO2 parameter field (Masimo SET MCable) source is SpO2 – see page 276).
The SpO2 parameter field contains the following

Pulse CO-Ox parameter field (Masimo rainbow
elements:
SET MCable)
A B C D The Pulse CO-Ox parameter field appears in

addition to the regular SpO2 parameter field when
E a Masimo rainbow SET MCable is connected that
supports parameters in addition to the standard
parameter set (SpO2, PLS*, PI). The parameter
K F
content of the parameter field is configurable (see
page 278).
G
J The display of Pulse CO-Ox parameters
(SpHb/SpHbv, SpOC, SpMet, PVI, SpCO) is
affected by the following conditions:
I H – Blanks appear instead of parameter values if a
038
sensor is connected but the parameter is not

A SpO2 label activated on the MCable.
B Units of measure – can be – Asterisks (***) replace the parameter values
activated/deactivated under the following circumstances:
C Sensitivity mode indicator (see page 276) – A parameter is activated but an
D PLS* (pulse) label incompatible sensor is connected
E PLS* value – A parameter is activated but no sensor is

connected
F Perfusion index label
– A technical failure exists (for example, an
G Perfusion index value unplugged sensor)
H Alarm off symbol when alarms are deactivated.
When alarms are activated, the alarm limits are
displayed instead.
NOTE
The parameter SpHb changes to SpHbv (if
Venous was selected for the blood source setting
SpHb Cal – see page 281).
You can select up to three parameters to be

displayed in the parameter field (see page 278).
Units of measure appear next to the parameter
label if applicable and can be activated/deactivated
(see page 486).
The Pulse CO-Ox parameter field contains the
following elements:
A B
C
H D
GF E
480
A Parameter 1 Pulse CO-Ox label

B Parameter 2 Pulse CO-Ox label
C Upper/lower alarm limits or crossed triangle
symbols when alarms are deactivated (for the
parameters SpOC and PVI there are no alarm
limits)
D Parameter 3 Pulse CO-Ox label
E Parameter 3 Pulse CO-Ox value
F Parameter 2 Pulse CO-Ox value
G Alarm off symbol when alarms are deactivated.
When alarms are activated, the alarm limits are
displayed instead.
H Parameter 1 Pulse CO-Ox value
Reviewing the SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox parameters
When the Masimo rainbow SET MCable is A SpO2 tab

connected, you can review the values and
B Show all sub tab
associated trends of the following parameters on
one page.The mini-trend display is updated C Duration button to select the trend duration
approximately every five seconds. If no Masimo
D Display area showing parameter labels, values,
rainbow SET parameter is activated on the Masimo
trend scales, mini-trend and selected intervals.
rainbow SET MCable, only the parameter label but
no trends appear.
To access the SpO2 and Pulse CO-Ox Show all
The following diagram is an example of a Show all
screen
page.
1 Select the CO-Ox parameter field to access the
Pulse CO-Ox setup page directly.
A or
Select Sensor parameters... from the main
menu bar > SpO2 horizontal tab to select the
Pulse CO-Ox setup page.
B 2 Select the Show all tab.
C
482
Accessing the SpO2 settings
The following three setup pages are available for 3 Select the horizontal SpO2 tab to access the
configuring Masimo SpO2 parameters: SpO2 page.
– SpO2 setup page for configuring general SpO2 or
parameters (Masimo rainbow SET MCable and
Select the Pulse CO-Ox tab to access the
Masimo SET MCable)
Masimo rainbow SET-specific setup page
– Pulse CO-Ox setup page and the Setup page
or
for configuring Masimo rainbow SET-specific
settings. the vertical Setup tab > enter the password to
access the password-protected setup pages for
the Masimo rainbow SET parameters (see
To access the SpO2 Pulse CO-Ox pages
page 281).
 Select the SpO2/Pulse CO-Ox parameter field
The top portion of the setup pages contain the Auto
to select the respective page directly.
set and Alarm buttons for configuring the alarm
or functions (no acoustic and optical alarm signals for
PI and SpOC). For detailed alarm setup
information, see "Configuring the alarm settings for
menu bar.
a patient" on page 136.
2 Select the horizontal SpO2 / Pulse CO-Ox tab.
button.
SpO2 parameter setup functions
General SpO2 setup functions take place in the

SpO2 page (see page 275).

Pulse tone Off, 5%, 10% (default), 20%, 30%, 40%, Sets the volume of the pulse
volume 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100% tone.
Tone source – ECG (default) Selects the source of the pulse
– SpO2 tone which affects either the
ECG or the SpO2 parameter
field display (see page 271).
For the SpO2 selection, the
higher the pitch of the tone, the
higher the SpO2 saturation
percentage.
Waveform size 10%, 20%, 30%, 40% (default), 50%, 60%, Sets the amplitude of the SpO2
[%] 70%, 80%, 90%, 100% waveforms.
If the waveform height exceeds
the display size of the channel,
the waveform appears clipped
(this does not affect the SpO2
signal processing).
FastSat mode On, Off (default) Allows rapid tracking of arterial
oxygen saturation changes.
When the Averaging time
setting is set to 2 to 4s, the
FastSat mode selection is
grayed out.
Sensitivity mode – Normal (default) – standard mode Determines the level of
detection sensitivity.
– APOD (adaptive probe off detection) –
the least sensitive mode for detecting a The message APOD or Max
reading on patients with low perfusion. appear in the SpO2 parameter
Provides the best detection for detached field when the corresponding
sensors. This mode is useful for patients sensitivity setting is selected.
at particular risk for sensors becoming When the setting Normal is
detached such as children or patients who selected, no message appears
are restless. in the parameter field.
– Max – provides maximum sensitivity for
poor signals

Averaging time 2 to 4, 4 to 6, 8 (default), 10, 12, 14, 16 s Determines how quickly the
reported SpO2 value responds
to changes in the patient’s
oxygen saturation.
A longer averaging time
provides a more accurate
result. However, in clinical
situations where rapid
physiological changes have to
be monitored, use a shorter
averaging time.
orange, white (default). waveforms and parameter
labels and values.
NOTE
The password-protected alarm setting SpO2
sensor off provides additional SpO2 alarm
configuration.
Masimo rainbow SET Pulse CO-Ox parameter setup functions
General Masimo rainbow SET SpO2 setup

functions take place in the Pulse CO-Ox page. To
access this setup page, see page 275. Additional
password-protected functions are available (see
page 281).

Show parameters – SpHb 1)
(default) Selects the parameter for the
parameter 1 location in the
(left button) – SpOC
Pulse CO-Ox parameter field.
– PVI The associated parameter label
and value have the largest font.
– SpCO
With an Hb sensor, the default
– SpMet
parameter is SpHb. With a CO-
sensor, the default parameter
for the parameter 1 location in
the parameter field changes
automatically to SpCO.
Changes to the parameter
selection are retained if the
same sensor is disconnected
and then reconnected. The
parameter selection changes to
the default selection, if another
Masimo rainbow SET sensor
type is connected.
1)
If the venous blood source was selected for SpHb Cal, the parameter label changes from SpHb
(arterial blood source) to SpHbv.

Show parameters – SpHb 1)
Selects the parameter for the
(middle button) – SpOC (default)
– PVI
With an Hb sensor, the default
– SpCO parameter is SpOC. With a CO-
sensor, the default parameter
– SpMet
for the parameter 2 location in
the parameter field changes
automatically to SpMet.
type is connected.
Show parameters – SpHb 1) Selects the parameter for the
(right button) – SpOC
– PVI (default)
PVI is the default parameter for
– SpMet the parameter 3 location in the
parameter field for both CO and
Hb sensors.
type is connected.
1)
Note: if the venous blood source was selected for SpHb Cal, the parameter label changes from SpHb

SpHb averaging For SpHb the selections are:
1)
Determines how responsive the
time monitor is to rapid physiological
– Long – approximately 6 minutes
changes while tracking blood
– Medium (default) – approximately 3 hemoglobin values.
minutes
– Short – approximately 1 minute provides a more accurate
averaging time.
Pulse CO-Ox mini – SpHb 1) (default) Selects the parameter to be
trend included in the mini-trend
– SpCO
display.
– SpOC
– SpMet
– PVI
(SpCO is the default when a CO sensor is
used)
orange, white (default). parameter labels and values.
1)
if the venous blood source was selected for SpHb Cal, the parameter label changes from SpHb
Password-protected Masimo rainbow SET setup functions
Additional Masimo rainbow SET setup functions

take place in the Setup page which is protected by
a clinical password. To access this setup page, see
page 275.
SpHb Cal – Arterial (default) Selects the blood sampling
source which is used to
– Venous
calculate the SpHb value.
The SpHb value changes to
SpHbv when the SpHb Cal
setting Venous is selected.
PVI averaging – Short Determines how responsive the
time monitor is to rapid physiological
– Long (default)
changes while tracking pleth
variability index.
provides a more accurate
averaging time.
SpO2 and pulse rate with Nellcor OxiMax MCable
Overview of SpO2 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

SpO2 precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Connecting the Nellcor OxiMax MCable. . . . 286
Patient preparation for SpO2 monitoring . . . 287

Applying the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
SpO2 display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

SpO2 parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Accessing the SpO2 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
SpO2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . 290
Overview of SpO2 monitoring
SpO2 monitoring is only possible with an SpO2 Refer to the Instructions for use Infinity Acute Care
MCable.The M540 uses the Infinity MCable – System – Infinity M540 for a detailed description of
Nellcor OxiMax (Nellcor OxiMax MCable) to the M540 SpO2 functions.
measure the percentage of functional hemoglobin
The SpO2 monitoring functions are configurable in
saturated with oxygen (%SpO2) and derive a pulse
the parameter-specific setup page (see page 290).
rate (PLS*) continuously. The values are displayed
on the M540 and the Cockpit. Before performing any monitoring functions, refer
A sensor applied to the patient measures the
patients" on page 13. Parameter-specific error
absorption levels of red and infrared light. The
messages are listed on page 541.
Nellcor OxiMax MCable uses the difference
between the two measurements to calculate the
percentage of saturated hemoglobin (SpO2).
Because light absorption varies with blood volume
and blood volume varies with pulse rate, the Nellcor
OxiMax MCable can also derive a pulse rate – Saturation (SpO2)
(PLS*). – Pulse rate (PLS*)
SpO2 measurements are for adult, pediatric and NOTE

neonatal patients. SpO2 monitoring may be compromised by the
patient’s condition such as low perfusion, low
NOTE hematocrit level, high hemoglobin concentration,
Information about wavelength range may be high CO, elevated levels of Bilirubin, and
useful during photodynamic therapy. For details, excessive motion.
see the technical data chapter of the Instructions
for use Infinity Acute Care System – Infinity M540.
SpO2 precautions
Interfering substances: Carboxyhemoglobin may WARNING

erroneously increase measurement values. The
To reduce the hazard of burns during surgery,
level of increase is approximately equal to the
keep the sensor or transducer and their
amount of carboxyhemoglobin present. Dyes, or
associated cables away from the surgical site,
any substance containing dyes that change arterial
the electro-surgical unit return electrode, and
pigmentation may cause erroneous measurement
earth ground.
values.
WARNING WARNING
High oxygen levels may predispose a Inspect the application site every two to three
premature baby to retinopathy of prematurity. hours to ensure skin quality and correct
If this is a consideration do NOT set the high optical alignment. If the skin quality changes,
alarm limit to 100%, which is equivalent to move the sensor to another site. Change the
switching the alarm off. Transcutaneous SpO2 application site at least every four hours.
monitoring is recommended for premature
babies receiving supplemental oxygen. WARNING
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Patient injury can occur if the oximeter is
WARNING applied wrong or if it is subject to excessive
An SpO2 sensor should not be used as an pressure over a prolonged interval.
apnea monitor.
CAUTION
WARNING Do not immerse the sensor or patient cable in any
Use only Nellcor- and Dräger-specified liquid. Moisture may present a safety risk.
sensors. Other sensors may not provide
adequate protection against defibrillation and NOTE
may put the patient at risk. An SpO2 sensor can be used during defibrillation,
but the readings may be inaccurate for up to
WARNING 20 seconds.
An SpO2 sensor should be considered an
early warning device. If a trend towards NOTE
patient hypoxemia is observed, blood Possession or purchase of this device does not
samples should be analyzed by laboratory convey any express or implied license to use the
instruments to completely understand the device with unauthorized consumable products
condition of the patient. which would, alone, or in combination with this
device, fall within the scope of one or more of the
WARNING patents relating to this device and/or consumable
The pulsations from an intra-aortic balloon products. For a list of approved sensors, see the
support can elevate the pulse rate. Verify the Instructions for use Infinity Acute Care System –
pulse rate of the patient against the heart rate. Accessories.
NOTE NOTE
Do not use a functional tester to assess the A functional tester can be used to measure the
accuracy of an SpO2 sensor or an SpO2 sensor total error of an SpO2 sensor monitor if a
monitor. Since SpO2 sensor measurements are particular calibration waveform has been
statistically distributed, only about two-thirds of independently demonstrated to be accurate for
those measurements can be expected to fall that system. The functional tester can then
within ±A rms of a CO-oximeter's measured value. measure how accurately a particular SpO2
sensor is in reproducing the calibration waveform.
Connecting the Nellcor OxiMax MCable
The Nellcor OxiMax MCable cable connects A SpO2 port on the M540
directly to the M540.
B MCable connector
A C MCable 14-pin connector
D Intermediate cable connector to MCable
E Intermediate cable connector to sensor
B To connect the Nellcor OxiMax MCable

1 Connect the Nellcor OxiMax MCable connector
(B) to the blue SpO2 port (A) of the M540.
2 Attach the intermediate cable (D) to the
connector of the Nellcor OxiMax MCable (C).
3 Attach the appropriate sensor cable to the end
of the intermediate cable (E) – see page 288 for
more information.
E
331
Patient preparation for SpO2 monitoring
The following tips provide optimal SpO2 monitoring – Bright light causing erratic measurement or
results but must never replace hospital-approved missing values. Cover the sensor with opaque
practices or manufacturer’s recommendations. material if it is likely to be exposed to direct
bright light.
The accuracy of SpO2 monitoring depends largely
on the strength and quality of the SpO2 signal. – Significant levels of dysfunctional hemoglobins
(HbCO or MetHb)
If a finger is used as a monitoring site, remove any
nail polish. Cut the finger nails of the patient, if – Intravascular dyes such as indocyanine green
necessary, for better sensor placement. or methylene blue
Pulses may be counted erroneously due to the – Excessive patient movement
following conditions:
– Venous pulsations
– Placement of a sensor that is too tight
– Placement of a sensor on an extremity with a
– Patient experiences hypotension, severe blood pressure cuff, arterial catheter, or
vasoconstriction, severe anemia, or intravascular line
hypothermia
– Arterial occlusion proximal to the sensor
– Patient is in cardiac arrest or is in shock
Applying the sensor To apply the sensor

1 Select the size and type of sensor that is best
If you are using a reusable sensor, make sure it is suited for your patient. Follow the
clean before applying it to the patient. Follow the recommendations of the manufacturer.
recommendations of the manufacturer.
2 Position the sensor correctly and attach it to
WARNING your patient.
Inspect the application site every two to three
hours to ensure skin quality and correct opti-
cal alignment. If the skin quality changes,
move the sensor to another site. Change the
application site at least every four hours.
NOTE
Read the instructions provided with the sensor for
optimal application techniques and for safety in-
formation. Never use damaged sensors. Doing so
may compromise performance.
330
3 Connect the sensor to the Nellcor OxiMax
MCable.
NOTE
After connecting the sensor, do the following if the
sensor-LED does not light up:
– Observe the monitor for any message and act
accordingly
– Replace the sensor.
SpO2 display
On the Cockpit, the SpO2 display consists of:

– SpO2 parameter field
– SpO2 pulse plethysmogram waveform
SpO2 parameter field
The SpO2 parameter field contains the following

A B C elements:
A SpO2 label
B Units of measure – can be
D activated/deactivated
I E C PLS* (pulse) label
H D PLS* value
symbols when alarms are deactivated
G F
F Alarm off symbol when alarms are deactivated.
The diagram shows a typical parameter field layout. When alarms are activated, the alarm limits are
This layout may change when additional displayed instead.
parameters are put on display. For more
NOTE
information, see "Parameter fields" on page 284.
The alarm limits for SpO2 remain visible at the
Parameter fields report parameter values and Cockpit, the M540, on the ICS, and on remote
indicate the alarm status of parameters. Parameter devices even though the Show alarm limits
fields can also report technical conditions such as setting is deactivated (see page 473). For PLS,
disconnected sensors and so on. For detailed the limits area in the parameter field appears
information regarding the content of parameter blank.
"Troubleshooting" on page 525. If SpO2 and/or PLS alarms are deactivated, the
usual symbol appears next to the parameter
label.
NOTE
G Message area for SpO2 messages
The pulse plethysmogram waveform is directly
proportional to the strength of the pulse H SpO2 saturation value
amplitude.
I SpO2 blip that pulsates with each detected
pulse (only when the selected pulse tone
source is SpO2 – see page 290).
Accessing the SpO2 settings
1 Select the SpO2 parameter field to select the The top portion of the page contains the Auto set
SpO2 page directly. and Alarm buttons for configuring the alarm
or
Select Sensor parameters... from the main page 136.
menu bar.
2 If you cannot see the tab, select the following
button.
SpO2 parameter setup functions
All SpO2 setup functions take place in the SpO2

page.

Pulse tone Off, 5%, 10% (default), 20%, Sets the volume of the pulse tone.
volume 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%,
80%, 90%, 100%
Tone source ECG (default), SpO2 Selects the source of the pulse tone which
affects both the ECG and the SpO2
parameter field display (see page 289). For
the SpO2 selection, the higher the pitch of the
tone, the higher the SpO2 saturation
percentage.
Waveform size 10%, 20%, 30%, 40% (default), Sets the amplitude of the SpO2 waveforms.
[%] 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%,
If the waveform height exceeds the display
100%
size of the channel, the waveform appears
clipped (without affecting the SpO2 signal
processing).

Response mode – Normal (default) – up to Establishes the frequency the oximeter uses
90% change within 5 to to calculate, record, and display SpO2
7 seconds saturation levels:
– Fast – up to 90% change – Fast mode responds to changes in blood
within 2 to 4 seconds oxygen saturation levels in 2 to 4 seconds
when calculating%SpO2.
– Normal mode responds to changes in
blood oxygen saturation in 5 to 7 seconds
when calculating%SpO2.
SatSeconds alarm Off (default), 10, 25, 50, 100 This selection does the following:
SatSeconds
– Analyzes desaturation events by
NOTE: When SatSeconds is multiplying their duration (seconds) by the
set to any value other than Off, number of percentage points the patient
the Desat. alarm status is set exceeds the alarm limit.
to Off.
– Eliminates nuisance alarms caused by
brief and numerous violations of lower and
upper alarm limits.
– Overrides the alarm validation setting
(see page 472) and the SpO2 high priority
desaturation alarm.
Color Red, green, blue, yellow, light Determines the color of the waveforms and
blue, purple, orange, white parameter labels and values.
(default).
NOTE
The password-protected alarm setting SpO2 check sensor provides additional SpO2 alarm
configuration. For more detailed information see page 125.
Temperature
Temperature
Overview of temperature monitoring . . . . . . 294
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Temperature display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Temperature parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Accessing the temperature dialog . . . . . . . . 296

To apply a temperature label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Temperature parameter setup functions . . . 297
Temperature
Overview of temperature monitoring
The M540 measures and displays the following Refer to the instructions for use Infinity Acute Care
temperature values and relays them to the Cockpit System – Infinity M540 for a detailed description of
for display: the M540 temperature functions.
– Surface body temperature Before performing any monitoring functions, refer
– Core temperature
patients" on page 13. For parameter-specific error
Temperature monitoring is intended for adult, messages, see "SpO2" on page 541.
pediatric, and neonatal patients. All clinical
For details on how to connect temperature sensors
thermometer readings are a direct measurement,
to the M540 or to hemodynamic pods, refer to the
except when using the Tcore sensor.
NOTE Infinity M540.
The temperature functions and associated probes
should be calibrated every two years by qualified Supported parameters
personnel to maintain an accuracy of ±0.1 °C – Ta, Tb, ∆T: absolute temperature values,
(±0.2 °F). temperature difference value
The temperature monitoring functions are – T1a, T1b, ∆T1: absolute temperature values,
configurable in the parameter-specific setup page temperature difference value
(see page 296).
Precautions
WARNING
Protective covers for general purpose probes
contain latex.
NOTE
Cover internally placed reusable temperature
sensors with temperature sensor sheaths.
NOTE
After starting the body temperature measure-
ment, it takes some time until the monitor displays
the actual value. This time period depends on the
difference in temperature between environment
and body.
Temperature
Temperature display
On the Cockpit, the temperature display consists of The temperature parameter field contains the
a parameter field (see page 297). following elements:
Any temperature values originating from the
MPod – QuadHemo, the Hemo2 pod, or the Hemo4 A B E A F E
pod are labeled T1a, T1b, and ∆T1. Any
temperature values originating from a single or dual
temperature Y-cable that are connected to the
M540 temperature port are labeled Ta, Tb, and ∆T.
When only a single temperature sensor is
connected, only one temperature value is
displayed. The values for the second temperature
and temperature difference appear blank.
F C D E
040
Temperature parameter field
A Temperature label
NOTE B Units of measure (can be activated/deactivated)
The following diagram shows a typical parameter C Temperature difference parameter label or
field layout. For more information, see second direct temperature label
"Temperature parameter setup functions" on
page 297. Temperature values in parameter fields D Calculated temperature difference or second
may display with a decimal point instead of a direct temperature value
comma. E Upper/lower alarm limits or crossed triangle
Parameter fields report parameter values and
indicate the alarm status of parameters. Parameter F Temperature value
disconnected sensors and so on. For detailed
Temperature
Accessing the temperature dialog
 Select the temperature parameter field to select To apply a temperature label

the Temp. page directly.
or 1 Select the Label temps tab.
1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main 2 Select the desired temperature parameter (Ta,
menu bar. Tb, T1a, T1b).
2 Select the Temp. (Temp. 1) tab to access the 3 Select a label to apply to the temperature
Temp. page. If you cannot see the tab, select sensor (Oral, Eso, Nasal, etc.).
the following two symbols located in the upper
right corner of the dialog: symbol and the
display filter button.
The top portion of the Temp./Temp. 1 page con-
tains the Auto set and Alarm buttons for configur-
ing the alarm functions. For detailed alarm setup in-
formation, see "Configuring the alarm settings for a
patient" on page 136.
Complete the following steps to access the
temperature labels and apply these labels to the
temperature sensors.
1 Press the Sensor parameters... button on the
main screen.
2 Press the button until you see the Temp.
tab in the upper row of tabs.
3 Select the Temp. tab.
NOTE
The Temp. tab refers to Ta and Tb. The Temp. 1
tab refers to T1a, and T1b.
Temperature
Temperature parameter setup functions
All temperature setup functions take place in the NOTE

Temp./Temp. 1/Label temps pages (see
On the M540, changing the color of one tempera-
page 296).
ture parameter changes the color of all the tem-
perature parameters.
CAUTION
Do not connect a Tcore® sensor to the Cardiac
Output (C.O.) Tb port on an MPod — Quad Hemo.

Ta – TOral Ta configures the first
temperature value on the
Tb – TEso
M540.
– TNasal
Tb configures the second
– TRect temperature value on the
M540.
– TBlad
– Tcore
– TBld1
– TBlnkt
– TSkin
– TR
– TL
ΔT Difference Ta–Tb
Color 1) Red, White (default), Yellow, Green, Light Determines the color of all
blue, Blue, Purple, Orange temperature parameter labels
and values.
Temperature

T1a – T1Oral T1a configures the third
temperature value.
T1b – T1Eso
T1b configures the fourth
– T1Nasal
temperature value.
– T1Rect
– T1Blad
– T1core
– T1Bld1
– T1Blnkt
– T1Skin
– T1R
– T1L
ΔT1 Difference T1a–T1b
Color 1)
Red, White (default), Yellow, Green, Light Determines the color of all
blue, Blue, Purple, Orange temperature parameter labels
and values.
1)
This setting is a patient default which may be unique for each patient category; it is part of the profile.
Non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP)
Overview of non-invasive blood pressure

monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Non-invasive blood pressure precautions. . . 301
Connecting the non-invasive blood

pressure hose and cuff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Patient preparation for non-invasive blood

pressure monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Applying the blood pressure cuff . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Non-invasive blood pressure display. . . . . . 304

Non-invasive blood pressure parameter
fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Continuous mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Interval mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Non-invasive blood pressure

measurement modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Single-measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Interval mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Continuous measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Venous stasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Activating or deactivating venous stasis. . . . . . 309
Accessing the non-invasive blood

pressure settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Non-invasive blood pressure parameter

setup functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Overview of non-invasive blood pressure monitoring
The M540 uses the oscillometric method to acquire NOTE

and process non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP)
The non-invasive blood pressure functionality
signals and sends the results to the Cockpit for
should be calibrated every two years by technical-
display. Blood pressure measurements are
ly qualified personnel as described in the Service
determined by the oscillometric method and are
manual.
equivalent to those obtained by intra-arterial
methods, within the limits prescribed by the Refer to the instructions for use Infinity Acute Care
Association for Advancement of Medical System – Infinity M540 for a detailed description of
Instrumentation, Electronic Automated the M540 non-invasive blood pressure functions.
Sphygmomanometers.
The non-invasive blood pressure monitoring
The M540 inflates and then deflates a blood functions are configurable in the parameter-specific
pressure cuff wrapped around the patient’s arm or setup page (see page 310).
leg. A hose connects the cuff to the monitor which
determines the systolic, diastolic and mean Before performing any monitoring functions, refer
pressures for adult, pediatric and neonatal patients. to the section "For your safety and that of your
To protect the patient from excessive inflation limits, messages are listed on page 548.
the blood pressure cuff automatically deflates
when:
– A measurement exceeds 2 minutes in adult and Supported parameters
pediatric mode
– NIBP S – systolic non-invasive blood pressure
– A measurement exceeds 90 seconds in
neonatal mode – NIBP D – diastolic non-invasive blood pressure
– NIBP M – mean non-invasive blood pressure
Non-invasive blood pressure precautions
WARNING WARNING
Rapid, prolonged cycling of non-invasive Accurate non-invasive blood pressure
blood pressure measurements have on measurements depend on the correct size and
occasion been associated with petechia, type of the blood pressure cuff in relation to
ischemia, purpura, or neuropathy. Make sure the patient's arm circumference. The wrong
that the cuff is properly attached and check sized cuff, or cuffs outside the range or size
the cuff site regularly to prevent the cuff manufactured by Dräger, can cause
pressure from impeding the blood flow. inaccurate measurements. Use only Dräger
approved cuffs and make sure that the correct
WARNING size is used for each patient.
Obstructions may cause the cuff to inflate and
deflate improperly and result in inaccurate WARNING
measurement values. Check the hose and cuff To reduce the possibility of pumping air into
for damage and soiling. Do not allow the hose the patient’s blood vessels, never connect
and cuff to come in contact with fluids, and pneumatic connectors to an intravascular
make sure that they are not compressed or system.
kinked.
WARNING
WARNING Before monitoring neonates and infants:
Do not place the cuff on injured or breached – Select the correct cuff size and hose.
skin because cuff compression could further – Select the neonatal or pediatric patient
damage the tissue. category, if not already selected. This
provides the appropriate inflation for
WARNING neonates, infants, and pediatric patients
and protects neonatal patients from
Do not place the cuff on a limb with either an
excessive cuff pressures and longer cuff
intra-arterial line or a vascular prosthesis
cycle time.
because cuff compression will impede
perfusion. Failure to follow the above actions could
result in extreme discomfort, petechiae,
WARNING ischemia, purpura, or neuropathy.
Do not perform a blood pressure
measurement on the upper arm of the side of NOTE
a mastectomy. The effectiveness of non-invasive blood pressure
monitoring has not been established in pregnant
WARNING patients, including pre-eclamptic patients.
When measuring non-invasive blood pressure
and another parameter simultaneously on the
same limb, the measurement of the other
parameter can be temporarily interrupted.
NOTE NOTE
The accuracy of the oscillometric blood pressure A systolic blood pressure higher than the current
signal can decrease (up to loss of measurement) high inflation limit may trigger a message that the
under the following conditions: non-invasive blood pressure inflation limit is low.
– weak pulses When this message appears, manually check the
– irregular pulses blood pressure of the patient.
– patient movement artifacts
– tremor artifacts
– respiratory artifacts
– pulses generated from a ventricular assist
device
Connecting the non-invasive blood pressure hose and cuff
The following diagram shows where the non- A Non-invasive blood pressure connector on the
invasive blood pressure hose connects to the non- M540
invasive blood pressure hose connector (A) on the
B Non-invasive blood pressure hose
side of the M540.
C Blood pressure cuff
To connect the hose and cuff

A 1 Select a blood pressure cuff size that is
appropriate for the patient.
B 2 Connect the blood pressure cuff (C) to the hose
(B).
3 Connect the non-invasive blood pressure hose
(B) to the non-invasive blood pressure
connector (A) of the M540.
C
336
Patient preparation for non-invasive blood pressure monitoring
The following tips provide optimal non-invasive A Index line

blood pressure monitoring results, but must never
B Artery marker
replace hospital-approved practices or
manufacturer’s recommendations. C Range labels
Accurate non-invasive blood pressure D Size indicator
measurements depend on the correct size and type
of the blood pressure cuff in relation to the arm
Correct patient positioning
circumference of the patient. The wrong sized
cuffs, or cuffs outside the range or size For a patient with hypertension who is not in a lying
manufactured by Dräger, can cause inaccurate position, perform the resting blood pressure
measurements. Use only Dräger approved cuffs measurement as follows:
and make sure that the correct size is used for each
– Place the patient in a comfortable seated
patient.
position.
– Make sure the legs are not crossed.
Applying the blood pressure cuff – Make sure the feet are flat on the floor.
Weak or irregular pulses, patient movement, – Make sure the patient is leaned back and arms
tremors, or respiratory artifacts can affect the are at rest.
accuracy of non-invasive blood pressure – Apply the center of the cuff at the level of the
measurements and even cause them to fail. Before right atrium.
applying the cuff, read the non-invasive blood
pressure precautions. – The patient should be relaxed, if possible, and
should not talk during measurement.
We recommend that you do not apply the cuff on a
limb that is already used for other measurements. – Wait for 5 minutes, if possible, before
Make sure that other patient connections do not performing the first measurement.
interfere with each other.
NOTE
The following diagram depicts a typical Dräger cuff. The accuracy of the blood pressure measurement
can be affected by the following conditions:
A – The measuring site, the lying position, patient
movement, and the physiological condition of
D the patient.
– Cuffs that are stored or used outside of the
B specified environmental conditions. For
acceptable conditions, refer to the Technical
Data chapter of the Instructions for useInfinity
Acute Care System – Infinity M540.
C C
337
NOTE 1 Place the cuff 2 to 5 cm (1 to 2 inches) above

the elbow (or around the middle of the thigh).
Blood pressure measurements can be affected by
Place the cuff label "this side to patient" against
arrhythmias (for example, atrial and premature
the skin.
ventricular contraction), atrial fibrillation, low
perfusion, diabetes, renal diseases, trembling and 2 Place the artery marker (B) over the artery
shivering. In the presence of implausible pointing to the hand or the foot. Place the cuff
measurement values check for the above- label ’index’ (A) so that it falls within the range
mentioned reasons and repeat the measurement. labels (C) to ensure the correct fit. If the cuff
If possible, wait for a few minutes before does not fall within the indicated range, select a
performing another measurement at the same cuff that better accommodates the limb
measuring site. circumference.
3 Wrap the deflated cuff snug around the limb
To apply the cuff without impeding blood flow. Make sure there is
a finger’s width of space between the cuff and
Before applying the cuff to the patient, read and
the upper arm or thigh before fastening it.
understand the manufacturer’s warnings in the
Instructions for Use for the cuff.
Non-invasive blood pressure display
On the Cockpit, the non-invasive blood pressure Non-invasive blood pressure parameter
display consists of a parameter field. fields
When a measurement is in progress, the
background of the lower part of the parameter field NOTE
turns white. The following diagram shows a typical parameter
During low systolic or diastolic pulse amplitudes or field layout. This layout may change when
significant motion artifacts, the parameter field may additional parameters are put on display. For
only display a mean value. If the M540 is in venous- more information, see "Parameter fields" on
stasis mode, the cuff pressure and the label page 70.
Venous stasis appears in the non-invasive blood
pressure parameter field . Parameter fields report parameter values and
If you cannot apply the cuff at heart level, adjust the fields can also report technical conditions such as
displayed systolic and diastolic non-invasive blood disconnected sensors and so on. For detailed
pressure values as follows: add 8 mmHg (1.1 kPa) information regarding the content of parameter
for each 10 cm (4 inches) above the heart; subtract fields for each parameter, see the chapter
8 mmHg (1.1 kPa) – for each 10 cm (4 inches) "Troubleshooting" on page 525.
below the heart.
The appearance of non-invasive blood pressure
parameter fields also depends on the selected non-
invasive blood pressure mode.
Continuous mode Interval mode
The following diagram shows a parameter field The following diagram shows a parameter field
when the continuous non-invasive blood pressure when the interval mode is selected (see page 307
mode is selected (see page 308). for more information).
A B C A B C
K D I D
E E
J I H G F H G F
041
043
A NIBP parameter label A NIBP parameter label
B Unit of measurement (can be B Unit of measurement (can be
activated/deactivated) activated/deactivated)
C Time since last non-invasive blood pressure C Time since last non-invasive blood pressure
measurement measurement
D Mean pressure value D Last mean pressure value
E Alarm limits or crossed triangle symbols when E Alarm limits or crossed triangle symbols when
alarms are deactivated alarms are deactivated
F Time remaining before continuous mode is F Selected inflation interval (see page 310)
terminated
G Inflation pressure value or progress indicator
G Label Cont. mode
H Label auto (after the measurement is
H Unit of measurement completed, a progress indicator replaces the
label to indicate the time before the start of the
I Inflation pressure value
next measurement)
J Label Inflation pressure
I Systolic and diastolic pressure value
K Systolic/diastolic pressure value
Non-invasive blood pressure measurement modes
WARNING At the beginning of a measurement, the M540

inflates the cuff to a pressure that is 25 mmHg
Press the start/stop key to deflate the cuff
(3.3 kPa) in adult/pediatric mode and 30 mmHg
rapidly if an adverse effect occurs on the
(4 kPa) in neonatal mode above the previously
patient.
detected systolic value. If the M540 cannot obtain a
valid measurement, it re-inflates the cuff to the
The following non-invasive blood pressure
maximum inflation pressure provided the
measurement modes are available:
measurement cycle has not timed-out. If the M540
– Single cannot obtain a measurement within the
measurement cycle, no further attempts are made
– Interval
until the next scheduled interval or until you initiate
– Continuous a single measurement manually. Error messages
identify the cause of failed measurements (see
– Venous stasis
page 548).
The selected mode affects the appearance of the
The last non-invasive blood pressure measurement
non-invasive blood pressure parameter field (see
value is displayed in the parameter field until the
page 304).
new measurement is completed. New values
Before taking any non-invasive blood pressure appear at the end of a measurement. A chime
measurements, read the precautions on page 303. sounds at the end of a measurement when the
corresponding function is activated (see page 310).
Single-measurement mode
Single-measurement mode allows you to start Interval mode

measurements when needed. You can start and
stop a single measurement at the M540 and at the
WARNING
Cockpit.
Because non-invasive blood pressure
measurements occur intermittently, a
To start/stop a single measurement patient’s condition may change between
Do one of the following: measurements. Therefore, do not rely on non-
invasive blood pressure alarms alone to notify
 Press the start/stop key on the front of the you of a patient’s changing condition.
M540. Press the key again to stop the
measurement. In interval mode, the M540 initiates measurements
or at set intervals. Changing the interval setting during
a measurement resets the interval timer. If you
 Press the NIBP start/stop button on the main select another interval setting after interval mode
menu bar of the Cockpit. Press the button again was deactivated, you must select the NIBP
to stop the measurement. start/stop button on the menu bar, for interval
measurements to start.
NOTE To start/stop interval mode

A safety timer ensures that a cuff remains deflated 1 Select the non-invasive blood pressure
for at least 30 seconds before the end of a parameter field to select the NIBP page directly,
measurement and the beginning of a new one.
or
This precaution avoids prolonged impeded blood
flow which could be harmful. The safety timer Select Sensor parameters... from the main
overrides any interval setting and is of particular menu bar.
importance in the 1 and 2-minute intervals.
2 Select the NIBP tab to access the NIBP page.
You can still take single measurements during an 3 Select Interval time [min] and make your
interval cycle. selection. The available settings are: Off
Interval measurements are not possible during: (default), 1, 2, 2.5, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 45, 60,
120, 240 min.
– Venous-stasis mode – the measurements
resume immediately after the cuff deflates. For any interval setting of 5 minutes and up, the
following time alignment occurs. After the first
– Cardiac bypass mode – select the NIBP measurement is completed, all subsequent
start/stop button to resume interval measurements align with the next natural time
measurement after exiting cardiac bypass boundary that corresponds to the selected
mode. interval. For example, if a 5-minute interval is
– Standby mode – select the NIBP start/stop selected at 10:03, the next interval starts at
button to resume interval measurement after 10:05, 10:10 and so on. If a 10-minute interval
exiting standby mode. is selected at 10:07, the next interval starts at
10:10, 10:20, and so forth.
– Activated Continuous mode.
4 Press NIBP start/stop button on the main
menu bar if you change the mode setting from
Aligning interval mode settings between Off to another setting (otherwise, interval
Cockpit and M540 measurements will not start).
If interval mode is deactivated on the Cockpit and
NOTE
an M540 is docked with interval mode activated
and a measurement is in progress, the non- Pressing the NIBP start/stop button longer than
invasive blood pressure measurement is canceled two seconds suspends interval mode and sets the
automatically. In addition, interval mode is Interval time [min] to Off.
deactivated on the M540. If the M540 is power cycled while in interval mode,
If interval mode is deactivated on the M540, but you must press the NIBP start/stop button to
activated on the Cockpit, press the NIBP start/stop resume interval measurements.
button on either device to initiate interval mode.
If interval mode is activated on both devices but you To stop interval measurements
dock an M540 with a different interval time, the non-  Press the NIBP start/stop button on the main
invasive blood pressure measurement continues. menu bar of the Cockpit.
However, the M540 interval time is adjusted to the
Cockpit setting at the end of the measurement. or
If you turn the M540 off and on again, and interval  Press the start/stop key on the front of the
mode is activated on both the Cockpit and the M540.
M540, select NIBP start/stop button to resume
interval mode.
Continuous measurements To activate or deactivate continuous mode

1 Select the non-invasive blood pressure
WARNING parameter field to select the NIBP page directly,
When using continuous mode, observe the or
patient closely and verify limb perfusion
clinically. Be extra vigilant when using 2 Select Sensor parameters... from the main
continuous mode on neonates or menu bar.
hemodynamically compromised patients. 3 Select the NIBP tab to access the NIBP page.
In continuous mode, the M540 continuously 4 Select On or Off next to Continuous mode.
initiates NIBP measurements over a 5-minute
period. NOTE
Continuous non-invasive blood pressure mode
A 10 second (±1 second) minimum interval prevents you from enabling venous stasis.
between the end of one measurement and the start
of another provides minimal perfusion of the limb.
To stop continuous measurements
 Press the NIBP start/stop button on the main
menu bar,
or
 Deactivate Continuous mode in the NIBP
Venous stasis
By maintaining a constant cuff pressure, the M540 To activate or deactivate venous stasis
stops the blood flow to the lower extremity of the
cuffed limb long enough to cannulate a patient. In NOTE
this mode, the cuff occludes the limb for about as If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the
long as an non-invasive blood pressure Venous stasis button is also accessible on the
measurement takes (approximately 2 minutes for main menu bar. For more information, see
adults and approximately 1 minute for neonates). page 465.
WARNING 1 Select the non-invasive blood pressure

Do not use venous stasis on a limb that is parameter field to select the NIBP page directly,
unsuitable for non-invasive blood pressure or
measurements (for example, an arm with a
catheter). If the patient experiences adverse
reactions, immediately press the NIBP Select Sensor parameters... from the main
start/stop button to deflate the cuff. menu bar.
2 Select the NIBP tab to access the NIBP page.
3 Make sure non-invasive blood pressure
Activating or deactivating venous stasis
continuous mode is not activated (see
page 310).
NOTE
4 Select On next to Venous stasis.
Make sure continuous non-invasive blood pres-
sure mode is not enabled (see page 310) be- NOTE
cause it prevents you from using venous-stasis
When the venous-stasis mode begins, an
mode.
attention tone sounds.
During active venous stasis, the non-invasive blood

pressure parameter field reports the remaining time
and displays the message Stasis in the parameter
field. As soon as venous stasis is terminated, the
parameter field resumes its previous appearance
(see page 304).
Interval measurements are suspended during
venous stasis but resume immediately after the cuff
deflates.
Accessing the non-invasive blood pressure settings
1 Select the non-invasive blood pressure 2 Select the NIBP tab to access the NIBP page. If
parameter field to select the NIBP page directly. you cannot see the tab, select the following two
symbols located in the upper right corner of the
or
dialog: symbol and the display filter
Select Sensor parameters... from the main button.
menu bar.
The top portion of the page contains the Auto set
and Alarm buttons for configuring the alarm
page 136.
Non-invasive blood pressure parameter setup functions
All non-invasive blood pressure setup functions

take place in the NIBP page (see page 310).

Interval time [min] Off (default), 1 min, 2 min, 2.5 min, Defines intervals for non-invasive
3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, blood pressure measurements.
25 min, 30 min, 45 min, 60 min,
(Cardiac bypass 120 min, 240 min
mode and ECMO
mode automatically
deactivate interval
measurements)
Inflation mode Adult (default), Pediatric, Neonate Sets the threshold for maximum cuff
inflation.
Continuous mode On, Off (default) Initiates successive non-invasive blood
pressure measurements for 5 min.
Chime On, Off (default) Determines whether or not a tone
sounds at the end of a completed non-
invasive blood pressure measurement.
Venous stasis On, Off (default) Stops the blood flow to the lower part of
the cuffed limb for a fixed time.
Color Red, green, blue, yellow, light blue, Determines the color of the parameter
purple, orange, white (default). values and labels.
Invasive pressure (IP)
Overview of invasive pressure monitoring . . . 312

Invasive pressure precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Patient preparation for invasive pressure

monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Invasive pressure display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Invasive pressure parameter field . . . . . . . . . . 313
Large mean value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Invasive pressure waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Labeling invasive pressure channels. . . . . . 315
Standard labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Pressure label conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Pod-M540 label conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Zeroing a pressure transducer . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Zeroing a specific transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Pulmonary wedge pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

pods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Accessing the invasive pressure settings. . . 324
Invasive pressure parameter setup

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Measuring pulse pressure variation (PPV) . . . 327
Measuring systolic pressure variation

(SPV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Overview of invasive pressure monitoring
The M540 acquires, processes, and displays Supported parameters

invasive pressure (IP) signals and relays the data
to the Cockpit. Several pods are available for See page 315 for available invasive pressure
monitoring invasive pressure. Monitoring more than labels.
two pressures simultaneously requires the Multi-IP
option. – If both an arterial blood pressure and ICP are
connected, the algorithm computes the
Invasive pressure measurements are for adult, difference between ICP and mean arterial blood
pediatric, and neonatal patients. pressure and reports it as CPP.
Refer to the Instructions for use Infinity Acute Care – If both an arterial blood pressure and BDP are
System – Infinity M540 for a detailed description of connected, the algorithm computes the
the M540 invasive pressure functions. difference between BDP and mean arterial
The invasive pressure monitoring functions are blood pressure and reports it as BPP.
configurable in the parameter-specific setup page – If both an arterial blood pressure and ABD are
(see "Invasive pressure parameter setup functions" connected, the algorithm computes the
on page 325). difference between ABD and mean arterial
Before performing any monitoring functions, refer pressure and reports it as APP.
messages are listed on page 552.
For details on hemodynamic pods, refer to the
Instructions for use Infinity Acute Care System –
Infinity M540.
Invasive pressure precautions
WARNING
To prevent patient injury, never reuse a single-
use transducer.
WARNING
Do not zero all pressures simultaneously
using the key if any pressure waveform is
flat (nearly static).
There are additional warnings regarding pulmonary

wedge pressure on page 320.
Patient preparation for invasive pressure monitoring
NOTE – When preparing the patient, make sure there

are no air bubbles in the sensor or the stopcock.
If air bubbles appear in the tubing system, flush
the system with the infusion solution again. Air – For maximum signal strength, choose the
bubbles may lead to wrong pressure shortest possible length of pressure tubing.
measurement values. Shorter pressure tubing reduces signal
attenuation but is more susceptible to motion
The following tips provide optimal invasive artifacts. Pressure tubing with higher pressure
pressure monitoring results but must never replace limits signal dampening.
hospital-approved practices or manufacturer’s
recommendations. – Position the transducer so that it is level with the
appropriate anatomical reference point for each
monitored pressure.
Invasive pressure display
On the Cockpit, the invasive pressure display – Invasive pressure parameter field
consists of:
– Invasive pressure waveform
Invasive pressure parameter field
NOTE GP5, GP6, GP7, GP8, AXL, RAD, UAP, BRA, LV,
PA, RV) display systolic, diastolic, and mean
pressure values.
additional parameters are put on display. For Parameter fields for non-pulsatile pressures (LA,
more information, see "Parameter fields" RA, CVP, ICP, ICP2, ICP3, ICP4, ABD, BDP, ESO,
on page 70. FEMV, UVP, GPM) display only the mean pressure
value.
indicate the alarm status of parameters. Parameter If the M540 detects a static pressure, the algorithm
fields can also report technical conditions such as computes only the mean pressure. A static
disconnected sensors, and so on. For detailed pressure condition occurs when the maximum and
information regarding the content of parameter minimum values of a pulsatile pressure signal differ
fields for each parameter, see the chapter by less than 3 mmHg (0.4 kPa).
The content of the invasive pressure parameter
fields depends on whether the parameter is pulsatile
or non-pulsatile. Parameter fields for pulsatile
pressures (GP1, GP2, GP3, GP4, ART, AOR, FEM,
An invasive pulsatile pressure parameter field An invasive non-pulsatile pressure parameter field
contains the following elements: contains the following elements:
A B C
A B
E C
D
A IP parameter label
A Invasive pressure parameter label
B Unit of measurement (can be
activated/deactivated) B Mean pressure value
C Mean pressure value C Crossed triangle symbol when the diastolic
invasive pressure alarm is turned off.
D Alarm limits or crossed triangle symbols when
alarms are deactivated
E Systolic/diastolic pressure values
Large mean value Invasive pressure waveforms
The invasive pressure mean value can either be Invasive pressure waveforms are either displayed
displayed in regular or large font size. in separate waveform channels or in overlapped
format in one channel. When overlapped, the
waveform field increases to combine multiple
To activate the large mean value display
waveforms. For each invasive pressure waveform,
 Select the invasive pressure parameter field to a corresponding parameter field is displayed. To
select the Invasive pressures page directly. activate the overlap display for adjacent pressure
waveforms, see page 460 in the "System
or
configuration" chapter.
menu bar.
2 Select the desired Invasive pressures tab (for
example, GP1) along the right side of the
Invasive pressures page.
3 Select On next to Large mean.
Labeling invasive pressure channels
The invasive pressure label determines how a – The zero value, the date, and time associated
signal is analyzed and reported. The M540 takes with the pressure channel remain unchanged
the pressure labels from the connected pod or even if a new label is assigned.
MCable provided the transducers are connected.
When a new label is assigned to a pressure NOTE
channel, the M540 clears the parameters and Certain pressure labels have extra selections in
conditions set for the previous label (including their corresponding Cockpit parameter setup
alarms and waveform scales). It replaces these pages. For example, from the PA page you can
values with the settings of the new label. When the start a wedge pressure and from the ICP page
M540 is docked on the M500, all pressure labels you can set a minimum scale.
are transferred to the Cockpit.
The following rules apply to labeling pressure
channels:
– If no pressure labels are assigned, the labels
GP1 to GP8 are automatically assigned
depending on how many pressures are
connected.
NOTE
If the Cockpit displays the generic pressure labels
(GP1 through GP8), the displays on the Hemo2
and Hemo4 pods are labeled P1a, P1b, P1c, P1d.
To assign a pressure label manually or

 Select the invasive pressure parameter field to 1 Select Sensor parameters... on the main
access the Invasive pressures dialog directly. screen.
or 2 Select the Invasive pressures tab.
1 Select Sensor parameters... on the main 3 Select the Label pressures tab.
screen.
4 Select the desired invasive pressure by
2 Select the Invasive pressures tab. pressing one of the buttons in the upper row of
buttons.
3 Select the desired parameter tab on the right
side of the dialog. 5 Select the desired label by pressing one of the
buttons in the lower two areas, which are
4 Select the button next to Label on the left side
labeled Pulsatile labels and Non-pulsatile
of the dialog.
labels.
5 Click on the desired label to assign it to one of
The invasive pressure selected in step 4 now
the pressure paramters.
displays the label selected in step 5.
Standard labels
The M540 detects the labels automatically from the

hemodynamic pod, provided a transducer is
connected. The M540 transfers the labels to the
Cockpit. You can also label pressure channels
manually.
The following table lists the available invasive
pressure labels.
Invasive pressure labels

Label Pressure type Measured pressures Measurement range
ART Arterial blood pressure Systolic, diastolic, mean –50 to +400 mmHg
AOR Aortic arterial blood pressure –6.6 to +53.3 kPa
FEM Femoral arterial blood pressure
AXL Axillary arterial blood pressure
RAD Radial arterial blood pressure
UAP Umbillical arterial blood pressure
BRA Brachial arterial blood pressure
LV Left ventricular blood pressure
PA Pulmonary arterial blood pressure
RV Right ventricular blood pressure
CVP Central venous blood pressure Mean
FEMV Femoral venous blood pressure
ESO Esophageal pressure
UVP Umbilical venous pressure
RA Right atrial blood pressure
LA Left atrial blood pressure
ICP Intracranial pressure
CPP 1)
Cerebral perfusion pressure
ICP2 Intracranial pressure 2
CPP2 1)
Cerebral perfusion pressure 2
CPP3 1)
Cerebral perfusion pressure 3
CPP4 1) Cerebral perfusion pressure 4
ABD Intra-abdominal pressure
APP 1) Abdominal perfusion pressure
BDP Bladder pressure
BPP 1) Bladder perfusion pressure
Generic Labels
GP1 to GP8 Systolic, diastolic, mean
GPM Mean generic pressure Mean
The perfusion pressure value is only calculated when ICP/ABD/BDP and arterial blood pressure values are
1)
available.
Pressure label conflicts
Each pressure label is assigned to one location. If Pod-M540 label conflicts

you try to reuse a label, you must confirm it. The
M540 assigns the label to the currently selected The hemodynamic pods store pressure labels like
parameter field and places an automatic pressure the M540. When a pod with previously stored labels
label (GP1 to GP8) in the previous location. When is connected, different pressure labels may exist for
the M540 is docked in an IACS configuration, the the same channel, thus causing a conflict.
pressure labels are saved as part of the M540
profile. The label stored in the M540 has priority over the
label stored in the pod. When a patient monitored
by a standalone M540 is discharged, the label from
the M500 patient profile then takes priority over the
label stored in the M540. When an M540 is docked
in an IACS configuration, the M540 label remains in
use until manually changed.
Zeroing a pressure transducer
To establish accurate invasive pressure values, If the procedure fails after two attempts, replace the
zero the transducer according to the hospital’s transducer or consult specialized service
protocol at least once a day. Perform additional personnel.
zeroing under the following circumstances:
If the attention tone is activated (see page 457), a
– After introducing a catheter into the vascular tone sounds when the zeroing procedure is
system of the patient successfully completed.
– Before each monitoring session
– Each time you use a new transducer or
pressure tubing
– Whenever you connect the transducer cable to
the monitor
– If the reported pressure values seem incorrect
– When the message please check zero
appears.
For zeroing to be successful, a pressure must be
stable for at least 3 seconds. Messages report the
status of the zeroing process. The time and date of
the last successful zero is recorded on the Invasive
pressures page. Check the invasive pressure
waveform and repeat the zeroing procedure if the
zeroing fails because the pressures are not static.
Zeroing a specific transducer To zero all pressure transducers from the

Cockpit
This procedure allows you to select a specific 1 Align the transducers to the heart level of the
transducer for zeroing. You can also initiate the patient.
procedure from the M540 (see the Instructions for
use Infinity Acute Care System – Infinity M540 for 2 Close the stopcocks to the patient, and open
details). them to air.
3 Select the Sensor parameters... Zero all
To zero a specific transducer button on the main menu bar .
 Select the invasive pressure parameter field to 4 Select the Invasive pressures tab.
select the Invasive pressures page directly. 5 Select the Zero all button.
or or
1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main – Select the symbol next to the Sensor
menu bar. parameters... button on the main menu bar .
2 Select the Invasive pressures tab to access – Select the Zero all button.
the Invasive pressures page.
6 Verify that the transducers have been zeroed. If
3 Select the desired Invasive pressures tab (for zeroing failed, repeat the procedure.
example, ART) along the right side of the
Invasive pressures page. WARNING
4 Align the transducer to the level of the heart Using the Zero all function zeroes all static in-
(phlebostatic axis point, fifth intercostal space vasive pressure < 3 mmHg.
and midaxillary line).
Certain invasive pressure alarms are sup-
5 Close the transducer stopcock to the patient pressed while pressures are being zeroed. For
and open it to air. detailed information, see "Zeroing invasive
pressures" in the Alarms chapter.
6 Select the button next to Zero in the Invasive
pressures page.
NOTE
If the zeroing of the transducer is successful, a If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the
confirmation message appears. If zeroing Zero all button is also accessible on the main
failed, a failure message appears. In that case, menu bar. For more information, see page 465.
repeat steps three to five.
For details on how to zero all invasive pressures

simultaneously using a hemodynamic pod, see the
Infinity M540.
WARNING
Invasive pressure alarms are suppressed
while pressures are being zeroed. For detailed
Pulmonary wedge pressure
When the M540 is docked, you can calculate a WARNING

pulmonary wedge pressure (PWP) from the Hemo4
Do not over-inflate the balloon because an
pod, Hemo2 pod, and the MPod – QuadHemo. You
over-inflated balloon can rupture the
can also calculate a wedge pressure from the
pulmonary artery.
Wedge page on the Cockpit (see page 323). You
cannot request wedge pressures from the M540.
WARNING
During PWP measurements, only the mean PA
Alarm monitoring for invasive pressures, if
pressure is displayed.
activated, is temporarily deactivated during
WARNING PWP measurements to prevent nuisance
alarms. The parameter field does not display a
For the safety of the patient keep the balloon-
crossed triangle symbol because alarm
inflation time to the minimum necessary to
monitoring is automatically activated upon
acquire an accurate PWP value. Prolonged
completion of a wedge pressure
inflation of the balloon can result in
measurement.
pulmonary hemorrhage or infarction.
WARNING
The PA catheter may move into the wedge
position before the balloon is inflated. One
sign of this "catheter drift" is that the PWP
waveform becomes wedge shaped. Follow
your hospital’s clinical guidelines to correct
the catheter’s position.
Starting wedge measurements from the pods
To start a wedge pressure measurement 2 Press the Wedge key (A) again to start.
1 Press the Wedge key (A) on the Hemo2 pod, – PA alarms are deactivated temporarily.
Hemo4 pod, or the MPod – QuadHemo. The
– The message Wedge in progress appears
message Inflate balloon. Press "Wedge" to
on the Cockpit and the measurement
Start. appears on the Cockpit.
begins. A PWP value is displayed at the
Hemo2 pod bottom of the Wedge page on the Cockpit
A within 10 seconds. The message Deflate
balloon and press "Save wedge" to
finish appears.
3 Press the Wedge key (A) again to save the
value. The following happens on the Wedge
page of the Cockpit (see page 322):
– The message Invasive pressures appears
in the message field.
– A new PWP value calculated during the next
10 seconds appears. An attention tone
339
sounds at the end of the calculation when

the corresponding feature is activated (see
Hemo4 pod A page 457). Also, the message Deflate
balloon and press "Save wedge" to
finish appears in the message field.
– The PA and reference waveforms are
stopped, and the message Waveforms
stopped appears above the PA scale in the
display window.
– After a successful wedge measurement, the
PA waveform resumes its previous size and
sweep speed. PA systolic and diastolic
values are displayed again, and PA alarms
338
are restored to the values before entering

MPod – QuadHemo A Wedge mode.
340
Starting wedge measurements from the Cockpit
The following diagram shows the Wedge page A Prepare wedge button
where you start wedge measurements manually.
B Start wedge button
The wedge pressure value is saved automatically
when: C Freeze/ Adjust button
– You close the Wedge page. D Save wedge button
– 240 seconds have elapsed after the wedge E Cancel wedge button
pressure was started and a valid PWP value
F Message field
exists.
G PWP value
Procedures
H PWP results window
G I Scale button
F
J Sweep speed [mm/s] button
A B C D E
K Reference waveform button
I
J
K
045
To start a wedge measurement

 Select the PA parameter field (if displayed) > 8 Select the Start wedge button (B).
select the Start wedge button.
– The message Wedge in progress appears
NOTE in the message field (F).
If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the – A new PWP value calculated during the next
Start wedge button is also accessible on the main 10 seconds appears. An attention tone
menu bar. For more information, see page 465. sounds at the end of the calculation when
the feature is activated (see page 457).
or Also, the message Deflate balloon and
press "Save wedge" to finish appears in
the message field (F).
menu bar.
– The PA and reference waveforms are
2 Select the Wedge tab (if not already selected).
stopped, and the message Waveforms
3 Verify that the PA catheter has been properly stopped appears above the PA scale in the
inserted. display window (H).
4 Select the Prepare wedge button (A). The – A horizontal cursor is drawn through the PA
following happens: waveform.
– PA alarms are deactivated temporarily 9 Select one of the following buttons:
– The message Inflate balloon. Press – Freeze/ Adjust button (C) to alter the PWP
"Wedge" to Start. appears in the message value manually.
field (F). Only the PA mean value appears in
– Save wedge button (D) to save the new
the parameter field (the diastolic/systolic
value (it is stored in the trend function)
values are blanked).
– The button Start wedge appears. – Cancel wedge (E) to cancel the
measurement.
5 Use the Scale button (I) to change the scale, if
necessary. After a successful wedge measurement, the PA
6 Use the Sweep speed [mm/s] (J) button to and respiratory waveforms resume their previous
select a different sweep speed for the size and sweep speed. PA systolic and diastolic
waveform, if necessary. values are displayed again, and PA alarms are
restored to the values before entering wedge
7 Use the Reference waveform button (K) to mode.
select a reference waveform (available settings:
None, RRi).
Accessing the invasive pressure settings
 Select the Invasive pressures parameter field The top portion of the page contains the Auto set
to select the Invasive pressures page directly. and Alarm buttons for configuring the alarm
or
Select Sensor parameters... from the main page 136.
menu bar > Invasive pressures tab to access
the Invasive pressures page. If you cannot
see the tab, select the following two symbols
located in the upper right corner of the dialog:
symbol and the display filter button.
Invasive pressure parameter setup functions
All invasive pressure setup functions take place in

the Invasive pressures page (see page 324).
Zero None Zeroes only the pressure indicated on the
Invasive pressures page and displays the
time and date of the last zeroing (see
page 319).
Label ART, AOR, UVP, FEM, AXL, RAD, UAP, Allows the user to assign a label to each
BRA, PA, LA, LV, RV, RA, ABD, BDP, pressure channel 1 through 8.
CVP, ESO, FEMV, ICP, ICP2, ICP3, ICP4,
GPM, RAD, UVP, GP1 to GP8.
The defaults are as follows:

– Channel 1: GP1
– Channel 2: GP2
– Channel 3: GP3
– Channel 4: GP4
– Channel 5: GP5
– Channel 6: GP6
– Channel 7: GP7
– Channel 8: GP8
Scale – 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 75, Controls the upper scale of the pressure
100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300 waveform.
mmHg
The lower scale value is either
– 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, –5 mmHg (–0.7 kPa) for pressures labeled
24, 30, 32, 36, 40 kPa CVP, RA, LA or 0 mmHg (0 kPa) for other
pressure labels.
– GP1 to GP8, arterial pressures, LV:
200 mmHg (30 kPa) for adults
150 mmHg (20 kPa) for pediatrics
100 mmHg (16 kPa) for neonates
– PA, RV: 50 mmHg (12 kPa)
– ICP, ABD, BDP, ESO, FEMV, UVP,
GPM, CVP, LA, RA: 20 mmHg (4 kPa)
Filter 8 Hz and 16 Hz (default) Selects the filter setting applied to the
invasive pressure signal.

Large On, Off (default) Determines whether the mean invasive
mean pressure value appears in large or normal
font.
Color Red, green, blue, yellow, light blue, purple, Determines the color of the waveforms,
orange, white. parameter labels, and values.
The various invasive pressure parameters
have the following defaults:
– ART, AOR, FEM, AXL, RAD, UAP,
BRA, GP1 to GP4 = red
– PA, LV, BDP = yellow
– CVP, ABD, ESO, FEMV, GPM, UVP =
blue
– ICP, ICP2, ICP3, ICP4, LA = purple
– RA, RV, GP5 to GP8 = orange
ICP parameter page only
Min. scale Allows you to select the minimum scale.
When this function is activated, the
following happens:
– The lower value is set at
–25 mmHg (–3 kPa)
– The higher value is set at 25 mmHg
(3 kPa)
– The Scale selection appears grayed
out
PA page only
Start None Allows you to start a wedge pressure
wedge measurement (see page 321).
Measuring pulse pressure variation (PPV)
The user selects values for the maximum pulse 9 Press the button next to Sweep speed and
pressure and the minimum pulse pressure on an select 6.25, 12.5, 25, or 50.
arterial waveform. These values are used to
calculate the pulse pressure variation. Up to three
To calculate a PPV measurement
PPV calculations provide the average that displays
on the PPV screen. 1 Press the Freeze button to stop the waveforms.
To setup a PPV configuration 2 Turn the rotary knob to select a PPmax(S)
value.
1 Press the Procedures... button on the main
screen. 3 Press the rotary knob to save the value.
2 Press the PPV tab. 4 Turn the rotary knob to select a PPmax(D)
value.
3 Press the button next to Arterial waveform and
select a pulsatile label: ART (default), AOR, 5 Press the rotary knob to save the value.
FEM, AXL, RAD, UAP, BRA.
6 Turn the rotary knob to select a PPmin(S)
4 Set the upper and lower scale values of the value.
waveform:
7 Press the rotary knob to save the value.
– Press the first button next to Scale [mmHg]
8 Turn the rotary knob to select a PPmin(D)
and select the number for the bottom of the
value.
scale.
– Press the second button next to Scale
[mmHg] and select the number for the top Or
of the scale.
– Press the Repeat button to calculate additional
5 Press the Off button next to Waveform Grid to measurements.
hide the grid.
NOTE
6 Press the On button next to Waveform Grid to
The three most recent measurements are used to
display the grid.
calculate the average value.
7 Press the Reference waveform button and
select one of the following: 10 Press the Save button when finished entering
values.
– Off
The latest average PPV value and timestamp
– Paw
displays in the upper right corner of the selected
– Flow arterial waveform within the last 24 hours.
– Volume PPV is calculated using the following formula:
– CO2 M540 PPmax – PPmin
PPV (%) = * 100
– CO2 Medibus.X PPmax + PPmin
2
– RRi where:
8 Press the button next to Scale and select the PPmax = PPmax (S) – PPmax (D) of max. art. pulse
desired scale number. PPmin = PPmin (S) – PPmin (D) of min. art. pulse
Measuring systolic pressure variation (SPV)
To calculate systolic pressure variation, the user 8 Press the box next to Scale and select the
selects values for the maximum systolic pressure desired scale number.
and the minimum systolic pressure from an arterial
9 Press the box next to Sweep speed and select
pressure waveform. These values are used to
6.25, 12.5, 25, or 50.
calculate the systolic pressure variation. Up to
three SPV calculations provide the average that
displays on the SPV screen. To calculate an SPV measurement
1 Press the Freeze tab to stop the waveforms.
To setup an SPV configuration
2 Turn the rotary knob to select a Max(S) value.
1 Press the Procedures... button on the main
3 Press the rotary knob to save the
screen.
measurement.
2 Press the SPV tab.
4 Turn the rotary knob to select a Min(S) value.
3 Press the button next to Arterial waveform and
select a pulsatile label: ART (default), AOR,
FEM, AXL, RAD, UAP, BRA. Or
4 Set the upper and lower limits of the waveform: – Press the Repeat button to calculate additional
measurements.
– Press the first button next to Scale [mmHg]
and select the number for the bottom of the NOTE
scale.
The three most recent measurements are used to
– Press the second button next to Scale calculate the average value.
[mmHg] and select the number for the top
of the scale. 6 Press the Save tab when finished entering
measurements.
5 Press the Off button next to Waveform Grid to
hide the grid. The latest average SPV value and timestamp
displays in the upper right corner of the selected
6 Press the On button next to Waveform Grid to
arterial waveform within the last 24 hours.
display the grid.
SPV is calculated using the following formula:
7 Press the Reference waveform button and
select one of the following: SPV = Max(S) – Min(S)
– Off The unit of measure of the SPV value is the same
as the current unit of measure for invasive
– Paw
pressure, e.g., mmHg or kPa.
– Flow
– Volume
– CO2 M540
– CO2 Medibus.X
– RRi
Cardiac output (C.O.)
Overview of cardiac output monitoring . . . . 330

Cardiac output measurement method . . . . . . . 330
C.O. precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Connecting the cardiac output hardware. . . 331
Patient preparation for cardiac output

monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Cardiac output display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Cardiac output computation constant . . . . . 336
Cardiac output measuring modes . . . . . . . . 338

Automatic measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Manual measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Saving the cardiac output value . . . . . . . . . . 341
Reviewing the cardiac output averages . . . . 342
Accessing the cardiac output settings. . . . . 343
Cardiac output parameter setup functions . . . 344
Overview of cardiac output monitoring
The M540 uses the thermodilution method to When computing cardiac output, the M540 takes
compute cardiac output (C.O.) for adult and the following factors into account:
pediatric patients. Cardiac output monitoring is not
– Injectate volume, temperature, density, and
intended for neonatal patients.
specific heat of the fluid that is being injected
The MPod – QuadHemo, Hemo4, and Hemo2 pods
– Baseline blood temperature, density, and
connect to the M540 and acquire the blood and
specific heat of the blood
injectate temperatures which are used to compute
the cardiac output value. – Temperature changes of the blood injectate
mixture
Although the M540 processes the cardiac output
algorithms, you can only view the data and execute – Area under the temperature waveform
cardiac output functions on the Cockpit.
The M540 supports the automatic and manual
measuring modes.
Cardiac output measurement method The cardiac output monitoring functions are
configurable in the parameter-specific setup page
A solution of known temperature and volume is and the Procedures > C.O. page (see page 342).
injected into the blood stream in the right atrium. A Before performing any monitoring functions, refer
thermistor in the catheter tip continuously to the section "For your safety and that of your
measures the temperature of the blood as it leaves patients" on page 13. Parameter-specific error
the heart. The injectate mixes with and cools the messages are listed on page 552.
surrounding blood. The blood reaches its minimum
temperature relatively quickly and then warms up
slowly until it returns to the baseline blood
temperature. The total drop in blood temperature is
inversely related to the cardiac output of the patient.
– C.O. – Cardiac output
The lower the cardiac output value, the more the
injectate cools the blood. – Tblood – blood temperature
– Tinj – injectate temperature
C.O. precautions
WARNING WARNING
An incorrect computation constant may yield Verify that you enter the patient’s current
incorrect cardiac output measurements and weight (not his or her ‘admit’ weight). Failure
put the patient at risk. Confirm that the to enter an accurate weight value can result in
manually entered computation constant is inaccurate calculations and put the patient at
correct for the catheter you are using. risk.
NOTE
C.O. monitoring is only supported on the first
MPod – QuadHemo in a daisy-chained configura-
tion.
Connecting the cardiac output hardware
You can connect the hemodynamic cable to one of

the following devices:
– MPod – QuadHemo
– Hemo4 pod
– Hemo2 pod
The intermediate cable from the listed devices
connect directly to the M540.
To connect the cardiac output hardware using

the MPod – QuadHemo
1 Connect the gray connector of the
A
hemodynamic cable (B) to the gray
hemodynamic port (A) of the M540.
2 Connect the red connector of the hemodynamic
B cable (C) to the MPod – QuadHemo
hemodynamic port (D).
F D 3 Connect the pod connector of the cardiac-

output intermediate cable (E) to the cardiac
output port of the MPod – QuadHemo (F).
4 Connect the catheter and the thermistor cables
(H) to the thermistor port of the cardiac-output
intermediate cable (G).
E
C
A M540 hemodynamic port

B Gray connector of the hemodynamic cable
C Red connector of the hemodynamic cable
D MPod – QuadHemo hemodynamic port
E Pod connector of the cardiac-output
intermediate cable
F Cardiac output port of the MPod – QuadHemo
G Thermistor port of the cardiac-output
intermediate cable
H Catheter cable and thermistor cable
To connect the cardiac output hardware using

the Hemo4 and the Hemo2 pod
A 1 Connect the gray connector of the

hemodynamic cable (B) to the gray
hemodynamic port (A) of the M540.
2 Connect red connector of the hemodynamic
B cable (C) to the Hemo4/Hemo2 pod port (D).
D 3 Connect the pod connector of the cardiac-
E output intermediate cable (F) to the cardiac
F output port of the Hemo4/Hemo2 pod (E).
4 Connect the catheter and the thermistor cables
(H) to the thermistor port of the cardiac-output
intermediate cable connector (G).
F
C
H
346
A M540 hemodynamic port

B Gray connector of the hemodynamic cable
C Red connector of the hemodynamic cable
D Hemodynamic pod port
E Cardiac output port
F Pod connector of the cardiac-output
intermediate cable
G Thermistor port of the cardiac-output
intermediate cable
H Thermistor cables
Patient preparation for cardiac output monitoring
The following tips provide optimal cardiac output – Use an in-line injectate system. Systems that
monitoring results but must never replace hospital- measure the injectate temperature in the ice
approved practices or manufacturer’s bath can introduce errors. These errors happen
recommendations. because the injectate temperature changes
between its removal from the ice bath and the
– Follow the recommendations of the
injection.
manufacturer. Dräger recommends that you
place pre-filled syringes or the closed injectate – If you fill your syringes manually, fill them with
delivery system into an ice bath. the same volume each time. The recommended
amount is 10 cc for adults and 5 cc for pediatric
– Check the ice bath regularly and add ice to
patients. Do not touch the body of the syringe to
maintain a temperature between 0 °C (32 °F)
avoid warming the injectate.
and 5 °C (41 °F). The accuracy of
measurements done with the thermodilution – Inject the entire volume in one swift, continuous
method increases as the temperature of the motion.
injectate approaches 0 °C (32 °F).
– Perform the injection at the end of expiration.
NOTE Taking successive cardiac output
measurements at different points in the
For the most accurate results when using an
respiratory cycle provides different
injectate at room temperature, use a 10 cc
measurements, especially for patients on
injectate volume unless clinically contraindicated.
mechanical ventilators.
– Verify the injectate volume. – Discard results that are widely different from the
– Verify the proper selection of catheter type and general trend, and results associated with
size or computation constant if Other is chosen irregularly shaped waveforms.
for catheter type.
Cardiac output display
On the Cockpit, the cardiac output display consists A C.O. label

of a parameter field.
B Time stamp of the last saved cardiac output
NOTE average (this area is blank if no measurements
have been taken over the past 24 hours)
field layout. This layout may change when C Blood temperature label
D Blood temperature (Tblood) value – acquired
from the hemodynamic pod
page 70. Temperature values in parameter fields
may display with a decimal point instead of a E Upper/lower alarm limits or crossed triangle
comma. symbol when alarms are deactivated
F Injectate temperature label
indicate the alarm status of parameters. Parameter G Injectate temperature value
H Previously saved cardiac output value –
average of a series of saved measurements
The cardiac output parameter field contains the
following elements:
A B C
D
E
F
H G
046
Cardiac output computation constant
WARNING To enter a computation constant manually

An incorrect computation constant may yield Make sure the catheter type Other is selected (see
incorrect cardiac output measurements and page 344), otherwise the button Comp. constant
put the patient at risk. Confirm that the is not available on the Procedures... > C.O. page.
manually entered computation constant is
1 Access the C.O. page (see page 344)
correct for the catheter you are using.
or
The computation constant compensates for the
Access the Procedures... > C.O. page (see
specific characteristics of the cardiac output
page 342).
catheters. If you use a Baxter, BD/Ohmeda, or
Arrow catheter, the computation constant is 2 Select the keypad symbol next to Comp.
automatically selected. If you choose Other as a constant to open a numeric keypad.
catheter type (see page 344), enter a computation
3 Enter the correct computation constant for the
constant manually. The entered computation
type of catheter being used (refer to the tables
constant must correspond to the catheter, its size,
on page 337).
injectate volume, and injectate temperature.
4 Select Enter on the keypad to confirm the
Consult the documentation included with the
value.
catheter for computation constants, and select one
that corresponds to the used injectate volume and
temperature.
The following tables list the computation constants

for Baxter, BD/Ohmeda, and Arrow catheters.
Baxter computation constants
Injectate Tinj sensor Tinj sensor
temperature connected disconnected
(Tinj)
sensor connected
Catheter Injectate Tinj = -4.9 to 16.0 °C Tinj = 16.1 to 25 °C Tinj = 20 °C (68 °F)
size volume (23 to 60.9 °F) (61.0 to 77 °F)
7F 10 cc 0.561 0.608 0. 578
7F 5 cc 0.259 0.301 0.274
7.5F 10 cc 0.574 0.595 0. 588
7.5F 5 cc 0.287 0.298 0. 283
5F 5 cc 0.285 0.307 0. 292
BD/Ohmeda computation constants

Injectate temperature (Tinj) Tinj sensor connected/
sensor connected Tinj sensor disconnected
Catheter Injectate Tinj = -4.9 to 16.0 °C Tinj = 16.1 to 25 °C
size volume (23 to 60.9 °F) (61.0 to 77 °F)
7.5F 10 cc 0.579 0.628
7.5F 5 cc 0.281 0.309
7.5F 3 cc 0.160 0.181
7F 10 cc 0.579 0.628
7F 5 cc 0.281 0.309
7F 3 cc 0.160 0.181
5F 5 cc 0.291 0.316
5F 3 cc 0.170 0.188
Arrow computation constants

Injectate temperature Tinj sensor connected
(Tinj)
sensor connected/sensor
disconnected
Catheter Injectate Injectate Temperature: InjectateTemperature: Tinj >= 24 °C
size volume Tinj = -4.9 °C to 23.9 °C (75.2 °F)
(23 °F to 75 °F)
7.5F 10 cc 0.532 0.586
7.5F 5 cc 0.249 0.265
7.5F 3 cc 0.131 0.155
7F 10 cc 0.541 0.601
7F 5 cc 0.250 0.273
7F 3 cc 0.134 0.156
5F 5 cc 0.267 0.303
5F 3 cc 0.157 0.192
Cardiac output measuring modes
Two cardiac output measuring modes are Automatic measurements

available: automatic and manual. If unstable blood
temperatures, artifact, or other conditions are In auto mode, the message Inject when ready
preventing automatic measurements, switch to appears in the Procedures... > C.O. page of the
manual mode. Cockpit when the baseline blood temperature is
If the attention tone is not deactivated (see stable. If the blood temperature becomes unstable,
page 457), a tone sounds when the cardiac output the message Inject when ready is replaced by the
value has been computed. message Poor baseline. To select the automatic
cardiac output mode, see page 343.
To start a measurement in auto mode Hemo4 pod A

1 Press the cardiac output start key (A) on the
MPod – QuadHemo or the Hemo4/Hemo2.
or
Select the Start C.O. button on the
Procedures... > C.O. page (see page 342).
NOTE
Start C.O. button is also accessible on the main
338
MPod – QuadHemo 2 Wait for a tone to sound and the message Inject
A when ready message to appear which
indicates that a stable blood temperature has
been detected. Do not perform an injection
before the Inject when ready message
appears.
3 Inject the saline solution into the bloodstream. A
thermodilution waveform appears, displaying
the change in blood temperature. If the blood
temperature becomes unstable, the
measurement is canceled automatically. If no
temperature drop is detected, the waveform
340
stops and the message %0 No Temperature

Hemo2 pod Change appears.
A
4 Repeat step 2 to take additional measurements
or to repeat a measurement, making sure to
wait for the Inject when ready message.
The Procedures... > C.O. page (see page 342)
stores up to five cardiac output measurements.
Each value panel is touch-sensitive and allows
you to include or exclude a value from the
calculation of the average. Any value that is
crossed out is excluded from the average. If you
touch the panel again, the value reappears and
will be included in the average.
339
To save the cardiac output average, see

page 341.
Manual measurements
If automatic measurements are not possible due to

unstable blood temperatures or other causes,
Hemo4 pod A
switch to manual mode. To select manual cardiac
output mode, see page 344.
To start a measurement in manual mode

 Press the cardiac output start key (A) on the
MPod – QuadHemo or the Hemo4/Hemo2
pods.
or
338
MPod – QuadHemo
A 1 Select Procedures... from the main menu bar.
2 Select the C.O. tab to access the
Procedures... > C.O. page.
3 Select the Start C.O. button on the Cockpit.
Inject the saline solution immediately.
4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for additional
measurements.
The Procedures... > C.O. page (see page 342)
stores up to five cardiac output averages with
340
time stamps. Each value panel is touch-

Hemo2 pod sensitive and allows you to include or exclude a
A value from the calculation of the average. Any
value that is crossed out is excluded from the
average. If you touch the panel again, the value
reappears and will be included in the average.
To save the cardiac output average, see
page 341.
339
Saving the cardiac output value
After completing a measurement, you can store the

cardiac output average. Closing the Procedures...
> C.O. page without saving the cardiac output
value(s) causes any unsaved values to be lost.
To save the cardiac output value manually

1 Select Procedures... from the main menu bar.
2 Select the C.O. tab to access the
Procedures... > C.O. page.
3 Select the Save C.O. average button.
The stored cardiac output value and the time stamp
are stored in the trend function and the parameter
field.
Reviewing the cardiac output averages
Different injection techniques cause variations in A Start C.O. button (only available in manual
cardiac output measurements. To compensate for mode – see page 340)
such discrepancies, you can review up to five
B Save C.O. average button
measurements and use them to compute a cardiac
output average. The following diagram shows the C Most recent cardiac output average
Procedures > C.O. page after computing an
D Blood and injectate temperature value field
average.
E Waveform field
Procedures
F Up to five cardiac output measurements with
time stamps. Each value panel is touch-
C sensitive and allows you to include or exclude a
value from the calculation of the average. Any
A B value that is crossed out is excluded from the
average. If you touch the panel again, the value
D reappears and will be included in the average.
E G Catheter type button
H Catheter size button
I Injectate volume [cc] button
If you select the catheter type Other (see
X
page 344), a button appears at the bottom of the
page. This button accesses a keypad for entering a
F F F F computation constant.
G
H
I
047
Accessing the cardiac output settings
 Select the cardiac output parameter field to The top portion of the page contains the Auto set
select the C.O. page directly. and Alarm buttons for configuring the alarm
or
1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main page 136.
menu bar.
2 Select the C.O. tab to access the C.O. page. If
you cannot see the tab, select the following two
symbols located in the upper right corner of the
dialog: symbol and the display filter
button.
Cardiac output parameter setup functions
All cardiac output setup functions take place in the

C.O. page.

Catheter type – BD/Ohmeda (default) Displays the currently selected catheter
type.
– Edwards/Baxter
– Arrow
– Other
Catheter size 5F, 7F (default), 7.5F Displays the currently selected catheter
size.
If Other is selected for Catheter type
setting, this button is not available.
Injectate volume 3.0, 5.0, or 10.0 (default) Displays the currently selected volume of
[cc] the injectate.
If Other is selected for Catheter type
setting, this button is not available.
Comp. constant – 0.100 to 0.999 The computation constant must be entered

manually if the catheter type Other was
This selection only – 0.542 (default)
selected (see page 344). The computation
appears if the
constant depends on the injectate volume
Catheter type
and temperature according to the specific
Other was
values provided by the catheter.
selected.
C.O. mode Auto (default), Manual Determines the cardiac output
measurement mode (see page 338).
Start C.O. None Starts a cardiac output measurement (see
page 338).
Color White (default); there is no color Determines the color of the waveforms,
selection for cardiac output parameter labels, and values.
Mainstream CO2 monitoring
Overview of Mainstream CO2 monitoring . . . 346

CO2 precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Connecting the CO2 sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Patient preparation for CO2 monitoring. . . . 349
CO2 display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

CO2 parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
CO2 waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Using the CO2 dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

CO2 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
CO2 parameter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Performing a calibration check . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Required accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Overview of Mainstream CO2 monitoring
The Cockpit provides fast and continuous Refer to the Instructions for use Infinity Acute Care
mainstream measurements of carbon dioxide System – Infinity M540 for a detailed description of
concentrations (CO2) in the airway of intubated the M540 CO2 functions.
patients. The M540 acquires signals from a CO2
sensor (Infinity MCable – Mainstream CO2) which
fits over a mainstream airway adapter. The
lightweight, reusable CO2 mainstream sensor
messages are listed in "Troubleshooting"
provides sensitive and accurate measurements. It
on page 525.
uses non-dispersive infrared technology to
measure CO2 in breathing gases.
CO2 monitoring is available for adult, pediatric, and Supported parameters
neonatal patients. Refer to the Instructions for use
Infinity Acute Care System – Infinity M540 for – etCO2 (end-tidal CO2 concentration)
ordering information of the appropriate size of
accessories. – inCO2 (inspiratory CO2 concentration)
As respiration gases flow through the airway – RRc (respiratory rate derived from CO2
adapter, the sensor analyzes the expired and measurement)
inspired air of the patient. The analysis is
accomplished by sending a beam of infrared light
through transparent ports in the airway adapter
while detecting changes in CO2 absorption levels.
CO2 precautions
Refer to "General safety information" on page 17 WARNING

for general precautions.
CO2 alarms do not activate until the first
WARNING breath is detected after turning on the monitor
or discharging a patient.
RRc apnea alarms are NOT reported if the set-
ting RRc apnea time [s] is set to Off in the CO2
setup page and the RRc alarm feature is deac- WARNING
tivated. To generate RRc apnea alarms, acti- The surface temperature of the sensor may
vate the RRc alarms and select an RRc apnea rise to 43 °C (109 °F). Prolonged exposure to
alarm time. the patient's skin may result in a burn.
WARNING CAUTION
The safety and effectiveness of the respiration Leaks in the breathing circuit (for example, an
measurement method in apnea detection, par- uncuffed endotracheal tube or a damaged airway
ticularly the apnea of prematurity and apnea adapter) may significantly affect CO2
of infancy, has not been established. measurement values.
WARNING CAUTION
Patient monitors that measure CO2, anesthet- To avoid accidental disconnections, do not apply
ic agents, and/or respiratory mechanics are excessive tension to any sensor cable.
not intended to be used as an apnea monitor
and/or recording device. While these products CAUTION
provide an apnea alarm, that alarm condition To prevent leakage, make sure the airway
is initiated based on the elapsed time since adapter is firmly connected to the breathing
the last breath was detected. Clinical diagno- circuit.
sis of a true apneic event, however, requires
multiple physiological signals.
CAUTION
Check the CO2 mainstream sensor for damage
before use. A damaged CO2 sensor may impair
galvanic isolation or may introduce debris into the
breathing circuit.
NOTE
Dräger CO2 accessories that come in contact
with the patient do not contain natural rubber la-
tex.
WARNING
For premature babies, do not carry out CO2
measurements because the CO2 cuvette sig-
nificantly increases the dead space.
Connecting the CO2 sensor
Before connecting any CO2 hardware, make sure

the airway adapter in use matches the airway
adapter setting of the Cockpit. For example, do not
use a disposable airway adapter if the Cockpit is
configured for a reusable airway adapter (and vice C
versa). Not aligning the adapter with the
configuration setting at the Cockpit compromises
the displayed CO2 value.
The CO2 cable connects directly to the M540. F D
E
A
348
D Y-piece
E Airway adapter
B F Endotracheal tube adapter
To connect the hardware

The IACS is only compatible with the sensors
6871950 revision 5 or higher. Previous revisions
are not compatible.
1 Connect the CO2 sensor cable connector (B) to
the yellow CO2 port (A) on the M540.
2 Select a suitable Mainstream airway adapter
(C) whose windows are clean and dry (replace
the adapter if necessary).
C 3 Insert the airway adapter (E) between the
endotracheal tube adapter (F) and the ventilator
Y-piece (D).
CAUTION
347
Always position the sensor windows of the airway

A M540 CO2 port
adapter vertically to prevent patient secretions
B CO2 sensor cable connector from obscuring the adapter windows.
C Mainstream airway adapter 4 Snap the Mainstream airway adapter (C) firmly
into the airway adapter and make sure that the
cable is directed away from the patient.
Patient preparation for CO2 monitoring
The following tips provide optimal monitoring When switching adapter types (from reusable to
results but must never replace hospital-approved disposable or adult to pediatric, or vice versa),
practices or manufacturer’s recommendations. there is no need to re-zero a Dräger sensor. If the
sensor window is clean and the correct sensor type
A default O2 concentration of 21% (the percentage
is selected under the Airway adapter CO2
of oxygen in ambient air) for all CO2 measurements
Mainstream setting, only zero a Dräger sensor
is assumed. If the patient is receiving supplemental
when the measurement value is suspect or when
oxygen or N2O or Heliox, select the gas that is
prompted to re-zero.
being administered in the CO2 setup page. Make
sure to manually adjust the ambient pressure to the
actual measurement value. Automatic ambient
pressure compensation is not provided. Failure to
compensate for supplemental gases results in
inaccurate measurement values.
CO2 display
On the Cockpit, the CO2 display consists of: The CO2 parameter field contains the following
elements:
– A CO2 parameter field
– A CO2 waveform A B C
CO2 parameter field D

E
NOTE
F
field layout. This layout may change when addi-
tional parameters are put on display. For more in-
formation, see "Parameter fields" on page 70.
H G
048
A etCO2 (end-tidal CO2) label
disconnected sensors, and so on. For detailed B Unit of measurement (can be
information regarding the content of parameter activated/deactivated)
C inCO2 label (inspired CO2)
D inCO2 value – the level of CO2 in the airway
during inspiration, taken as the minimum value
during the previous measurement interval
F RRc (respiratory rate) parameter label
G RRc value – respiratory rate derived from the
CO2 signal
H etCO2 value – highest CO2 value in the airway
during expiratory phase
CO2 waveforms
The Cockpit also displays an instantaneous CO2 A Expiratory or alveolar plateau (level of CO2 in
waveform. lungs ceases to increase significantly)
B End-tidal concentration point (end of expiratory
phase, where CO2 is measured)
A B C Onset of inspiratory phase

D Onset of expiratory phase
E Baseline during inspiration
E D C
349
Troubleshooting
In addition to evaluating the clinical status of a The following table shows how CO2 waveforms
patient, CO2 waveforms can help troubleshoot can be used to identify common problems.
problems with equipment.
Description Cause CO2 waveform
Alveolar plateau showing a – Inadequate seal around the
downward slope that endotracheal tube
merges with a descending
– Leaky or deflated endotracheal
limb.
or tracheostomy cuff
– Artificial airway that is too small
for the patient

Elevated waveform Rebreathing due to one of the
baseline with following causes:
corresponding increase in
– Disposable airway adapter is
CO2 level.
used although the Cockpit is
configured for the reusable
adapter type
– Contaminated airway adapter
(dirty window)
– CO2 zero drift
– Insufficient expiratory time
– Faulty expiratory valve
– Inadequate inspiratory flow
– Malfunction of a CO2 absorber
system
– Partial rebreathing circuits
Change in slope of Obstruction caused by one of the
ascending limb. Possible following:
absence of an alveolar
– Partial obstruction in expiratory
plateau.
limb of breathing circuit
– Foreign matter in upper airway
– Partially kinked or occluded
artificial airway
– Herniated endotracheal or
tracheostomy tube cuff
– Bronchospasm
Elevated baseline, with – Faulty ventilator circuit valve
pronounced slope on
– Rebreathing (see above)
descending limb
Using the CO2 dialog
Setup for all CO2 parameters takes place in the CO2 Limits
CO2 dialog. This dialog contains the following tabs:
– Mainstream sets associated CO2 parameters Setup for all CO2 alarm limit functions takes place
in the Mainstream tab within the CO2 dialog.
– Microstream sets associated CO2 parameters
The Mainstream tab displays fields on the upper
– Calibration check performs a Mainstream sen- left side for etCO2, inCO2, and RRc settings.
sor calibration check. For information about the
Calibration check tab, see "Performing a cali- etCO2 and RRc allow adjustment of the upper
bration check" on page 355. alarm limit, use of the Archive feature, and use of
Auto set. For inCO2, only the upper alarm limit and
If the Cockpit is not set up for CO2 monitoring, then Archive can be used.
the Microstream tab also displays in the CO2 dia-
log.
NOTE
To access the Mainstream settings The sensor must be removed from the airway
adapter before zeroing. The sensor is zeroed in
If the CO2 parameter displays on the cockpit: room air. Do not breathe on the airway adapter
1 Touch the CO2 parameter field. during zeroing. CO2-related alarms are disabled
whenever the sensor is zeroing; however, active
2 Touch the Mainstream tab. alarms continue to display during zeroing.
Or, if the CO2 parameter field is not displayed:
NOTE
 Select Sensor parameters... from the main
menu bar > Mainstream tab to access the CO2 limits settings apply to both Mainstream and
Mainstream page. If you cannot see the tab, Microstream.
select the following two symbols located in the
upper right corner of the dialog: symbol and
the display filter button.
CO2 parameter setup
All setup functions for CO2 take place in the CO2 For detailed alarm setup information, see
dialog. "Configuring the alarm settings for a patient" on
page 136.
NOTE
When a Scio module is connected, parameter NOTE
controls for CO2 are available only in the Scio The sensor must be removed from the airway
setup menu. adapter before zeroing. The sensor is zeroed in
room air. Do not breathe on the airway adapter
Before connecting any CO2 hardware, make sure during zeroing.
the airway adapter that is used matches the airway
adapter setting at the Cockpit.

Zero None Zeroes the CO2 sensor if necessary. The
CO2 sensor stores a new isoelectric point for
(Only available if a
CO2 measurements.
CO2 device is
connected)
Scale – 0 to 40 mmHg (default), 0 Adjusts the size of the CO2 waveform.

to 60 mmHg,
Scale settings apply to both Mainstream and
0 to 80 mmHg, 0 to
Microstream.
100 mmHg
– 0 to 5 kPa (default), 0 to
8 kPa, 0 to 12 kPa, 0 to
16 kPa
– 0 to 5 % (default), 0 to 8 %,
0 to 12 %,
0 to 16 %
Atm. pressure 570 to 800 mmHg Determines the ambient pressure setting of
the sensor and compensates for pressure
760 mmHg (default)
effects. Failure to compensate for pressure
can cause inaccurate measurements.
Gas Air (default), N2O/O2, Compensates for supplemental oxygen or
compensation O2>50%, HeliOx N2O or Heliox. Failure to compensate for
supplemental oxygen can cause inaccurate
measurements.
RRc apnea time Off (default), 10, 15, 20, 25, Specifies the time the M540 waits before
[s] 30 s reporting a cessation of breathing as an
apnea event.
RRc apnea time [s] settings apply to both
Mainstream and Microstream.
RRc apnea Off, Store (default), Str/Rec, Determines what happens in response to an
archive Record apnea.
RRc apnea archive settings apply to both
Mainstream and Microstream.
Airway adapter Reusable (default), Determines the type of airway adapter used
Disposable for CO2 monitoring.
Compensates for the type of airway adapter
that is being used.
Requires matching the adapter with the
configuration setting at the Cockpit; if the
adapters do not match, the CO2 value
displayed is compromised.

Color Red, green, blue, yellow (de- Determines the color of the waveforms and
fault), light blue, purple, or- parameter labels/values.
ange, white.
Color settings apply to both Mainstream and
Microstream.
Performing a calibration check
The Calibration check tab is used to do the

following tasks:
– View the date of the last calibration
– Perform a calibration check
A calibration check verifies that the CO2 sensor is
functioning within the acceptable calibration limits.
If successful, the message CO2 calibration check
successful displays on the Cockpit. For
descriptions of additional message conditions,
"Calibration and maintenance" on page 559.
Perform a calibration check according to the
healthcare facility’s guidelines.
Contact the biomed or service personnel for the
While a calibration check is in progress, any active required accessories if needed.
alarms continue to display on the Cockpit; however,
CO2- and RRc-related alarms are temporarily
To perform a calibration check
disabled until a valid breath is detected and the
associated value displays in the CO2 parameter
field. 1 Select the Calibration check tab.
2 Follow the instructions as they display on the
Calibration check window.
Required accessories
3 If the calibration check fails, follow the
– Test filter (attached to the CO2 sensor and instructions that display on the Cockpit or
shown in the following figure). contact specialized service personnel.
Microstream CO2 monitoring
Overview of Microstream® CO2

monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Using the Microstream MCable . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
CO2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

CO2 waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Using the CO2 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

CO2 limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
CO2 parameter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Calibration Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Required accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Overview of Microstream® CO2 monitoring
The Cockpit provides continuous sidestream Supported parameters

measurements of carbon dioxide (CO2)
concentrations for intubated and non-intubated – etCO2 (end-tidal CO2 concentration)
patients. The Cockpit acquires signals from the
Infinity MCable – Microstream CO2 – inCO2 (inspiratory CO2 concentration)
(subsequently referred to as Microstream MCable – RRc (respiratory rate)
and shown in the following figure).
Parameter-specific error messages are listed on
page 559.
Accessories
Refer to the Infinity Acute Care System Instructions

for use, Monitoring Accessories for available
accessories used for Microstream CO2 monitoring.
Using the Microstream MCable
Refer to the Infinity M540 patient monitor

The Microstream MCable enables the clinician to Instructions for use (Software VG5.n) for
monitor CO2 using the patient monitor. It uses non- information about the Microstream MCable and the
dispersive infrared technology to measure CO2 in following topics:
breathing gases. The Microstream MCable – Safety precautions
analyzes the expiratory and inspiratory air as the
breathing gases flow through the sample line. It – Connection and detachment
automatically compensates for ambient pressure – Scavenger system use
within the defined operating ranges
– Use models and required accessories
The Microstream MCable is intended for use with
adult, pediatric, and neonatal patients with the – Sample line guidance
appropriate accessories. – Calibration check
to the chapter "For your safety and that of your
patients" on page 13.
CO2 display
On the Cockpit, the CO2 display consists of: J etCO2 value – highest level of CO2 in the airway
during the expiratory phase within the
– CO2 parameter field
measurement interval
– CO2 waveform
CO2 waveform
CO2 parameter field
The M540 also displays an instantaneous CO2
The CO2 parameter field contains the following waveform.
elements:
A B C D E F A B
E D C
J I H G
349
094
A Expiratory or alveolar plateau (level of CO2 in

A etCO2 label lungs ceases to increase significantly)
B Unit of measurement B End-tidal concentration point (end of expiratory
phase, where CO2 is measured)
C Crossed triangle symbol when the etCO2 alarm
is turned off C Onset of inspiratory phase
D inCO2 label D Onset of expiratory phase
E inCO2 value – the level of CO2 in the airway E Baseline during inspiration
within the measurement interval
F Crossed triangle symbol when inCO2 alarms
are turned off
G Crossed triangle symbol when RRc alarms are
turned off
H RRc value – respiratory rate derived from the
CO2 signal.
I RRc (respiratory rate) parameter label
Troubleshooting
In addition to evaluating the clinical status of a

patient, CO2 waveforms can help troubleshoot
equipment problems. The following table shows
how CO2 waveforms can be used to identify
common problems.

downward slope that endotracheal tube
merges with a descending
limb.
for the patient
Elevated waveform Rebreathing due to one of the
baseline with following causes:
corresponding increase in
CO2 level.
system
Change in slope of Obstruction caused by one of the
ascending limb. Possible following:
absence of an alveolar
plateau.
hose of breathing circuit
– Foreign matter in upper airway
artificial airway
– Bronchospasm
pronounced slope on
descending limb
Using the CO2 dialog box
Setup for CO2 parameters takes place in the CO2 NOTE

dialog. This dialog contains the following tabs:
CO2 limits settings apply to both Mainstream and
– Mainstream sets associated CO2 parameters Microstream.
– Microstream sets associated CO2 parameters
– Calibration check performs a
Microstream MCable calibration. For
information about the Calibration Check tab,
see "Calibration Check" on page 363.
If the Cockpit is not set up for CO2 monitoring, then
the Mainstream tab also displays in the CO2
dialog.
To access the Microstream settings

If the CO2 parameter displays on the Cockpit:
1 Touch the CO2 parameter field.
2 Touch the Microstream tab.
Or, if the CO2 parameter field is not displayed:
menu bar > Microstream tab to access the
Microstream page. If you cannot see the tab,
CO2 limits
Setup functions for CO2 parameters take place in

the Microstream tab within the CO2 dialog.
The Microstream tab displays fields on the upper
left side of the window for etCO2, inCO2, and RRc
settings.
etCO2 and RRc allow adjustment of the upper and
lower alarm limits, use of the Archive feature, and
use of Auto set. For inspiratory CO2, only the
upper limit and Archive can be used.
CO2 parameter setup
Setup functions for CO2 parameters take place in For detailed alarm setup information, see "Config-
the CO2 dialog within the Microstream tab. uring the alarm settings for a patient" on page 136.
NOTE
When a Scio module is connected, parameter
controls for CO2 are available only in the Scio
setup menu.

RRc apnea time Off (default) Specifies how long the Cockpit waits before
[s] reporting a cessation in breathing as an apnea
10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s
event.
RRc apnea Off, Store (default), Str/Rec Determines what happens in response to an
archive apnea event.
Next service in: Informational only (settings The remaining hours until maintenance is
are not applicable) required.
Averaging Last valid breath, Controls the specific time or the interval used
Off, to select the maximum measured etCO2 and
10 s, 20 s (default), 30 s the minimum measured inCO2.
Scale – 0 to 40 mmHg (default), 0 Adjusts the size of the CO2 waveform.
to 60 mmHg,
Scale settings apply to both Mainstream and
0 to 80 mmHg, 0 to
Microstream.
100 mmHg
– 0 to 5 kPa (default), 0 to
8 kPa, 0 to 12 kPa, 0 to
16 kPa
– 0 to 5% (default),
0 to 8%, 0 to 12 %,
0 to 16%
Color Red, White, Yellow (default), Determines the color of the CO2 waveform,
Green, Light blue, Blue, and the parameter labels and values.
Purple, Orange
Last calibration: Informational only Displays the date of the last calibration.
Calibration Check
The Calibration check tab is used to perform the WARNING

following tasks:
Risk of inaccurate patient results
– Viewing the remaining hours until the next
A Microstream MCable that is out of
service check is due for the Microstream
calibration may provide inaccurate results.
MCable
If calibration does not take place as
– Viewing the date of the last calibration
instructed, the Microstream MCable may be
– Performing a calibration check out of calibration.
A calibration check verifies that the Microstream Ensure the proper calibration of the
MCable is within the acceptable calibration limits. If Microstream MCable.
successful, the message CO2 calibration check
successful displays on the Cockpit. For
descriptions of additional message conditions, see
"Calibration and maintenance" on page 559.
Perform a calibration check according to the
healthcare facility’s schedule guidelines.
Required accessories
– A gas canister (with a mix of 5% CO2, 21% O2,

balanced N2).
– Sample line
Contact the biomed or service personnel for the
required accessories if needed.
To perform a calibration check
1 Select the Calibration check tab.

2 Follow the instructions as they display on the
Calibration check window.
3 If the calibration check is unsuccessful, see
"Calibration and maintenance" on page 559 or
contact specialized service personnel.
Scio Monitoring
Scio Monitoring
Overview of Scio monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Using the Scio dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

To access the Scio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
CO2 alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
CO2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
O2 alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
O2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Agent alarm setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Agent parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . 373
CO2 display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

CO2/O2 parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
CO2 waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
O2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
O2 parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
O2/N2O parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Agent display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Agent parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Agent/xMAC parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Agent/N2O parameter field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Manual agent identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Automatic agent identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Mixed Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Scio Show all page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
xMAC (MAC multiple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Zeroing the gas analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Scio Monitoring
Overview of Scio monitoring
The Scio Four module samples gas from the NOTE

breathing gas of pediatric patients and adults. It
The N2O and xMAC agent trends are not
continuously measures the concentration of CO2,
available on the destination Cockpit after a
N2O, and anesthetic agents (Sevoflurane,
network transfer. However, they can be viewed on
Desflurane, Isoflurane, Halothane, Enflurane) in
the primary patient monitor, the ICS, or any other
the breathing gas as well as the O2 concentration
patient data management system.
(optional). All measured values as well as derived
values are communicated to a patient monitor.
WARNING
Risk of inaccurate gas measurement values
During warm-up, reported values may not be
accurate. Wait until the gas analyzer has
completed initialization and warm-up. Refer to
the Technical Data appendix in the gas
analyzer supplement for further information
regarding gas analyzer accuracy.
WARNING
Risk due to defective sensors
If the gas analyzer is not ready for operation,
the patient will not be adequately monitored.
Before using the medical device, ensure a
suitable substitute monitoring.
WARNING
Risk of patient safety
The multigas information displayed is
intended to be used by trained and authorized
health care professionals only.
NOTE
The M540 does not backfill secondary agent
trends on the network. The secondary agents are
sent in real-time to the network.
NOTE
In this chapter, all Scio Four modules (Scio Four,
Scio Four Oxi, Scio Four plus, and Scio Four Oxi
plus) are referred to as "gas analyzer."
Scio Monitoring
The gas analyzer is available in four variants with

different functions as listed below.
O2 CO2, N2O Agent Agent ID Mixtures

Scio Four No Yes 1 out of 5 No No
Scio Four Oxi Yes Yes 1 out of 5 No No
Scio Four plus No Yes 2 out of 5 Yes Yes
Scio Four Oxi plus Yes Yes 2 out of 5 Yes Yes
IACS automatically detects the variant of gas – <agent>>%val

analyzer connected and adjusts all context-
– inN2O >82
sensitive menus for the gas analyzer variant.
– FiO2 <%val
At start-up, the gas analyzer warms up and
displays the low-priority alarm Scio warming up: – Inspiratory xMAC high
Accur. low on the M540 monitor. During this time,
– Sample line blocked
concentrations for certain gases may not be
available and the anesthetic agent may not be – Scio is not connected
identified.
– Scio unavailable for neonates
The following alarms are supported prior to the de-
– Scio warming up: Accur. low
tection of a valid breath:
– Second agent detected
NOTE – Water trap is full
The "%0" symbol indicates CO2, N2O, O2, and All other O2 alarms, CO2 alarms, N2O alarms, and
any agents that may appear in the alarm anesthetic gas alarms are active only after one
message. breath has been detected.
– MIXED AGENT
– %0 out of range high
– %0 reduced accuracy
– %0 sensor failure
– %0 value temporarily unavail.
– Check water trap/sample line
– Gas sensor failure
– CO2 reduced accuracy
– CO2 sensor failure
– Gas sensor reduced accuracy
Scio Monitoring
The following parameters are supported:

– RRc
– inCO2
– etCO2
– FiO2 (displays as inO2 in parameter fields)
– etO2
– inN2O
– etN2O
– inSev
– etSev
– inDes
– etDes
– inIso
– etIso
– inHal
– etHal
– inEnf
– etEnf
– xMAC
Scio Monitoring
Using the Scio dialog
Setup for Scio parameters takes place in the Scio

dialog. This dialog contains the following tabs:
– CO2
– O2
– Agent settings
– Agent alarms
– Show all
To access the Scio settings
Scio settings are available through the CO2, O2, or

Agent parameter fields.
If the CO2, O2, or Agent parameter field displays on
the Cockpit:
1 Touch the CO2, O2, or Agent parameter field.
2 Touch the Scio tab.
Or, if the CO2, O2, or Agent parameter field is not
displayed:
menu bar > Scio tab to access the Scio page.
button.
CO2 alarm limits
The CO2 tab displays fields on the upper left side of

the window for etCO2, inCO2, and RRc alarm limit
settings.
etCO2 and RRc allow adjustment of the upper and
use of Auto set. For inCO2, only the upper limit and
Archive can be used.
Scio Monitoring
CO2 parameter setup functions NOTE

When a CO2 mainstream sensor or
Setup functions for CO2 parameters take place in Microstream MCable is connected, parameter
the CO2 tab within the Scio dialog. controls for Scio are unavailable.

RRc apnea time – Off (default) Specifies the time the M540 waits before
[s] reporting a cessation of breathing as an
– 10
apnea event.
– 15
– 20
– 25
– 30
RRc Apnea – Off Determines what happens in response to an
archive apnea.
– Store (default)
– Str/Rec
– Record
Parameter field – CO2 (default) Configures the CO2 display based on the
selected setting.
– CO2/O2
Scale [mmHg] – 40 Adjusts the size of the CO2 waveform.
– 60
– 80
– 100
Color – Red Determines the color of the waveforms, and
the parameter labels and values.
– White
– Yellow (default)
– Green
– Light blue
– Blue
– Purple
– Orange
Scio Monitoring
O2 alarm limits
For gas analyzers with O2 monitoring, the O2 tab

displays fields on the upper left side of the window
for etO2 and FiO2 alarm limit settings.
etO2 and FiO2 allow adjustment of the upper and
use of Auto set.
NOTE
When a gas analyzer without O2 monitoring is
connected, the controls for O2 alarms are not
available in the Scio setup menu.
O2 parameter setup functions
Setup functions for O2 parameters take place in the

O2 tab within the Scio dialog.

Parameter field – O2 Configures the O2 display based on the
selected setting.
– O2/N2O
Scale [%] – 0-100 Adjusts the size of the O2 waveform.
– 15-35
– 20-100 (default)
– 25-45
– 35-55
– 45-65
– 55-75
– 65-85
– 75-95
– 85-105
Mini-trend – etO2 (default) Selects the parameter to display in the mini-
trend associated with the O2 parameter field.
– FiO2
Scio Monitoring
Agent alarm setup F Archive column

G Display filter button
The Agent alarms tab allows the following to be
adjusted for all agent alarms: H Auto set all button (see "Auto setting all alarm
limits" on page 149)
– Alarm status (on/off)
WARNING
– Lower limit
Setting alarm limits to extreme values may
– Upper limit prevent certain alarm conditions from being
– Archive status
The Agent alarms tab consists of a table with
setup rows for each agent. Each setup row consists
To configure agent alarm settings
of several fields for configuring the individual alarm
settings. When you select a field to configure a NOTE
setting, an orange border highlights the selected
For more information on agent alarm settings, see
row.
"Alarm ranges and defaults" on page 160.
A B C D E F 1 Touch the corresponding field in the Alarm

on/off column (B) to activate or deactivate alarm
monitoring. A crossed-out triangle appears in
the parameter field when alarm monitoring is
deactivated.
2 Touch the corresponding field in the Lower
column (C). Use the rotary knob to set the lower
alarm limit, and press the rotary knob to confirm
the setting.
3 Touch the corresponding field in the Upper
column (E). Use the rotary knob to set the upper
alarm limit, and press the rotary knob to confirm
the setting.
4 Touch the corresponding field in the Archive
column (F). Use the rotary knob to select one of
the following settings to determine what
happens in response to an alarm:
generated.
H G – Store – stores the event for later review.
A Parameter labels column – Str/Rec – generates a timed recording and
B Alarm on/off column stores the event.
C Lower limits column Select the Auto set all button (J), to auto adjust the
D Actual parameter values alarm limits of all parameters. For more
E Upper limits column
Scio Monitoring
Agent parameter setup functions can be set, the alarms will not annunciate for the
secondary agent until it is changed to the primary
Setup functions for Agent parameters take place in agent.
the Agent settings tab within the Scio dialog.
When a secondary agent is used, alarm limit
violations trigger alarms only for the primary agent.
Although the alarm limits on the secondary agent

Parameter field – Agent Displays anesthetic agents based on the selected
setting.
– Agent/ xMAC (default)
– Agent/N2O
Mini-trend – Agent (default) Selects the parameter to display in the mini-trend
associated with the Agent parameter field.
– xMAC
NOTE: If Agent is selected, the expiratory value
of the primary agent is displayed.
Agent – Desflurane Configures the Scio Four or Scio Four Oxi module
(Scio Four Oxi and to measure the concentration levels of a user-
– Enflurane
Scio Four only) specified anesthetic agent.
– Halothane
WARNING:
– Isoflurane – Use care when selecting the agent
manually. Measurements are inaccurate if
– Sevoflurane (default)
the wrong agent is selected.
– Scio Four Oxi and Scio Four cannot
recognize anesthetic gas mixtures.
Measurements are inaccurate if anesthetic
gases are mixed.
NOTE: The Agent button is grayed-out when a
gas analyzer with automatic agent identification is
connected (Scio Four Plus, Scio Four Oxi Plus).
"Second agent de- – On (default) Indicates a change of the anesthetic agent during
tected" alarm monitoring.
– Off
Only occurs on gas analyzers with automatic
agent identification.
NOTE: The "Second agent detected" alarm
button is grayed-out when a gas analyzer with
manual agent identification is connected (Scio
Four, Scio Four Oxi).
Scio Monitoring
CO2 display
On the Cockpit, the CO2 display consists of: A etCO2 label

– CO2 parameter field B etCO2 value – highest level of CO2 in the airway
during the expiratory phase within the
– CO2 waveform
The Cockpit supports a configurable parameter
C etCO2 alarm limits (displays crossed triangle
field for display of CO2 that allows one of the
symbol when etCO2 alarms are turned off)
following displays:
D inCO2 label
– CO2 by itself (default)
E inCO2 value – the level of CO2 in the airway
– CO2 with O2 (only for gas analyzers with O2
monitoring)
F inCO2 alarm upper limit (displays crossed
CO2 parameter field triangle symbol when the inCO2 alarm is turned
off)
The default CO2 parameter field displays the
current values for: G RRc alarm limits (displays crossed triangle
symbol when RRc alarms are turned off)
– Inspired CO2 (inCO2) – the level of CO2 in the
airway during inspiration phase. H RRc parameter label
– End-tidal CO2 (etCO2) – the level of CO2 in the I RRc value – respiratory rate derived from the
airway at the end of expiration. CO2 signal.
– Respiratory Rate (RRc) – the patient’s

respiratory rate, derived from the etCO2 signal.
A B C D E F
etCO2 inCO2
0
27
4
70
20
RRc
21 30
5
EtcO2pbox_en.pdf
I HG
Scio Monitoring
CO2/O2 parameter field G inO2 (FiO2) alarm limits (displays crossed

triangle symbol when inO2 alarms are turned
The CO2 /O2 parameter field displays the following off)
additional values:
H Abbreviation for " expiratory"
– Inspired O2 (in O2/FiO2) – the level of O2 in the
airway during inspiration, taken as the minimum I etCO2 value – highest level of CO2 in the airway
value within the measurement interval during the expiratory phase within the
– End-tidal O2 (etO2) – the highest level of O2 in
the airway during the expiratory phase within J etO2 value – highest level of O2 in the airway
the measurement interval during the expiratory phase within the
NOTE
K etCO2 alarm limits (displays crossed triangle
Current RRc values are displayed on the CO2 tab symbol when etCO2 alarms are turned off)
of the Scio dialog.
L etO2 alarm limits (displays crossed triangle
symbol when etO2 alarms are turned off)
A B C DE F G H I J KL
CO2 waveform
in et
The M540 also displays an instantaneous CO2
waveform.
CO2 0 4
27 70
20
A B
O2 50 100
20 25 100
10
EtcO2_O2pbox.pdf
E D C
A CO2 label
349
B O2 label
A Expiratory or alveolar plateau (level of CO2 in
C Abbreviation for "inspiratory" lungs ceases to increase significantly)
D inCO2 value – the level of CO2 in the airway B End-tidal concentration point (end of expiratory
during inspiration, taken as the minimum value phase, where CO2 is measured)
C Onset of inspiratory phase
E inO2 (FiO2) value – the level of O2 in the airway
D Onset of expiratory phase
within the measurement interval E Baseline during inspiration
F inCO2 alarm upper limit (displays crossed
triangle symbol when the inCO2 alarm is turned
off)
Scio Monitoring
Troubleshooting
In addition to evaluating the clinical status of a

patient, CO2 waveforms can help troubleshoot
problems with equipment. The following table
shows how CO2 waveforms can be used to identify
common problems.
Description Cause Capnogram

downward slope that merg- endotracheal tube
es with a descending limb.
for the patient
Elevated waveform base- Rebreathing due to one of the fol-
line with corresponding in- lowing causes:
crease in CO2 level.
– Disposable airway adapter is
used although the Cockpit is
configured for the reusable
adapter type
– Contaminated airway adapter
(dirty window)
– CO2 zero drift
system
Scio Monitoring
Description Cause Capnogram

Change in slope of ascend- Obstruction caused by one of the
ing limb. Possible absence following:
of an alveolar plateau.
limb of breathing circuit
– Foreign body in upper airway
artificial airway
– Bronchospasm
pronounced slope on de-
scending limb
Scio Monitoring
O2 display
NOTE C inO2 (FiO2) value – the level of O2 in the airway

O2 monitoring is available only with Scio Four Oxi
and Scio Four Oxi plus.
D inO2 (FiO2) alarm limits (displays crossed
On the Cockpit, the O2 display consists of: triangle symbol when inO2 alarms are turned
– O2 parameter field off)
– O2 waveform E Abbreviation for "expiratory"
The Cockpit supports a configurable parameter F etO2 value – the highest level of O2 in the
field for display of O2 that allows one of the airway during the expiratory phase within the
following displays: measurement interval
– O2 by itself (default) G etO2 alarm limits (displays crossed triangle

symbol when etO2 alarms are turned off)
– O2 with N2O
O2 parameter field
The default O2 parameter field displays the current

values for:
– Inspired O2 (inO2/FiO2) – the level of O2 in the
airway during inspiration phase.
– End-tidal O2 (etO2) – the level of O2 in the
airway at the end of expiration.
A B C D E FG
in et
O2 50 25 100
20
100
10
O2_pbox_en.pdf
A O2 label
B Abbreviation for "inspiratory"
Scio Monitoring
O2/N2O parameter field I etN2O value – the highest level of N2O in the
airway during the expiratory phase within the
The O2 / N2O parameter field displays the following measurement interval
additional values: J etO2 alarm limits (displays crossed triangle
– Inspired N2O (inN2O) – the level of N2O in the symbol when etO2 alarms are turned off)
airway during inspiration, taken as the minimum
value within the measurement interval
– End-tidal N2O (etN2O) – the highest level of
N2O in the airway during the expiratory phase
A B C DE F G H I J
in et
O2 30 100
20 25 100
10
N2O 70 69
O2_N2O_pbox.pdf
A O2 label
B N2O label
C Abbreviation for "inspiratory"
D inO2 (FiO2) value – the level of O2 in the airway
E inN2O value – the level of N2O in the airway
F inO2 (FiO2) alarm limits (displays crossed
triangle symbol when inO2 alarms are turned
off)
G Abbreviation for "expiratory"
H etO2 value – the highest level of O2 in the
airway during the expiratory phase within the
Scio Monitoring
Agent display
The agent waveforms and parameters can be A Abbreviation for primary anesthetic agent (may
identified by color as follows: display Agent? during agent identification for
gas analyzers with automatic identification)
– Sevoflurane = yellow
B Inspired primary agent value – the level of
– Desflurane = blue
anesthetic agent in the airway during the
– Isoflurane = purple inspiration phase
– Halothane = red C Abbreviation for "inspiratory"
– Enflurane = orange D Inspiratory alarm limits for primary agent
The appearance of the agent parameter field varies E Abbreviation for "expiratory"
depending on the number of identified agents.
F Expired primary agent value – the level of
Typical agent parameter field displays are shown
below.
expiration phase
G Expiratory alarm limits for primary agent
Agent parameter field H Expiratory alarm limits for secondary agent
On the Cockpit, the default Agent parameter field I Expired secondary agent value – the level of
displays the current values for: anesthetic agent in the airway during the
expiration phase
– Inspired agent (e.g., inSev) – the level of
anesthetic agent in the airway during the J Inspiratory alarm limits for secondary agent
inspiration phase K Inspired secondary agent value – the level of
– Expired agent (e.g., etSev) – the level of anesthetic agent in the airway during the
anesthetic agent in the airway during the inspiration phase
expiration phase L Abbreviation for secondary anesthetic agent
(for gas analyzers with automatic identification)
A B C D E F G
in et
O2 3.04 4.4
0.0 3.04 10.1
0.0
3.0 12.7
0.0 3.0 20.0
0.0
Agent_pbox_en.pdf
L K J I H
Scio Monitoring
Agent/xMAC parameter field L Inspiratory alarm limits for secondary agent

M Inspired secondary agent value – the level of
The Agent/ xMAC parameter field displays the anesthetic agent in the airway during the
following additional values: inspiration phase
– xMAC – the MAC multiple calculated from the N Age used to calculate xMAC (default age of 40
current expiratory measured values and the is the user has not entered a birth date for the
age-dependent MAC values patient)
A B C D E F G H O xMAC label
in et
O2 3.04 4.4
0.0 3.04 10.1
0.0
N2O 3.0 12.7

0.0 3.0 20.0
0.0
AGE 40 2.0
Agent_xMAC_pbox_en.pdf
O N M L K J I
A Abbreviation for primary anesthetic agent (may

display Agent? during agent identification for
B Abbreviation for secondary anesthetic agent
D Inspired primary agent value – the level of
inspiration phase
E Inspiratory alarm limits for primary agent
F Abbreviation for "expiratory"
G Expired primary agent value – the level of
expiration phase
H Expiratory alarm limits for primary agent
I Expiratory alarm limits for secondary agent
J Expired secondary agent value – the level of
expiration phase
K xMAC multiple
Scio Monitoring
Agent/N2O parameter field J Expired secondary agent value – the level of

The Agent/N2O parameter field displays the expiration phase
following additional values: K etN2O value – the highest level of N2O in the
– Inspired N2O (inN2O) – the level of N2O in the airway during the expiratory phase within the
airway during inspiration, taken as the minimum measurement interval
value within the measurement interval L Inspiratory alarm limits for secondary agent
– End-tidal N2O (etN2O) – the highest level of M Inspired secondary agent value – the level of
N2O in the airway during the expiratory phase anesthetic agent in the airway during the
within the measurement interval inspiration phase
A B C D E F G H N inN2O value – the level of N2O in the airway

in et within the measurement interval
O N2O label
O2 3.04 4.4
0.0 3.04 10.1
0.0
3.0 12.7
0.0 3.0 20.0
0.0
70 69
Agent_N2O_pbox_en1.pdf
N2O
O N M L K J I
A Abbreviation for primary anesthetic agent (may

display Agent? during agent identification for
B Abbreviation for secondary anesthetic agent
D Inspired primary agent value – the level of
inspiration phase
E Inspiratory alarm limits for primary agent
F Abbreviation for "expiratory"
G Expired primary agent value – the level of
inspiration phase
H Expiratory alarm limits for primary agent
I Expiratory alarm limits for secondary agent
Scio Monitoring
Manual agent identification Mixed Agent
Manual agent identification is available only for gas NOTE

analyzers without automatic agent identification:
The measurement of mixed agent is available
Scio Four and Scio Four Oxi.
only for gas analyzers with automatic agent rec-
ognition: Scio Four plus and Scio Four Oxi plus.
WARNING
Risk due to inaccurate gas measurement val- When the gas analyzer detects a mixture of two
ues anesthetic agents, the displayed real-time
Use care when selecting the agent manually. waveform is the primary agent concentration. The
Measurements are inaccurate if the wrong color of the waveform and the first agent label in the
agent is selected. Agent parameter field represents the agent with
the highest expiratory xMAC value (primary agent).
WARNING The following label indicates the SEV agent with
Risk due to inaccurate gas measurement val- the highest expiratory xMAC value:
ues
Sev
Measurements using a gas analyzer without
automatic agent recognition are inaccurate if Des
anesthetic gases are mixed.
This label switches to that of the second
administered agent when its expiratory xMAC value
To configure manual agent identification, refer to
exceeds that of the first agent:
"Agent parameter setup functions" on page 373.
Des
Automatic agent identification Sev
Automatic agent identification setup is available

only for the following gas analyzers: Scio Four Plus
and Scio Four Oxi plus.
These gas analyzers automatically identify up to
two anesthetic agents, even in mixtures.
If the gas analyzer has not yet identified or cannot
identify an agent, or has detected a mixture of three
or more anesthetic agents (for example, due to too
low agent concentrations, a leaking vaporizer, or
traces of disinfectants), the agent parameter field is
blank and the Agent label displays Agent?
Scio Monitoring
Scio Show all page  inN2O

 inHal
The Scio Show all page displays the values and
units of measure of the currently monitored  inEnf
parameters in one screen.  inIso
 inDes
To access the Scio Show all page
 inSev
 Touch the Show all tab on the Scio page.
 etO2
The Scio Show all page displays the following
parameter data:  etCO2
– Current measurements vent.  etN2O

These values can come from a MEDIBUS.X  etHal
device only. When only a Scio module is
connected, this section is blank.  etEnf
 PIP  etIso
 Pplat  etDes
 Pmean  etSev
 PEEP  xMAC
 R  RRc
 Cdyn – Current consumption
These values can come from a MEDIBUS.X
 E device only. When only a Scio module is
 Tcase connected, this section is blank.
 VT auto  Hal cons
 MVmand  Enf cons
 MVspon  Iso cons
 MV auto  Des cons
 RRmand  Sev cons
 RRspon  O2 cons
 RR auto  Air cons
– Current measurements gases  N2O cons
These values can come from either a Scio
module or a MEDIBUS.X device. However,
when a Scio module is connected, these values
always come from the Scio module.
 FiO2
 inCO2
Scio Monitoring
xMAC (MAC multiple)
The xMAC value is a simple navigation aid for

anesthetic agent delivery.
IACS displays the inspiratory and expiratory
measured values for O2, N2O, anesthetic gases,
and the xMAC.
The xMAC is the MAC multiple calculated from the
current expiratory measured values and the age-
dependent MAC values. If no respiratory phase is
detected, expiratory values and xMAC cannot be
displayed.
The integrated xMAC algorithm is based on the
MAC values shown in the following table. These
values are guiding values only. The binding values
are specified on the package information leaflet of
the anesthetic agent.
The MAC values are dependent upon the age of the
patient. The values specified in the table (according
to ISO 80601-2-55) apply to a patient age of 40
years.
IACS provides age-corrected xMAC if the user has
entered a birth date for the patient.If no birth date is
entered, IACS uses 40 years as the age.
Agent MAC corresponds to:

(in 100% O2)
Desflurane 6.0 Vol%
Enflurane 1.7 Vol%
Halothane 0.77 Vol%
Isoflurane 1.15 Vol%
N2O 105 Vol%
Sevoflurane 2.1 Vol%
The age-corrected MAC values are calculated

using an equation developed by W. W. Mapleson
(British Journal of Anaesthesia 1996, pp. 179-185).
The equation applies to patients older than 1 year.
MACage corrected = MAC1 x 10(–0.00269 x (age –40))
1 40 years
Scio Monitoring
For gas mixtures, the respective multiples for N2O

and anesthetic agents are added according to the
following equation:
exp. conc. Anesth.1 exp. conc. Anesth.2 exp. conc. N2O

xMAC = + +
MAC age-corrected Anesth.1 MAC age-corrected Anesth.2 MAC age-corrected N2O
Example:
exp. Iso. = 0.65 Vol%; exp. N2O = 69%;
age = 32 years
MACage-corrected from Iso.: MAC1 = 1.21 Vol%
MACage-corrected from N2O: MAC** = 110 Vol%
xMAC = 0.54 + 0.63 = 1.2
The influence of other drugs (opiates or
intravenous hypnotics) is not considered in the
xMAC calculation.
1 32 years
Zeroing the gas analyzer
The gas analyzer automatically purges and zeroes During zeroing:

itself and does not require any interaction by the
– Waveforms flatline
user.
– The status bar displays the message Scio
If the IACS has been in Standby or Discharge for
zeroing is in progress
less than two hours, the gas analyzer is available
without zeroing for at least the first 90 minutes of – Active Scio alarms continue to display
monitoring.
During the first 25 seconds of zeroing, the Scio-
However, if the IACS and/or gas analyzer has been related parameter fields (CO2, O2, N2O, Agents)
powered down or has been in Standby or display the last valid values.If zeroing takes longer
Discharge for more than two hours, a warm-up than 25 seconds, those parameter fields display
procedure occurs when the IACS begins "CAL"
monitoring. The warm-up procedure includes
zeroing and can take up to 7.5 minutes. During this
time, accuracy is reduced.
Dual SpO2 monitoring
Overview of Dual SpO2 monitoring. . . . . . . . 388

To set up SpO2* prior to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
To select the mini trends parameter . . . . . . . . . 388
To configure the mini trends display . . . . . . . . . 389
Overview of Dual SpO2 monitoring
Dual SpO2 monitoring is possible through an

RS-232 serial port connection from an external NOTE
device to the Cockpit. Data appears at the Cockpit The asterisk in SpO2* and PLS* indicates these
upon device connection.The following SpO2 output parameters are from an external device. Also,
devices are supported: primary SpO2 and SpO2* from an external device
– Nellcor PM1000N, N-180, NPB 190, NPB 195, are differentiated by color (selections are red,
NPB 395, NPB 595, NPB 600 green, blue, yellow, light blue, purple, orange,
white). The SpO2* default is light blue.
– Masimo Radical-7, Masimo Rad-87
To set up SpO2* prior to use

The external device interface supports the following screen.
parameters:
2 Press the Screen setup tab.
Parameter Label
3 Press the Auto view tab.
SpO2 SpO2*
4 Press the Manual button next to Display
Pulse rate PLS* mode.
SpO2 difference ∆SpO2 5 Locate and select SpO2*.
(∆SpO2 = SpO2 – SpO2*) 6 Rotate the rotary knob to advance SpO2* in the
Location (user set) – Pre-ductal priority list.
– Post-ductal 7 Press the rotary knob to view SpO2* on the
screen.
– Right
– Left
– Arm To select the mini trends parameter
– Foot Mini trends are available for SpO2* and ∆SpO2.

– None (default) 1 Press the Sensor parameters... button on the
main screen.
NOTE 2 Press the SpO2* tab.
No waveform is provided for SpO2* from an
external device. 3 Press the SpO2 label button and select. one of
the following: Pre-ductal, Post-ductal, Right,
NOTE Left, Arm, Foot, None (default).
A primary SpO2 device must also be connected in 4 Press the Mini Trend button and select ∆SpO2
order to display a ∆SpO2 value. or SpO2*.
5 Press the Color button and select a color.
To configure the mini trends display

screen.
2 Press the Screen setup tab.
3 Press the Auto view tab.
4 Press the Mini trends button.
5 Select one of the following settings:
– Off
– 10 min
– 15 min
– 20 min
– 30 min
– 45 min
– 1h
– 90 min
– 2h
– 4h
CAUTION
Alarms for external SpO2* devices are not
supported on the IACS.
External Device – Bispectral index (BIS)
Overview of BIS monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Supported parameters and settings . . . . . . . . . 392
BIS precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Device compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
BIS display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

BIS parameter field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Accessing the BIS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
BIS parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . 396

BIS Show all page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Overview of BIS monitoring
The Cockpit acquires data from the BIS VISTA Supported parameters and settings
monitoring system using an RS232 connection.
BIS monitoring provides the level of consciousness BIS– Bispectral index
using EEG electrodes that are affixed to the EMG – Electromyograph indicator
patient’s forehead. The BIS value guides the
clinician in administering the correct level of SQI– Signal quality index
anesthetic agents to achieve the correct level of BSR– Suppression ratio
sedation.
PWR– Total signal power
NOTE SEF– Spectral edge frequency
Waveforms are not supported on recordings.
BCT– Burst count
BIS monitoring is available for adult and pediatric Smoothing rate setting
patients. It is not available in neonatal mode.
All supported BIS parameters are trended as
Before performing any monitoring functions, refer graphical and tabular trends. For more information
to the section "For your safety and that of your (see page 175).
patients" on page 13. The Smoothing rate setting and all of the BIS
parameters are displayed in the Show all page
For detailed information and technical (see page 396).
specifications regarding BIS monitoring with the
BIS VISTA devices, refer to the documentation All BIS parameters are supported on the network
provided by the manufacturer. and available for export protocol.
The Smoothing rate setting is supported on the
network but it is not available for export protocol.
NOTE
SQI parameter trends are not transferred with a
network transfer from IACS to Delta.
BIS precautions
WARNING WARNING
When connecting a third-party device, verify The following section lists all of the external
its proper operation before clinical use. Refer devices and related software versions that
to the instructions for use of the third-party Dräger has validated. Dräger cannot make any
device for complete instructions. For further claim for the reliability of the data for
questions, contact your local representative. subsequent or previous software versions or
for any devices that have not been validated.
In the interest of patient safety and device
WARNING performance, do not connect devices to the
Always refer to the primary data source before monitor which have not been approved by
making diagnostic or therapeutic decisions. Dräger. The hospital is responsible for
contacting Dräger to determine the
Connecting peripheral devices is supported compatibility and warranty status of any
via the device connectivity option. Only connection made to another manufacturer’s
connect peripheral medical devices to a medical devices.
patient monitor if those devices comply with
the electrical safety requirements found in IEC
60601-1. Refer to "Safe connection with other Device compatibility
electrical equipment" on page 15" of these
instructions for use for information on how to The Cockpit supports the Aspect BIS Vista
connect devices safely. Complete 2-channel monitor with software version
3.00.
BIS display
On the Cockpit, the BIS x display consists of: BIS parameter field
– BISx parameter field
NOTE
– 1 EEG waveform
BIS parameter fields report parameter values. For

detailed information regarding the content of
parameter fields for each parameter, see the
chapter "Troubleshooting" on page 525.
The BIS parameter field contains the following EMG bar graph
elements:
The EMG bar graph consists of 5 tic marks. As the
amplitude increases, more tic marks are filled in
A B white.
C
D
D
C
E
B
H G F 559 A
A Bispectral index label (BIS)
561
B Secondary parameter label (selectable)
A First section is filled in – 30 to 38 dB
C Secondary parameter value
B Second section is filled in – 39 to 47 dB
D EMG label
C Third section is filled in – 48 to 55 dB
E Electromygraph bargraph indicating the current
amplitude of the EMG signal D All sections filled in – > 55 dB
F Signal quality index (SQI) bargraph indicating
the quality of the detected signal
G Signal quality index label (SQI)
H BIS value
NOTE
If the SQI value is less than 15%, the parameter
values for BIS, BSR, BCT, SEF, and PWR will be
replaced by *** identifying them as unreliable.
If the SQI value falls between 15% and 50% a
question mark appears next to the BIS value
indicating the value may be unreliable.
If BSR is less than 5%, the BCT value will be
replaced by *** identifying it as unreliable.
SQI bar graph

The SQI bar graph consists of 5 bars. The more
bars are filled in green, the better the quality of the
signal.
E
D
C
B
A
560
A SQI value between 0 and 20
B SQI value between 21 and 40
C SQI value between 41 and 60
D SQI value between 61 and 80
E SQI value between 81 and 100
Waveforms
One EEG waveform (labelled as EEG T) is

displayed next to the BIS parameter field.
Accessing the BIS settings
 Select the BIS parameter field to select the BIS If you cannot see the tab, select the following
page directly. two symbols located in the upper right corner of
or
button.
3 Select the Settings and Show all tab.
menu bar.
2 Select the BIS tab to access the BIS page.
BIS parameter setup functions
All BIS setup functions take place in the BIS page.

Settings page
Scale[uV] 5, 10, 25, 50, 100 (default), 250 µV Selects the scale of the EEG T
waveform.
Smoothing rate Informational data only Not applicable
[s]
BIS secondary BSR, BCT (default), SEF, PWR Selects a secondary parameter
parameter and assigns it to the BIS
parameter field (see page 393).
No alarm Informational message that no optical or Not applicable
signaling for this acoustic alarm signals are available on the
device. the Cockpit
BIS Show all page
This page displays all supported BIS parameters, settings, labels and the units of measure where
appropriate.
External Device – Neuromuscular transmission (NMT)
Overview of NMT monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Supported modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Supported settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
NMT precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Device compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
NMT display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

NMT parameter field (PTC mode) . . . . . . . . . . 400
NMT parameter field (TOF/TOFs mode) . . . . . 401
Printing NMT information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Accessing the NMT settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
The NMT page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

NMT parameter functions and settings. . . . . . . 404
Overview of NMT monitoring
The Cockpit supports communication with third- Supported modes

party neuromuscular transmission devices using an
RS232 connection. The following modes from the NMT device are
NMT monitoring measures the level of muscle supported:
relaxation of patients under the influence of – TOF (Train of Four) – A sequence of four
neuromuscular blocking agents. By using an stimulation pulses is sent and the magnitude of
electrical stimulus of a peripheral nerve, the muscle the muscle twitch after each individual pulse is
response (thumb twitch) and the skin temperature measured.
can be measured.
– TOFs (slow Train of Four) – the user sets the
NMT monitoring is available for adult, pediatric, and frequency of the stimulation of four pulses.
neonatal patients.
– PTC (Post Tetanic Count) – counts the
Before performing any monitoring functions, refer responses of tetanic stimulation followed by
to the section "For your safety and that of your single stimuli at one-second intervals
patients" on page 13. NMT modes are not displayed. Furthermore, they
are not available on the network and are not
For detailed information and technical available for export protocol.
specifications regarding NMT monitoring, refer to
the documentation provided by the manufacturer of
the NMT device. Supported settings
The following settings from the NMT device are

Supported parameters supported:
The following parameters from the NMT device are – Stimulation current mode – determines if the
supported: stimulation current was obtained automatically
or set by the user manually.
– TOF Ratio – Train of Four ratio (%)
– Stimulation current – reports the current in mA
– TOF-Cnt – Train of Four count (no unit of
measurement) – Pulse width – reports the width of the pulse
microseconds
– PTC – Post Tetanic Count (no unit of
measurement) All NMT settings are broadcast to the Infinity
network. They are not available for Export protocol.
All NMT parameters are trended and available on
the Infinity network and export protocol.
All trended NMT parameters are available for
network transfer. For more information (see page
175).
NMT precautions
WARNING WARNING
When connecting a third-party device, verify The following section lists all of the external
its proper operation before clinical use. Refer devices and related software versions that
to the instructions for use of the third-party Dräger has validated. Dräger cannot make any
device for complete instructions. For further claim for the reliability of the data for
questions, contact your local representative. subsequent or previous software versions or
WARNING performance, do not connect devices to the
Always refer to the primary data source before monitor which have not been approved by
making diagnostic or therapeutic decisions. Dräger. The hospital is responsible for
Connecting peripheral devices is supported compatibility and warranty status of any
via the device connectivity option. Only connection made to another manufacturer’s
connect peripheral medical devices to a medical devices.
60601-1. Refer to "Safe connection with other Device compatibility
electrical equipment" on page 15 of these
instructions for use for information on how to The Cockpit is compatible with the following NMT
connect devices safely. devices:
– TOF scan - minimum version 1.5.8
NMT display
On the Cockpit, the NMT display consists of two NOTE

NMT parameter fields. The content depends on
The following diagrams show a typical parameter
one of the following modes which is selected at the
NMT device:
– Single more information, see "Parameter fields" on
page 70.
– TOF Ratio or TOF Cnt (parameter field display
depends on the selected mode) Parameter fields report parameter values and
– PTC indicate certain technical information such as signal
strength and time stamps (see page 400 for
detailed information).
NMT parameter field (PTC mode)
The NMT parameter field in PTC mode contains the

following elements:
A B C
E D
564
A Neuromuscular transmission label (NMT)

B NMT mode label PTC
C Time stamp of current value (display depends
on menu setting - see page 403)
D PTC value
E 15 individual amplitude bar graphs indicating
the number of twitches
NMT parameter field (TOF/TOFs mode)
The NMT parameter field in ’TOF /TOFs’ mode is C Time stamp of the current value (the time stamp
very similar and contains the following elements: identifies the time the Cockpit received the
value from the connected device)
D Count down time bar and value indicating the
remaining time in the interval before the start of
the next set of measurements - displayed only
in TOFs mode
A B C
The label auto 15 s appears instead of the
count down bar when the user initiates
30 automatic TOF.
E TOF Ratio / TOF-Cnt value
F E D
F 4 individual amplitude bar graphs indicating the
number of TOF counts (the last bar shows the
magnitude of the fourth twitch).
A Neuromuscular transmission label (NMT) 563
B NMT parameter label TOF Ratio or TOF Cnt

TOF Ratio appears when the TOF count is
equal to four twitches and the amplitude of the
first twitch is ≥ 20%.
TOF Cnt appears when the TOF count is ≤ than
three twitches or there are four twitches and the
magnitude of the first twitch is < 20%.
Printing NMT information
You can print a report of all NMT settings and up to or

the latest 500 measurements.
menu bar.
Printing NMT settings and measurements
2 Select the NMT tab to access the NMT page.
1 Select the NMT parameter field to select the
3 Select the Print button in the lower left corner of
NMT page directly.
the NMT page.
2 Select the Print button in the lower left corner of
the NMT page.
Accessing the NMT settings
 Select the NMT parameter field to select the

NMT page directly.
or
menu bar.
2 Select the NMT tab to access the NMT page.
button.
The NMT page
The NMT page displays the settings of the NMT A Display temperature button for activating or
device. Except for the Display temperature and deactivating the temperature display in the NMT
the Print buttons these settings are informational parameter field.
only and cannot be changed on the Cockpit. The
B Settings field– displays the settings of the
NMT page also displays the latest NMT
connected third-party NMT device.
measurement values collected. A total of 500
measurements can be reviewed and are accessible C Measurements field – reports the last 500 NMT
with the scroll bar. Once the data base reaches 500 measurements.
measurements, the oldest measurement is
D Scroll bar for scrolling through the collected
replaced by the most recent one.
NMT data.
Unlike trends, the measurements on the NMT page
E Print button for printing the measurements and
cannot be transferred.
settings.
The following diagram depicts the NMT page.
F No alarm signaling for this device. –
Informational message.
A A
B C D
E
565
NMT parameter functions and settings

Display – On Controls the temperature
temperature display in the NMT parameter
– Off (Default) field (not available with
TOFscan).
Stim current 0 to 60 mA (no default) Displays the stimulation current
of the NMT device.
Stim current Auto The NMT device establishes a
mode supramaximal current during
the first measurement and uses
it for subsequent
measurements (not available
with TOFscan).
Manual The stimulation current was
selected manually.
Sensitivity (1-512) Between 1 and 512 (no default) Displays the sensitivity of the
NMT device(not available with
TOFscan).
Pulse width 200 or 300 µs Determines the width of the
pulse.
Print Prints the current NMT settings and up to 500 of the most recent measurements.
No alarm Informational message that no optical or acoustic alarm signals are available on
signaling for this the Cockpit.
device.
External device – continuous cardiac output (CCO)
Overview of CCO monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

External device alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Reference handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
CCO precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
CCO/SvO2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

CCO/SvO2 parameter field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Viewing the CCO/SvO2 parameters . . . . . . . 410
Accessing the CCO/SvO2 settings . . . . . . . . 411
SvO2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . 411
Overview of CCO monitoring
With the device connectivity option, the Cockpit can External device alarms
display parameter values from a continuous
cardiac output device. Within 30 seconds of If the external device alarm feature is activated at
connecting the device, the data appear at the the Cockpit (see page 474) and an external device
Cockpit. The following cardiac output devices are is disconnected from the Cockpit, the following
supported: happens at the Cockpit and at the ICS when the
– Vigilance II SvO2/CCO patient is admitted at the ICS:
– Vigileo SvO2/CCO – An alarm tone of low priority sounds.
– EV1000 – The message External device disconnected

appears.
The CCO monitoring functions are configurable in
the parameter-specific setup page (see page 411).
Before performing any monitoring functions, refer Reference handbook
patients" on page 13. For a complete list of available parameters contact
your DrägerService representative.
The following table lists the supported parameters

displayed on the Cockpit originating from external
CCO devices that are supporting and monitoring
these parameters. The range and resolution for all
parameters are provided by the CCO device. All of
the parameters are displayed in the Show all page
(see page 410).
Label Parameter Unit of mea- Comments Cockpit Trends Originating
surement page from which
device
SvO2 Venous oxygen % Not applicable Continuous Vigilance II,
saturation trend Vigileo,
CCO Continuous L/min Not applicable Continuous EV1000
cardiac output trend
CCI Continuous L/min/m2 Calculated value on Continuous
cardiac output Cockpit; requires trend
index height and weight
values from the
Cockpit.
SVR Systemic dyn·s/cm5 Calculated value at Continuous
vascular the Cockpit; trend
resistance requires the values
for ART M and CVP
from the Cockpit.
SVRI Systemic dyn·s/cm5/m2 Calculated value on Continuous

vascular Cockpit; requires trend
resistance index height and weight
values from the
Cockpit.
SV Stroke volume mL Calculated value on Continuous
Cockpit; requires trend
SVI Stroke volume mL/m2 heart rate to be Continuous
index monitored. trend
Label Parameter Unit of mea- Comments Cockpit Trends Originating

surement page from which
device
Tblood Blood °C or °F Unit of Continuous Vigilance II and
temperature measurement is trend EV1000
determined by the
unit of
measurement
selected at the
Cockpit
VO2 Oxygen mL/min Not applicable Not trended
consumption
DO2 Oxygen delivery mL/min Not applicable Not trended
SaO2 Arterial oxygen % Not applicable Continuous Vigilance II
saturation trend
EDV End-diastolic mL Not applicable Not trended
volume
EDVI End-diastolic mL/m2 Calculated value on Not trended
volume index Cockpit; requires
height and weight
values from the
Cockpit.
ESV End-systolic mL Not applicable Not trended
volume
ESVI End-systolic mL/m2 Calculated value on Not trended
volume index Cockpit; requires
height and weight
values from the
Cockpit.
EF Ejection fraction % Not applicable Not trended
SVV Stroke volume % Calculated Continuous Vigileo and
variation parameter on trend EV1000
Cockpit; if required
parameters are not
monitored or
entered, the
parameter appears
blank.
CCO precautions
WARNING WARNING
To reduce the risk of patient injury due to Always refer to the primary data source before
electrical shock, always position the external making diagnostic or therapeutic decisions.
device connectivity cable as far from the
patient as possible. Make sure that any cables Connecting peripheral devices is supported
or other conducting devices do not come in via the device connectivity option. Only
contact with the patient. The device connect peripheral medical devices to a
connectivity cable is electrically isolated from patient monitor if those devices comply with
the monitor and any peripheral devices, but the electrical safety requirements found in IEC
the cable’s enclosure is not electrically 60601-1. Refer to "Safe connection with other
isolated from the peripheral device itself. electrical equipment" on page 15 of these
instructions for use for information on how to
connect devices safely.
WARNING
The Cockpit does not annunciate alarms for
external device parameters.
CCO/SvO2 display
On the Cockpit, the CCO/SvO2 display consists of

a parameter field. A B
CCO/SvO2 parameter field

C
NOTE D
field layout. This layout may change when addi- E
F
049
indicate the alarm status of parameters. Parameter A Primary parameter label
disconnected sensors and so on. For detailed B Secondary parameter label
information regarding the content of parameter C Secondary parameter value
"Troubleshooting" on page 525. D Third parameter label
The CCO/SvO2 parameter field contains the E Third parameter value

following elements: F Primary parameter value
Viewing the CCO/SvO2 parameters
The Show all page displays the values of the 1 Select the Trends/ Data... button from the main
currently monitored CCO/SvO2 parameters. menu bar.
2 Select the Hemo tab.
To access the CCO/SvO2 parameters
3 Select the Show all tab.
1 Select the Sensor parameters... button from
the main menu bar.
2 Select the CCO tab.If you cannot see the tab,
or
Accessing the CCO/SvO2 settings
1 Select the Sensor parameters... button from

the main menu bar.
2 Select the CCO tab. If you cannot see the tab,
SvO2 parameter setup functions

Parameter 1 SvO2 (default), Tblood, CCO, CCI, VO2, Selects the primary parameter
DO2, SaO2, SVR, SVRI, EDV, EDVI, ESV, in the CCO parameter field.
ESVI, EF, SV, SVI, SVV
Parameter 2 SvO2, Tblood, CCO (default), CCI, VO2, Selects the secondary
DO2, SaO2, SVR, SVRI, EDV, EDVI, ESV, parameter in the CCO
ESVI, EF, SV, SVI, SVV parameter field.
Parameter 3 SvO2, Tblood, CCO, CCI, VO2, DO2, SaO2, Selects the third parameter in
SVR (default), SVRI, EDV, EDVI, ESV, ESVI, the CCO parameter field.
EF, SV, SVI, SVV
CCO mini trend SvO2, SVV, CCO (default), CCI, SVR, SVRI, Selects the parameter to be
SV, SVI included in the mini-trend.
NOTE
SVV, SV, and SVI trends are not available on the
destination Cockpit after a network transfer.
However, they could eventually be viewed on the
primary patient monitor, the ICS, or any other
patient data management system.
External devices – MEDIBUS.X devices
External device monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Compatible MEDIBUS.X devices. . . . . . . . . . 415
Supported MEDIBUS.X ventilator and

anesthesia data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Supported parameters on the Cockpit . . . . . . . 416
Supported waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Viewing MEDIBUS.X parameter data . . . . . . 424
Viewing loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
The Show all pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Configuring the ventilator Show all page . . . . . 426
Accessing parameter setup functions . . . . . 427
Paw setup functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Ventilator parameter setup functions . . . . . . 428
CO2 setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
External device monitoring
The device connectivity option enables the Cockpit External device alarms
to partner with external MEDIBUS.X -compatible
devices to provide the following functionality: Alarms from the ventilator are transmitted to the
– Display parameter values, waveforms, and Infinity network and made available for alarm
loops from ventilators and anesthesia machines annunciation at the ICS. For more information, refer
to the Instructions for use Infinity CentralStation.
– Trend parameters
If the external device alarm feature is activated at
– Show all pages for ventilators that can be the Cockpit (see page 474) and an external device
configured is disconnected from the Cockpit, the following
– Configurable display of parameter fields for happens at the Cockpit and at the ICS when the
ventilators and anesthesia machines patient is admitted at the ICS:
Within 30 seconds of connecting a device, the data – An alarm tone of low priority sounds.
appear at the Cockpit. – The message External device disconnected
is displayed.
NOTE
Ventilation waveforms are not supported on re-
cordings.

patients" on page 13. For device-specific error
messages, refer to the instructions for use of the
connected ventilator.
NOTE
When connecting a ventilator that does not sup-
port CO2 monitoring, the Cockpit may still display
a CO2 tab in the Ventilator dialog.
Precautions
WARNING
WARNING The following table lists all of the external
Always refer to the primary data source before devices and related software versions that
making diagnostic or therapeutic decisions. Dräger has validated. Dräger cannot make any
Connecting peripheral devices is supported claim for the reliability of the data for
via the device connectivity option. Only subsequent or previous software versions or
connect peripheral medical devices to a for any devices that have not been validated.
patient monitor if those devices comply with In the interest of patient safety and device
the electrical safety requirements found in IEC performance, do not connect devices to the
60601-1. Refer to "Safe connection with other monitor which have not been approved by
electrical equipment" on page 15 of these Dräger. The hospital is responsible for
instructions for use for information on how to contacting Dräger to determine the
connect devices safely. compatibility and warranty status of any
connection made to another manufacturer’s
medical devices.
Compatible MEDIBUS.X devices
The Cockpit device connectivity interface allows The following table lists which devices and corre-
data from various standalone devices to display pa- sponding software versions are supported with ME-
rameters, settings and waveforms on the Cockpit. DIBUS.X version 1.0.3.
Supported device Supported software version

Ventilators
Dräger Evita V500 2.31
Dräger Babylog VN500 2.31
Dräger Savina 300 4.02
Dräger Carina 3.21
Dräger Evita V300 2.31
Dräger Oxylog 3000+ 1.04
Anesthesia machines
Dräger Primus family, Apollo 4.5
Dräger Infinity Perseus A500 1.11
Dräger Zeus IE 1.04
Dräger Fabius family 3.35
Supported MEDIBUS.X ventilator and anesthesia data
The MEDIBUS.X ventilators and anesthesia low-priority alarm messages but broadcasts all
machines send parameters, settings, modes, and medium-priority and high-priority alarm messages
waveforms are broadcast to the network via the to the Infinity network.
Cockpit. However, not all parameters are displayed
Refer to the RS-232 export handbook for
at the Cockpit (see table below for supported
information on which parameters are available for
parameters). In addition, the Cockpit refuses all
export protocol. The RS-232 export handbook is
available in English only.
Supported parameters on the Cockpit
The following table lists which MEDIBUS.X

ventilator and anesthesia parameters are displayed
and trended on the Cockpit. Refer to page 415 for
a list of supported ventilators and anesthesia
machines and the compatible software versions.
Parameter Description Unit of Displayed in Ventila- Cockpit Available

label mea- tion or Anesthesia Trends page for display
sure- Show all page (see in parame-
ment page 426) ter field
Yes/No?
Air cons Accumulated air L Ventilation Not trended No
consumption
Cdyn Dynamic compliance L/bar Ventilation and Continuous No
Anesthesia trend
CO2 slope Increase of mmHg/L Ventilation Continuous No
measured CO2 kPa/L trend
value in phase III of
the CO2 waveform Vol%/L
C20/Cdyn Ratio of compliance No units Ventilation Continuous No

during the last 20% trend
of inspiration of
dynamic compliance
DCO2 CO2 elimination 10*mL^2/ Ventilation Continuous No
coefficient during s trend
HFO
Des cons Desflurane mL Anesthesia Continuous No
consumption trend
E Elastance mbar/L Anesthesia and Continuous No
Ventilation trend

Yes/No?
EIP End-inspiratory mbar Ventilation Continuous No
pressure trend
Enf cons Enflurane mL Anesthesia Continuous No
consumption trend
etCO2 End-tidal carbon % Anesthesia and Continuous Yes
dioxide Ventilation trend
concentration kPa Anesthesia and Continuous No
Ventilation trend
etDes End-tidal desflurane % Anesthesia Continuous Yes
concentration kPa trend
etEnf End-tidal enflurane % Anesthesia Continuous Yes

etHal End-tidal halothane % Anesthesia Continuous Yes

etIso End-tidal isoflurane % Anesthesia Continuous Yes

etN2O End-tidal nitrous % Anesthesia Continuous Yes

oxide concentration trend
etO2 End-tidal oxygen % Anesthesia and Continuous Yes
concentration Ventilation trend
etSev Endtidal sevoflurane % Anesthesia Continuous Yes
FiO2 Inspiratory oxygen % Anesthesia and Continuous Yes

fraction Ventilation trend (appears as
inO2)
FlowDev Average device flow L/min Ventilation Continuous No

trend
Hal cons Accumulated mL Anesthesia Continuous No
halothane trend
consumption
inHal Inspiratory halothane % Anesthesia Continuous Yes

Yes/No?
inCO2 Inspiratory carbon % Anesthesia and Continuous Yes
dioxide kPa Ventilation trend
concentration
I (I:E) Inspiratory No units Ventilation Not trended No
component
E (I:E) Expiratory No units Ventilation Not trended No
component
inEnf Inspiratory enflurane % Anesthesia Continuous Yes
inDes Inspiratory % Anesthesia Continuous Yes

desflurane kPa trend
concentration
inN2O Inspiratory nitrous % Anesthesia Continuous Yes
oxide concentration trend
inIso Inspiratory isoflurane % Anesthesia Continuous Yes
inSev Inspiratory % Anesthesia Continuous Yes

sevoflurane kPa trend
concentration
Iso cons Isoflurane mL Anesthesia Continuous No
consumption trend
% leak Leakage minute % Ventilation Continuous No
volume in % of trend
inspiratory minute
volume
MV Minute volume L/min Ventilation and Continuous Yes
Anesthesia trend
MVe Minute volume, L/min Ventilation Continuous Yes
expired trend
MVespon Spontaneous L/min Ventilation Continuous No
expiratory minute trend
volume
MVleak Leakage minute L/min Ventilation Continuous No
volume trend
MVi Minute volume, L/min Ventilation Continuous Yes
inspired trend

Yes/No?
MVmand Mandatory minute L/min Ventilation and Continuous No
volume Anesthesia trend
MVspon Spontaneous minute L/min Ventilation and Continuous No
volume Anesthesia trend
% MVspon Spontaneous % Ventilation Continuous No
breathing portion of trend
minute volume
N2O cons Accumulated nitrous L Anesthesia Not trended No
oxide consumption
NIF Negative inspiratory mbar Ventilation Continuous No
force trend
∆O2 Inspiratory/ % Ventilation and Continuous No
expiratory oxygen Anesthesia trend
concentration
difference
O2 cons Accumulated oxygen L Anesthesia Not trended No
consumption
P0.1 Occlusion pressure mbar Ventilation Continuous No
trend
∆Phf Pressure amplitude mbar Ventilation Continuous No
during HFO trend
Phigh Upper pressure level mbar Ventilation Continuous No
during APRV trend
PIP Peak inspiratory mbar Ventilation and Continuous Yes
pressure Anesthesia trend
Plow Lower pressure level mbar Ventilation Continuous No
during APRV trend
Pmin Minimum airway mbar Ventilation Continuous No
pressure trend
Pmean Mean airway mbar Ventilation and Continuous Yes
pressure Anesthesia trend
Pplat Plateau pressure mbar Ventilation and Continuous Yes
Anesthesia trend
R Resistance mbar/L/s Ventilation and Continuous No
Anesthesia trend

Yes/No?
r2 Correlation factor min Ventilation Continuous No
trend
Rpat Patient airway mbar/L/s Ventilation Continuous No
resistance trend
RR Respiratory rate /min Anesthesia and Continuous Yes
Ventilation trend
RRc Respiratory rate /min Ventilation Continuous Yes
based on carbon trend
dioxide
measurement
RRf Respiratory rate /min Ventilation Continuous Yes
based on trend
volume/flow
measurement
RRmand Mandatory /min Ventilation and Continuous No
respiratory rate Anesthesia trend
RRp Respiratory rate /min Ventilation Continuous Yes
based on pressure trend
RRspon Spontaneous /min Ventilation Continuous No
respiratory rate trend
RSB Rapid shallow 1/min/L Ventilation Continuous No
breathing index Note: not trend
supported in
1/min/mL
unit of
measure in
the export
protocol
application
Note: adult
and
pediatric
patients
only
Sev cons Sevoflurane mL Anesthesia Continuous No

consumption trend
Tispon Spontaneous s Ventilation Continuous No
inspiratory time trend
TC Time constant s Ventilation Continuous No
trend

Yes/No?
Tcase Therapy case min Anesthesia Not trended No
duration
TCe Expiratory time s Ventilation Continuous No
constant trend
Tlow Effective expiratory s Ventilation Continuous No
time during trend
APRV/AutoRelease
V'CO2 Carbon dioxide mL/min Ventilation Continuous No
production trend
Vds Serial dead space mL Ventilation Continuous No
volume trend
Vds/VTe Ratio of serial dead % Ventilation Continuous No
space volume to trend
expiratory tidal
volume
V'O2 Oxygen mL/min Ventilation Continuous No
consumption trend
VTACH Tidal volume mL Ventilation and Continuous Yes
Anesthesia trend
VTCO2 CO2 production mL Ventilation Continuous No
volume per breath trend
VTe Expiratory tidal mL Ventilation Continuous Yes
volume trend
VTemand Mandatory mL Ventilation Continuous No
expiratory tidal trend
volume
VTespon Spontaneous mL Ventilation Continuous No
expiratory tidal trend
volume
VTespon Expiratory mL Ventilation Continuous No
mean spontaneous mean trend
tidal volume
VThf Tidal volume during mL Ventilation Continuous No
HFO trend
VTi Inspiratory tidal mL Ventilation Continuous Yes
volume trend

Yes/No?
VTimand Mandatory mL Ventilation Continuous No
inspiratory tidal trend
volume
VTispon Spontaneous mL Ventilation Continuous No
inspiratory tidal trend
volume
VTispon Inspiratory mL Ventilation Continuous No
mean spontaneous mean trend
tidal volume
VTmand Mandatory tidal mL Ventilation Continuous No
volume Note: Only trend
mL is
supported
(L is
supported
on source
device)
VTspon Spontaneous tidal mL Ventilation Continuous No

volume Note: Only trend
mL is
supported
(L is
supported
on source
device)
VT/Wt Tidal volume per kg mL/kg Ventilation Continuous No

body weight trend
xMAC xMAC mean alveolar no units Anesthesia Continuous Yes
concentration trend
derived from
expiratory
concentration.
Supported waveforms
The following MEDIBUS.X waveforms are

displayed on the Cockpit.
Waveform label Description Unit of measurement

Paw Airway pressure mbar
Flow Inspiratory and expiratory flow L/min
CO2 Carbon dioxide concentration mmHg, kPa, %
Viewing MEDIBUS.X parameter data
The Cockpit displays parameter data originating The Cockpit displays the following waveforms,
from connected MEDIBUS.X devices in the loops, and parameters:
following locations:
– Airway pressure waveform (Paw) and
– Parameter fields associated parameter field
– Loops pages (see page 425) – Expiratory flow waveform and associated
flow/volume (vent) parameter field
– Trends pages (see page 175)
– CO2 waveforms and associated parameter field
– Show all pages (see 426)
– Loops (flow-volume, pressure-volume)
Parameter fields
NOTE A Primary parameter label

The following diagram shows a typical parameter B Second parameter label
C Second parameter value
additional parameters are put on display.
D Third parameter label
indicate the alarm status of parameters. Parameter E Third parameter value
fields can also report technical conditions such as F Primary parameter value
disconnected sensors, and so on. The content of a
parameter field can be configured. For more NOTE
information see page 427. The background of the Paw parameter field
The following diagram shows a typical parameter appears cyan when a ventilator or an anesthesia
field for a MEDIBUS.X parameter. workstation becomes disconnected.
A B
C
D
E
F
049
Viewing loops
Loops offer important information about the 1 Select the Sensor parameters... button on the
response of the patient to mechanical ventilation. main menu bar.
The Cockpit displays loops from supported
2 Select the Ventilator tab or the Anesthesia
MEDIBUS.X devices provided the source devices
workstation tab.
make the data available to the MEDIBUS.X
protocol. 3 Select the PV Loop tab to view pressure-
volume loops or select the FV Loop tab to view
Pressure-volume loops illustrate changes in
flow-volume loops.
compliance, resistance, and work of breathing. A
mandatory breath plots counterclockwise, while a 4 Select the Loops tab to view all loops in one
spontaneous breath plots clockwise. Inspiration dialog.
starts at a point defined by baseline pressure and
5 Select the Loop draw button at the bottom of
the volume level at the beginning of inspiration.
the pages to choose how many loops are drawn
Flow-volume loops also report mechanical and on top of each other before the screen is
spontaneous breaths. Inspiration begins at the cleared.
origin and moves upward and clockwise. Expiration
6 Select the Save reference button at the bottom
plots below the horizontal axis and progresses
of the page if you want to save a loop for future
counterclockwise to the original starting point.
analysis and comparison.
To view loops
You can view loops from the Ventilator or the
Anesthesia workstation tabs. Which tab is
displayed depends on whether a ventilator or an
anesthesia workstation is connected.
NOTE
Depending on which devices are connected to the
Cockpit, two Ventilator tabs may be displayed.
The MEDIBUS.X Ventilator tab is the one that
has the message Medibus.X ventilator devices
displayed as a header on the various pages.
The Show all pages
The Show all page displays the values and units of To access the Show all pages
measure of the currently monitored parameters in
You can access the Show all page in the
one screen. The following two Show all pages are
Ventilator or the Anesthesia workstation tabs.
available:
Which tab is displayed depends on whether a
– Under the Anesthesia workstation tab ventilator or an anesthesia workstation is
connected.
NOTE
Depending on which devices are connected to the NOTE
Cockpit, two Ventilator tabs may be displayed. Depending on which devices are connected to the
The MEDIBUS.X Ventilator tab is the one that Cockpit, two Ventilator tabs may be displayed.
has the message Medibus.X ventilator devices The MEDIBUS.X Ventilator tab is the one that
displayed as a header on the various pages. has the message Medibus.X ventilator devices
The anesthesia Show all page displays the
following data: 1 Select the Sensor parameters... button on the
main menu bar.
– Current ventilator measurements
2 Select Ventilator or Anesthesia workstation
– Current gas measurements
> Show all.
– Current consumption
Configuring the ventilator Show all page
NOTE
If a Scio module is connected, the values in the You can configure the parameter display of the
Current measurements gases section come ventilator Show all page and adapt it to the
from the Scio module, regardless of which MEDI- parameter set of the connected device.
BUS.X device is connected.
To configure the ventilator Show all page
The ventilator Show all page displays the following
data: 1 Select the Sensor parameters... button on the
main menu bar.
– Current ventilator measurements
Select Ventilator > Configure show all. A page
– Units of measure with twenty-six buttons appears.
The ventilator Show all page can be configured
NOTE
(see page 426).
2 Press any button to activate a list of available – MV auto: MVe, MV,MVi

parameters. You can also select None to
– RR auto: RR, RRf, RRp
remove any parameter from being displayed in
that space. The parameter selection MV auto, – VT auto: VTe, VTACH,VTi
RR auto and VT auto are unique because the
3 Select the desired parameter in the list to assign
associated parameter set varies from device to
it to the button and to the Show all page.
device. When the Vent parameter display
setting Auto is selected, the Cockpit pulls the 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired configu-
available parameter from the source device ration for the Show all page is completed.
according to the following priority list:
Accessing parameter setup functions
You can configure the display of ventilation and If you cannot see the tab, select the following
anesthesia parameters in the following tabs located two symbols located in the upper right corner of
under the Ventilator or the Anesthesia the dialog: symbol and the display filter
workstation tabs. button.
– Paw 3 Select either the Paw, Vent or CO2 or CO2/O2/
Agent tabs to access the respective setup
– Vent
pages.
– CO2 (when a ventilator is connected) or
CO2/O2/ Agent (when anesthesia workstation NOTE
is connected) Most setup functions described in the following ta-
bles are available under the Ventilator and the
Anesthesia workstation tabs. Exception where
menu bar.
a setup function is only available under one tab
2 Select the Ventilator or the Anesthesia are noted.
workstation tab.
NOTE
Paw setup functions
See page 427 for information on how to access this

page.

Paw scale 10, 15, 20, 25 (default), 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, Determines the scale of the
100, 120 mbar displayed Paw waveform.
Parameter 1 PEEP, PIP (default), Pmean, Pplat Selects the primary
parameter in the Paw
parameter field.
Parameter 2 PEEP, PIP, Pmean (default), Pplat Selects the second
parameter field.
Parameter 3 PEEP (default), PIP, Pmean, Pplat Selects the third parameter
in the Paw parameter field.
Color Red, green, blue, yellow, light blue (default), Determines the color of all
purple, orange, white. MEDIBUS.X parameter
fields, waveforms, and
loops.
Ventilator parameter setup functions

page.

Flow scale 5, 10, 15, 20 (default in neonatal mode), Determines the scale of the
35, 50, 100 (default in adult and pediatric displayed Flow waveform.
mode), 150, 200 L/min
Vol scale 5, 10, 25, 50 (default in neonatal mode), Determines the scale of the
75, 100, 250, 500, 1000 (default in displayed Volume waveform.
pediatric and adult mode), 1500 mL

Vent parameter – Auto (default) Determines whether the selected
display parameters for display in the
– Manual
parameter field are selected
manually or automatically. With the
setting Manual, the parameter for
each parameter field location are
selected manually. With the setting
Auto, the parameter supported by
the source device is assigned to
the parameter field location.
Parameter 1 MVe (default), MVi, VTe, VTACH, VTi, RR, Selects the primary parameter in
RRf, RRp the ventilation parameter field
when the Vent parameter display
setting is set to Manual.
– MV auto (default) – (available Selects the primary parameter in
parameter depends on source the ventilation parameter field
device:MVe, MV, MVi) automatically when the Vent
parameter display setting is set to
– RR auto – (available parameter
Auto. The specific parameter
depends on source device: RR, RRf,
supported by the source device is
RRp)
assigned automatically according
– VT auto – (available parameters to the priority list.
depends on source device: VTe,
VTACH, VTi)
Parameter 2 MVe, MVi, VTe, VTACH, VTi, RR (default), Selects the second parameter in
RRf, RRp the ventilation parameter field
when the Vent parameter display
– MV auto – (available parameter Selects the primary parameter in
depends on source device:MVe, MV, the ventilation parameter field
MVi) automatically when the Vent
– RR auto (default) – (available
parameter depends on source device:
RR, RRf, RRp)
– VT auto – (available parameters to the priority list.
depends on source device: VTe,
VTACH, VTi)

Parameter 3 MVe, MVi, VTe (default), VTACH, VTi, RR, Selects the third parameter in the
RRf, RRp ventilation parameter field when
the Vent parameter display
– MV auto – (available parameter Selects the primary parameter in
depends on source device:MVe, MV, the ventilation parameter field
MVi) automatically when the Vent
– RR auto – (available parameter
depends on source device: RR, RRf,
RRp)
– VT auto (default) – (available to the priority list.
parameters depends on source device:
VTe, VTACH, VTi)
Color Red, green, blue, yellow, light blue Determines the color of all
(default), purple, orange, white. ventilation parameter fields,
waveforms, and loops.
CO2 setup functions

page. The tab is labelled CO2 when a ventilator is
connected. The tab is labelled CO2/O2/ Agent
when an anesthesia workstation is connected.
Menu selections when Ventilator tab is selected.
CO2 Scale – 0 to 40 (default), 0 to 60, 0 to 80, Determines the scale of the
0 to 100 mmHg displayed CO2 waveform.
– 0.0 to 5.0 (default), 0.0 to 8.0, 0.0 to 12.0,
0.0 to 16.0 kPa
– 0 to 5 (default), 0 to 8, 0 to 12, 0 to 16%
Color Red, green, blue, yellow (default), light blue, Determines the color of the
purple, orange, white. CO2 parameter field and
waveform.
Menu selections when Anesthesia workstation tab is selected.
etCO2 parameter – etCO2 (default) Determines the appearance of
field the etCO2 parameter field.
– etCO2/O2
– 0.0 to 5.0 (default), 0.0 to 8.0, 0.0 to 12.0,
0.0 to 16.0 kPa
waveform.
O2 parameter field – O2 Determines the appearance of
the O2 parameter field.
– O2/N2O (default)
– Off
Agent parameter – Agent Determines the appearance of
field the Agent parameter field.
– Agent/ xMAC (default)
Note: If two agents are
– Agent/N2O
detected, both are displayed
– Off automatically.
External devices – Servo-i ventilator
Overview of ventilation monitoring . . . . . . . 434

Infinity CentralStation – Vent Central option. . . 434
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Device compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Supported Servo-i parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Supported Servo-i waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Viewing parameter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Viewing loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
The Show all page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Accessing the parameter setup functions. . . 440
Ventilator Paw setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . 441
CO2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . 443
Overview of ventilation monitoring
The device connectivity option enables the Cockpit If the external device alarm feature is activated at
to display parameter values, waveforms, and loops the Cockpit (see page 474) and an external device
from a Servo-i ventilator. is disconnected from the Cockpit, the following
happens at the Cockpit and at the ICS when the
Within 30 seconds of connecting a device, the data
patient is admitted at the ICS:
appear at the Cockpit. The ventilator monitoring
functions are configurable in the parameter-specific – An alarm tone of low priority sounds.
setup page (see page 441).
– The message External device disconnected
NOTE is displayed.
Ventilation waveforms are not supported on re-
cordings.

NOTE
When connecting a ventilator that does not sup-
port CO2 monitoring, the Cockpit may still display
a CO2 tab in the Ventilator dialog.
Infinity CentralStation – Vent Central

option
Certain parameters, settings, modes, and

waveforms originating from Servo-i ventilators are
broadcast to the network via the Cockpit. If the
patient is admitted at an ICS (Infinity
CentralStation) with software version VF8 and the
Vent Central option is activated, you can review the
above-mentioned data at the ICS. For more
detailed information, refer to the VF8 instructions
for use entitled ’Infinity CentralStation’.
External device alarms
Alarms from the ventilator are transmitted to the

Infinity network and made available for alarm
annunciation at the ICS. For more information, refer
to the Instructions for use Infinity CentralStation.
Precautions
WARNING WARNING
Always refer to the primary data source before The following section lists all of the external
making diagnostic or therapeutic decisions. devices and related software versions that
Dräger has validated. Dräger cannot make any
Connecting peripheral devices is supported
claim for the reliability of the data for
via the device connectivity option. Only
subsequent or previous software versions or
connect peripheral medical devices to a
performance, do not connect devices to the
60601-1. Refer to "Safe connection with other
monitor which have not been approved by
electrical equipment" on page 15 of these
Dräger. The hospital is responsible for
instructions for use for information on how to
connect devices safely.
compatibility and warranty status of any
medical devices.
Device compatibility
The Cockpit device connectivity interface allows

data from the Servo-i ventilator with software
version 7 to display parameters, settings and
waveforms on the Cockpit. See the table below for
supported parameters.
Supported Servo-i parameters
The following table lists which Servo-i ventilator pa-

rameters are displayed and trended on the Cockpit.
Refer to page 435 for a list of supported ventilators
and the compatible software versions.
label mea- tion Show all page Trends page for display
sure- (see page 440) in parame-
ment Yes/No? ter field
Yes/No?
Cdyn Dynamic compliance L/bar Yes Continuous No
etCO2 End-tidal CO2 mmHg Not supported for Continuous and Yes
concentration kPa display mini-trend
%
FiO2 Inspired O2 % Yes Continuous No
MVe Minute volume, L/min Yes Continuous and Yes
expired mini-trend
MVespon Spontaneous L/min Yes Continuous No
expiratory minute
volume
PEEP Peak end expiratory cmH2O Yes Continuous Yes
airway pressure
PIP Peak inspiratory cmH2O Yes Continuous and Yes
pressure mini-trend
Pmean Mean airway cmH2O Yes Continuous Yes
pressure
RR Respiratory rate /min Yes Continuous Yes
V'CO2 Carbon dioxide mL/min Yes Continuous No
production
VTe Tidal volume, mL Yes Continuous Yes
expired
Supported Servo-i waveforms
The following Medibus waveforms are displayed on

the Cockpit.
Paw Airway pressure mbar
Viewing parameter data
from connected Servo-i ventilator in the following loops and parameters:
locations:
– Show all pages (see page 440)
Parameter fields
NOTE The following diagram shows a ventilator

parameter field.
additional parameters are put on display. For A B
page 70.
Parameter fields report parameter values and C

fields can also report technical conditions such as D
information regarding the content of parameter E
"Troubleshooting" on page 525
F
049
A Primary parameter label
B Second parameter label
E Third parameter value
F Primary parameter value
Viewing loops
Loops offer important information about the To view loops

response of the patient to mechanical ventilation.
1 Select the Sensor parameters... button on the
You can review loops on two pages:
main menu bar.
Pressure/volume and Flow/volume.
2 Select the Ventilator tab. If you cannot see the
tab, select the following two symbols located in
compliance, resistance, and work of breathing. A
the upper right corner of the dialog:
mandatory breath plots counterclockwise, while a
spontaneous breath plots clockwise. Inspiration – symbol
– display filter button
Flow-volume loops also report mechanical and NOTE
spontaneous breaths. Inspiration begins at the Depending on which devices are connected to the
origin and moves upward and clockwise. Expiration Cockpit, two Ventilator tabs may be displayed. If
plots below the horizontal axis and progresses you select the Ventilator tab and the selected
counterclockwise to the original starting point. page has the message Medibus.X ventilator
devices displayed as a header, you have
NOTE selected the wrong Ventilator tab).
In neonatal mode, ventilator loops are not avail-
able on the Cockpit. 3 Select the PV Loop tab to view pressure-
flow-volume loops.
4 Select the Loops tab to view all loops in one
dialog.
5 Select the Loop draw button at the bottom of
the page to choose how many loops are drawn
on top of each other before the screen is
cleared.
6 Select the Save reference button at the bottom
The Show all page
The Show all page displays the values of the or

currently monitored ventilator parameters and units
of measure in one screen.
main menu bar.
NOTE 2 Select the Ventilator tab.
The settings TVi, I (I:E) and E (I:E), also appear in
the Show all page in addition to the parameters. NOTE
Cockpit, two Ventilator tabs may be displayed. If
To access the ventilation show all page
you select the Ventilator tab and the selected
1 Select the Trends/ Data... button on the main page has the message Medibus.X ventilator
menu bar. devices displayed as a header, you have
selected the wrong Ventilator tab.
2 Select Trends > Ventilator > Show all
Accessing the parameter setup functions

menu bar > Ventilator tab to access the
Ventilator page. If you cannot see the tab,
NOTE
page has the message Medibus.X ventilator
2 Select either the Paw or the Vent tabs to access

the respective pages.
Ventilator Paw setup functions

page.

Parameter 1 Pmean, PEEP, PIP (default) Selects the primary
parameter field.
Parameter 2 Pmean (default), PEEP, PIP Selects the second
parameter field.
Parameter 3 Pmean, PEEP (default), PIP Selects the third parameter
purple, orange, white. ventilation parameter fields,

page.

Flow scale 5, 10, 15, 20 (default in neonatal mode), 35, Determines the scale of the
50, 100 (default in adult and pediatric mode), displayed Flow waveform.
150, 200 L/min
Vol scale 5, 10, 25, 50 (default in neonatal mode), 75, Determines the scale of the
100, 250, 500, 1000 (default in pediatric and displayed Volume waveform.
adult mode), 1500 mL
Parameter 1 MVe, (default), RR, VTe Selects the primary parameter
in the Vent parameter field.
Parameter 2 MVe, RR (default), VTe Selects the second parameter
Parameter 3 MVe, RR, VTe (default) Selects the third parameter in
the Vent parameter field.
CO2 parameter setup functions

page.

– 0.0 to 5.0 (default), 0.0 to 8.0, 0.0 to 12.0,
0.0 to 16.0 kPa
Atm. pressure 570 to 800 mmHg Determines the ambient
pressure setting.
waveform.
External devices – Evita 2D, Evita 4, Evita XL (Medibus)
Overview of ventilation monitoring . . . . . . . 446

Infinity CentralStation – Vent Central option. . . 446
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Device compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Supported Medibus ventilator data . . . . . . . 448

Supported Medibus parameters on the
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Supported Medibus waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Viewing Medibus parameter data . . . . . . . . . 450
Viewing loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
The Show all page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Accessing the parameter setup functions. . . 453
Ventilator Paw setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . 453
CO2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . 454
Overview of ventilation monitoring
The device connectivity option enables the Cockpit External device alarms
to display parameter values, waveforms, and loops
from the Medibus-compatible ventilators Evita 2D, Alarms from the ventilator are transmitted to the
Evita 4, and Evita XL. Infinity network and made available for alarm
Within 30 seconds of connecting a device, the data annunciation at the ICS. For more information, refer
appear at the Cockpit. The ventilator monitoring to the Instructions for use Infinity CentralStation.
functions are configurable in the parameter-specific If the external device alarm feature is activated at
setup page (see page 453). the Cockpit (see page 474) and an external device
is disconnected from the Cockpit, the following
NOTE happens at the Cockpit and at the ICS if the patient
Ventilation waveforms are not supported on is admitted at the ICS:
recordings.
– An alarm tone of low priority sounds.
Before performing any monitoring functions, refer – The message External device disconnected
to the section "For your safety and that of your is displayed.
NOTE
When connecting a ventilator that does not
support CO2 monitoring, the Cockpit may still
display a CO2 tab in the Ventilator dialog.
Infinity CentralStation – Vent Central

option
Certain parameters, settings, modes, and

waveforms originating from Evita ventilators are
broadcast to the network via the Cockpit. If the
patient is admitted at an ICS (Infinity
CentralStation) with software version VF8 and the
Vent Central option is activated, the above-
mentioned data is displayed at the ICS. For more
detailed information, refer to the VF8 instructions
for use entitled ’Infinity CentralStation’.
NOTE
When connecting an Evita XL device to IACS,
when the patient is in NIV (non-invasive mode),
then information on the mode is not sent out on
the network.
Precautions
WARNING
WARNING The following section lists all of the external
Always refer to the primary data source before devices and related software versions that
making diagnostic or therapeutic decisions. Dräger has validated. Dräger cannot make any
Connecting peripheral devices is supported claim for the reliability of the data for
via the device connectivity option. Only subsequent or previous software versions or
connect peripheral medical devices to a for any devices that have not been validated.
patient monitor if those devices comply with In the interest of patient safety and device
the electrical safety requirements found in performance, do not connect devices to the
IEC 60601-1. Refer to "Safe connection with monitor which have not been approved by
other electrical equipment" on page 15 of Dräger. The hospital is responsible for
these instructions for use for information on contacting Dräger to determine the
how to connect devices safely. compatibility and warranty status of any
medical devices.
Device compatibility
The device connectivity option allows data from

Evita 2D, Evita 4, and Evita XL ventilators to display
parameters, settings and waveforms on the
Cockpit. The following table lists which software
versions are supported with Medibus.
Supported device Supported software

version
Device Software version
Dräger Evita 2D 1.00 and higher
Dräger Evita 4 1.00 and higher
Dräger Evita XL 5.00 and higher
Supported Medibus ventilator data
The Evita ventilators (Evita 2D, Evita 4, and Evita Refer to the RS-232 export handbook for
XL) send parameters, settings, modes and alarm information on which parameters are available for
messages to the Cockpit. export protocol and which settings and modes are
supported. The RS-232 export handbook is
Certain ventilator parameters, settings, and
available in English only.
ventilation modes are broadcast to the Infinity
network. In addition, a limited number of alarms are
made available to the Infinity network.
Supported Medibus parameters on the Cockpit
The following table lists which parameters are

displayed and trended on the Cockpit. Refer to
page 447 for a list of supported ventilators and the
compatible software versions.
Parameter Description Unit of Displayed in Cockpit Available
label measure- Ventilation Show Trends page for display
ment all page (see in
page 452) Yes/No? parameter
field
Yes/No?
Cdyn Dynamic compliance L/bar Yes Continuous No
etCO2 End-tidal carbon mmHg Yes Continuous and Yes
dioxide kPa mini-trend
concentration
%
FiO2 Inspiratory oxygen % Yes Continuous No
fraction
MVe Minute volume, L/min Yes Continuous and Yes
expired mini-trend
MVspon Minute volume, L/min Yes Continuous No
expired,
spontaneous
P0.1 Occlusion pressure mbar or Not supported for Not trended No
cmH2O display.
PEEP Peak end expiratory mbar or Yes Continous Yes
airway pressure cmH2O
Pmean Mean airway mbar or Yes Continuous Yes
pressure cmH2O
Pmin Minimum airway mbar or Yes Not trended No
pressure cmH2O
Parameter Description Unit of Displayed in Cockpit Available

label measure- Ventilation Show Trends page for display
ment all page (see in
page 452) Yes/No? parameter
field
Yes/No?
Pplat Plateau pressure mbar or Yes Not trended No
cmH2O
PIP Peak inspiratory mbar or Yes Continuous and Yes
pressure cmH2O mini-trend
R Resistance mmbar/L/s Yes Continuous No
RRspon Spontaneous /min Yes Continuous No
respiratory rate
RR Respiratory rate /min Yes Continuous Yes
I (I:E) Inspiratory No unit Yes Not trended No
component
E (I:E) Expiratory No unit Yes Not trended No
component
I:E Ratio inspiratory to No unit Yes Not trended No
expiratory
Note: This
component
parameter is
calculated and is not
broadcast to the
network
V'CO2 Carbon dioxide mL/min Yes Continuous No
production
Vds Serial dead space mL Yes Continuous No
volume
Vds/VTe Ratio of serial dead % Yes Not trended No
space volume to
expiratory tidal
volume
VTe Expiratory tidal mL Yes Continuous Yes
volume
Supported Medibus waveforms
The following Medibus waveforms are displayed on

the Cockpit.
PAW Airway pressure mbar
Viewing Medibus parameter data
from connected Evita 2D, Evita 4, and Evita XL loops, and parameters:
ventilators in the following locations:
– Show all pages (see page 452)
Parameter fields
NOTE
A B
C
Parameter fields report parameter values and D
fields can also report technical conditions such as E
fields for each parameter, see the chapter F
"Troubleshooting" on page 525
049
The following diagram shows a ventilator A Primary parameter label
parameter field. B Second parameter label
E Third parameter value
F Primary parameter value
Viewing loops
Loops offer important information about the Flow-volume loops also report mechanical and
response of the patient to mechanical ventilation. spontaneous breaths. Inspiration begins at the
You can review loops on two pages: origin and moves upward and clockwise. Expiration
Pressure/volume and Flow/volume. plots below the horizontal axis and progresses
counterclockwise to the original starting point.
compliance, resistance, and work of breathing. A NOTE
mandatory breath plots counterclockwise, while a
In neonatal mode, ventilator loops are not avail-
spontaneous breath plots clockwise. Inspiration
able on the Cockpit.
To view loops 3 Select the PV Loop tab to view pressure-

flow-volume loops.
main menu bar.
4 Select the Loops tab to view all loops in one
2 Select the Ventilator tab. If you cannot see the
dialog.
tab, select the following two symbols located in
the upper right corner of the dialog: 5 Select the Loop draw button at the bottom of
the page to choose how many loops are drawn
– symbol
on top of each other before the screen is
– display filter button cleared.
NOTE 6 Select the Save reference button at the bottom

The Show all page
The Show all page displays the values of the 2 Select the Ventilator tab.
currently monitored ventilator parameters and units
of measure in one screen. NOTE
To access the ventilation show all page
1 Select the Trends/ Data... button on the main page has the message Medibus.X ventilator
menu bar. devices displayed as a header, you have
2 Select Trends > Ventilator > Show all
or 3 Select the Show all tab.
main menu bar.
Accessing the parameter setup functions
1 Select Sensor parameters... from the main 2 Select either the Paw or the Vent tabs to access
menu bar > Ventilator tab to access the the respective pages.
Ventilator page. If you cannot see the tab,
NOTE
Ventilator Paw setup functions

page.

Parameter 1 Pmean, PEEP, PIP (default) Selects the primary
parameter field.
Parameter 2 Pmean (default), PEEP, PIP Selects the second
parameter field.
Parameter 3 Pmean, PEEP (default), PIP Selects the third parameter

page.

Flow scale 5, 10, 15, 20 (default in neonatal mode), 35, Determines the scale of the
50, 100 (default in adult and pediatric mode), displayed Flow waveform.
150, 200 L/min
Vol scale 5, 10, 25, 50 (default in neonatal mode), 75, Determines the scale of the
100, 250, 500, 1000 (default in pediatric and displayed Volume waveform.
adult mode), 1500 mL
Parameter 1 MVe (default), RR, VTe Selects the primary parameter
Parameter 2 MVe, RR (default), VTe Selects the second parameter
Parameter 3 MVe, RR, VTe (default) Selects the third parameter in
the Vent parameter field.
CO2 parameter setup functions

page.

CO2 Scale – 0 to 40 (default), 0 to 60, 0 to 80, Determines the scale of the dis-
0 to 100 mmHg played CO2 waveform.
– 0.0 to 5.0 (default), 0.0 to 8.0, 0.0 to 12.0,
0.0 to 16.0 kPa
Atm. pressure 570 to 800 mmHg Determines the ambient pres-
sure setting.
Color Red, green, blue, yellow (default), light blue, Determines the color of the CO2
purple, orange, white. parameter field and waveform.
System configuration
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Biomed setup – patient monitor setup. . . . . . . 487

Biomed setup – name service settings . . . . . . 489
Screen setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Biomed setup – network setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Biomed setup – printer setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Screen setup – general settings . . . . . . . . . . 457 Biomed setup – recorder setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Biomed setup – service setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Screen setup – auto view functions . . . . . . . 459
Configuring the auto view settings . . . . . . . . . . 460 Biomed IT setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Activating/deactivating IT tab feature . . . . . . . 493
Configuring parameters for display . . . . . . . 461 Configuring IT tabs – browser setup . . . . . . . . 493
The parameter selection window . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Adding a browser page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Configuring the parameter priority and Deleting a browser page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Configuring Citrix applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Configuring IT tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Screen setup – configuring views . . . . . . . . 464
Profile setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Screen setup – configuring main menu Selecting a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
bar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Saving profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Screen setup – configuring the multi-tab
split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Modifying an existing profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Saving a new profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Screen setup – the View editor . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Configuring profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
View editor functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Configuring the patient-specific profiles . . . . . 502
Configuring the alarm setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Transferring profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Alarms setup – general settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Alarm setup – configuring the alarm volume Transferring patient profiles over the network . . .503
and tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Alarm setup – Code functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Importing and exporting profiles using a
Alarm setup – configuring M540 settings . . . . . 479 USB flash drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Alarms setup – Pressure settings . . . . . . . . . . 480
Configuring the recording and report

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Reports setup – Reports page . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Recorder setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Rest ECG setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Reports setup – Reports setup page . . . . . . . . 484
Biomed setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Biomed setup – country-specific settings . . . . . 485
Biomed setup – units of measure. . . . . . . . . . . 486
Overview
This chapter describes the System setup dialog – Biomed (see page 484)
which consists of several setup pages for
– Profiles (see page 498)
configuring the Cockpit. Some of these setup
pages are password protected and are only Most setup pages consist of selections for
accessible to authorized personnel. configuring individual features. In the following
sections such setup pages are presented as tables
The System setup dialog consists of the following
which list each menu selection, the available
setup pages:
settings, and a description. Some setup pages are
– Screen setup (see page 456) more complex and are therefore described in more
detail. Where necessary, diagrams clarify
– Alarms (see page 471)
additional setup procedures.
– Recordings/ Reports (see page 481)
Screen setup
Several Screen setup pages are available for 3 Select one of the following tabs to access the
configuring the layout and the content of the corresponding setup page:
screen.
– Auto view (if the auto view setup toolbar is
To access the screen setup functions
visible along the bottom of the screen, you
1 Select the System setup... button on the main can also select the Setup button in the lower
menu bar. right corner of the screen to access the
Auto view page)
2 Select the Screen setup tab (if not already
selected). – Views (password required)
– Config. buttons (password required)
– Multi-tab split screen
– View editor (password required)
Screen setup – general settings
The following table lists the available settings of the

General settings page. Your selection takes effect
immediately. To access this page, see page 456.
Monitoring sweep 6.25, 12.5, 25 (default), 50 Sets the sweep speed of the waveforms.
speed [mm/s]
Respiratory 6.25 (default), 12.5, 25, 50 Sets the sweep speed of the respiratory
sweep speed waveform.
[mm/s]
Anesthesia sweep 0.62, 6.25 (default), 12.5, 25, Sets the sweep speed of the anesthesia
speed [mm/s] 50 waveform.
0.62 mm/s is not supported on
the network and is transmitted
as 6.25 mm/s on the network
Show parameter On, Off (default) Activates/deactivates the display of units of
units measurement in the parameter fields.
On the Cockpit, when the parameter field’s
value is set to Off, after a restart it may show a
value other than Off. Reset the parameter
field’s setting to Off.
volume deactivates it.
– 5, 10 to 100 in increments
of 10% (default 40%)
Brightness 10 to 100% (default) in Adjusts the brightness of the Cockpit screen.
increments of 10% This setting does not affect the M540.
Night time 00:00 to 24:00 Sets the start and end time of night time mode.
During night time mode, the entire background
of the screen appears almost black. All buttons
turn dark gray.
To toggle this setting manually, use the
function key Color scheme (see page 466).

QR Code Scannable barcode that can Allows authorized personnel to scan the QR
be used to access device code (from a smart phone or other device),
information. instead of using a password, to access device
information.
Screen setup – auto view functions
The following diagram shows the Auto view page. A Auto display mode selection button
This page also functions dynamically with the auto
B Manual display mode selection button
view setup toolbar (see page 462). To access this
page, see page 456. C Show All
System setup D Auto view tab

E Waveforms button
A B C F Layout button (for waveforms)

D
E G Pressure overlap Off, Common, Individual
buttons
F
N H Parameter boxes button
G
I Layout button (for parameter fields)
J Split screen button
H K Mini trends selection button
I L NIBP trend button

J N M Toolbar button
N Parameter selection window
K
L
M N
050
Configuring the auto view settings
You can perform various functions in the Auto view 5 Select the Parameter boxes button (H) and
page. The following settings describe the general use the rotary knob to select the desired
settings of the Auto view page. For detailed number of parameter fields for display. The
information on setting up the display attributes of a available selections are: Off, 1, 2, 3 (default), 4,
parameter, see "Configuring parameters for 5, 6.
display" on page 461.
NOTE
When the Parameter boxes value is set to Off,
To configure the available settings
after a restart it may show a value other than Off.
In the following steps, the letters in parentheses Reset the parameter field’s setting to Off.
correspond to the diagram for the Auto view page
(see page 459). 6 Select the Layout button (I). Then select the
Top or Bottom (default) button to determine if
1 Access the Auto view page (see page 456).
the parameter fields appear along the bottom or
2 Select the display mode by selecting one of the the top of the screen.
following two buttons next to Display mode:
7 Select the Split screen button (J). This button
– Auto (A) to select the auto display mode appears grayed out if the web enabled layouts
(see page 82). option is locked. The available selections are:
None (default), Anesthesia show all, BIS
– Manual (B) to select the manual display
show all, BIS/NMT show all, CCO show all,
mode (see page 76).
ECG/ST, ECG/Vent, ECG show all, Loops,
3 Select the Waveforms button (E) to determine SpO2 show all, ST parameters, Multi-tab
the number of waveforms that can be selected split screen, Trend table - auto, Trend table -
in the parameter selection window (N). The manual,Ventilator show all, IP show all.
number of waveforms available for selection
If you select None, the monitoring area contains
depends on the purchased software and
only real-time parameters. Any other selection
hardware options:
divides the monitoring area into two windows.
The right window continues to display the real-
Device With option Without option
time parameters. For more detail see "M540
C500 12 or 16 waveforms 10 waveforms and Cockpit communication" on page 49.
C700 16 waveforms 12 waveforms 8 Select the Mini trends button (K) to activate or
deactivate the mini-trend display or select a
Select the Layout button (F). Then select the trend display time (see page 80). The available
Left or Right (default) button to determine if the selections are: Off, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min,
waveforms appear to the left or to the right of 30 min (default), 45 min, 1 h, 90 min, 2 h, and
the parameter fields. 4 h.
4 Select the Pressure overlap Off (default), 9 Select the NIBP trend button (L) to choose
Common, or Individual button (G) to activate or between the graphic or numeric representation
deactivate pressure overlap mode. This feature of the NIBP mini-trend display.
works only if the pressure waveforms are
displayed in adjacent channels. 10 Toggle the Toolbar button (M) to On (default) or
Off to activate or deactivate the auto view setup
toolbar (see page 460).
Configuring parameters for display
Basically, the parameter selection window (D) of The parameter selection window
the Auto view page controls where a parameter
appears on the screen. The window also controls The parameter selection window (D) in the Auto
how a parameter is displayed (as a waveform view page determines where a parameter appears
and/or as a parameter field), or if it is excluded from on the screen and how it is displayed.
display. To access this page, see page 456.
The selected display mode determines how the
System setup parameter selection window behaves:
– If you select the Auto button (B) next to Display
mode, the parameter selection window
B C functions dynamically with the auto view setup
A toolbar (see page 462). You can also determine
the content of the parameter list by using the
display filter button . When it appears on a
D dark green background, all parameters are
displayed in the parameter selection window,
even if they are not connected. Parameters that
are not connected appear gray. However, as
soon as you connect a parameter, the
corresponding label appears black, and
occupies the assigned location on the screen.
D
When the display filter button appears on a light
green background, the parameter selection
window contains only connected parameters.
– If you select the Manual button (C) next to
Display mode, all parameters are listed. In this
D case, the display filter button is deactivated.
If a parameter is not connected, the
corresponding label appears gray. However,
unlike in auto mode, the parameter label and/or
050
waveform occupies a space on the screen even

A Auto view tab though it is not connected yet.
B Auto button
C Manual button
D Parameter selection window
Configuring the parameter priority and display
In the parameter selection window, one of three 4 Select the parameter and use the rotary knob to
display symbols appears next to each parameter move it up or down the parameter selection
label. The symbols identify how the parameter window (N) to the desired position. As you
appears on the screen: move the parameter up or down the list, the
display symbol next to the parameter can
the parameter appears as a waveform
change. For example, a parameter that
and as a parameter field
previously appeared as a parameter field and a
the parameter appears as a parameter waveform , will only appear as a parameter
field field as you are moving it down the list.
the parameter is not displayed 5 Press the rotary knob to confirm the selection.
To configure the parameter priority and display

Parameters are arranged in descending order in
from the Auto view setup toolbar
the window and occupy the same position on the
screen. For example, the top parameter in the When activated (see page 459), the auto view
parameter selection window occupies the top setup toolbar appears along the bottom of the
location on the screen. screen whenever you activate a view containing an
auto view component. The auto view setup toolbar
In auto display mode, you can configure a
functions dynamically with the parameter selection
parameter in two ways:
window of the Auto view page (see page 461).
– From the Auto view page Whatever changes you make in one place is
reflected in the other.
– From the auto view setup toolbar which appears
at the bottom of the screen if activated Each connected parameter is represented as a
small field on the auto view setup toolbar. The
In manual display mode, you can configure a
following figure is an example of how the auto view
parameter only from the Auto view page (see
setup toolbar identifies the display mode of
page 459).
parameters on the main screen. The symbols
above the parameter label identify the three
To configure the parameter priority and display different display modes. The same symbols appear
from the Auto view page in the parameter selection window of the Auto view
page.
correspond to the diagram for the Auto view page
(see page 459).
1 Access the Auto view page (see page 456). A B C
2 Select the number of waveforms for display with
the Waveforms button (E).
3 Select the number of parameter fields for
display with the Parameter boxes button (H).
051
A A parameter with the symbol on the auto You can either display or hide the auto view setup
view setup toolbar appears as a waveform and toolbar (see page 460). You can also change the
a parameter field on the main screen. display status of a parameter display mode by
Parameters in this display mode always appear switching its position on the auto view setup toolbar.
on the left side of the auto view setup toolbar.
B A parameter with the symbol on the auto To change the display status of a parameter
view setup toolbar appears only as a parameter
1 Select the field on the auto view setup toolbar of
field on the main screen. Parameters in this
the parameter whose display mode you wish to
display mode always appear in the center of the
change. A yellow frame highlights the selected
auto view setup toolbar.
field.
C A parameter with the symbol on the auto
2 Use the rotary knob to move the parameter to
view setup toolbar is excluded from display on
the desired place on the auto view setup
the main screen. Parameters in this display
toolbar. Whatever position you move it to
mode always appear on the right side of the
determines the display status of the parameter.
auto view setup toolbar.
Pay attention to the symbol that changes as you
In the Auto view page (see page 459), you can turn the rotary knob to select a new position.
select the maximum amount of ’waveforms’ and
For example, if a parameter is assigned to the
’parameter fields and determine the parameter
’no display’ status , turn the rotary knob to the
priority. The number of parameters you can select
left until the field appears in the ’waveform’
depends on the locked option that is activated.
portion of the auto view setup toolbar. The
For example, if you select five Auto view page, the symbol changes to the following image: .
auto view setup toolbar consists of five waveform
3 Press the rotary knob to confirm your selection.
fields and three parameter fields. If more
The new parameter and the previous parameter
parameters are available than there are fields
switch positions on the auto view setup toolbar
assigned to the auto view setup toolbar, the
and the screen changes accordingly.
additional parameters are relegated to the ’not
displayed’ status. Any changes you make on the auto view setup
toolbar are immediately reflected on the Auto view
NOTE page (see page 459) and vice versa.
If the auto view setup toolbar is displayed, you can
access the Auto view page by selecting the
Setup button at the right edge of the Auto view
toolbar.
Screen setup – configuring views
The Views page displays all available views which 4 Select the view whose name is followed with an
control how information is presented on the screen. asterisk and appears in italic font (for example,
The Views page consists of custom views and Basic OR *). This display convention identifies a
Dräger views. You can select any view and save view that has been modified and whose
changes to custom views. Dräger views can be changes have not yet been saved.
selected, but they cannot be changed.
5 Select the Save View button. This button does
not execute any function if you select it and no
To save changes to a custom view custom views are available to be saved.
1 Select the System setup... button on the main 6 Press the rotary knob.
menu bar.
NOTE
You can also save changes to a custom View from
selected).
the View editor page.
3 Select the Views tab. A password popup
appears.
Screen setup – configuring main menu bar buttons
The Config. buttons page allows you to customize A Alarms... button

the content of the main menu bar (see page 73) by
B Mark event button
adding and removing buttons. However, the menu
bar contains several buttons with essential C Code button
functionality that are permanently placed and
D Views... button
cannot be removed.
E Print screen button
The following diagram shows the default Config.
buttons page for a C700. On the C500 the keys F Freeze waveforms button
(Print screen and Zero all) do not appear on the
G Trends/ Data... button
main menu bar. They appear on the quick access
toolbar instead. The depicted menu bar is an exact H Procedures... button
replica of the actual menu bar. As you make
I Sensor parameters... button
changes to the menu bar on the Config. buttons
page, the actual menu bar on the main screen J NIBP start/stop button
changes accordingly.
K Zero all button
System setup L System setup... button
M Start/Standby... button
A
Q N Home button
B O Restore config. buttons button
C P Selection window with available buttons
D P R Q Arrow buttons for moving the cursor up and
E down the pick list
F R Slide bar for moving a button up or down the
menu bar.
G
H
Q
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
To configure the function keys 5 Select the button on the menu bar list to be
replaced with another one.
correspond to the diagram for the Config. buttons NOTE
Any button appearing on a light gray background
1 Select the System setup... button on the main identifies one that holds a permanent position on
menu bar. the menu bar. These buttons cannot be ex-
changed and are therefore not selectable.
selected). The button to be removed is highlighted in
3 Select the Config. buttons tab. A password yellow. A pop-up window (P) with a slide ruler
popup appears. appears. The popup contains the following list
of available selections. Up to 14 buttons can be
4 Enter the clinical password and select the Enter
assigned to the main menu bar:
button.
Button Description
None – Reassigns the button name to’None’ in the Config. buttons page.
– Removes the original button from the main menu bar and reorders the
buttons on the main menu bar.
All alarms paused Pauses all alarms at the Cockpit for two minutes.
Auto set all Adjusts the alarm limits of all parameters automatically.
Code Executes pre-configured functions during an emergency.
Color scheme Controls the brightness of the Cockpit screen.
Default view Resets the Cockpit to the factory-default view.
Discharge Discharges a patient from the Cockpit.
ECMO Activates ECMO Mode (see page 128)
Freeze waveforms Stops the waveform from scrolling for approximately 60 seconds.
Home Returns to the main screen and closes any dialog.
Mark event Stores 20 seconds of waveform and parameter data in the alarm history.
NIBP start/stop Starts or stops an non-invasive blood pressure measurement.
NIBP continuous Starts or stops a continuous non-invasive blood pressure measurement.
Pacer detection Allows you to activate or deactivate pacer detection.
Pressures off Activates Pressures off (see page 129)
Pressures paused Activates Pressures paused (see page 129)
Print case summary Prints a combination of reports configured in the Reports page.
Print screen Prints the contents of the current screen on a connected laser printer.
Privacy Activates privacy mode (patient monitoring continues but the patient data are
removed from the Cockpit and the M540 and appear only at the ICS).
Relearn ARR Prompts the M540 to learn the dominant QRS pattern of a patient to identify
the rhythms as either normal or irregular.
Button Description
Relearn ST Prompts the M540 to learn the dominant ST-segment deviations of a patient
in order to identify ST rhythms as either normal or irregular.
Remote view Provides access to patient data from other Infinity monitors within the same
monitoring unit.
Rest ECG report Prints a diagnostic report generated from a 12-lead ECG.
Show all ECG Displays all ECG waveforms.
Standby Places the Cockpit in standby mode.
Start C.O. Starts a cardiac output measurement.
Start wedge Starts a pulmonary wedge measurement.
Split screen Turns the split screen view on and off based on the configuration. For
information about configuring the split screen view, see "Configuring the auto
view settings" on page 460.
System setup... Activates the password-protected system functions for configuring the
Cockpit.
Timer Displays or hides the timer on the main screen.
Trend graph report Prints the contents of the graphical trends window according to the selected
Trend duration [hr] setting.
Trend table report Prints the contents of the tabular trend window according to the selected
Table interval [min] setting.
Venous stasis Activates venous-stasis mode.
Volumes... Accesses the Settings page for configuring the volume of the various tones.
Zero all Zeroes all invasive pressures.
6 Select the desired button or click the rotary To restore the default setup of the menu bar
knob to move the new button to the menu bar.
You can restore the default setup of the menu bar
The previous button is moved to the pop-up
(see page 465) at any time. In the following steps,
window. The main menu bar changes
the letters in parentheses correspond to the
immediately to reflect the new selection.
diagram for the Config. buttons page (see
7 Repeat steps 5 – 7 for additional configuration page 465).
changes to the menu bar.
menu bar.
selected).
3 Select the Config. buttons tab. A password
popup appears.
4 Enter the clinical password and select the Enter
button.
5 Select the Restore config. buttons button.
Screen setup – configuring the multi-tab split screen
The Multi-tab split screen is a split screen mode 4 Select the Tab 1, Tab 2, or Tab 3 to select the
that consists of up to three separate tabs (see desired content from the following list of
diagram on page 79). The content of each tab can available choices:
be configured separately.
– Anesthesia show all (default for Tab 2)
To be able to turn the Split screen view on and off
– BIS show all (default for Tab 3)
from the main menu bar, be sure the Split screen
button is assigned to the menu bar. See’To – BIS/NMT show all
configure the function keys’ on page 466.
– CCO show all
– ECG/ST
To configure the split screen
– ECG/Vent
menu bar. – ECG show all (default for Tab 1)
2 Select the Screen setup tab (if not already – Loops
selected).
– SpO2 show all
3 Select the Multi-tab split screen tab.
– ST parameters
– Ventilator show all
– Trend table - auto
– Trend table - manual
– Ventilator show all
– IP show all
Screen setup – the View editor
In addition to the eight Dräger views, each Cockpit A View field and arrow button
can have eight custom views. The View editor is
B Symbol for changing the name of the selected
an option that allows you to create, modify, and
view
save custom views.
C Template field and arrow button
NOTE
D View editor tab
Although the Cockpit can display many parame-
ters and waveforms, use discretion when building E Layout panel
custom views to make sure clinically relevant in-
F Profiles... button
formation is not obscured or unreadable.
G Save View symbol
The following diagram shows the View editor
page.
To access the view editor
System setup 1 Select the System setup... button on the main
menu bar.
A 2 Select the Screen setup tab > View editor tab
(C).
B
3 Enter the password and select the Enter button.
C
G D
View editor functions
In the following procedures, the letters in

parentheses correspond to the View editor
E diagram.
The View editor allows you to perform the following
functions:
F – Modify existing views
– Save changes to a view
– Change the name of the selected view
– Assign a view to profiles
052
To modify a custom view 7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all panels in the
selected layout template.
NOTE
8 Select the symbol (G) next to Save View
Although the Cockpit can display many parame-
field (see diagram on page 469) to save the
ters and waveforms, use discretion when building
changes under the existing name.
custom Views to make sure clinically relevant in-
formation is not obscured or unreadable. or
Select the symbol next to the View field (A)
1 Access the View editor page (see page 469).
to access a keyboard for renaming the current
2 Select the arrow button next to the View field view.
(A) and select the view you wish to modify.
NOTE To assign a view to profiles

You can only change custom Views. Dräger views You can assign a view to a profile after you modify
cannot be changed. a view or at any time after that.
A view label that appears in italic font and is 1 Access the View editor page (see page 469).
followed by an asterisk identifies a view that has 2 Select the arrow button next to the View field
been modified but whose changes have not (A) to choose the view that you wish to assign
been saved yet. to profiles (if not already selected).
3 Select the arrow button next to the Template 3 Select the Profiles... button (F) to display the
field (B) to select a layout template (D) which Add to profile popup.
consists of various panels that illustrate what
the basic layout of the screen will look like. 4 Select either the Draeger views or Custom
views button under the Adult, Pediatric or
4 Touch a panel of the selected layout template to Neonate column. An additional popup appears
select a content. The following Content popup which lists the profiles stored under the selected
appears. category.
Content 5 Select as many profiles as you wish to assign
the currently selected view to.
G
6 Select OK.
H
053
5 Select the top arrow button (G) in the Content

popup to assign one of the following contents to
the selected panel:
– Parameters
– Waveforms
– Applications
6 Select the bottom arrow button (H) in the
Content popup to select additional settings. For
example, if you chose Waveforms in step 4,
you can select the ECG lead for display.
Configuring the alarm setup
The password-protected Alarms pages are for 4 Select one of the following tabs to access the
configuring the general alarm settings. respective setup page:
To access the alarms pages
– Volume/ Tone
1 Select System setup... on the main menu bar.
– Code
A password popup appears.
– M540 settings
2 Select the Alarms tab.
– Pressure settings
Alarms setup – general settings

General settings page.

All alarms paused – 1, 2 (default), 3, 4, 5 min The button on the alarm toolbar changes to All
alarms paused. This button is accessible by
selecting the symbol on the quick access
toolbar, (see page 51).
When the button is selected, the following
happens:
– All alarm functions are temporarily
suppressed for the selected time. The alarm
function is automatically activated when the
alarm pause timer times out.
– The message All alarms paused appears
in the header bar on yellow background with
a timer and the following symbol:
– No timeout The button on the alarm toolbar changes to All
alarms off. This button is accessible by
selecting the symbol on the quick access
toolbar, (see page 82).
When the All alarms off button is selected, the
following happens:
– All alarm functions are suppressed until you
select the button again which activates the
alarm function.
– The message All alarms off appears in the
header bar on red background with the
following symbol:
– Disabled The All alarms paused button on the alarm
toolbar is grayed out and you cannot
temporarily or permanently deactivate alarm
monitoring.
Alarm validation On (default), Off When this function is activated, alarm
conditions are verified for a certain time before
triggering acoustic and optical alarm signals
(see page 119). This feature reduces nuisance
alarms.

SpO2 alarm delay – On (default) The alarm validation feature must be activated
to use this setting.
– Off
When this setting is activated, an SpO2 lower
alarm limit violation must persist for 10 seconds
before triggering acoustic and optical alarm
signals.
This function is not possible if the Nellcor
SatSeconds alarm feature is set to any value
other than Off (see page 291).
Show alarm limits – On (default) Determines whether alarm limits appear in the
parameter fields.
– Off
Alarm bar enabled – On (default), Determines whether the alarm bar flashes
during an alarm.
– Off
OR Alarms – On, Activates/deactivates OR alarms. Alarm
functions are affected when OR alarms is
– Off (default)
activated (see page 127).
Cardiac bypass – On Activates/deactivates cardiac bypass mode.
Alarm functions are affected when cardiac
– Off (default)
bypass mode is activated (see page 127).
This mode is not available when the French
NFC mode is enabled (see page 487).
NIBP/SpO2 – On On – the SpO2 alarm function is deactivated
interlock during non-invasive blood pressure and Pulse
– Off (default)
CO-Ox measurements (for more details, see
"NIBP/SpO2 interlock alarms" on page 126).
Off – the SpO2 alarm function is activated
during NIBP and Pulse CO-Ox measurements.
ASY/VF alarms – Always on (default) Always on – the ASY/VF alarm functions are
always activated.
– Follow HR alarm
Follow HR alarm – the ASY and VF alarm
settings follow the setting of the heart rate
alarms.
Pacer detection – Advanced Advanced – you can select fusion mode in the
mode ECG page (see page 229).
– Basic (default)
Basic – fusion mode is not selectable.

External device – On (default) When this feature is activated, the Cockpit
disconnected displays the message External device
alarm control – Off
disconnected when a device that is connected
to the Cockpit with the device conncectivity
option becomes disconnected.
WARNING
If you select Follow HR alarm, ASY, and VF
alarms are not reported if the heart rate and
arrhythmia alarm functions are turned off.
Alarm setup – configuring the alarm volume and tones

Volume/ Tone page which controls various tone
settings. To access this page, see page 471.

Minimum alarm – 5%, Determines which alarm volume settings are
volume available under the Alarm volume button. This
– 10% to 100% (in increments
setting does not affect the volume of the
of 10%);
attention or the pulse tone.
50% (default)
– Off
Alarm volume Off, 5%,10 to 100% (in Determines the volume of the alarm tone. You
increments of 10%); default is can never turn the alarm volume lower than the
50% selected setting for Minimum alarm volume.
Make sure the alarm volume is set so it can be
heard in the monitoring environment.
The 5% setting is only available when the
Minimum alarm volume setting is set to 5%.
The Off setting is only available under the
following circumstances:
– When the Cockpit is in OR alarms or
assigned to an ICS.)
– When the Minimum alarm volume feature
is set to Off.
Pulse tone volume – Off Determines the volume of the pulse tone.
– 5, 10 (default) to 100% (in
increments of 10%)

volume deactivates the attention tone.
– 5, 10 (default) to 100% (in
increments of 10%)
"Audio off" – On (default) Sounds an alarm tone every 30 seconds at the
reminder Cockpit and at the M540 to remind you that the
– Off
alarm tone is deactivated during an active alarm
condition. This feature is only active when an
alarm condition exists. This alarm tone is
suppressed if you initiate an audio pause.
When the Cockpit is in OR alarms, the volume
of the alarm tone corresponds to the Alarm
volume setting of 10%. When OR alarms is not
activated, the volume equals to 50%.
This feature is not supported on remote
devices.
– On – a truncated acoustic alarm signal
sounds every 30 seconds for an alarm
condition of medium or high priority. Low-
priority alarms tones are not truncated.
During multiple alarm conditions, the
reminder tone adjusts itself to always report
the alarm condition with the highest alarm
priority.
– Off – No alarm tone sounds when the alarm
volume is deactivated and an alarm occurs.

"All alarms off" – On (default) When the All alarms paused setting is set to
reminder No timeout (see page 472) and you select the
– Off
All alarms off button, this feature reminds you
that alarm monitoring has been deactivated for
all alarms.
Whether or not the Cockpit is in OR alarms, the
volume of the alarm tone corresponds to the
Alarm volume setting of 50%.
– On – an alarm tone sounds every
30 seconds during an alarm condition. In
addition, the message area flashes red
three times with the message All alarms off
and the symbol . The alarm message
field appears solid until the 30 second pass.
Then the tone sounds again and the
message and the symbol flash again.
On remote devices, the message does not
flash but appears on solid red background
with the identical message and symbol.
When cardiac bypass mode is activated,
this feature is not available.
Any changes to this setting on the Cockpit

are adopted when the M540 docks. You can
also change this setting from the M540 if it is
docked and it will update the setting on the
Cockpit.
– Off – No alarm tone sounds when alarm
monitoring is deactivated and an alarm
occurs.
Tone set – Infinity Determines the type of alarm tone used (for
more information, see "Acoustic alarm signals"
– IEC fast (default)
on page 122).
– Advanced Arrhythmia
– Hybrid

Audio pause: Quiet – On – On – Only alarm conditions of high priority
mode override an active audio pause. The
– Off (default)
appropriate parameter field flashes. Alarm
conditions of equal or lower alarm priority
will not be reported with an alarm tone.
– Off – Any new alarm condition, regardless
of its alarm priority, overrides an already
active audio pause state at the Cockpit and
at the ICS if the patient is admitted there. All
optical and acoustic alarm signals are
reported fully for any new alarm condition.
For detailed information how quiet mode affects
the audio pause behavior, see page 132.
Alarm setup – Code functions
For urgent care, you can configure a set of The following table lists the available settings of the
individual monitoring functions. These functions Code page. To access this page, see page 471.
can be activated simultaneously when you select
the Code button on the main menu bar. For more
information regarding this function, see page 158.
When the Code button is pressed, a timer along
with a Stop and a Reset button appears in the
header bar.
Continuous – On – On – a continuous recording starts when
recording you select the Code button.
– Off (default)
– Off – no recording starts when you select
the Code button.
Continuous NIBP – On – On – continuous NIBP measurements start
mode when you select the Code button.
– Off (default)
– Off – no NIBP measurements start when
you select the Code button.
Audio off – On – On – No acoustic alarm signal sounds when
you select the Code button.
– Off (default)
– Off – Alarm tones sound when when you
select the Code button.

Alarm volume off – Yes – Yes – the acoustic alarm signal for any
active alarm is deactivated, the Audio
– No (default)
alarms off message and the symbol
appear in the header bar.
– No – the acoustic alarm signals for any
active alarm are not affected when you
press the Code button.
All alarms off – On – On – the following happens when you select
the Code button.
– Off (default)
– All audible and optical alarm signals are
deactivated at the Cockpit and at the
ICS.
– The message area flashes red with the
message All alarms off. The
symbol appears in the header bar.
– The All alarms paused setting is set to
No timeout
– if the selection All alarms off reminder
is set to On, an alarm tone sounds every
30 seconds to indicate that the alarms
were disabled.
Selecting the Code button again causes
any existing alarm conditions to be
annunciated immediately.
– Off – any existing alarm is still annunciated
optically and acoustically when you select
the Code button.
Alarm setup – configuring M540 settings
The M540 settings page configures certain M540

settings. These setting will automatically update the
M540 settings when the M540 is docked. To
access this page, see page 471.

Transport alarm – 50% (default) to 100% Determines the speaker volume of the M540 at
volume (in increments of 10%) the Cockpit while the M540 is undocked.
The Cockpit setting adjusts the Transport
alarm volume setting to match the M540 when
it is undocked.
The Transport alarm volume setting is tied to
the minimum alarm volume setting (see
page 474). If the minimum alarm volume is set
to a higher volume than the selected Transport
alarm volume setting, the Transport alarm
volume setting is adjusted to the higher setting.
If the minimum alarm setting is set to a lower
setting than the current Transport alarm
volume setting, the setting does not change.
Transport pulse – Off (default) Determines the pulse tone volume of the M540
tone volume while the device is on transport.
– 5%
– 10% to 100%
(in increments of 10%)
Keep device label – Yes (default) – Yes – The M540 retains the product label of
the Cockpit when it undocks.
– No
– No – the M540 retains the product label
configured in the M540 wireless menu.
Alarms setup – Pressure settings

Pressure settings page.
Pressures paused – 1 min Determines the duration and availability of the
Pressures paused function. For details, see
– 2 min (default)
page129.
– 3 min
– 4 min
– 5 min
– Disabled
Pressures off – Enabled Determines the availability of the Pressures off
function. For details, see page 129.
– Disabled
Configuring the recording and report settings
The Recordings/ Reports pages are for 3 Select one of the following tabs to access the
configuring general recording and report settings. respective setup page:
– Recorder setup
To access the Recordings/ Reports pages
– Rest ECG report
1 Select System setup... on the main menu bar.
– Reports setup
2 Select the Recordings/ Reports tab.
Reports setup – Reports page

Reports page.
ECG/ST – ECG report Prints the selected report. See "Available
reports" on page 512 for detailed descriptions
– Rest ECG report
of each report.
– ST report
Alarms Alarm history report
Trends/Data – Trend graph report
– Trend table report
– Calculations report
Laser Report – Continuous wvf. report
– Timed wvf. report
Recording – Timed recording
– Continuous recording
Recorder setup

Recorder setup page.
Delay 6, 10 (default), 15 s Determines the amount of delay (pre-event)
data included in a timed recording. Delay data
refers to data that originated before the
recording was initiated. A marker on the strip
recording marks where the delay data ends
and the real-time data starts.
Duration 6, 10, 15, 20 s (default) Determines the length of a timed recording.
Speed 6.25, 12.50, 25.00 (default), Determines the recording speed.
50.00 mm/s
Waveform – Auto (default) – Auto – the top two displayed waveforms
Selection are automatically selected for recordings. If
– Manual
no waveforms are displayed, no recording
is generated.
– Manual – the two selected waveforms
under Waveform 1 and Waveform 2 are
printed.
Waveform 1 Selected parameter under Assigns the selected waveform to the top
Waveform Selection setting channel on R50N recordings, provided the
(factory default is ECG Lead II) Waveform Selection is set to Manual.
Waveform 2 Selected parameter under Assigns the selected waveform to the bottom
Waveform Selection setting channel on R50N recordings, provided
(factory default is ECG lead V) Waveform Selection is set to Manual.
Alarm Waveform – On (default) When this function is activated, the waveform
of an alarming parameter of medium or high
– Off
priority is printed in the second recording
channel provided the archive function is
activated.
Rest ECG setup
Appropriate settings are crucial for optimal 12-lead To obtain an optimal automatic diagnostic
analysis. The following table lists the available interpretation of an Rest ECG report, make sure the
settings of the Rest ECG report page which selections in the following table and the Weight,
controls various settings. To access this page, see Height, and Birth date in the Demographics page
page 481. (see page 101) are configured appropriately for the
patient.
NOTE
The Rest ECG report is only available for adult NOTE
and pediatric patients. If the ECG Filter is set to ESU, Rest ECG report
cannot be generated.

Gender – Unknown (default) The selected information is included in the
report.
– Male
– Female
Race – Unknown (default)
– Caucasian
– Asian
– African
– Other
Medication 1 No meds, Unknown (default),
Medication 2 list of medications
Condition 1 Pick list with several choices

Condition 2 for indicating the medical
condition of the patient.
(Unknown is the default)
Notes List of entries for annotating
the condition of the patient.
(None is the default)
Rest ECG report Print button The button is grayed out and not selectable
when:
– The patient is not admitted at the ICS.
– The Rest ECG analysis feature is not
activated at the ICS.
– The 12-lead ECG option is not unlocked.
– The required 12-lead cable is not
connected.
Reports setup – Reports setup page
The following table lists the available settings of the NOTE

Reports setup page. To access this page, see
Reports printed on a laser printer use the settings
page 481.
in the Reports setup page not the settings de-
fined in the trend setup pages.

Waveform delay 6, 10 (default), 15 s Determines the amount of delay (pre-event)
[s] data included in a timed strip report. Delay data
refers to data that originated before the report
was initiated. A marker on the report marks
where the delay data ends and the real-time
data starts.
Waveform 10, 20 s (default) Determines the length of a strip report.
duration [s]
Trend duration 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 24 (default), 48, Determines the graphical trend interval on the
[hr] 72, 96 hr graphical trend report.
Table interval 1, 5, 10, 15 (default), 30, Determines the tabular trend interval on the
[min] 60 min tabular trend report.
Biomed setup
This section describes several pages accessible 4 Select one of the following tabs:
only to authorized personnel. All Biomed pages are
– Country
password protected.
WARNING
– Patient monitor
Do not service the Cockpit while monitoring a
patient. – Name service
– Network setup (select either the Infinity or
To access the biomed pages Hospital tab)
1 Select System setup... on the main menu bar. – Printer setup
2 Select the Biomed tab. – Recorder setup
3 Enter the password and select Enter. – Service

– IT setup (select the desired tab such as
Web browser, Innovian, and so on).
Biomed setup – country-specific settings

Country page. To access this page, see page 484.

Language English (United States), Selects the language of the Cockpit screen
German (Germany), French text. You must select the language of the M540
(France), French (Belgium, independently.
Canada), Dutch (Belgium),
Spanish (Spain, Traditional
sort), Italian (Italy), Finnish
(Finland), Danish (Denmark),
Norwegian (Norway, Bokmal),
Portuguese (Brazil), Swedish
(Sweden), Dutch
(Netherlands), Japanese
(Japan), Russian (Russia),
Turkish (Turkey), Polish
(Poland), Greek (Greece),
Hungarian (Hungary),
Chinese (Simplified, PRC),
Czech (Czech Republic),
Dutch (Belgium), French
(Belgium), Romanian,
Croatian
Time zone User-selectable list of time Allows you to configure the Cockpit for the
zones local time zone.
Time Time and date fields Allows you to set the regional time and date.
Biomed setup – units of measure

CAUTION
The following table lists the available settings of the Before you connect the M540 to a different Cock-
Units of measure page where you can configure pit, make sure that the units of measure align be-
the units for all parameter groups. To access this tween the two devices. Differing units of measure
page, see page 484. Select the Apply button after could result in loss of data or a patient discharge.
making your selection.

Pressure – mmHg (default) Assigns the selected unit of measurement to
the parameter. Whenever you change a unit of
– kPa
measurement, the Cockpit discharges the
patient.
CO2 – mmHg (default) Assigns the selected unit of measurement to

– kPa
– % patient.
Applies to Mainstream and Microstream
(sidestream).
Temperature – °C (Celsius) default Assigns the selected unit of measurement to
– °F (Fahrenheit)
ST – mm (default) patient.
– mV
SpHb – g/dL
(only Masimo
rainbow SET) – mmol/L
Agent – kPa (default)

– %
Weight – kg (default)
– lb (adult, pediatric)
– oz, g (neonate)
Height – cm (default)
– in
Biomed setup – patient monitor setup

Patient monitor page. To access this page, see
page 484.
Change clinical Use the keypad to enter the Configures a new password for the Cockpit.
password new password (up to 4
When an M540 whose password has been
Change numbers)
changed docks to a Cockpit with a different
biomedical password, the Cockpit password overrides the
password M540 password.
CAUTION: Be sure to record the new
password because it cannot be retrieved
once it is lost. For further assistance,
contact specialized service personnel.
French NFC mode – On When this feature is activated, HR alarms
cannot be deactivated, and the all alarm pause
– Off (default)
period cannot exceed 3 minutes.
Simulation (basic) – On Activates or deactivates basic simulation
mode.
– Off (default)
This feature is used when the M540 is
connected. When activated, the Cockpit uses
the simulator mode from the M540 and adds
additional device connectivity parameters.
External display – Clone (default) Selects the output for the external display. For
details, see page 61.
– Indep. display
Patient profile – On When this feature is activated, you can select
selection a profile and patient category on the Start
– Off (default)
dialog.
Adopt OR alarms – Auto Auto – OR alarms are automatically activated
when an anesthesia machine is connected.
– Manual
Manual – OR alarms must be activated
manually when an anesthesia machine is
connected.
Whenever you disconnect the A500 from the
Cockpit, the OR Alarms and Cardiac bypass
features are disabled automatically regardless
of their setting.

Adopt cardiac – Auto Auto – when an anesthesia machine is
bypass connected and the OR Alarms setting is
– Manual
activated at the Cockpit, the Cardiac bypass
feature is automatically activated when the
A500 is in cardiac bypass mode. Cardiac
bypass is automatically disabled when the
A500 is no longer in cardiac bypass mode.
Manual – when an anesthesia machine is
connected and the OR Alarms setting is
activated at the Cockpit, the Cardiac bypass
feature must be activated manually (see
page 473).
Restore factory None Restores all patient and monitoring settings to
settings the factory defaults.
Do not restore factory defaults while
monitoring a patient.
Biomed setup – name service settings

Name service page. To access this page, see
page 484. After making the desired changes, select
the Apply button which causes a brief loss of
communication with a docked M540.

Monitoring unit ID 1 to 255 (increments of 1) Allows you to assign the Cockpit to a
monitoring unit by entering an ID using the
keypad symbol.
Monitoring unit Up to seven alphanumeric Allows you to enter the corresponding label for
label characters the network and recordings using the
Care unit label keyboard symbol.
Bed label When entering the Bed label, do not use the
word’IACS’.The word’IACS’ is used for the
Hospital name Name service setting. If the Name service
setting and any bed labels match, the IACS
bed label does not appear on the ICS.
Enable Central – On (default) If this feature is activated and an ICS is
Station connected to the network, the message Not
– Off
Monitored By Central appears in the Cockpit
header bar if the Cockpit is not assigned to an
ICS. For more information, (see page 94).
If this feature is deactivated, an ICS is
connected to the network and the Cockpit is
not assigned to an ICS, the message Not
Monitored By Central does not appear in the
Cockpit header bar.
Enable Remote – On (default) If this feature is activated, the Cockpit allows
Control other Infinity monitors and the ICS to view its
– Off
data and perform simple functions, such as
requesting a recording or pausing an alarm.
Enable Remote – On (default) If this feature is activated, the Cockpit allows
Silence alarms to be silenced from network devices.
– Off
Biomed setup – network setup
The following table lists the available settings for

configuring the Infinity and the hospital network
settings in the Infinity and the Hospital pages. To
access the pages, see page 484. After making the
desired changes, select the Apply button to
activate them.
DHCP – Disabled (default) Applies to the hospital network.
– Enabled When the Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) is activated, the settings for
IP address, Subnet mask, Gateway, and
Primary DNS are pulled automatically from
the server.
IP address User selectable Allows you to select an IP address manually
(the DHCP setting has to be set to Disabled).
Subnet mask User selectable Allows you to set up a subnet mask (the DHCP
setting has to be set to Disabled).
Gateway User selectable Allows you to set up a gateway (the DHCP
setting has to be set to Disabled).
Primary DNS User selectable Allows you to set up the primary Domain Name
System (DNS) – set the DHCP setting to
Disabled.
Offline detection – On (default) Determines if the Cockpit issues an alarm tone
and a message when it loses its connection to
– Off
the Infinity network. For more information, see
"Communicating with the Infinity network"
on page 51.
Biomed setup – printer setup

Printer setup page. To access this page, see
page 484. After making the desired changes, select
the Apply button.

Printer IP address User selectable Allows you to configure the IP address for
printing reports on a network printer.
HP Universal Print Informational only Displays the version of the print driver.
Driver
Paper Size Letter, Legal, A4 Allows you to select the printer paper.
Print test page Select the Print screen button, to verify that the printer is working properly.
Biomed setup – recorder setup

Recorder setup page. To access this page, see
page 484.

Primary Recorder Recorders are available for Selects a recorder as the primary recorder for
selection once they are printing recordings.
Secondary Recorder connected to the network. Selects the secondary recorder for printing
recordings when the primary recorder is not
available.
Biomed setup – service setup A Biomed tab

B Product identification field displaying software-
The following table lists the available settings of the specific information (for example, software
Service page. To access this page, see page 484. version, and so on).
System setup C Select this button to copy all logs to the

connected USB flash drive.
A
D Select this button to export the current profiles
to the connected USB flash drive.
B E Select this button to import the profiles from the
connected USB flash drive.
C F Select this button to export the shared system

profile
D
G Select this button to import the shared system
E profile
F
H Select this button to export the independent
G display profile
H I Select this button to import the independent
I display profile
J Window displaying status messages relating to
the function that is being executed.
J K Service button for accessing Service-related
functions such as unlocking options (refer to the
Technical documentation available from
DrägerService for detailed information).
K
055
Biomed IT setup
The IT page consists of several setup pages for Configuring IT tabs – browser setup
performing the following IT-specific tasks:
– Activating or deactivating all IT tabs You can set up a browser as an IT tab that contains
several pre-configured Web pages. These Web
– Configuring a browser pages are accessible from a pull-down dialog under
– Configuring Citrix applications the configured IT tab (see "Accessing an IT tab" on
page 519).
– Configuring IT applications
CAUTION
The Infinity Acute Care System – Monitoring Ap-
Activating/deactivating IT tab feature plications (IACS) does not have virus protection
software and relies therefore on the firewall of
When the web enabled tabs option is unlocked, the your institution to prevent access to infected files.
Cockpit supports IT applications (options) that are While setting up IT applications to access web-
accessible via IT tabs (see "Supported IT sites, evaluate each website with regard to possi-
applications" on page 520). When an IT application ble virus infection.
is configured and the tab is activated, the
corresponding IT tab appears along the left edge of
the screen as soon as the IT tab feature is
activated. Regardless of how many IT tabs are
configured, the top tab is always labeled Patient
and provides access to the Cockpit main screen.
To activate or deactivate IT tab feature

1 Access the IT setup page (see page 484).
2 Select the IT tabs button.
3 Select the On or Off button next to the IT tabs
selection.
The following diagram shows the Web browser J Selection window with pre-configured websites.
page. The left side displays a pick list which is
K Add button
reserved for pre-configured websites. The right
side is for setting up new sites or for editing existing L Delete button
ones. The site with the asterisks is the default site
that appears automatically when you access the
corresponding IT tab. Adding a browser page
System setup C In the following steps, the letters in parentheses
refer to the diagram of the Web browser page.
B B A B B B
L K D To add a browser page
E 1 Access the Web browser page (see page 484).
F F 2 Select the Add button (K). The label Undefined

appears in the pick list (J) as a place holder.
G G
3 Select the following buttons to configure the
H H corresponding settings:
– Select the symbol next to the Name
menu selection (D) to activate an keyboard
J for changing the label Undefined to an
actual name.
– Select the symbol next to the URL menu
selection (E) to activate an keyboard for
entering the URL.
– Select the Default on or off button (F) to
activate or deactivate this site as a default in
the pick list (J).
I I – Select the Block Popups on or off button

057
(G) to allow or prevent popups from

A Web browser tab appearing on the website.
B IT setup tabs for accessing pages of the – Select Full Trust on or off button (H) to
corresponding IT applications. select the security setting for this website.
C Symbol for accessing additional IT applications 4 Select the Tab visible on or off button (I) to
display or hide the IT tab.
D Name button
Once a browser is correctly set up, the website is
E URL button accessible under the corresponding IT tab (for
F Default on and off buttons more information, see "Accessing an IT tab" on
page 519).
G Block Popups on and off buttons
H Full Trust on and off buttons
I Tab visible on and off buttons
Deleting a browser page Configuring Citrix applications
In the following steps, the letters in parentheses The following diagram shows the Application page
refer to the diagram of the Web browser page on for configuring Citrix applications. Citrix allows you
page 494. to access remote applications without running the
actual application on the Cockpit.
To delete a browser page System setup
1 Access the Web browser page (see page 484).
2 Select the website you wish to delete in the pick B B B B A B
list.
C
3 Select the Delete button (L). D E
K J I
G G
H H
066
A Application tab
B IT tabs
C Name symbol and field
D Name column
E Value column
F List of Citrix client object properties
G Auto logoff on and off buttons
H Tab visible on and off buttons
I Edit button
J Delete button
K Add button
To configure a Citrix application Configuring IT tabs

correspond to the diagram for the Application The following diagram shows an example of an IT
page (see page 495). page. When the appropriate IT application option is
unlocked, IT tabs appear with the corresponding
1 Access the Application page (see page 484). label of a pre-configured URL address, provided
2 Select the symbol next to the Name menu the web enabled tab option is also unlocked.
selection (C) to activate a keyboard for
System setup
changing the name of the IT tab label (the name
of the actual tab in the IT setup page does not A
change. B B B B B B
3 Define the ICA client object properties needed C
for connection to your Citrix environment. The
Name column (D) defines the property being
D
used and the Value column (E) defines the E E
value needed. F F
Refer to the Citrix ICA Client Object
documentation for more information.
G G
A Biomed tab 059
B IT tabs for accessing setup pages for the

corresponding IT applications.
C Name button and description field
D URL button and description field
E Full Trust on and off buttons
F Block Popups on and off buttons
G Tab visible on and off buttons
To configure an IT application tab CAUTION

In the following steps, the letters in parentheses The URL address shows a pre-configured string.
correspond to the diagram for the IT setup page Do not change any portion of the string except for
(see page 496). the <server name> to preserve the correct infor-
mation.
1 Access the IT setup page (see page 484).
2 Select the tab of the IT application you wish to – Select the Full Trust on or off button (E) to
configure. select the security setting for this website.
3 Select the following buttons to configure the – Select the Block Popups on or off button
corresponding settings: (F) to allow or prevent popups from
appearing on this website.
– Select the symbol next to the Name
menu selection (C) to activate a keyboard 4 Select the Tab visible on or off button (G) to
for changing the name of the IT label (the display or hide the tab.
name of the actual tab in the IT setup page
does not change). NOTE
IT tabs appear grayed out and are therefore not
– Select the symbol next to the URL menu
selectable while the application is loading. A tab
selection (D) to activate a keyboard for
may also appear grayed out the first time an ap-
entering the URL.
plication is turned on.
Once an IT application is correctly set up, the

website is accessible under the corresponding IT
tab (for more information, see "Accessing an IT tab"
on page 519).
Profile setup
A profile ’remembers’ patient settings and device to be repeated for each monitoring session. Each
settings for future use. Profiles eliminate time- patient category has one default profile. All tasks
consuming setup tasks that would otherwise have related to profiles take place in the Profiles pages.
Selecting a profile
The following diagram shows the Select profile A Profiles tab

page where you can select a profile with pre-
B Select profile tab
configured patient and device settings.
C Adult selection button
System setup
D Pediatric selection button
A
B E Neonate selection button
C D E F Profile arrow button
F G Description window of selected profile
G To select a profile
menu bar.
2 Select the Profiles tab (A) > Select profile tab
(B).
3 Select the desired patient category button:
– Adult (C)
– Pediatric (D)
– Neonate (E)
4 Select the arrow button next the Profile menu
selection (F) to display a list of profiles within
the selected patient category. If available, a
description of the selected profile appears in the
description field (G).
058
Saving profiles
For each patient category, you can create and save Modifying an existing profile
five unique profiles. Included in the five profiles is a
Dräger default profile that cannot be modified. The You can save changes to an existing profile. The
following diagram shows the Save Profile page only profile you cannot modify is the Dräger default
where you can modify existing profiles and save profile. The Dräger default profile is activated the
new ones. very first time the system is booted up, after a
software upgrade or after factory defaults are
System setup restored.
A
NOTE
C D E B Saving a profile for the patient being monitored
F might not be applicable to the care unit. To avoid
any issues or the possibility of an automatic
G restart, carefully follow the procedure, "To save
changes to an existing profile".
I H
The adult profiles, pediatric profiles, neonate
profiles pages have identical setup functions. The
only exception is their content which is patient-
category specific. This is important when you are
resetting all profiles to Dräger profiles. Only the
profiles within the currently selected patient-
category are affected.
To save changes to an existing profile

correspond to the diagram for the Save Profile
page.
1 Make sure the Cockpit is in the correct patient
060
category before configuring the profiles (see

A Profiles tab
"Selecting the patient category" on page 105).
B Save Profile tab
2 Make the desired changes to the patient
C Adult selection button settings.
D Pediatric selection button 3 Select the System setup... button on the main
menu bar.
E Neonate selection button
4 Select the Profiles tab (A)
F Profile arrow button
5 Select the Save Profile tab (B). A password
G Description field of selected profile
popup appears.
H Save profile as... button
I Save Profile button (see page 500)
7 Select the arrow button (F) next to the Profile To save a new profile
menu selection. A summary of the selected
1 Repeat steps 1 to 6 for saving changes to an
profile appears in the description field (G).
existing profile (see page 499).
8 Select the Save Profile button (I) to apply the
2 Select the Save profile as... button (H) in the
changes to the selected profile.
Save Profile page (see diagram on page 499).
The Save Profile pop-up window appears.
Saving a new profile 3 Select the setup buttons next to Profile
name (A), Description (B), and Default view
You can also save a profile under a new name and (C) to enter the corresponding information.
assign it to an existing view using the Save Profile 4 Select the Save Profile button (D).
pop-up window.
A
B
C
D
061
A Profile name field and setup button

B Description field and setup button
C Default view field and selection button
D Save Profile button
Configuring profiles
The following diagram shows a patient-specific A Adult tab

Profiles page for configuring profiles. These pages
B Pediatric tab
allow you to modify existing profiles such as the
name of the profile, the profile description, and so C Neonate tab
on.
D Views tab
There are three pages for each patient category
E Set as Default button
(adult, pediatric, and neonate).
F Delete Profile button
System setup
G Profile name field and setup button
B C D H Description field and setup button

A
E I Views... button
K F J Default view field and selection arrow

K Pick list of available profiles
G
To access the patient-specific Profiles pages
H
1 Select the System setup... button from the
I
main menu bar.
J 2 Select the Profiles tab.
3 Select the Profiles/ views tab.
4 Select either the Adult (A), Neonate (B),
Pediatric (C) tabs to access the patient
category-specific pages.
NOTE
Do not configure profiles while monitoring a
patient, as this may cause the Cockpit to lock,
forcing a reboot.
062
Configuring the patient-specific profiles

correspond to the diagram for the patient-specific
Profiles page (see page 501).
To configure the profiles

1 Access the patient-specific profiles page.
2 Select the desired profile in the pick list (K).
3 Select one or more of the following buttons:
– Select the Set as Default button (E) to
designate the selected profile as the new
default profile for the selected patient
category. After each patient discharge or a
restart of the Cockpit, the default profile is
automatically loaded when that patient
category is selected.
– Select the Delete Profile button (F) to
delete the selected profile.
– Use the button next to the Profile name
field (G) of the profile page to name the
profile. The name appears in the Select
profile page (see page 498).
– Use the button next to the Description
field (H) of the profile page to add or modify
an existing description. The description
appears in the Select profile page (see
page 498) when you select a profile.
– Select the arrow button next to the Default
view field (I) and select the view that you
wish to designate as the default view.
Transferring profiles
You can transfer profiles over the network or with a System setup
USB flash drive.
A
NOTE
Use a FAT32 flash drive for importing or exporting
profiles. USB flash drives with NTFS format do B C
not produce reliable results.
D
Only patient profiles can be transferred over the
network. See page 504 for details on how to
transfer shared system profiles.
NOTE
Whenever you use the transfer profile function, all
existing profiles for all patient categories are
transferred simultaneously.
Transferring patient profiles over the

network
Transferring patient profiles over the network is

only possible among Cockpits within in the same
monitoring unit. The following diagram shows the
Profile transfer page which consists of a list of G F E
064
connected devices within the monitoring unit.
A Profiles tab
B Device name column
C Status column
D Profile transfer tab
E Start transfer button
F Clear selection button
G Select all button
To transfer a profile over the network NOTE

1 Select the System setup... button on the main When profiles are transferred to a device with
menu bar. older compatible software, any new profile
functionality is not transferred.
2 Select the Profiles > Profile transfer tabs.
3 Enter the clinical password. The Profile – Clear selection button (F) to remove any
transfer page which lists all the devices in the selection from the device list.
monitoring unit appears. 5 Select the Start transfer button (E) to start the
4 Select a device from the list or select one of the profile transfer.
following buttons: The profiles are transferred to the target Cockpit
– Select all button (G) to select all devices to but are not implemented until you select a new
transfer profiles to. profile.
Importing and exporting profiles using a USB flash drive
You can import and export patient and shared NOTE

system profiles from one Cockpit to another using a
On the Cockpit, removing the USB flash drive
USB flash drive.
while importing a profile may prevent the import
Whenever you import or export patient profiles or from completing, even though a Profile success-
shared system profiles, all settings of the selected fully imported. message displays.
profile are transferred. For information about what
settings are included in a patient or a shared
system profile, see page 84 and page 90 WARNING
respectively. Do not leave a USB flash drive permanently
If you are importing shared system profiles from a connected to the Cockpit, as this could cause
Cockpit that has options unlocked (such as the Cockpit to go into a fail state after power
physiological calculations) that are locked on the cycling.
destination Cockpit, the shared system profiles
are imported. However, the settings relating to the To export patient and shared system profiles to
locked feature will not become active until the a USB flash drive
option is unlocked on the destination Cockpit. 1 Insert a USB flash drive into one of the USB
ports of the Cockpit whose profiles you wish to
transfer.
NOTE
If an M540 is docked its profiles are also 2 Select the System setup... button from the
imported/exported as part of the patient profiles. main menu bar.
3 Select the Biomed tab.
Unlike transferring profiles over the network, using
a USB flash drive has the advantage that the 4 Enter the Biomed password.
Cockpits do not have to reside in the same
5 Select the Service tab.
monitoring unit.
6 Select the Export patient profile button to
export all patient profiles to the USB flash drive.
or To import shared system profiles from a USB

flash drive
Select the Export shared system profile
button to export all shared system profiles to the 1 Insert the USB device in the USB port of the
USB device. Cockpit where you wish to transfer the profiles
to.
A message appears in the text window indicating
that the profiles have been successfully exported. A 2 Select the System setup... button from the
corresponding message appears if the export is main menu bar.
unsuccessful.
4 Enter the Biomed password.
To import patient profiles from a USB flash
drive 5 Select the Service tab.
1 Insert the USB device in the USB port of the 6 Select the Import shared system profile
Cockpit where you wish to transfer the profiles button to import all shared system profiles from
to. the USB device to the Cockpit. A confirmation
popup appears stating that the Cockpit will
2 Select the System setup... button from the
reboot if you press the Import button.
main menu bar.
7 Select the Import button in the confirmation
popup to start importing the patient profiles,
4 Enter the Biomed password.
or
5 Select the Service tab.
Select Cancel to stop the procedure and
6 Select the Import patient profile button to dismiss the popup.
import all patient profiles from the USB flash
Messages appear in the text window informing you
drive to the Cockpit.
if the shared system profiles imported successfully
Messages appear in the text window informing you or not. Once the system profiles are imported, the
if the patient profiles imported successfully or not. Cockpit reboots.
Reports/recordings
Reports/recordings
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
R50N recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Replacing the recorder paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Timed recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Remote Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Automatic alarm recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Continuous recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Causes for automatic cancellation of
recordings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Requesting recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Available reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Printing reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Configuring a case summary report. . . . . . . 516
Reports/recordings
Overview
The Cockpit offers a real-time record of its The content of the recordings and reports depend
monitoring results on an R50N recorder. In on the configured settings. You can customize the
addition, you can request various reports and print recording and report settings in the Recordings/
screens which are printed on a laser printer. Reports pages (see page 481).
NOTE NOTE
Ventilation waveforms are not supported on re- Do not disconnect the network strip recorder
cordings. during printing, as this could reset the Cockpit.
Messages relating to recordings and reports are

listed on page 556.
R50N recorder
Timed and continuous strip recordings are printed Replacing the recorder paper
on an R50N recorder which is connected to the
network or to the PS250 / P2500 using a cross-over
cable. The R50N is a two-channel strip recorder. To replace the paper
1 Open the paper door and remove the empty
paper roll and any paper remaining in the
printing mechanism.
2 Place a new paper roll with printed side facing
up into the spool holder. Unroll a few inches of
A paper from the bottom.
B 3 Align the paper roll with the paper guides, and
close the door. (If not aligned properly, the
paper may jam.)
4 Generate a timed recording to verify that the
recorder is connected properly, and the paper is
354
loaded correctly.
A Stop key – stops a recording in progress
B mm/s key – does not function
Reports/recordings
Timed recordings
From the Cockpit, you can request timed strip recording was initiated and real-time data that was
recordings that are printed on an R50N recorder acquired after the recording started. The ratio of
(see page 511). Timed recordings can be delay and real-time data are configurable (see
requested manually or triggered automatically page 481). Strip recordings also include pacer
depending on configured alarm settings. spikes if present.
If a signal source becomes unavailable, for The header of a timed recording contains the
example due to a disconnected lead or a cable, following information:
while a recording is printing, the associated
– Parameter values at the time the recording
parameter data and waveform appear as blank
starts printing
data on the strip recording.
– Patient name and ID number
A timed recording contains data of a specified
duration which is configurable from 6 seconds to – Date and time
20 seconds (see "Configuring the recording and
The following diagram shows a typical timed
report settings" on page 481). A timed recording
recording.
contains delay data that originated before the
A D F H J
C I
B E G I
355
A Patient name F Selected delay time
B Patient ID G Selected recording speed
C Monitoring unit H Origin of recording request (for example, BED
TIMED)
D Date
I ECG filter setting
E Time
J Parameter labels and units of measure
Remote Recordings
You can also request a recording from another

monitor or the ICS. Remote recordings use the
delay, duration, and speed recorder settings of the
Cockpit not the remote device from which you
request the recording.
Reports/recordings
Automatic alarm recordings
When the Alarm Waveform feature is activated To assign an alarm priority to arrhythmia events
(see page 481), timed alarm recordings are
generated automatically whenever a parameter
bar.
whose archive function is activated goes beyond
the set alarm limits. 2 Select the Limits tab (if not already selected).
Alarm recordings are also generated when an 3 Select the ARR tab along the right side to
arrhythmia event with an alarm classification of display the ARR page.
high or medium occurs.
4 Touch the field in the Alarm column of the
The following sections describe how to set up a parameter whose alarm priority you want to
parameter or arrhythmia event to generate an modify.
automatic alarm recording.
5 Select the field in the Archive column and
select either Store, Str/Rec, Record to
To activate or deactivate the archive function of generate a recording or Off to deactivate the
a parameter feature.
1 Select the parameter field of the parameter 6 Press the rotary knob to confirm the setting.
whose alarm function you wish to activate or
deactivate to access that parameter page
directly.
or
Select Sensor parameters... from the main
menu bar > select the desired parameter tab to
access the page.
2 Select the button next to the Archive setting
and select either Store, Str/Rec, Record to
generate a recording or Off to deactivate the
feature.
Reports/recordings
Continuous recordings
Continuous recordings are almost identical to timed Causes for automatic cancellation of
recordings (see figure on page 509). The only recordings
difference is that a continuous recording runs until
you manually interrupt it unlike a timed recording, Any active timed or continuous recording is
which runs for a specified time. automatically canceled under the following
The waveform labels, scale bars, and the scales circumstances:
are printed once for each parameter. – If the Cockpit loses its connection to the
network. The recordings resume when the
To request a continuous recording network connection is restored.
 Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... – If you place the Cockpit into standby mode
button on the main menu bar > Continuous – If you discharge a patient
recording.
Requesting recordings
The following table lists where you can request

manual timed and continuous recordings.
Type of report Description How to request the recording
Timed recording A strip recording of a  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data...
specified duration (see button on the main menu bar > Timed
page 509). recording
 Select the Trends/ Data... button on the main
menu bar > Trends > Reports > General
reports > Timed recording
Continuous A strip recording that  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data...
recording continues until manually button on the main menu bar > Continuous
stopped (see page 511). recording
 Select the Trends/ Data... button on the main
menu bar > Trends > Reports > General
reports > Continuous recording
Reports/recordings
Available reports
If an IACS patient is admitted at the ICS for central – Bed name

monitoring or was previously admitted there and
– Parameter labels and values (for ECG, ST,
the data have been archived, you can request the
Alarm Event, timed waveform, and continuous
following reports from the Cockpit. The reports are
strip reports only)
printed on any compatible laser printer
The footer of all reports contains the following
The reports are printed based on pre-configured
information:
settings (see page 484). The header of all reports
contains the following information: – Date
– Patient name and ID number – Page number
– Hospital name – Report title
– Care unit
Printing reports
The following table outlines the types of reports that

are available. Most reports can be requested from
several places on the Cockpit.
Type of report Description How to request the report
Print screen Prints the current display.  C700: Select the Print screen button on the main
Whenever you request a menu bar.
print screen, it is printed on
 C500: Select the symbol next to the Views...
the connected laser printer.
button on the main menu bar.
If a keyboard is connected to the Cockpit, you can also
use the print screen key of the keyboard to generate a
print screen.
Reports/recordings

ECG report Prints the waveforms of the  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... button
connected ECG leads. on the main menu bar > Rest ECG report
This report is not of  Select the Trends/ Data... button on the main menu
diagnostic quality. bar > Trends > Reports > General reports > ECG
report
Note: ECG filter values, specified in Hz, are added to
the printed strip recordings to comply with IEC 60601-2-
27. For example: "ECG: 0.5-40Hz”.
Filter setting bandwidth ranges include:
– Monitor: 0.5 - 40Hz
– Filter Off: 0.08 - 40Hz
– ESU: 0.5 - 16 Hz
Rest ECG This 12-lead diagnostic When requesting a Rest ECG report, use the 1mV/cm
report 1) report is generated in scale to avoid overlapping ECG waveforms.
different stages. Although
 Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... button
you request the report at the
on the main menu bar > Rest ECG report
Cockpit, the M540 collects
the actual ECG data, and  Select to the Trends/ Data... button on the main
the ICS prints it. To be able menu bar > Trends > Reports > General reports >
to generate such a report, Rest ECG report
the Cockpit must be in the
The Rest ECG report is only available for adult and
same monitoring unit as the
pediatric patients. To obtain an optimal automatic
ICS, and the Rest ECG
diagnostic interpretation of an Rest ECG report, make
analysis option must be
sure the required settings are configured appropriately
installed at the ICS.
for the patient (see page 483).
The report is available in
several formats that can be
customized at the ICS (refer
to the ICS instructions for
use). You can also configure
the content of a Rest ECG
report, see "Rest ECG
setup" on page 483.
Timed Prints strip reports of all  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... button
waveform report currently displayed on the main menu bar > Timed wvf. report
waveforms (the waveform
 Select the Trends/ Data... button on the main menu
duration and delay time
bar > Trends > Reports > General reports >
settings are configurable,
Timed wvf. report
see page 484).
Reports/recordings

Continuous Prints strip reports of all  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... button
waveform report currently displayed on the main menu bar > Continuous wvf. report
waveforms (prints a
maximum of five pages).
Continuous wvf. report
ST report Prints the ST complexes  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... button
currently displayed on ST on the main menu bar > ST report.
screen.
bar > Trends > Reports > General reports > ST
report
This report is not of
diagnostic quality.  Select the Sensor parameters... button on the main
menu bar or the ST parameter field if it is displayed
> ECG > ST complex > Print
Graphical trend Prints the contents of the  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... button
report 1) graphical trends according on the main menu bar > Trend graph report.
to the selected Trend
duration [hr] setting (see
bar > Trends > Graph > Print
page 484).
Graphical trend reports do
bar > Trends > Reports > General reports > Trend
not include discrete data
graph report
such as C.O. and NIBP.
Analysis tool Prints the values of the  Select the Procedures... button from the main
graphical trend Analysis tool page (see menu bar > Analysis tool tab > Print.
report page 181) corresponding to
The Print button is only available after you mark a
the Cursor 1 and Cursor 2
portion of the graphical trends with the cursor buttons.
positions. It also contains
the Delta values between
the Cursor 1 and the Cursor
2 values.
Tabular trend Prints the contents of the  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... button
report 1) tabular trend according to on the main menu bar > Trend table report
the selected Table interval
[min] setting (see
bar > Trends > Table > Print
page 484).
bar > Trends > Reports > General reports > Trend
table report
Graph vitals Prints the contents of the  Select the Trends/ Data... button on the main menu
report Graph vitals page. bar > Trends > Graph vitals > Print
If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the buttons for requesting these reports button are also accessible
1)
on the main menu bar. For more information, see page 465.
Reports/recordings

Ventilation/anes Prints the contents of the  Select the Trends/ Data... button on the main menu
thesia report Ventilation / Anesthesia bar > Trends > Ventilation / Anesthesia > Print
page. A ventilator report
requested from the ICS does
not print the ventilator
settings.
Alarm history Prints the contents of the  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... button
report Alarm history page. on the main menu bar > Alarm history report.
bar > Trends > Reports > General reports > Alarm
history report
 Select the Alarms... button on the main menu bar >
Alarm history > Print
Alarm event Prints the content of the  Select the Alarms... button on the main menu bar >
report selected event. Alarm history > Event > Print
Calculations Prints the entire calculations  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... button
report results table currently on the main menu bar > Calculations report.
displayed in the
Calculations page.
Calculations report
Case summary Prints a combination of  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... button
report reports configured in the on the main menu bar > Case summary report.
Reports page of the
Trends/Data dialog (see
bar > Trends > Reports > General reports > Print
page 191).
case summary
bar > Trends > Reports > General reports > OR
report > Print case summary
OR report Prints a brief summary of an  Select the symbol next to the Trends/ Data... button
anesthesia OR case on the main menu bar > OR report.
including the agent and gas
consumptions during the
bar > Trends > Reports > General reports > OR
case.
report
bar > Trends > Reports > OR report > Print
If configured to appear on the main menu bar, the buttons for requesting these reports button are also accessible
1)
on the main menu bar. For more information, see page 465.
Reports/recordings
Configuring a case summary report
The Reports Setup page allows you to select To setup a case summary report
which reports make up a case summary report.
Selecting the Case summary report button prints
menu bar.
the pre-configured reports without having to select
each report manually. If no reports are pre- 2 Select the Reports tab (if not already selected).
configured, the following reports are assigned by
3 Select the Setup tab to display the setup page
default to a case summary report: ECG report,
to be included in the case summary report.
Anesthesia trend report, OR report.
4 Select one or more of the following reports (the
buttons of the selected reports appear dark
green):
ECG report, Rest ECG report, ST report,
Alarm history report, Trend graph report,
Trend table report, Anesthesia trend report,
Calculations report, Timed wvf. report, OR
report
You can print a case summary report from several
places, see page 515.
IT applications (options)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Configuring IT tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Accessing an IT tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Supported IT applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Connecting to the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

EC 60601-1:2005 and 60601-1:2012 clause
14.13 compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Overview
The Cockpit supports several IT applications. Each If you are using a keyboard, you can activate a
application is an option that is accessible by mouse cursor on the Cockpit by pressing the ALT
selecting a tab appearing on the left side of the and F10 keys simultaneously.
monitoring area (see "Cockpit split screen mode
with multi-tab split screen" on page 79). Whenever NOTE
IT tabs are displayed, the top IT tab is always The F1 key is configured globally to control alarm
labeled Patient and allows you to access the silence from the keyboard and is not available to
monitoring screen that displays the current IT applications for use.
patient’s vital signs.
Configuring IT tabs
Only authorized personnel with the Biomed If the Cockpit loses communication with an
password can configure IT tabs. In the IT setup application, a message appears on the
page you can activate or deactivate each tab and corresponding IT application page. The Cockpit
configure specific settings, such as the blocking of tries to restore the communication with the IT
popups and so on. For detailed information, see application as quickly as possible.
"Biomed IT setup" on page 493.
CAUTION Web browser

The IACS does not have virus protection software
and relies therefore on the firewall of your In addition to IT applications, you can also setup a
institution to prevent access to infected files. browser with pre-configured websites (see
While setting up IT applications to access "Configuring IT tabs – browser setup" on
websites, evaluate each website with regard to page 493). Once you access the web browser IT
possible virus infection. tab, you can choose from all of the websites that
were pre-configured under the Biomed tab. IT tabs
are also available in split screen mode (see
page 79).
Accessing an IT tab
The following diagram is an example of a web always visible to report the patient’s monitoring
page. After a browser has been successfully data status. The top IT tab is the Patient tab that
configured (see page 494), you can select it by returns you to the main screen displaying the
clicking the corresponding IT tab. Whatever IT patient’s vital signs.
application is displayed, the Cockpit header bar is
A
B B C D E F
065
A Patient tab – always returns you to the main
screen with the patient’s vital signs.
B Navigate backward and forward
C Stops loading the web page
D Refreshes the screen
E Displays the main screen
F Address window
NOTE
Refreshing certain IT applications may disconnect
the application and require a new login.
Supported IT applications
If you dock a new M540 and admit the patient at the Browser emulation for Internet Explorer 7 to
Cockpit, the content of some application tabs Internet Explorer 11 and Microsoft Edge is
changes to reflect the data of the new patient. supported in all of the IT tabs except the Application
Similarly, if you discharge a patient, all IT tabs tab.
reflect that the patient is discharged. The following
table lists the supported IT applications.
Name of Application Supported Description
software version
Innovian Solution Suite VF7.1 Clinical flow sheet application.
This application includes: The tab can be configured to display a single patient.
– Innovian Critical Care
The single patient tab requires that the M540 is docked.
(formerly known as
ChartAssist) The Innovian waveform feature is not supported with the
– Innovian IACS VG5 (or later) release.
Perioperative Care Whenever you access the Innovian tab, the local patient
is displayed or the admit screen is presented if the local
patient has not yet been admitted to Innovian Solution
Suite application. For more information, refer to the
instructions for use Innovian Solution Suite.
NOTE: Innovian report generation is no longer supported
starting in IACS VG6. Print these reports from a PC where
Innovian is accessible.
Incorrect birth dates and hospital admittance dates could
be incorrect by one day on the Innovian admit screen due
to daylight savings. These dates can be entered directly
into Innovian using a PC.
Infinity Symphony Suite VF7 An application that provides retrospective analysis of
patient data stored on the ICS. The tab can be configured
to run a single patient provided an M540 is docked. The
Symphony status page only displays ST-deviations that
are displayed in the parameter field.
RemoteView (Gateway VF6 or higher Allows you to remotely view up to 4 different bedside
PatientWatch) monitors from the Cockpit.
No wireless symbol (example: ) appears on the
PatientWatch screen when the M540 is in wireless mode.
PatientWatch is supported only in English.
Application Citrix XenApp Provides remote access to IT applications residing on the
server Versions 5, Citrix server.
6, 6.5
Name of Application Supported Description

software version
Web browser Up to Internet Provides access to HTML and HTML5 content.
Explorer 11 and
MicrosoftEdge
Web application Up to Internet Provides access to HTML and HTML5 content for a single
Explorer 11 and URL, including the Citrix Receiver.
MicrosoftEdge
Connecting to the network
Dräger provides patient monitoring, therapy, and IT unidentified risks for patients, users, and third
products that may exchange information parties. These risks must be identified, analyzed,
electronically with each other in the clinical evaluated, and controlled before placing the
environment, as well as other non-Dräger devices, medical device into the IT network. Before a device
over information technology networks (IT can be in service on the Infinity Network, a valid and
networks). Each data interface is an IT network in unique IP address must be entered.
terms of the relevant communications standard
(e.g. printer interface, ISB interface, etc.).
Transmission of patient and device data across the
IT network enables patient data and equipment
data to be monitored, stored, transferred, printed,
or shared through the use of direct wired, as well as
wireless technologies, facilitating the following
operations:
– Waveform and parameter data display
– Alarm notification
– Network recordings and printing
– Remote control (for example, alarm
management)
– Remote BedView
– Patient archive data review (trends, events,
charting information)
– Equipment setting and patient data transfer
– Service access (device and component status
data; log file access)
Connecting Dräger devices to a shared IT network
with other devices, or subsequent changes to the
shared IT network, can lead to previously
EC 60601-1:2005 and 60601-1:2012 – The LAN-based IT-network uses TCP/IP

clause 14.13 compliance communication protocols. It must be capable of
supporting either unicast (static or dynamic
Subsequent changes to the IT network can include, addressing requiring ARP or RARP), as well as
among other things: multicast and broadcast transmissions. It needs
to allow the use of the Internet Group
– IT network configuration changes Management Protocol (IGMP version 2).
– Adding or removing additional devices to/from Dräger medical devices send out data packets
the IT network on the IT network. Dräger products like
CentralStation monitors, Gateways, or other
– Upgrading and/or updating network equipment bedside monitors, which are configured to
connected to the IT network receive these data packets, use the Internet
Hospital personnel (for example, biomedical or Management Protocol to join or leave an IP
network engineers) should read the accompanying Multicast group. An example of this data flow is
documents of the Dräger equipment carefully bedside devices sending out their patient data
before connecting the device to an IT network. using IP multicasting. A CentralStation monitor
Additionally, attention should be given to the can join into each multicast channel to capture
network interface description and network-relevant and display bedside patient data information.
alarms. Installation personnel should also refer to – Dräger devices may also require that the IT-
IEC 80001-1 for guidance before connecting the network provides support for three dedicated,
Dräger equipment to IT-networks. independent virtual local area network (VLAN)
The following summary provides additional connections for bedside medical devices,
disclosure on the connection of Dräger medical mobile patient monitors, and for access to the
devices to IT Networks: Health Delivery Organization (HDO) clinical
network. Additional information can be obtained
– The most commonly-required configuration of from specialized service personnel.
the LAN-based IT-network incorporating Dräger
medical devices is a star topology that connects – Besides direct network connections, other
monitoring units and groups of monitoring units possible communication interfaces include:
("care units") via layered network switches and  Serial data connections, conforming to EIA
the segmentation from other IT-Network traffic RS-232 (CCITT V.24/V.28) for MEDIBUS-
via separately designated virtual LANs. based products, paging interfaces, and
Required device interface configurations are connections to 3rd party medical devices.
described in the respective product instruction
for use documentation.  IEEE 1073 conformant interfaces (Medical
Information Bus) for connections to 3rd
– The specifications of the LAN connection for party medical devices (IEEE 1073.3.2 or
Dräger medical devices to the IT-Network are 1073.3.1 and 1073.4.1).
outlined in the IEEE 802.3 wired and IEEE
802.11(b, g, n) wireless Ethernet standards.  Serial data connections, conforming to USB
Port settings for layer 2 and layer 3 switches are 2.0, for human interface devices (mouse,
defined on a product-specific basis. These keyboards, mass storage devices such as
settings are available from specialized service flash disks, CD drives, etc.).
personnel. Dräger provides products for initial
set-up with pre-loaded IP addresses.
– Security for Dräger wireless products is

implemented using the Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES) WPA2, with pre-share key
administration at the time of installation.
Security for selected Dräger clinical IT products
includes SSL and additional capabilities defined
in the Medical Device Disclosure for Medical
Device Security (MDS2) form.
– There are potential hazardous situations that
can result from the failure of the IT-Networks to
provide the characteristics required to meet the
purpose of the medical device connection to the
IT Network. Dräger products will attempt to
detect and mitigate these potentially hazardous
situations. Related to this medical device, these
situations may include:
 Untimely delivery of data (alarm
annunciation/parameter values
exchange/etc.), depending on a "reliable
distributed alarm system or not"
 Data not sent or sent to the wrong device
 Missing data
 Patient data intercepted/corrupted
 Incorrect time stamp on data
 Alarms not detectable in time due to unsafe
distributed alarm system or alarm present at
network interruption
 Alarm pause/audio pause reset due to
network interruption
 Data privacy lost due to missing
firewall/virus protection
 Wrong equipment settings/wrong or no
alarms due to missing firewall/virus
protection
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Device communication messages . . . . . . . . 526
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
ARR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Respiration (RRi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP) . . . . . . 548
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Invasive pressure (IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Mainstream CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Microstream CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Calibration and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
CO2 monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Sample line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Cardiac Output (C.O.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Recording status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Alarm - Cause - Remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Troubleshooting
Overview
Alarm messages in the alarm display field are Advisory = ! Message of low priority
displayed in hierarchical order.
For example, if two faults are detected If no priority level is assigned, the message is
simultaneously, the more urgent of the two is informational and no action is required.
displayed. In the following table, messages are listed in
The priority level of the alarm messages (see alphabetical order. These tables identify possible
page 117 for definitions) is identified by alarm causes and provides corrective action. The
exclamation marks: various causes and remedies should be worked
through in the order listed until the problem has
Warning = !!! Message of high priority been resolved.
Caution = !! Message of medium priority
Device communication messages
Priority Message Cause Remedy

None Check IP address Duplicate PDS or Multicast Ensure the fourth octet of the IP
address. address is unique within the mon-
itoring unit.
None Disconnected from The M540 is disconnected Dock the M540.
M540 from the M500.
None Duplicate device Duplicate domain. Assign a unique domain name.
name
None Duplicate IP address The IP address is already in Assign a unique IP address.
use.
Troubleshooting

! External device An external device is no Check the external device
disconnected longer communicating with connections.
the Cockpit due to a
disconnected cable
(hardware- related).
An external device is no First check the external device
longer communicating with connection and reconnect the
the Cockpit. When this cable, if necessary. If the
happens repeatedly in connection is still not restored,
rapid succession, the turn the Cockpit off, and then turn
Cockpit will stop monitoring it on again.
the external connection
(software-related). In this
instance all connected
devices become
disconnected.
! Not Monitored By The Cockpit is connected to Admit the patient at the central
Central the Infinity network but is station.
not assigned to a central
Return the M540 inside the range
station.
of the wireless access point.
A wireless M540 is out of
Check network connectivity.
range of the access point.
! Offline The Cockpit is Check the network connectivity.
disconnected from the
Infinity network.
!! Please plug in power Loss of AC power forces Check the power source and all
supply the Cockpit to run on connections.
battery charge power for at
least five minutes before
shutting down.
! Please plug in system The system cable was Reconnect the system cable.
cable disconnected from the
M500.
!! Power supply The power supply is Unplug the power supply and
overheating overheating. contact specialized service
personnel.
!! Power supply H/W Faulty power supply. Replace the power supply and
failure contact specialized service
personnel.
Troubleshooting

!! Power supply low The battery charge is Reconnect to AC power.
battery < 20%. When the battery
charge falls below 10%, the
Cockpit performs a safe
shutdown.
! Power supply H/W Faulty power supply. Unplug the power supply and
failure contact specialized service
personnel.
None Remote Relearn The indicated function was Informational message –
initiated from the central no action required.
station.
None Remote Limit Change The indicated function was Informational message –
station.
None Silenced at Remote Remote alarm silence Informational message –
station or another Cockpit.
Troubleshooting
Messages

!!! All alarms off: This message appears in the alarm Deactivate the feature to
bypass message field when you activate remove the message.
cardiac bypass mode (see
page 473).
!!! All alarms off The All alarms paused function is Select the All alarms off
set to No timeout (see page 471) button again to remove the
and the All alarms off button was message.
selected.
!!! All alarms paused The All alarms paused function is Select the All alarms
with timer set to a time (see page 471) and the paused button again to
All alarms paused button was remove the message.
selected.
!! Audio paused with The yellow Audio paused 2 min Press the key again to
timer key (next to the rotary knob) was remove the message.
pressed.
!!! Pressures off The Pressures off function is Press the Pressures off
enabled (see page 129) and the button again to remove the
Pressures off button was pressed. message.
!! Pressures paused The Pressures paused function is Press the Pressures
set to a time (see page 129) and the paused button again to
Pressures paused button was remove the message.
pressed.
!! Audio off This message appears in the alarm Activate the Audio off
message field when the Audio off setting to remove the
feature is set to On. message.
None Discharge This message appears in the center Touch the screen to resume
of the Cockpit screen when the monitoring and admit a new
Touch Screen to
patient has been discharged (see patient.
resume monitoring
page 95).
! Duplicate IP address This message appears in the alarm Configure a new IP
message field when a duplicate IP address.
address is detected anywhere on
The Cockpit then
the Infinity network.
immediately tries to rejoin
The Cockpit goes offline within 10 the Infinity network
seconds of a Duplicate IP address
alarm condition.
Troubleshooting

None Filter ESU This message appears above the Select another filter setting
ECG waveform when the filter to change or remove the
setting is set to ESU (see message.
page 228).
None Filter off This message appears above the Activate the function to
ECG waveform appears when the remove the message.
filter setting is set to Off (see
page 228).
!!! HR, ASY, VF off This message appears in the alarm Activate the functions to
message field under the following remove the message.
circumstances:
– Heart rate alarms are
deactivated,
– ASY/VF alarms feature is
set to Follow HR alarm (see
page 473),
– Arrhythmia monitoring is
deactivated.
The same message also appears
– Heart rate alarms are
deactivated,
– ASY/VF alarms feature is
set to Always on (see
page 473),
– Arrhythmia monitoring is
deactivated,
– The selected HR source is
activated and is either SpO2
or ART.
!!! ASY, VF off This message appears in the alarm The message disappears
message field under the following under the following
circumstances: circumstances:
– Heart rate alarms are enabled – The setting HR source
is changed to ECG
– HR source is set to ART or
SpO2 – The setting ARR mode
is changed to Basic or
– ARR mode (arrhythmia) is set
Advanced.
to Off
Troubleshooting

!! HR alarms off This message appears in the alarm Activate the function to
message field under the following remove the message.
circumstances.
– When the alarm limits for heart
rate are deactivated and the
ASY/VF alarms function is set
to Always on (see page 473).
– When the alarm limits for heart
rate are deactivated, the basic
arrhythmia function is activated
and the ASY/VF alarms
function is set to Follow HR
alarm (see page 473).
None Pacer off These messages appear above the Deactivate the function to
ECG waveform when the remove the message.
Pacer fusion
corresponding function is activated
or deactivated (see page 228)
None Privacy This message appears in the center Take the patient out of
of the Cockpit screen when privacy standby to view all the data
Touch Screen to
mode has been activated at the Cockpit.
resume monitoring
(see page 96). All patient data are
removed from the screen and are
only visible at the ICS. This function
is not available unless the patient is
also admitted at the ICS.
None Standby This message appears in the center Touch the screen to resume
of the Cockpit screen when the monitoring.
Touch Screen to
Cockpit has been placed in standby
resume monitoring
mode.
None Waveforms stopped This message appears above all Select the button again to
waveforms when you press the remove the message.
Freeze waveforms button on the
main menu bar (see page 96).
Troubleshooting
ECG
Priority Message Parameter field Problem Solution

!!! Asystole ASY The reported Check the patient and
arrhythmia was treat if necessary.
detected
!!! Bradycardia BRADY The reported Check the patient and
arrhythmia was treat if necessary.
(neonatal patient
detected
category)
!! HR > (alarm limit) Parameter value The parameter – Check the patient
value is and treat if
HR < (alarm limit)
above/below the necessary.
set upper/lower
– Change the alarm
alarm limits.
limits.
!! %0 out of range The parameter value The parameter
high 1) is replaced by +++ value is above the
measurement
range of the
monitor.
! %0 artifact 1) 2) The parameter value – Patient – Check the
is replaced by *** movement electrodes and
(shivering, reapply if
tremors) necessary.
– Bad electrode – Make sure that
contact the patient’s skin
is properly
– Excessive
prepped.
signal noise
interference – Isolate the patient
from auxiliary from auxiliary
equipment equipment, if
possible.
Troubleshooting

! %0 unplugged 1)
The parameter value Lead-off condition – Replace faulty
is replaced by *** detected due to: cable(s).
%0 leads off 1)
– broken – Reapply gel on

cable(s) reusable
electrodes and
– disconnected
reapply them or
ECG lead
replace new
wires
disposable
– loose lead electrodes.
wire(s)
– Select another
– wrong lead ECG lead for
selected processing.
– dried out – If monitoring
electrode gel augmented leads,
verify that the
ECG cable(s)
number of
disconnected from
selected leads in
the M540.
the ECG setup
page is correct.
– Check cable(s)
and connection(s)
– Replace cable(s)
if necessary
None LA lead off Parameter value The indicated lead Reattach the
is no longer electrode to the
None LL lead off
attached to the patient.
None RA lead off patient.
None RL lead off
None V lead off
None V1 lead off
V2 lead off
V3 lead off
V4 lead off
V5 lead off
V6 lead off
V+ lead off
Troubleshooting

!!! Ventricular VF The reported Check the patient and
fibrillation arrhythmia was treat if necessary.
detected
Rest ECG messages
None ECG Collecting Parameter value Rest ECG was Instruct the patient to
waveforms initiated lie still.
None ECG busy Parameter value The central station Wait a few minutes
is already before requesting the
processing a report again.
report.
None ECG cannot Parameter value Connection to – Check that the
connect central station is patient is
not possible. admitted at the
central station.
– Check that the
central station
has the Rest ECG
option activated.
None ECG report Parameter value The Rest ECG Informational
complete report has been message – no action
printed required.
None %0 comm failure 1) Parameter value The external Check the
device is not configuration at the
available. central station.
None Sending ECG data Parameter value Informational Informational
message. message – no action
required.
1)
%0 is a placeholder for the parameter label HR or ECG.
After discharging a patient or starting the device, the alarm becomes active only after a numeric value
2)
has been received for that parameter.
NOTE
when the M540 is in OR alarms.
Troubleshooting
ST

! Cannot analyze The parameter The algorithm – Perform a relearn
ST value is replaced cannot determine (see page 242).
by *** ST values due to
– Check electrodes; re-
artifact, the
apply if necessary.
absence of normal
beats, or invalid – Make sure the
leads. patient’s skin is
properly prepared.
– Isolate the patient
from auxiliary
equipment if
possible.
– Inspect and replace
faulty cable(s) and
wire(s).
– Reapply gel on
reusable electrodes
and reapply them or
replace new
disposable
electrodes.
– Reapply the
electrode(s). Make
sure the patient’s
skin is properly
prepared.
– If a lead or electrode
cannot be replaced,
select another ST
lead for processing.
!! ST > (alarm limit) Parameter value The parameter – Check the patient
ST < (alarm limit)
set upper/lower
alarm limits.
limits.
Troubleshooting

!! %0 out of range The parameter The parameter – Check the patient
low 1) value is replaced value is below the and treat if
by - - - measurement necessary.
range of the
– Check the placement
monitor.
of electrodes and
change their position
if necessary.
!! %0 out of range The parameter The parameter – Check the patient
high 1) value is replaced value is above the and treat if
by +++ measurement necessary.
range of the
– Check the placement
monitor.
of electrodes and
change their position
if necessary.
! %0 unplugged 1) The parameter ECG lead wires Check the cables and
value is replaced are disconnected connections; replace if
by *** from the M540. necessary.
None ST relearn The parameter ST relearn is in Informational message –
value appears progress no action required.
blank.
1)
%0 is a placeholder for the parameter label ST.
ARR
Except for asystole and ventricular fibrillation, you

can assign the alarm priority low, medium or high or
you can deactivate the alarm function. For asystole
and ventricular fibrillation, the alarm priority is fixed
as life-threatening and you cannot deactivate the
alarm function.
Troubleshooting

!!! Asystole ASY The indicated Check the patient
!!! Ventricular fibrillation VF arrhythmia was and treat if
detected. necessary.
!! %0 Run 1) RUN
Some messages
!! %0 Accelerated AIVR
only appear when
idioventricular
the Full arrhythmia
rhythm 1)
option is installed.
! %0 Supraventricular SVT
tachycardia 1)
! %0 Couplet 1) CPT
! %0 Bigeminy 1) BGM
! %0 tachycardia 1)
TACH or VTACH
! %0 bradycardia 1)
BRADY
! %0 PAUSE 1)
PAUSE
!! %0 artifact 1) ARTF
None ARR cannot learn The parameter value After 100 beats, – Check the
appears blank the M540 cannot electrode
determine the preparation.
dominant normal
complex on any – Reapply
lead selected for electrodes if
QRS processing.
necessary.
None %0 relearning 1) LEARN The M540 is Informational
learning the message – no
patient’s QRS action required.
complex to
establish a
reference
template.
In the parameter field, the value is replaced by an ARR abbreviation (see page 37) except for the ARR
cannot learn message.
!! PVC/min > (alarm limit) Parameter value PVC value is – Check the
above the upper patient and
alarm limit. treat if
necessary.
– Reapply
electrodes if
necessary.
1)
%0 is a placeholder for the parameter label ARR.
2)
Troubleshooting
Respiration (RRi)

!! RRi > (alarm limit) Parameter value The parameter value is – Check the
above/below the set patient and
RRi < (alarm limit)
upper/lower alarm treat if
necessary.
limits.
– Check the
alarm limits.
!! %0 out of range The parameter – The respiratory rate – Check the
high1) value is replaced is higher than 150 patient and
by +++ breaths per minute. treat if
necessary.
– The M540 may be
counting artifacts as – Check the
valid breaths. placement of
electrodes.
– The M540 may be
counting – Move the
interference caused electrodes
by faulty equipment. away from the
source of
interference.
!!! %0 apnea 1) APNEA Neonatal apnea – Check the
condition was detected. patient and
treat if
!! %0 apnea 1) APNEA Adult or pediatric apnea necessary.
condition was detected.
– Check the
placement of
electrodes.
Change their
position if
necessary.
– Initiate a
relearn or reset
breath-
detection
sensitivity in
manual mode.
Troubleshooting

%0 coincidence 1
Parameter value The heart rate and – Check the
respiratory rate fall patient and
within 20% of each treat if
other. necessary.
– Check and
change the
electrode
placement if
you receive a
coincidence
message until
you obtain a
clear
respiration
signal.
– Change the
detection
threshold in
manual mode
or initiate a
relearning in
auto mode.
RRi relearning LEARN Relearn is in progress Informational mes-
sage -- no action
required.
Troubleshooting

! %0 lead off 1), 2)
The parameter The RRi lead is invalid. – Check the
value is replaced patient and
by *** treat if
necessary.
! %0 artifact 1), 2) The parameter Persistent artifact was
– Make sure the
value is replaced detected.
patient’s skin is
by ***
prepared
! RRi high The parameter A high respiration properly.
impedance value is replaced impedance was
– Isolate the
by *** detected. patient from
! %0 lead The parameter Faulty or disconnected any auxiliary
unavailable 1) value is replaced electrodes. equipment, if
by *** possible.
– Reapply gel on
reusable
electrodes and
reapply them or
replace new
disposable
electrodes.
– Inspect and
replace faulty
cables and
wires.
– If lead or
electrode
cannot be
replaced,
select another
lead for
processing (in
the RRi setup
page).
1)%0 is a placeholder for the parameter label RRi.
2) After discharging a patient or starting the device, the alarm becomes active only after a numeric value
NOTE
when the M540 is in OR alarms.
Troubleshooting
SpO2
The following messages originate from three

different hardware devices (Masimo SET, Masimo
rainbow SET, and Nellcor OxiMax).
None Learning pulse CO- Learning The parameters have Wait until message
(Masimo Ox been detected but disappears.
rainbow have not yet been
SET only) Displays computed.
parameter values
for SpO2, PLS*,
and PI. Parameter
values for SpHb
(SpHbv), SpOC,
SpMet, PVI, SpCO
are replaced by ***
None Low %0 SIQ 1) Associated – Poor signal quality – Check the
(Masimo parameter values patient and
– Measurement
rainbow are still displayed treat if
SET only) reading is
necessary.
obscured
– Make sure the
SpO2 sensor is
attached
properly to the
patient.
– Check all cable
connections.
None Low SpO2 SIQ Low SpO2 SIQ The Masimo MCable – Check the
detects low signal patient and
Parameter values
quality treat if
are still displayed.
necessary.
– Make sure the
SpO2 sensor is
attached
properly to the
patient.
– Check all cable
connections.
Troubleshooting

!! PLS out of range low The parameter The parameter value – Check the
(Any value is replaced is below the patient and
SpO2 by - - - measurement range treat if
MCable) of the monitor. necessary.
PLS out of range The parameter The parameter value – Change the
high value is replaced is above the alarm limits.
by +++ measurement range
of the monitor.
!! PVI > (alarm limit) Parameter value The parameter value – Check the
(Masimo is above the upper patient and
SpHb > (alarm limit)
rainbow alarm limits. treat if
SET only) SpHbv > (alarm limit) necessary.
SpMet > (alarm limit) – Change the
alarm limits.
SpOC > (alarm limit)
!! SpO2 > (alarm limit)
(Any PLS* > (alarm limit)
SpO2
MCable)
!! SpHb < (alarm limit) Parameter value The parameter value – Check the
(Masimo is above/below the set patient and
SpHbv < (alarm limit)
rainbow upper/lower alarm treat if
SET only) PVI < (alarm limit) limits. necessary.
SpOC < (alarm limit) The priority changes – Change the
to high (!!!) if the SpO2 alarm limits.
SpMet < (alarm limit)
value falls more than
(Any SpO2 < (alarm limit) 10% below the lower
SpO2
MCable) PLS* < (alarm limit) limit. This does not
occur when using
SatSeconds alarm
time with the Nellcor
OxiMax MCable.
Troubleshooting

! SpO2 cable Replace cable Cable expired. Replace the cable.
(Any expired 3)
Parameter values
Masimo
MCable) for SpO2, PLS*, PI,
SpHb (SpHbv),
SpOC, SpCO,
SpMet, and PVI
are replaced by
***.
NOTE: SpHb,
SpOC, SpCO,
SpMet, and PVI
are supported by
Masimo SET only.
! SpO2 cable expires Cable expires Cable near expiration. Replace the cable.
(Any soon soon
Masimo
MCable)
! SpO2 cable failure Cable failure The Masimo rainbow Replace the
(Masimo SET intermediate intermediate cable.
Parameter values
rainbow cable is faulty.
SET only) are replaced by ***
! SpO2 check Check sensor The SpO2 sensor is – Make sure the
(Nellcor sensor 2) disconnected. SpO2 sensor is
Parameter values
OxiMax attached
MCable are replaced by ***
properly to the
only)
patient.
– Check all cable
connections.
None %0 sensor Sensor The sensor is being Wait until message
(Masimo calibrating 1) calibrating checked for functional disappears.
rainbow integrity.
SET only) Parameter values This message
are replaced by *** appears right
before the
message SpO2
searching.
None SpO2 desaturation Parameter value SpO2 value below – Check the
(Any Desat. limit. patient and
SpO2 treat if
MCable) necessary.
– Change the
alarm limits.
Troubleshooting

! SpO2 H/W failure Parameter values Hardware failure – Check for faulty
(Any are replaced by *** MCable
SpO2
MCable) – Contact
specialized
service
personnel.
! SpO2 Interference Interference Interference such as – Make sure the
Detected 2) detected artifact or too much sensor is
ambient light was properly
Parameter values
detected. attached.
are replaced by ***
– Make sure that
no nail polish or
some other
substance is
blocking the
light.
– Change the
sensor location.
None SpO2 Low Low perfusion The signal is too – Check the
Perfusion small. patient and
treat if
Parameter values necessary.
– Move the
sensor to a site
that is more
adequately
perfused.
! SpO2 MCable MCable The SpO2 MCable is Check connections
unplugged 2) unplugged disconnected from to M540.
the M540.
Parameter values
are replaced by
***. The parameter
values are
replaced by blanks
for PI or SpOC if
using Masimo
rainbow SET
Troubleshooting

None SpO2 only mode SpO2 only mode The device cannot Remove and
(Masimo calibrate the Masimo reapply the sensor.
Parameter values
rainbow rainbow SET If the problem
SET for SpO2, PLS*, PI,
parameters and is persists, contact
MCable and PVI.
only) attempting to display specialized service
Parameter values
the standard Masimo personnel.
for SpHb (SpHbv),
parameters.
SpOC, SpMet,
SpCO are
replaced by ***
! SpO2 replace cable Replace cable Cable expired. Replace the cable.
(Any next pt. next pt.
Masimo
MCable) Parameter values
! SpO2 replace sensor Replace sensor – SpO2 sensor Replace the
(Any next pt. next pt. expired. sensor.
Masimo
MCable) Parameter values – Adhesive sensor
expired.
None SpO2 searching Searching The sensor is Verify proper
(Any searching for valid sensor application.
Parameter values
SpO2 pulses to compute a
MCable) are replaced by ***
measurement value.
! SpO2 sensor Replace sensor – SpO2 sensor Replace the
(Any expired 3) expired sensor.
Parameter values
Masimo
MCable) are replaced by *** – Adhesive sensor
expired
! SpO2 sensor expires Sensor expires – SpO2 sensor near Replace the
(Any soon soon expiration sensor.
Masimo
MCable) Parameter values – Adhesive sensor
near expiration
Troubleshooting

! %0 sensor failure 1)
Sensor failure – Hardware failure – Make sure the
(Any SpO2 sensor is
Parameter values – Faulty SpO2
SpO2 properly
MCable) are replaced by *** sensor
attached to the
patient and all
cables are
properly
connected.
– Replace the
sensor.
– Contact
specialized
service
personnel.
! SpO2 sensor off 2) Sensor off The Masimo MCable Reattach the SpO2
has detected that the sensor.
Parameter values
SpO2 sensor is no
are replaced by ***
longer attached to the
patient.
!! SpO2 sensor Sensor – SpO2 – Verify that the
(Any unplugged 2) unplugged intermediate cable cable and the
SpO2 or sensor is sensor are
unplugged properly
are replaced by ***
connected.
– SpO2 sensor is
unplugged from – Check for faulty
Masimo rainbow sensor.
SET MCable
! SpO2 unrecognized Unrecognized An incompatible cable – Connect the
(Any cable 3) cable is connected. right type of
Masimo cable.
MCable)
– Contact
Parameter values
specialized
are replaced by ***
service
personnel.
Troubleshooting

! SpO2 unrecognized Unrecognized – An incompatible – Connect the
(Any sensor sensor Nellcor or Masimo right type of
SpO2 SET sensor is sensor.
connected.
are replaced by *** – Contact
– A reusable SpHb specialized
Masimo rainbow service
SET sensor is personnel.
connected to an
Masimo rainbow
SET MCable that
does not support
SpHb.
1)
%0 is a placeholder for the parameter labels SpO2, PVI, SpHb (SpHbv), SpMet, SpOC, SpCO.
2)
3)
In the parameter field the parameter value is replaced by ***
Troubleshooting

!! NIBP S > (alarm limit) Parameter value The parameter – Check the patient
NIBP S < (alarm limit)
!! NIBP D > (alarm limit) Parameter value upper/lower
NIBP D < (alarm limit) alarm limits.
limits.
!! NIBP M > (alarm limit) Parameter value
NIBP M < (alarm limit)
!! %0 H/W failure 1) Parameter values – NIBP Check all hardware,
are replaced by *** measuremen contact specialized
t circuit failure service personnel.
– NIBP zero
out of range
or faulty
transducer
!! %0 low inflation The message Last The pressure of Select the next higher
limit 1) measurement the patient is inflation limit setting.
failed! is followed greater than the
by the message maximum
Low inflation limit allowed cuff
inflation
Parameter values
pressure.
are replaced by ***
! NIBP mean only Parameter values The pulse – Check the patient
are replaced by *** amplitude is too and treat if
small or too high necessary.
for the M540 to
– Check the hose
derive systolic
and cuff.
and diastolic
pressure values – Check the size and
but sufficient to the placement of
report a mean the cuff.
pressure value.
Troubleshooting

!! %0 out of range Parameter value or The parameter Check the NIBP
high 1) value is replaced by value is inflation limits and
*** depending on above/below the adjust them if
the pressure level measurement necessary (for
!! %0 out of range Parameter value or range of the example, if the wrong
low 1) value is replaced by monitor. patient category is
*** depending on selected).
the pressure level
!! NIBP failure The parameter NIBP hardware – Check hardware
value is replaced by failure. and replace if
*** necessary.
– Contact specialized
service personnel.
None NIBP pneumatic Parameter values NIBP hardware Contact specialized
char. needed are replaced by *** failure in the service personnel and
M540. take the M540 out of
service.
! %0 blocked Line 1) The message Last The inflation rate – Select a different
measurement is too high during cuff.
failed! is followed the inflation cycle
– Check the hose
by the message or the time to
and cuff for
Blocked line evacuate
damage.
residual cuff
Parameter values
pressure at the – Restart the
are replaced by ***
end of the measurement. If
deflation cycle is the message does
too short. not clear, contact
specialized service
personnel.
! %0 cannot The message Last The pulse profile – Check the patient
measure 1) measurement is too poor to and treat if
failed! is followed establish a necessary.
by the message reliable
– Move the cuff to a
Cannot measure measurement
limb with less
(usually due to
movement.
persistent motion
Parameter values artifact) – Restart the
are replaced by *** measurement. If
the message does
not clear, contact
specialized service
personnel.
Troubleshooting

! %0 cuff leak 1)
The message Last The drop in cuff – Check the hose
measurement pressure at the and cuff for leaks.
failed! is followed end of the Replace if
by the message inflation cycle is necessary.
Cuff leak too great.
– Restart the
Parameter values measurement. If
are replaced by *** the message does
not clear, contact
specializedservice
personnel.
! %0 measurement Parameter values An NIBP Repeat the
timeout 1) are replaced by *** measurement measurement.
has exceeded
time-out limit.
! %0 overpressure 1) Parameter values The cuff pressure – Check the patient
are replaced by *** has exceeded and treat if
the overpressure necessary.
threshold.
– Check the cuff for
obstructions.
– Repeat the
measurement.
! %0 open line 1) The message Last There was no Make sure that the
measurement significant hose and cuff are
failed! is followed increase in cuff properly connected to
by the message pressure during the monitor.
Open line the inflation
cycle.
Parameter values
are replaced by ***
None Venous stasis Parameter value or Message Informational message
started blank value reporting the – no action required.
status of venous
stasis.
ending blank value reporting the – no action required
status of venous
stasis.
ended blank value reporting the – no action required
status of venous
stasis.
1)
%0 is a placeholder for the parameter label NIBP.
Troubleshooting
Temperature

!! T1a > (alarm limit) Parameter value The parameter – Check the
T1b > (alarm limit) value is patient and
NOTE: The
Ta > (alarm limit) above/below the treat if
temperature label in
Tb> (alarm limit) upper/lower necessary.
the message may
T > (alarm limit) alarm limits.
vary depending on – Change the
∆T > (alarm limit)
the assigned alarm limits.
∆T1 > (alarm limit)
temperature label.
T1a < (alarm limit) The full list of
T1b < (alarm limit) temperature labels is
Ta < (alarm limit) available on page
Tb < (alarm limit)) 297.
T < (alarm limit)
∆T < (alarm limit)
∆T1 < (alarm limit)
!! %0 out of range high 1) The parameter value The parameter – Check the
is replaced by +++ value is patient and
!! %0 out of range low 1) The parameter value above/below the treat if
is replaced measurement necessary.
by - - - range of the
– Check the
monitor.
equipment and
replace, if
necessary.
! Cannot derive %0 2) The parameter value The cable is – Check the
is replaced by *** either faulty or equipment and
unplugged. replace it if
necessary.
– Connect the
second
temperature
sensor.
! %0 H/W failure 1), 2) The parameter value The hardware Contact
is replaced by *** reference values specialized service
do not meet the personnel.
specified
tolerance.
Troubleshooting

! %0 unplugged 1), 2)
The parameter value The temperature Reapply the
is replaced by *** sensor is temperature
unplugged. sensor.
1)
%0 is a placeholder for the parameter label T for Temp.
2)

!!! ART cath. The parameter value The arterial – Assess the catheter
disconnected? is replaced by *** catheter could insertion site.
be dislodged, or
– Inspect the tubing for
there could be a
leaks or the
leak in the
presence of blood.
tubing.
– Check the patient
and treat, if
necessary.
!! %0 transducer Pressure – Check the
failure 1) transducer transducer and
hardware replace, if necessary.
failure.
!! IP label > (alarm Parameter value The parameter – Check the patient
limit) value is and treat if
IP label < (alarm
upper/lower
limit) – Change the alarm
alarm limits.
limits.
!! %0 out of range The parameter value The parameter – Check the patient
low 1) is replaced by - - - falls outside the and treat if
!! %0 out of range The parameter value pressure range necessary.
high 1) is replaced by +++ of the monitor.
– Check the
equipment and
replace, if necessary.
Troubleshooting

! %0 please check Parameter value The IP zero Zero the transducer.
zero 1) value stored in
the M540 was
lost and the
transducer
requires
zeroing.
! %0 H/W failure 1) The parameter IP hardware – Check hardware and
value is replaced by failure. replace if necessary.
***
service personnel.
None %0 did not zero 1) Parameter value Transducer – Keep all tubing
zeroing failed motionless, then
because of: rezero.
– excessive – Change the
signal noise transducer.
– a non-static – Check stopcock,
waveform then rezero.
!! %0 static Parameter value Static pressure – Check the patient
pressure 1) detected on a and treat if
pulsatile signal, necessary.
due to:
– Open the system to
– a the patient by turning
physiological the stopcock.
condition
– Follow hospital
such as an
procedures for
asystole
dislodging catheters.
– a transducer
– Follow hospital
that is closed
procedures for
to the patient
clotted catheters.
– a catheter tip
that is
lodged
against a
vessel wall
– a clot on the
catheter tip
Troubleshooting

! %0 unplugged 1), 2)
The parameter The pressure – During an active
value is replaced by transducer for pressure: Reconnect
*** the specified or replace the cable.
parameter is
– During an inactive
either
pressure: deactivate
unplugged or
alarms.
faulty.
! HemoPod The parameter The IP pod is Check the equipment
unplugged 2) value is replaced by disconnected. and replace if necessary.
***
! %0 HemoPod H/W The parameter value Invasive – Check hardware and
failure1) is replaced by *** pressure pod replace if necessary.
has a hardware
failure.
service personnel
! 2nd HemoPod The parameter value The second – Check the
unplugged is replaced by *** invasive equipment and
pressure pod is replace if necessary.
disconnected.
None HemoPod None - message An incompatible – Remove the
incompatible only invasive incompatible
pressure pod invasive pressure
has been pod.
connected.
None %0 zero accepted 1) Parameter value Transducer Informational message –
zeroing was no action required.
successful.
None %0 did not zero - Parameter value Transducer – Keep all tubing
offset error 1) zeroing failed motionless.
because static
– Replace the
pressure was
transducer.
too high or too
low. – Check the stopcock
and zero again.
None Inflate balloon. Parameter value Action required Press Start wedge
Press "Wedge" to to start wedge button to begin wedge
Start. measurement. measurement.
This message
appears in the
Wedge dialog only.
Troubleshooting

None Wedge in progress Parameter value Informational Informational message –
message. no action required.
This message
appears in the
Wedge dialog only.
None Deflate balloon and Parameter value Action required Press Save wedge
press "Save to complete button to finish wedge
wedge" to finish wedge measurement.
measurement.
This message
appears in the
Wedge dialog only.
1)
%0 is a placeholder for the respective IP label (including CPP).
2)
Troubleshooting
Mainstream CO2

None CO2 calibration check The mainstream sensor Contact specialized service
failed calibration procedure failed. personnel.
None CO2 calibration check The mainstream sensor Informational message – no
in progress calibration procedure is in action required.
progress.
None CO2 calibration check The mainstream sensor Informational message – no
successful calibration procedure was action required.
successful.
None CO2 calibration failed The mainstream sensor Try again or contact
calibration procedure was specialized service personnel.
unsuccessful.
None CO2 calibration in The mainstream sensor Informational message – no
progress calibration procedure is in action required.
progress.
None CO2 calibration The mainstream sensor Informational message – no
successful.
! %0 check airway – The mainstream sensor – Make sure the mainstream
adapter 1) is not properly seated on sensor is attached properly
the adapter to the adapter.
– There are secretions in – If message persists, clean
the adapter. or replace the airway
adapter.
– There is sensor zero drift
– If message persists though
the airway adapter is clean,
zero the sensor.
! %0 H/W failure 1) CO2 sensor hardware Contact specialized service
failure. personnel.
Troubleshooting

! %0 incompatible – The M540 has detected – Use the airway adapter
sensor 1) that the used type the system is
mainstream sensor is configured for or adjust the
not compatible with the airway adapter setting.
selected sensor type
– If the message persists,
setting
clean or replace the airway
(reusable/disposable)
adapter.
– Secretions in the
– If the message persists
adapter
even though the correct
– Sensor zero drift airway adapter type is
selected and the airway
– High inspiratory CO2
adapter is clean, zero the
concentration
sensor.
– If the message still persists,
the inspiratory CO2 value
might not be accurate.
Check the patient and
ventilation.
!! CO2 out of range high 1) The parameter signal is – Check the patient and treat
outside the measuring if necessary.
range of the monitor.
– Check the equipment and
replace if necessary.
None CO2 please zero Instructional message for Zero the mainstream sensor.
the mainstream sensor only.
! %0 sensor too warm 1) The CO2 mainstream – Unspecified accuracy at
sensor is too warm due to ambient temperatures
ambient temperature. above 40 °C (104 °F).
– The sensor will return to
normal operation at
ambient temperatures
below 40 °C (104 °F). If not,
replace the sensor and
contact specialized service
personnel.
! CO2 MCable The CO2 sensor is Check the CO2 connections.
unplugged 1) disconnected.
! CO2 MCable failure The CO2 sensor hardware Contact specialized service
failed due to a corrupt personnel.
EPROM (erasable
programmable read-only
memory) chip.
Troubleshooting

!! CO2 warming up The CO2 sensor is – Wait for the CO2 sensor to
completing its warm-up warm up. During warm-up,
cycle. the accuracy is reduced.
– If the message persists
longer than 15 minutes
after the sensor has
warmed up and the ambient
temperature is above 10 °C
(50 °F), contact specialized
service personnel.
– You cannot zero the sensor
while this message is
displayed and the ambient
(50 °F).
– When the ambient
temperature is below 10 °C
(50 °F), the message can
display longer than
15 minutes. In this case, it
is possible to zero the
sensor after the message
has been displayed for at
least 10 minutes.
None %0 zeroing failed Zeroing of the sensor has – Try to zero the sensor again
failed or the sensor is faulty . making sure not to breathe
on the sensor.
– If zeroing fails again,
replace the sensor and
contact specialized service
personnel.
None %0 zeroing in progress The CO2 zeroing is in Informational message – no
progress. action required.
!! etCO2 > (alarm limit) The parameter value is – Check the patient and treat
above/below the set if necessary.
etCO2 < (alarm limit)
upper/lower alarm limits.
(except inCO2) – Change the alarm limits.
!! RRc out of range high The parameter signal is – Check the patient and treat
outside the measuring if necessary.
range of the monitor.
Troubleshooting

!! %0 apnea Apnea was detected – Check the patient and treat
if necessary.
– Check the placement of the
sensor.
1)
Microstream CO2
Calibration and maintenance

None CO2 calibration check The Microstream MCable Contact specialized service
failed calibration procedure failed. personnel.
None CO2 calibration check The Microstream MCable Informational message – no
successful.
None CO2 calibration check The Microstream MCable Informational message – no
in progress calibration procedure is in action required.
progress.
None CO2 calibration The Microstream MCable Contact specialized service
required calibration procedure is due. personnel.
None CO2 MCable: Maintenance for Contact specialized service
Maintenance is due Microstream MCable is due. personnel.
None %0 zeroing failed Resetting the Microstream Contact specialized service
MCable to zero has failed personnel.
the standard three attempts.
None %0 zeroing in progress The Microstream MCable is Informational message – no
being reset to zero. action required.
None CO2 zeroing succesful The Microstream MCable is Informational message -- no
successfully reset to zero. action required.
Troubleshooting
CO2 monitoring

! CO2 The M540 has detected that the Contact specialized service
incompatible Microstream MCable is not personnel.
pod compatible with the M540.
!! CO2 out of range The parameter signal is outside – Check the patient and treat if
high 1) the measuring range of the necessary.
monitor.
! CO2 sensor The Microstream MCable is Check the CO2 connections.
unplugged 1) disconnected.
! CO2 MCable The Microstream MCable is Reconnect the Microstream MCable
unplugged disconnected from the monitor. to the monitor.
! CO2 MCable The Microstream MCable Contact specialized service
failure hardware has failed due to one personnel.
of the following issues:
– a corrupt EPROM (erasable
programmable read-only
memory) chip
– a compromised flow rate
that caused the auto-zero
procedure to fail.
!!! %0 MCable: Gas The Microstream MCable gas Contact specialized service
outlet blocked outlet is blocked. personnel.
Troubleshooting

!! CO2 warming up The Microstream MCable is – Wait for the Microstream
completing its warm-up cycle. MCable to warm up. During
warm-up, the accuracy is
reduced.
– If the message persists longer
than 15 minutes after the sensor
has warmed up and the ambient
(50 °F), contact specialized
service personnel.
– You cannot zero the sensor
while this message is displayed
and the ambient temperature is
above 10 °C (50 °F).
– When the ambient temperature
is below 10 °C (50 °F), the
message can display longer
than 15 minutes. In this case, it
is possible to zero the sensor
after the message has been
displayed for at least
10 minutes.
None %0 zeroing in The Microstream MCable is Informational message – no action
progress being reset to zero. required.
!! etCO2 > (alarm The parameter value is – Check the patient and treat, if
limit) above/below the set necessary.
upper/lower alarm limits.
etCO2 < (alarm – Change the alarm limits.
limit)
(except inCO2)
!!! %0 apnea Apnea was detected. – Check the patient and treat, if
necessary.
– Check the placement of sensor.
!! RRc out of range The parameter signal is outside – Check the patient and treat if
high the measuring range of the necessary.
patient monitor.
1)
Troubleshooting
Sample line

! Sample line is being A sample line blockage Informational message – no
cleared occurred and the action required.
Microstream MCable is
attempting to clear the
sample line.
! Sample line blocked The sample line is blocked Replace the sample line.
during the purging process.
! Sample line The sample line is Securely connect the sample
disconnected disconnected from the line to the Microstream
Microstream MCable. MCable.
Cardiac Output (C.O.)
!! Tblood > (alarm limit) Parameter value The blood – Check the patient
temperature is and treat if
Tblood < (alarm limit)
outside the alarm necessary.
limits because of:
– a physiological limits.
condition
– inappropriate
alarm limits
– a faulty sensor
!! %0 out of range Parameter value The blood Check equipment and
high 1) temperature is replace if necessary.
outside the
%0 out of range low 1)
measurement
range because of a
faulty sensor.
Troubleshooting
! C.O. Catheter Fault - Parameter value The C.O. blood – Check the
Bad Ref. 2) thermistor catheter and
calibration resistor replace if
does not meet the necessary.
specified
– Contact
tolerance.
specialized
service personnel.
! C.O. Pod Fault - Bad Parameter value The C.O. – Remove and
Ref. 2) reference values reconnect the
do not meet the pod.
specified
– Repeat the
tolerances.
measurement.
– Replace the pod
and contact
specialized
service personnel
if the message
persists.
None %0 out of range Parameter value The C.O. is greater – Check the patient
high 1) than 20 liters/min and treat if
or less than necessary.
%0 out of range low 1)
0.5 liters/min
– Use cooler
because of:
injectate.
– a physiological
– Enter the correct
condition
values in the C.O.
– unstable page.
baseline
– Repeat the
– incorrect measurement. If
injectate message persists,
volume, replace faulty
catheter size, components.
or computation
constant
– faulty catheter,
cable, or
cartridge
Troubleshooting
None %0 Check Injectate Parameter value The thermistor is Connect the probe
Probe not connected or and repeat the
became measurement.
disconnected
during a
measurement.
None %0 duplicate device Parameter value Multiple C.O. Disconnect duplicate
connected 1) sources are C.O. sources.
connected. This
includes CCO
devices connected
via the device
connectivity
option.
None %0 Injectate Too Parameter value The injectate – Use an injectate
Cold 1) temperature is too within the correct
cold during the temperature
measurement range of –5 °C to
process. +30 °C (23 °F to
+86 °F).
– Check equipment
and replace if
necessary.
None C.O. injectate set to Parameter value No thermistor was Attach a thermistor.
20°C! connected. The
M540 assumes a
temperature of
20 °C (68 °F).
None %0 No Temperature Parameter value No change in – Repeat the
Change 1) blood temperature measurement.
during the C.O.
– Use a larger
measurement.
injectate volume.
– Repeat the
measurement. If
problem persists,
replace the
catheter.
– Use a cooler
injectate.
Troubleshooting
None %0 Poor Baseline 1) Parameter value Poor blood – Follow hospital

temperature procedures.
baseline during
– Repeat the
C.O.
measurement.
measurement.
– Replace the faulty
components, if the
message persists.
None %0 Use Cooler Parameter value – The difference Use a colder injectate.
Injectate 1) between the
temperature of
the blood and
the injectate is
less than 5 °C
(41 °F).
– The injectate
temperature is
greater than
25 °C (77 °F).
! %0 Transducer Parameter value A cable or – Reconnect the
Unplugged 1), 2) transducer has cable or
become transducer.
disconnected.
– Replace the faulty
part, if the
message persists.
1)
%0 is a placeholder for the parameter label C.O.
2)
NOTE: C.O. monitoring is only supported on the first MPod – QuadHemo in a daisy-chained
configuration.
Troubleshooting
Recording status messages
Priority Message Problem Solution

None Primary Recorder Not A recording was requested Try again, then contact
Connected but no recorder is available. specialized service personnel.
or
Secondary Recorder
Not Connected
None Primary Recorder Out A recording was requested Replace the recorder paper
of Paper but the recorder is out of (see page 508).
paper.
or
Secondary Recorder
Out of Paper
None Primary Recorder Door The recorder door is open. Close the door of the recorder.
Open
or
Secondary Recorder
Door Open
None Primary Recorder The recording request was Contact specialized service
Failure not accepted due to recorder personnel.
hardware failure.
or
Secondary Recorder
Failure
None Primary Recorder Not No recorder has been Contact specialized service
Assigned assigned. personnel.
or
Secondary Recorder
Not Assigned
None Primary Recorder The recorder is overheating. Contact specialized service
Overheating personnel.
or
Secondary Recorder
Overheating
Troubleshooting
Priority Message Problem Solution

None Timed Recording The requested recording is Informational message – no
Started being printed. action required.
or
Continuous Recording
Started
None Timed Recording The recorder is not available
Request Accepted and the requested recording
is queued or stored for later
or
printing.
Continuous Recording
Request Accepted
None Timed Recording The requested recording is
Finished printed.
or The requested recording
was manually canceled.
Timed Recording
Canceled
None Continuous Recording
Canceled
None Recording Not The assigned recorder is not Contact specialized service
Accepted available and the recording personnel to check the recorder
request was ignored. assignment.
None Excess Artifact The recording request was Check the ECG lead
Recording Canceled not accepted due to artifact. connections; contact
specialized service personnel.
Troubleshooting
Scio
CAUTION Alarm - Cause - Remedy

Risk due to gas measurement failure
If an alarm occurs, the table helps to quickly identify
If gas measurement fails, the patient can no causes and remedies. The possible causes and
longer be adequately monitored. remedial measures should be consulted in the
– Ensure corresponding substitute monitoring. order in which they are listed until the alarm is
– Check sample line and water trap for damage resolved.
or blockage and resolve these as needed.
The following table lists the alarm messages in
– Observe the prescribed exchange intervals.
alphabetical order.
NOTE
The "%0" symbol indicates CO2, N2O, O2, xMAC,
and any agents that may appear in the alarm
message.
Alarm Priority Alarm Cause Remedy
Medium %0 out of range high Agent concentration has Check vaporizer, fresh-
exceeded the Scio upper limit gas settings, and
of the measurement range. ventilation
Low %0 reduced accuracy Accuracy of the Agent sensor – Ensure clean
cannot be guaranteed. ambient air
NOTE – Check water trap and
This alarm occurs only on gas sample line.
analyzers with manual agent
– Change the water
identification.
trap or sample line if
necessary.
– Wait for automatic
zeroing.
– Power cycle the gas
analyzer.
service personnel.
Troubleshooting
Low %0 sensor failure The Agent sensor – Check sample line.

measurement has failed due
– Remove radiating
to:
devices (e.g.,
– Sample line occlusion. telephone).
– Electrical disturbance. – Use alternative agent
measurement
– Internal failure.
system.
– Call specialized
service personnel.
Low %0 value temporarily Agent parameter has – Ensure clean
unavail. unknown accuracy or ambient air.
automatic identification is
taking more time than usual,
devices (e.g.,
possibly due to:
telephone).
– Zeroing failure
– Check ambient
– Polluted ambient air temperature.
during zeroing.
– Check water trap and
– Electromagnetic sample line.
disturbances.
– Overheating. trap or sample line if
necessary.
– Power cycle Scio
– Change vaporizer
settings.
service personnel.
Low Check water – Sample line is blocked or – Check sample line.
trap/sample line not connected.
– Check water trap.
– Water trap is full or not
installed.
Troubleshooting

Low CO2 reduced Accuracy of the CO2 sensor – Ensure clean
accuracy cannot currently be ambient air
guaranteed.
sample line.
necessary.
zeroing
analyzer.
service personnel.
Low %0 sensor failure The CO2 sensor in patient gas – Check sample line.
measurement module has
failed due to:
devices (e.g.,
– Electrical disturbance. – Use alternative CO2
measurement
system.
service personnel.
Medium %0 out of range high CO2 concentration has Check vaporizer, fresh-
exceeded the Scio upper limit gas settings and ventila-
of the measurement range. tion.
Low etAgent < # – Expiratory anesthetic gas – Check vaporizer and
concentration has fallen fresh-gas settings.
Note
below the lower alarm limit – Check breathing
This alarm only occurs
for more th an 15 seconds. system for large
for the primary agent.
– Soda lime is dried out. leaks.
– Exchange soda lime.
Medium etAgent > # Expiratory anesthetic gas Check vaporizer and
concentration has exceeded fresh-gas settings
Note
the upper alarm limit for more
This alarm only occurs
than 15 seconds.
Medium etCO2 < # Expiratory CO2 has fallen be- Check ventilation.
low the limit for more than 15
seconds.
Troubleshooting
Medium etCO2 > # Expiratory CO2 has exceeded Check ventilation.

the limit for more than 15 sec-
onds.
Medium etO2 < # Expiratory O2 concentration – Check O2
has fallen below the lower concentration and
alarm limit for more than 15 fresh-gas settings
seconds. – Check breathing
system for large
leaks.
– Check O2 supply.
Medium etO2 > # Expiratory O2 concentration Check O2 concentration
has exceeded the upper alarm and fresh-gas settings.
limit for more than 15
seconds.
High FiO2 < # Inspiratory O2 concentration – Check O2
has fallen below the lower concentration and
alarm limit for: fresh-gas settings
– Check breathing
– At least 15 seconds (with
system for large
respiratory phases)
leaks.
– At least 30 seconds – Check O2 supply.
(without respiratory
phases)
Medium FiO2 > # Inspiratory O2 concentration Check O2 concentration
has exceeded the upper alarm and fresh-gas settings.
limit for more than 15
seconds.
Medium Gas sensor failure The patient-gas measurement – Check sample line.
has failed due to:
– Sample line occlusion. devices (e.g.,
telephone).
– Electrical disturbance.
– Use alternative gas
measurement
system.
service personnel.
Troubleshooting

Low Gas sensor reduced Accuracy of the gas – Ensure clean
accuracy measurements cannot ambient air.
currently be guaranteed.
sample line.
necessary.
zeroing
analyzer.
service personnel.
Low inAgent < # – Inspiratory anesthetic gas – Check vaporizer and
concentration has fallen fresh-gas settings.
NOTE
below the lower alarm limit – Check breathing
This alarm occurs only
for more than 15 seconds system for large
leaks.
– Soda lime is dried out
– Exchange soda lime.
Medium inAgent > # Inspiratory anesthetic gas Check vaporizer and
concentration has exceeded fresh-gas settings.
NOTE
the upper alarm limit:
for the primary agent. – At least 15 seconds (with
respiratory phases).
– At least 30 seconds
phases).
Medium inN2O > 82% Inspired N2O is greater than Check fresh-gas
82% composition.
– At least 15 seconds (with
respiratory phases).
– At least 30 seconds
phases).
Troubleshooting
Medium inCO2 > # Inspired CO2 has exceeded – Check soda lime.
the limit for more than 15 sec-
– Increase fresh-gas
onds possibly due to one of
flow.
the following:
– Check fresh-gas
– Soda lime is depleted.
settings.
– Leakage in breathing
– Replace the
system.
breathing system.
– Gas measurement is
– Adjust alarm limits if
inaccurate due to high
necessary.
respiratory rate.
– Check ventilation
– Large dead space.
settings.
Medium Inspiratory xMAC The inspiratory anesthetic gas Check vaporizer and
high concentration has exceeded 3 fresh-gas settings.
xMAC for more than 3
minutes.
High Inspiratory xMAC – The inspiratory anesthetic Check vaporizer and

high gas concentration has fresh-gas settings.
exceeded 5 xMAC
or, while the patient is breath-
ing:
– The inspiratory anesthetic
gas concentration has
exceeded 3 xMAC for
more than 30 seconds,
– The expiratory anesthetic
gas concentration has
exceeded 2.5 xMAC for
more than 30 seconds.
Medium %0 out of range high N2O concentration has Check vaporizer, fresh-
Troubleshooting

Low %0 reduced accuracy Accuracy of the N2O sensor – Ensure clean
cannot currently be ambient air
guaranteed.
sample line.
necessary.
zeroing.
analyzer.
service personnel.
Low %0 sensor failure The N2O sensor in patient gas – Check sample line.
measurement module has
failed due to:
devices (e.g.,
– Electrical disturbance. – Use alternative N2O
measurement
system.
service personnel.
Low %0 value temporarily N2O parameter has unknown – Ensure clean
unavail. accuracy possibly due to: ambient air.
– Zeroing failure. – Remove radiating
devices (e.g.,
– Polluted ambient air
telephone).
during zeroing.
– Check ambient
– Electromagnetic
temperature.
disturbances.
– Overheating.
sample line.
necessary.
analyzer.
service personnel.
Troubleshooting
Medium %0 out of range high O2 concentration has Check vaporizer, fresh-

Low %0 reduced accuracy Accuracy of the O2 sensor – Ensure clean
cannot be guaranteed. ambient air.
sample line.
necessary.
zeroing.
analyzer.
service personnel.
Medium %0 sensor failure The O2 sensor in the patient – Use alternative O2
gas measurement module has measurement
failed due to: system.
– Sample line occlusion. – Call specialized
service personnel.
– Electrical disturbance.
Troubleshooting

Low %0 value temporarily O2 parameter has unknown – Ensure clean
unavail. accuracy, possibly due to: ambient air.
– Polluted ambient air – Remove radiating
during zeroing. devices (e.g.,
telephone).
– Electromagnetic
disturbances. – Check ambient
temperature.
– Overheating.
sample line.
necessary.
– Wait for auto zeroing
to complete.
analyzer.
– Change vaporizer
settings.
service personnel.
Medium RRc > # Respiratory rate has exceed- Check ventilation.
ed the limit.
Medium RRc < # Respiratory rate is below the Check ventilation.
limit.
Medium RRc apnea No breathing or ventilation. – Start manual
ventilation.
– Check ventilation
settings.
– Check spontaneous
breathing ability of
the patient
Sample line is not connected. Connect sample line to
breathing circuit
Medium %0 out of range high RRc has exceeded the upper Check ventilation.
limit of the measuring range
for Scio.
Troubleshooting
Low Sample line blocked Sample line or patient-side Check sample line, water
filter is occluded. trap, and patient-side
filter.
Medium Scio is not connected Scio is disconnected or turned Connect the Scio module
off. or turn it on.
Low Scio unavailable for – Scio is plugged in while – Connect an alternate
neonates IACS is already in neonate CO2 monitor (e.g.,
mode. Mainstream or
– IACS is switched to Microstream) if CO2
neonate mode while Scio monitoring is desired
is already plugged in. in neonate mode.
– Switch IACS out of
neonate mode in
order to continue
Scio monitoring.
Low Scio warming up: Accuracy is not guaranteed Wait for the Scio module
Accur. low while the Scio is warming up. to warm up.
Low Second agent A second anesthetic agent – Wait for the transition
detected has been detected. phase to end after
changing anesthetic
NOTE NOTE
agents.
This alarm occurs only This alarm could be an
– Flush the system if
on gas analyzers with expected clinical behavior if
necessary.
automatic agent the clinician regularly uses
– Check fresh-gas
identification. two agents as part of the
settings.
process.
Medium Third agent detected A mixture of three or more – Wait for the transition
anesthetic agents or other phase to end after
NOTE
gases has been detected, changing anesthetic
possibly as a result of: agents.
on gas analyzers with
– A change of the anesthetic – Flush the system if
automatic
agent during monitoring necessary.
identification.
– Electromagnetic – Check fresh-gas
interference settings.
– The use of inhalants or – Check for
sprays (e.g., albuterol) electromagnetic
radiation in the
vicinity.
Low Water trap is full – Water trap is full. – Check water trap.
– Sample line is occluded. – Check sample line,
water trap, and
patient-side filter.
Troubleshooting
Medium %0 out of range high Indicates that the expiratory Check vaporizer, fresh-
xMAC is out of range high gas settings, and
when: ventilation.
– Primary agent, secondary
agent, and/or N2O are out
of range high.
– Expiratory xMAC exceeds
10.
Status Messages
Message Condition Suggested action

Scio zeroing is in Zeroing cycle in progress. Wait for the zeroing cycle to complete.
progress
Maintenance
Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Definition of maintenance concepts . . . . . . . . . 581
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Inspection / safety checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Scope of inspection/safety checks for the
Cockpit (C500/C700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
PS250 / P2500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
M540. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Metrological checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Maintenance Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Maintenance
Overview
This chapter describes the maintenance measures WARNING

required to maintain the functional integrity of the
If the device is mechanically damaged, or if it
medical device. Maintenance measures must be
is not working properly, do not use it. Contact
performed by the responsible personnel.
your hospital’s service personnel.
WARNING
Risk of infection. CAUTION
This device must be inspected and serviced at
Users and service personnel can become
regular intervals. A record must be kept on this
infected with pathogens.
preventive maintenance. A service contract with
Disinfect and clean the device or the Dräger is recommended. For repairs we
components before any maintenance recommend that you contact specialized service
measures and also before returning the personnel.
medical device for repair.
CAUTION
WARNING When servicing devices from Dräger, always use
Risk of electric shock. spare parts that are qualified to Dräger standards.
Dräger cannot warrant or endorse the safe
Current-carrying components are located
performance of third-party spare parts for use with
under the cover.
the devices.
– Do not remove the cover.
– Maintenance measures must be performed CAUTION
by the responsible personnel. Dräger If you spill liquid on the equipment, battery or
recommends DrägerService to perform accessories or immerse these components in
these measures. liquid, allow them to dry completely for at least 24
hours to 48 hours. Contact your hospital’s service
personnel to test any such component is fully
operational before putting it back in clinical use.
NOTE
Only perform maintenance measures when no
patient is connected to the device.
WARNING
Any modification of this device or any use
different from the one specified in these
instructions for use may cause interference
with other equipment. It may also result in
injury to the patient or the user, including
electric shock, burns or death.
Maintenance
Definition of maintenance concepts
Concept Definition
Maintenance All measures (inspection, preventive maintenance, repair) intended to
maintain and restore the functional integrity of a medical device.
Inspection Measures intended to determine and assess the actual state of a medical
device.
Preventive maintenance Recurrent specified measures intended to maintain the functional integrity of
a medical device.
Repair Measures intended to restore the functional integrity of a medical device after
a device malfunction.
Inspection
Perform inspections at regular intervals and ob-

serve the following specifications.
Checks Interval Personnel responsible
Inspection/safety checks Every 2 years Expert
Metrological checks Every 2 years Expert
Visual inspection
Perform a visual inspection before every use and in 3 Turn the monitor on and make sure the
accordance with your hospital’s policy. backlight is bright enough.
1 Make sure that the housing is not cracked or 4 Examine all system cables, power plugs and
broken and there are no signs of spilled liquids discontinue use if there are any signs of
or damage. damage.
2 Inspect all accessories (for example, sensors 5 Inspect all patient cables, leads and strain
and cables). Do not use if there are any signs of reliefs for general condition. Make sure the
damage. connectors are properly engaged at each end.
Maintenance
Inspection / safety checks
Inspection and safety checks of devices must be 6 Verify that the optical and acoustic alarm
performed according to the suggested intervals signals function properly.
specified in the table on page 581.
Scope of inspection/safety checks for

Scope of inspection/safety checks for the PS250 / P2500
the Cockpit (C500/C700)
The safety checks are no substitute for preventive
The safety checks are no substitute for preventive measures (including preventive replacement of
maintenance measures (including preventive wearing parts) as identified by the manufacturer.
replacement of wearing parts) as identified by the
1 Check accompanying documents:
manufacturer.
– Instructions for use are available
WARNING
2 Perform a functional test of the following
Risk of medical device failure features:
If safety checks are not performed on a – Verify the LEDs
regular basis, the proper operation of the
medical device can be compromised. – Perform system tests
Perform safety checks at the indicated 3 Check that the device combination is in good
intervals. condition:
– All labels are complete and legible.
– There is no visible damage.
– Fuses which are accessible from the
outside comply with the specified values.
features according to the instructions for use:
4 Check the electrical safety requirements
– Verify the LEDs
according to IEC62353 every two yea rs by
– Perform system tests qualified DrägerService personnel.
3 Check that the device combination is in good 5 Check the following safety features:
condition:
– The power LED and the battery indicator
– All labels are complete and legible LED function properly.
– There is no visible damage – The C500/C700 are powered correctly.
– Fuses which are accessible from the – Check the functional integrity of the Infinity
outside are in compliance with the specified MCable – Nurse call.
values
4 Use the instructions for use to check that all
components and accessories needed to use the
product are available.
according to IEC62353.
Maintenance
Scope of inspection/safety checks for the M540
The safety checks are no substitute for preventive – Check the functional integrity of the Infinity
maintenance measures (including preventive MCable – Nurse call.
replacement of wearing parts) as identified by the
– Functional integrity of the button
manufacturer.
located on the front of the device.
WARNING – Functional integrity of the non-invasive
Risk of medical device failure blood pressure overpressure sensor
(including the valves and the pump).
If safety checks are not performed on a
regular basis, the proper operation of the – Functional integrity of the optical and
medical device can be compromised. acoustic alarm signals.
Perform safety checks at the indicated 6 Replace the battery every two years and make
intervals. sure the M540 runs on battery charge without
fail for one minute as follows:
– Undock the M540 from the M500
– Turn on the M540
– Wait for one minute and observe the M540.
features according to the instructions for use:
If the battery fails, trained personnel must replace
– Verify the LEDs
it.
– Perform a functional test of the internal
battery
– Perform system tests (for example, Metrological checks
communication with the IACS, front buttons,
alarm bar, and functional integrity of If required by applicable regulations, the following
monitored parameters). measurement functions must be checked every two
years by qualified DrägerService personnel:
3 Check that the device combination is in good
condition: – Body temperature
– All labels are complete and legible – Non-invasive blood pressure
– There is no visible damage

– Fuses which are accessible from the
outside are in compliance with the specified
values
according to IEC62353 every two years by
qualified DrägerService personnel.
5 Check the following safety features:
– The power LED and the battery indicator
LED function properly.
– The C500/C700 are powered correctly.
Maintenance
Preventive maintenance
WARNING WARNING
Risk of faulty components Risk of electric shock
Device failure is possible due to wear or Before performing any maintenance work,
material fatigue of the components. disconnect all electrical connectors from the
power supply.
To maintain proper operation of all
components, this device must undergo
The following table shows the preventive
inspection and preventive maintenance at
maintenance intervals:
specified intervals.
Component Interval Measure Personnel re-

sponsible
Two non-invasive blood pressure air inlet Every two years Replace Expert
filters of the M540
If the non-invasive blood pressure air inlet
filter seems dirty or damaged, replace it
before the recommended two years. The air
inlet filter should be replaced, if the M540
was exposed to liquid. See "Exchanging the
ambient air filter" in the Technical
documentation which is available from
DrägerService.
Internal M540 battery Every two years Replace Hospital personnel
For devices that have high transport or
battery use, the battery must be checked
more often.
Internal PS250 / P2500 battery Every two years Replace Expert
NOTE
For devices that have high transport or battery
use, the battery must be checked more often.
NOTE
Do not disassemble the Ni-MH battery inside the
PS250 / P2500. Aside from the required two-year
maintenance recommended for the entire IACS,
this battery requires no additional routine
maintenance.
Maintenance
Maintenance Restart
To maintain optimal performance, the Cockpit must

be restarted on a regular basis. When specific IACS
restart thresholds are reached, the Cockpit pro-
vides a message to the user as described in the fol-
lowing table.
Restart Mode(s) of Message content Message Options Result(s)

Threshold operation duration
Voluntary Discharge Restart is required for 30 seconds Select Restart Restarts IACS
scheduled immediately
maintenance
Records
"Restart is
required"
message to
alarm history
Select Cancel Delays the next
restart message
until a semi-
critical or critical
threshold is
reached
No action taken Restarts IACS
during message
Records
duration
"Restart is
required"
message to
alarm history
Semi-critical Discharge Restart is required for 30 seconds Select Restart Restarts IACS
or Standby scheduled immediately
maintenance
Records
"Restart is
required"
message to
alarm history
during message
Records
duration
"Restart is
required"
message to
alarm history
Maintenance
Restart Mode(s) of Message content Message Options Result(s)

Threshold operation duration
Critical Any Restart is required for 2 minutes Select Restart Restarts IACS
scheduled immediately
maintenance and timer
Records
showing the time
"Restart is
remaining until restart
required"
A medium-priority alarm message to
is activated alarm history
during message
Records
duration
"Restart is
required" alarm
event to alarm
history
Reprocessing
Reprocessing
Reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Information on reprocessing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Classification for reprocessing. . . . . . . . . . . 589

Classification of medical devices . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Classification of device-specific components . . . 589
Before reprocessing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

Observe before disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Validated reprocessing procedures . . . . . . . 590

Overview of the reprocessing procedures of
the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Surface disinfection with cleaning . . . . . . . . . . 590
Storage and transport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Other agents and reprocessing

procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Disinfectants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
After reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Assembling and fitting device-specific
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Preparation before next use of device . . . . . . . 593
Reprocessing
Reprocessing
This chapter provides information for the repro- For specific cleaning instructions regarding the In-
cessing of device-specific components PS250 and finity Medical Cockpits, refer to the instructions for
P2500 power supply units. use entitled Infinity Acute Care System – Infinity
Medical Cockpits.
For specific cleaning instructions regarding Infinity
M540 components and accessories, refer to the in-
structions for use entitled Infinity Acute Care Sys-
tem – Infinity M540 (Software VG7.1).
Safety Information
WARNING CAUTION
Risk due to inappropriately reprocessed prod- Risk due to faulty products
ucts – Signs of wear, e.g., cracks, deformation, dis-
coloration, or peeling, may occur with repro-
Reusable products must be reprocessed, oth-
cessed products.
erwise there is an increased risk of infection.
– Follow the infection prevention policies Check the products for signs of wear and replace
and reprocessing regulations of the them if necessary.
health-care facility.
– Follow the national infection prevention WARNING
policies and reprocessing regulations. Because of the risk of electric shock, never re-
– Use validated procedures for reprocess- move the cover of any device while it is in op-
ing. eration or connected to power.
– Reprocess reusable products after every
use.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for
cleaning agents, disinfectants, and reprocess-
ing devices.
Information on reprocessing
Follow the national infection prevention policies

and reprocessing regulations.
Follow the infection prevention policies and repro-
cessing regulations of the health-care facility (e.g.,
concerning the reprocessing cycles).
Reprocessing
Classification for reprocessing
Classification of medical devices
The classification depends on the intended use of

the medical device. The risk of infection transmis-
sion through the application of the product to the
patient without proper reprocessing is the basis of
the Spaulding classification.
Classification Explanation
Non-critical Components that come only into contact with skin that is intact
Semi-critical Components that carry breathing gas or come into contact with mucous mem-
branes or pathologically altered skin
Critical Components that penetrate skin or mucous membranes or come into contact with
blood
Classification of device-specific Non-critical

components – PS250
– P2500
The following classification is a recommendation
from Dräger.
Semi-critical
– None
Critical
– None
Before reprocessing
WARNING
Observe before disassembly
A risk of an electric shock might occur due to 1 Switch off the device and all devices connected
penetrating liquid. Follow the instructions be- to it.
low to disconnect power before reprocessing.
2 Disconnect the power plugs.
Reprocessing
Validated reprocessing procedures
Overview of the reprocessing

procedures of the components
Components Surface Manual Machine Steam Description of

Disinfection cleaning fol- cleaning with Sterilization the procedure
with cleaning lowed by dis- thermal
infection by disinfection
immersion
PS250 Yes N/A N/A N/A See "Surface dis-
P2500 Yes N/A N/A N/A infection with
cleaning"
on page 590
Surface disinfection with cleaning Components:

– PS250
– P2500
Surface disinfectant Manufacturer Concentration Contact time

Dismozon plus BODE Chemie 1.6 % 15 min
Oxycide Ecolab USA 2.3 % 5 min
WARNING
Prerequisites:
Risk of electric shock and device malfunction.
– The surface disinfectant has been prepared in
accordance with the manufacturer's instruc- Penetrating liquid may cause the following:
tions. – Damage to the device
– The manufacturer's instructions, e.g., regarding – Electric shock
shelf life or application conditions, are ob- – Device malfunctions
served.
– An uncontaminated, lint-free cloth soaked in Ensure that no liquid penetrates the device.
surface disinfectant is used for the cleaning sur-
face disinfection.
WARNING
Do not immerse or rinse the device and its pe-
ripherals. If you spill liquid on the device (in-
cluding the battery or accessories), or acci-
dentally immerse it in liquid, allow contacts to
thoroughly dry.
Reprocessing
Surface disinfection
CAUTION
Do not use excessive pressure when cleaning the 4 Take a new disposable cloth soaked in surface
device and accessories. Excessive pressure can disinfectant. Wipe cleaned surfaces again until
damage the components. all surfaces to be disinfected are visibly wet.
5 Wait 15 minutes for the surface disinfectant
CAUTION contact time.
Do not steam autoclave, gas sterilize, or immerse
6 At the end of the contact time, moisten a new,
the components in liquid or cleaning solutions. Do
uncontaminated and lint-free cloth with water
not subject the components to intense vacuum.
(at least drinking water quality).
WARNING 7 Wipe all surfaces until no remains of the surface
Risk of cross-contamination: disinfectant, such as foam residues or streaks,
are visible.
Perform every step of the instructions below
for each of the components: 8 Wait until the surfaces are dry.
– PS250 9 Check the surfaces for visible damage and, if
– P2500 necessary, replace the product.
Failure to do so can lead to infection.
CAUTION Storage and transport

To avoid damaging the device, do not use sharp
After reprocessing, there are no special require-
tools or abrasives. Never immerse electrical
ments for the storage and transport of the product.
connectors in water or other liquids.
However, the following must be observed:
Cleaning – Store dry and free of dust.
1 Wipe off obvious soiling with a disposable cloth – Avoid recontamination and damage during
soaked in surface disinfectant. transport.
2 Dispose of the cloth. All further information on storage and transport in-
cluded in the accompanying documents must be
3 Wipe all surfaces with a new disposable cloth observed.
soaked in surface disinfectant. After that, there
must no longer be any soiling visible.
Other agents and reprocessing procedures
Disinfectants Surface disinfectants

The manufacturers of the surface disinfectants
Use nationally approved disinfectants suitable for have verified at least the following spectra of activ-
the respective reprocessing process and the in- ity:
tended application. – Bactericidal
– Yeasticidal
Reprocessing
– Virucidal or virucidal against enveloped viruses The following surface disinfectants were compati-
ble with the material at the time of testing:
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for surface
disinfectants.
Class of active ingre- Surface disinfectant Manufacturer Listing
dient
Chlorine-releasing BruTab 6S Brulin EPA1)
agents
Clorox Professional Disinfecting Clorox EPA
Bleach Cleaner
Dispatch Hospital Cleaner Disin-
fectant Towels with Bleach
Klorsept 17 Medentech EPA

Actichlor plus Ecolab USA EPA
Oxygen-releasing Descogen Liquid Antiseptica CE
agents Descogen Liquid r.f.u.
Oxygenon Liquid r.f.u.
Dismozon plus BODE Chemie CE
Oxycide Ecolab USA EPA

Perform Schülke & Mayr CE
SteriMax Wipes Aseptix CE

Incidin OxyWipes Ecolab USA CE
Quaternary ammoni- acryl-des2) Schülke & Mayr CE
um compounds
Mikrozid alcohol free liquid2)
Mikrozid alcohol free wipes2)
Mikrozid sensitive liquid2)

Mikrozid sensitive wipes2)
Cleanisept Wipes Maxi Dr. Schumacher CE
Surfa'Safe Premium ANIOS Laboratories CE

Wip'Anios Excel
Tuffie 5 Vernacare ARTG3)
1) United States Environmental Protection Agency
2) Virucidal against enveloped viruses
3) Australian Register of Therapeutic Goods
Reprocessing
Dräger states that oxygen-releasing agents and Other surface disinfectants are used at one's own
chlorine-releasing agents may cause color change risk.
in some materials. Color change does not indicate
that the product is not functioning correctly.
After reprocessing
Assembling and fitting device-specific

components
Prerequisite:
– All components have been reprocessed and
dried.
After the equipment is cleaned, inspect it and en-
sure that the power supply units are in good work-
ing condition. To do this, follow the guidelines be-
low:
 Make sure that the environment and power sup-
ply meet specifications.
 Inspect all power cords for damage, and make
sure that the insulation is in good condition.
 Inspect the equipment for mechanical damage.
In case of any damage or abnormality, do not
use the equipment. Contact the hospital’s bio-
medical engineers or your service personnel
immediately.
Preparation before next use of device
Checking the operational readiness

Prerequisite:
– The devices have been assembled and pre-
pared so that they are ready for operation.
Procedure:
 Check the operational readiness. For more in-
formation, see "Getting started" on page 99.
Disposal
Disposal
EU Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE) . . . . . . . . . . 595
EU Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE)
This device is subject to EU Directive 2002/96/EC

(WEEE). In order to comply with its registration
according to this directive, this device may not be
disposed of at municipal collection points for waste
electrical and electronic equipment. Dräger has
authorized a company to collect and dispose of this
device.
To initiate collection or for further information,
contact the local Dräger organization.
Technical data
Technical data
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Device combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Infinity PS250 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Infinity P2500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Infinity MCable – Nurse call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Infinity R50N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Sound pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Secondary display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . 606
EMC declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Electromagnetic environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Recommended separation distances from
wireless communication devices . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Operating characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Technical data
Overview
This chapter contains the technical data for the For the following information, refer to the
following devices of the Infinity Acute Care System instructions for use Infinity Acute Care System –
– Monitoring applications: Infinity M540:
– PS250 power supply – Infinity M500 docking station
– P2500 power supply – MPod and MCable devices that connect directly
to the M540
– Minimal technical requirements for the
secondary display – Specifications such as measuring ranges of
individual parameters
– Infinity MCable – Nurse call
The IACS is intended to be connected to one
For technical data of the Infinity C500/C700 refer to
patient at a time.
instructions for use Infinity Medical Cockpit.
Device combinations
This device can be operated in combination with – IEC 60601-1-4 (software-controlled

other Dräger devices or with devices from other functions)
manufacturers. Observe the accompanying – IEC 60601-1-8 (alarm systems)
documents of the individual devices.
If a device combination is not approved by Dräger,
If a device combination is not approved by Dräger, functional integrity of the devices can be
the safety and the functional integrity of the compromised.
individual devices can be compromised. The
The operating organization must ensure that the
operating organization must ensure that the device
device combination meets the applicable
combination complies with the applicable editions
standards.
of the relevant standards for medical devices.
Strictly observe instructions for use and assembly
Device combinations approved by Dräger meet the
instructions of all connected devices.
requirements of the following standards:
– IEC 60601-1, 3rd edition (general requirements CAUTION
for safety, device combinations, software-
Combinations of Dräger devices and third-party
controlled functions)
devices that are not approved by Dräger may
– IEC 60601-1-2 (electromagnetic
adversely affect operation of those devices and
compatibility)
may put the patient at greater risk of injury.
– IEC 60601-1-8 (alarm systems)
Or:
– IEC 60601-1, 2nd edition (general
requirements for safety)
– IEC 60601-1-1 (device combinations)
– IEC 60601-1-2 (electromagnetic
compatibility)
Technical data
CAUTION
The medical device must only be used with
software that is tested and approved by Dräger.
Any modifications of the operating system
settings can impair operating safety.
Responsibility for any such modifications lies with
the operating organization.
Infinity PS250 power supply
Physical specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H) 27.76 x 11.68 x 34.59 cm (10.93 x 4.60 x 13.62 in)
Weight 5.5 kg (12 lbs)
Cooling Convection
Connections – AC power
– RS232
– Alarm output
– System cable
– Infinity network (Ethernet)
– Potential equalization connector
Environmental specifications
Humidity (non-condensing) Operating: 20 to 95%
Storage/Transport: 20 to 95%
Temperature Operating: 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)
Storage: –20 to +60°C (–4 to +140°F)
The PS250 has an operating temperature range of
0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F). When the battery is being charged
at ambient temperatures below 5°C (41°F), the yellow LED
on the PS250 may light up.
Ambient pressure Operating: 485 to 795 mmHg (70 to 106 kPa)

Storage: 375 to 795 mmHg (50 to 106 kPa)
Protection against ingress of water IPX1 according to IEC 60529 – protected against harmful
effects of dripping water when mounted vertically with the
connectors facing down.
Technical data
Electrical specifications
Electrical protection Class 1
Input voltage 100 to 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Input current 3.0 to 1.3 A
Mode of operation Continuous
Batteries Dräger NiMH battery pack
Operating time: approximately 5 min
Recharging time: 8 hours
DC output +24 V nominal, SELV according to IEC 60601-1
Technical data
Infinity P2500
Physical specifications
Dimensions (W x D x H) 218 mm x 150 mm x 348 mm (8.6 in x 5.9 in x 13.7 in)
Weight 10 kg (22 lbs)
Cooling Natural convection (no cooling fan)
Connections – Nurse call
– System cable (quantity of 2)
– Ethernet (quantity of 2)
– RS232 (modular jack)
– Potential equalization connector (optional)
Environmental specifications
Humidity (non-condensing) Operating: 10% to 95%
Storage/Transport: 5% to 95%
Temperature Operating: 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Storage: –20 °C to 60 °C (–4 °F to 140 °F)
Atmospheric pressure Operating: 485 to 795 mmHg (647 hPa to 1060 hPa)
Storage: 375 to 795 mmHg (500 hPa to 1060 hPa)
Protection against ingress of water IPX1 according to IEC 60529 – protected against harmful
effects of dripping water when mounted vertically with the
connectors facing down
Electrical specifications
Input voltage 100 to 240 V AC (50 to 60 Hz)
Input current 4A
Batteries Rechargeable lead acid batteries
Operating time: approximately 5 minutes @ 250 W
Recharging time: maximum 12 hours
DC output – 250 W (TOTAL of two system cable output)
– +28 V DC (when powered by AC mains power supply)
– +24 V DC (when powered by fully charged batteries)
– SELV according to IEC60601-1.
Technical data
LEDs – Green LED (device is connected to AC power).

– Yellow LED (briefly during startup)
– The battery/charging failure indicator lights up yellow
– Battery failure (battery depleted, battery not connect-
ed, battery fault), or
– Battery charging error, or battery temperature issue
The Cockpit LEDs on the front light up for a few seconds
when the Infinity P2500 is connected to AC mains after it has
been disconnected for an interval to indicate that the LED is
working properly.
Automatic shutdown – Overload limit (the device shuts down)
– Power overload: exceed 285 W (at system connector)
– Current overload: exceed 14 A (short circuit protected)
– Output voltage: exceed 32V
– Temperature:
– internal temperature exceeds 75°C (167 °F)
– battery temperature exceeds 50 °C (122°F) when
battery is in charging status after 1 minute.
Electrical protection Class 1
Inrush current 37 A
Technical data
Infinity MCable – Nurse call
Physical attributes
Connections Connects to the PS250 / P2500
Connection via cable 8417370 only
Cable signals during non-alarm state
3
Cable 1 (NO normally open): white
Cable 2 (COM common): brown
Cable 3 (NC normally closed): green
Power requirements
Input voltage 24 V DC maximum
Input current 1 A DC maximum
Switching capacity 15 W maximum
Protection against electric shock Three contacts from the open cable have a
galvanic isolation of 1.5 k V AC
Environmental requirements
Operation
Temperature 5 to 55 °C (41 to 131 °F)
Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Ambient pressure 375 to 825 mmHg (50 to 110 kPa)
Storage
Temperature range –20 to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F)
Technical data
Infinity R50N
Physical attributes
Size (H x W x D) 180 x 120 x 222 mm
(7.1 x 4.7 x 8.7 in)
Weight 1.6 kg (3.6 lbs)
Connections AC power
X14 Infinity network connector
Potential equalization connector
Cooling Convection
Power requirements
Input voltage 100 to 240 V AC (50/60 Hz, 1 A)
Risk management
Protection class Class 1
Protection against liquid ingress IPX0 according to IEC 60529.
Environmental requirements
Operation
Temperature 15 to 40 °C (59 to 104 °F)
Storage
Temperature range –20 to +40 °C (–4 to +104 °F)
Relative humidity 10 to 95%, non-condensing without packaging
Technical data
Sound pressure
Sound pressure levels for IEC alarm tones

Measurements per ISO 3744, 5 to 100% volume setting
Device Low priority Medium priority High priority
C500 (1 generation)
st
50 dB(A) to 68 dB(A) 53 dB(A) to 69 dB(A) 55 dB(A) to 71 dB(A)
C700 (1st generation) 53 dB(A) to 70 dB(A) 54 dB(A) to 71 dB(A) 55 dB(A) to 73 dB(A)
C500 (2 generation)
nd
C700 (2 generation)
nd
C500 (3 generation)
rd
C700 (3rd generation) 57 dB(A) to 80 dB(A) 58 dB(A) to 80 dB(A) 59 dB(A) to 81 dB(A)
Secondary display
A secondary display has to meet the minimum Starting with IACS VG5.0, the maximum resolution
technical specifications outlined in the following of the secondary display must meet the
table. requirements provided in the table. For information
on how to connect a secondary display to the IACS,
see page 61.
General requirements
Resolution 50.8 cm (20 in) display: 1680 x 1050 (2nd-generation C700)
43.2 cm (17 in) display: 1440 x 900 (2nd-generation C500)
54.6 cm (21.5 in) display: 1920 x 1080 (3rd-generation C700)
43.9 cm (17.3 in) display: 1920 x 1080 (3rd-generation C500)
Maximum supported distance 5 m (16.4 ft)
Aspect ratio 16:10 (1st and 2nd generation)
Display delay 250 ms in reference to the patient signal
Connection to Cockpit DVI-I 1 connector (1st and 2nd generation only)
DisplayPort connector (3rd generation only)
Standards compliance IEC60950
Technical data
Electromagnetic compatibility
The separation distances are written with regard to CAUTION

the Cockpit. The numbers provided will not
The equipment should not be used adjacent to or
guarantee faultless operation but should provide
stacked with other equipment; if adjacent or
reasonable assurance of such. This information
stacked use is inevitable, the equipment should
may not be applicable to other medical electrical
be observed to verify normal operation in the
equipment, and older equipment may be
configuration in which it will be used.
particularly susceptible to interference.
Low level signals such as interference from
General notes electromagnetic energy. While the equipment
meets the testing described below, it is not a
Medical electrical equipment needs special
guarantee of perfect operation, the ‘quieter’ the
precautions regarding electromagnetic
electrical environment the better. In general,
compatibility (EMC) and needs to be installed and
increasing the distance between electrical devices
put into service according to the EMC information
decreases the likelihood of interference.
provided in this manual.
Portable and mobile RF communications NOTE
equipment can affect medical electrical equipment. The equipment is intended for use in the
electromagnetic environments specified below.
Cables and accessories not specified within the
The user of this equipment should assure that is
instructions for use are not authorized. Using other
used in such an environment.
cables and/or accessories may adversely impact
safety, performance and electromagnetic
compatibility (increased emission and decreased
immunity).
Electromagnetic emissions
Emissions Compliance according to... Electromagnetic environment
RF emissions (CISPR 11) Group 1 The equipment uses RF energy only
for its internal function. Therefore, its
RF emissions are very low and are
not likely to cause any interference
in nearby electronic equipment.
CISPR Emissions Classification Class A The equipment is suitable for use in
Harmonic emissions Class A industrial areas and hospitals
(IEC 61000-3-2) (CISPR 11 Class A). If it is used in a
residential environment (for which
Voltage fluctuations / flicker Complies CISPR 11 Class B is normally
(IEC 61000-3-3) required) this equipment might not
offer adequate protection to radio
frequency communication services.
The user might need to take
mitigation measures such as
relocating or reorienting the
equipment.
Technical data
Electromagnetic immunity
Immunity IEC 60601-1-2 test level Compliance Electromagnetic environment
against... level (of device)
Electrostatic Contact discharge: ±6 kV ±6 kV Floors should be wood, concrete or
discharge, ESD ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
Air discharge: ±8 kV ±8 kV
synthetic material, the relative
(IEC 61000-4-2)
humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast PS250 / P2500 lines: ±2 kV Mains power quality should be of a
transients / bursts ±2 kV typical commercial or hospital
±1 kV
environment.
(IEC 61000-4-4) Longer input / output
lines: ± 1 kV
Surges on AC Common mode: ±2 kV ±2 kV Mains power quality should be a
mains lines typical commercial or hospital
Differential mode: ±1 kV ±1 kV
environment.
(IEC 61000-4-5)
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Equipment emitting high levels of
magnetic field power line magnetic fields (in excess
50/60 Hz of 3A/m) should be kept at a distance
to reduce likelihood of interference.
(IEC 61000-4-8)
Technical data
Voltage dips and Dip >95%, 0.5 periods >95%, Mains power should be a typical
short interruptions 0.5 periods commercial or hospital environment.
Dip 60%, 5 periods
on AC mains input If user requires continued operation
60%, 5 periods
lines Dip 30%, 25 periods during power mains interruptions,
30%, 25 periods ensure batteries are installed and
(IEC 61000-4-11) Dip >95%, 5 seconds
charged. Ensure battery life exceeds
>95%,
longest anticipated power supply
5 seconds
failures or provide additional
uninterruptible power supply.
Conducted RF 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment should
RF coupled into 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz 3 V/m
be used no closer to any part of the
lines
device, including cables, than the
(IEC 61000-4-6) recommended separation distance
calculated from the equation
Radiated RF
applicable to the frequency of the
(IEC 61000-4-3)
transmitter as below.
Recommended separation distance
3.5
[V1] V d = ------- P
V1
3.5
d = ------- P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
E1
[E1] V/m
7
d = ------ P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
E1
where P is the maximum output

power rating of the transmitter in
watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in
meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF
transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey, should
be less than the compliance level in
each frequency range.
Interference may occur in the vicinity
of equipment marked with the
following symbol:
Technical data
a) Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones
and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be
predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF
transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in
the location in which the equipment is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the
equipment should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed,
additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the equipment.
b) Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
Recommended separation distances

Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF telecommunication
devices and the Cockpit
max. 150 kHz to 800 MHz to Comments (if applicable)
PEIRP (W) 800 MHz 2.5 GHz
Distance 1) Distance 1)
(m) (m)
0.001 0.04 0.07
0.003 0.06 0.12
0.010 0.12 0.23
0.040 0.21 0.4 For example: WLAN 5250
0.100 0.38 0.73 For example: WLAN 2440 (Europe), Bluetooth
0.200 0.54 1.03 For example: WLAN 5250 (Europe)
0.250 0.6 1.03 For example: DECT-devices
1.000 1.2 2.3 For example: GSM 1800 / GSM 1900 / UMTS cellular
phones, WLAN 5600 (not in Europe)
2.000 1.7 3.25 For example: GSM 900 cellular phones
3.000 2.08 3.98
10.00 3.8 7.27
100.00 12 23
1)
NOTE: Information regarding separation distances (IEC 60601-1-2:2007, tables 4 and 6)
Technical data
EMC declaration
General information
This device was tested for electromagnetic This device may be used in the direct vicinity of
compatibility using accessories from the list of other devices only if Dräger has approved this
accessories. Other accessories may only be used device arrangement. If no approval has been given
if they do not compromise the electromagnetic by Dräger, it must be ensured that this device
compatibility. The use of non-compliant functions correctly in the desired arrangement
accessories may result in increased before use. The instructions for use for the other
electromagnetic emissions or decreased devices must be followed.
electromagnetic immunity of the device.
Electromagnetic environment
Emissions Compliance
Radiated emissions Class A, group 1 (30 MHz to 1 GHz)
Conducted emissions Class A, group 1 (150 kHz to 30 MHz)
NOTE
The emissions characteristics of this equipment
make it suitable for use in industrial areas and
hospitals (CISPR 11 class A). If it is used in a res-
idential environment (for which CISPR 11 class B
is normally required), this equipment might not of-
fer adequate protection to radio-frequency com-
munication services. The user might need to take
mitigation measures, such as relocating or re-ori-
enting the equipment.
Immunity against Test level and required electromagnetic environ-

ment
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) (IEC 61000-4-2) Contact discharge: ±8 kV
Air discharge: ±15 kV
Fast transient electrical disturbances (bursts) Power cable: ±2 kV
(IEC 61000-4-4) Longer signal input lines/output lines: ±1 kV
Impulse voltages (surges) (IEC 61000-4-5) Voltage, external conductor – external conductor:
±1 kV
Voltage, external conductor – protective ground con-
ductor: ±2 kV
Technical data
Immunity against Test level and required electromagnetic environ-

ment
Magnetic fields at mains frequency 30 A/m
(IEC 61000-4-8)
Voltage dips and short interruptions in the supply 100 % drop, 0.5 period
voltage (IEC 61000-4-11)
100 % dip, 1 period
30 % dip, 25/30 periods
Voltage interruptions:
100 % drop, 5 seconds
Radiated high-frequency disturbances 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz: 3 V/m
(IEC 61000-4-3)
Conducted high-frequency disturbances 150 kHz to 80 MHz: 3 Vrms, ISM bands: 6 Vrms
(IEC 61000-4-6)
Electromagnetic fields in the vicinity of wireless Various frequencies from 385 MHz to 5785 MHz:
communication devices 9 V/m to 28 V/m, with various pulse modulations
Recommended separation distances from wireless communication devices
To ensure that the functional integrity of this device

is maintained, there must be a separation distance
of at least 1.0 m (3.3 ft) between this device and
wireless communication devices.
Operating characteristics
Classification
Classification Medical Device Europe Class IIb
Index
Index
Numerics Alarm limits

Auto set all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
12-lead monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 241 display on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 473
12-Lead wire set for ECG, connecting . . . . . . . 214 for individual parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3-, 5-, 6-lead wire sets for ECG, connecting . . . 213 Alarm messages
Mainstream CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
A Microstream CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Alarm messages, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
activating quiet mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Alarm messages, viewing current message . . . 124
Adjusting archive settings for ST . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Alarm monitoring
Admitting a patient multiple parameters, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 single alarm on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
over the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ST on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Adult patient category turning alarm monitoring on/off . . . . . . . . . 136
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Alarm priorities, see alarm grades
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Alarm processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Agent display, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Alarm ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Agent parameter firld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Alarm review, stored events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
agent parameter setup, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Alarm settings
Agent/N2O parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 configuring temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Agent/xMAC parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Alarm setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Alarm archive auto set limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
individual parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 changing alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
multiple parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 M540 settings, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Alarm bar ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
description of feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Alarm tone
header bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 selecting tone type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
multiple alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 setting the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 474
turning on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Alarm validation
Alarm behavior list of parameter validation times . . . . . . . 119
cardiac bypass mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 turning feature on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
multiple alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Alarm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
NIBP/SpO2 interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 minimum setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
OR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 474
privacy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Alarms
special alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 pre-silencing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SpO2 desaturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 viewing current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Alarms, all alarms on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
zeroing BP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Alarms, external devices . . . . 406, 414, 434, 446
Alarm conditions All alarms paused button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 alveolar plateau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 375
non-latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Analog sync MCable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Alarm defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Analog vs. digital display selection . . . . . . . . . 487
Alarm groups, setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Analysis tool page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Apnea archive, CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354, 370
after shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Apnea time, CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Apnea time, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Alarm light, see alarm bar Applications, available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Index
ARR C
configuring settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 C.O.
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 auto mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 catheter size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 catheter type display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
selecting leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
selecting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 computation constant, entering . . . . . . . . 344
Arrhythmia processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Artifact, reducing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 injectate volume, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Assembling the IACS hardware . . . . . . . . . . . 107 manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Assining default view to profile . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 measuring modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Atmospheric pressure setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Attaching the M540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 mode, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Attention tone volume, selecting . . . 153, 457, 475 monitoring principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Audio alarm, turning reminder on/off . . . . . . . . 476 patient preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Auto measuring mode precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 saving average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Auto setting alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 starting a measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Auto view setup toolbar, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 starting measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
automatic agent identification, Scio . . . . . . . . . 383 Calculations
Averaging C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 body surface area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
drug calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
hemodynamic calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
B lab data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Banners, supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 oxygenation/ventilation calculations . . . . . 201
Bed Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 saving calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Bed label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 viewing stored calculations . . . . . . . . 198, 204
BIS Calibrating the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
supported parameters and settings . . . . . . 392 Calibration check
Bispectral index (BIS) monitoring . . . . . . . . . . 391 Microstream accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Body surface area, calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 to perform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Boyd equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Cardiac bypass mode
Brightness of screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 457 alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Cardioversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Care unit, assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Catheters
size display, C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
type, C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Cause/remedy messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
CCO
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
external device connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 407
parameter selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
supported parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
view all parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
CentralStation connection, turning on/off . . . . 489
Citrix applications, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Classification Medical Device Europe . . . . . . 611
Index
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 D
prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
surface disinfectants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Deactivating alarm monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Clinical password, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Default profile, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Clinical users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Defaults
CO2 alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
apnea archive, selecting . . . . . . . . . . 354, 370 arrhythmia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
apnea time selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Defibrillator precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
apnea time, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Deleting a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
color selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Demographics page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
connecting sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Device combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Device connectivity . . . . . . . . . 406, 414, 434, 446
gas compensation selection . . . . . . . . . . . 354 DHCP, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 Discharging a patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
patient preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 disinfectants,surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Display
waveform amplitude selection . . . . . . 354, 362 ARR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 CCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
zeroing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
CO2 alarm limits, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
CO2 display, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
CO2 parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
CO2 parameter setup, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 RESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 393, 399
CO2/O2 parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 SpO2 (Masimo SET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Cockpit, turning on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 SpO2 (Nellcor OxiMax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Code button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Code functions, included settings . . . . . . . . . . 477 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Coincidence detection (Resp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 437, 438, 450
Color Display filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
BP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Display mode, selecting ’auto’ or ’manual’ mode .
C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 62, 460
CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Display status, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
CO2 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Display, customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 DNS, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Resp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Docking station, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277, 280, 291 Docking the M540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 109
ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428, 441 Drug calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Configuring alarm settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Drug list, customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Configuring arrhythmia settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Dual Hemo MCable, description . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Conflicts between pressure labels . . . . . . . . . . 318 DuBois equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Connections Duration of timed recordings . . . . . . . . . 482, 484
12-Lead wire set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
3-, 5-, 6-Lead wire sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
cardiac output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Dual Hemo MCable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
ECG lead wire sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
neonatal ECG monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
SpO2 (Masimo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268, 269
SpO2 (Nellcor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Continuous NIBP mode, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Contraindications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Current alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Index
E Fusion mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
ECG
12-lead monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 241 G
connecting 12-lead wire set . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Gateway, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
connecting lead wire sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Graphical trend report
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 selecting trend duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
electrode placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 graphical trends page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
heart rate source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
infusion pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
patient preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 H
pulse tone source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Hardware
QRS sync marker, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 additional hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
roller bypass pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 connecting CO2 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 connecting to IACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
TENS signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Heart rate source, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
TruST 12-lead on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Hemodynamic calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Electric shock, precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 HIS (Hospital Information System) . . . . . . . . . 103
Electrode placement, ECG, RESP . . . . . . . . . 220 Hospital label, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
EMC declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
End-tidal concentration point . . . . . . . . . . 359, 375 I
Environments of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Impedance-derived pacemakers . . . . . . . . . . 232
Equations
Importing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Boyd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Independent Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DuBois . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
hemodynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Infinity Medical Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
ESU interference, pacemakers . . . . . . . . 216, 233
Infinity network
Events
loss of connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Infinity network communication . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
storing manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Infusion pumps, artefact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Exporting profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Injectate volume, C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
External alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Innovian Solution Suite application . . . . . . . . 520
External device alarm option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Inspection of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
External devices
Inspection, intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406, 414, 434, 446
Inspection, visual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
supported cardiac output devices . . . . . . . 406
Install persist settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
External devices - BIS monitoring . . . . . . . . . . 391
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
External devices - Medibus X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Interval measurement mode (NIBP) . . . . . . . . 306
External devices - NMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
color, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
F filter selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
labeling pressure channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Factory defaults, restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 large mean value display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
FastSat mode, SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Filtering IP signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Filtering the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 pressure label conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Fire wall protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 standard labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Freezing waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 wedge pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
French NFC mode zeroing a specific sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 IP address, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Function keys ISO points,changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 IT applications, available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Index
IT setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Messages

IT tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 arrhythmia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
IT tabs, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
L IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Labs, capturing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Resp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Language selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Rest ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Latching alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Lead-wire sets, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Leads, selecting for ARR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Limit alarm ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Microstream
Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425, 439, 451 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
auto set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
M capnogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
M500, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 etCO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
M540 and IACS communication . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 expiratory phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 375
M540 settings, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 inspiratory phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359, 375
M540, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 parameter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
M540, docking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358, 359
M540, turning on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 patient use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
M540, undocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 RRc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Main menu bar technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Mainstream Microstream calibration check
auto set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
calibration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 successful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
CO2 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Microstream MCable
parameter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Mainstream calibration check calibration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
successful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 use with patient types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Mini trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Maintenance description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
preventive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 460
manual agent identification, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . 383 setting up screen area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Manual measurement mode Minimum alarm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 mixed agent, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Marking events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Monitoring sweep speed, selecting . . . . . 63, 457
Masimo SET MCable, connecting . . . . . . . . . . 268 Monitoring unit
Measuring modes, NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Medibus X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 assigning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Menu buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Multiple alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
N
Naming a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Nellcor Oximax MCable, connecting . . . . . . . 286
Neonatal ECG monitoring, connections . . . . . 215
Index
Neonatal patient category P

definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Pacemaker
Network detection, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 fusion mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
communication interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 impedance-derived . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
connecting to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 infusion pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 minimizing ESU interference . . . . . . 216, 233
transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Neuromuscular transmission (NMT) . . . . . . . . 401 precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
NIBP roller bypass pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
chime on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 TENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
color setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Parameter boxes
connecting hose and cuff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 number, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 460
continuous mode, description . . . . . . . . . . 308 top or bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 460
continuous mode, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Parameters
inflation mode, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 changing display status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
interlock feature on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 configuring display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
interval measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . 306 priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 462
interval time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 selecting units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
measuring modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Patient category
mini trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105
single measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
venous stasis on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Patient discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
NIBP/SpO2 interlock alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Patient monitor, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Night time screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Patient positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
NMT Patient preparation
PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 cardiac output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
supported modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Non-latching alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Nurse call NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 RESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 287
SpO2 (Masimo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
SpO2 (Nellcor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
O Patient profile, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
O2 alarm limits, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Patient safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
O2 display, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 PatientWatch, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
O2 parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Pausing alarm monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
O2 parameter setup, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Pausing alarm tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
O2/N2O parameter field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Paw scale, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428, 441
One-shot alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Pediatric patient category
Operating concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Optimizing pacer processing . . . . . . . . . . 216, 233 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Options Persistent alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
device connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 414, 434, 446 Pre-configured code settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
external device alarms . . . . . . . . 414, 434, 446 Pre-silencing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Vent Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434, 446
OR mode
alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Oxygenation/ventilation calculations . . . . . . . . 201
Index
Precautions Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 adding a description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
CCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 adding default view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 default profile assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 default profiles (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 deleting a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Respiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 393, 399 Exporting with a USB device . . . . . . . . . . 504
SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Importing with a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Pressure channels, labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Pressure label conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 naming a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Pressure overlap, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 460 patient profiles (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Primary recorder, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 settings not included in a profile . . . . . . . . . 89
Print screen, requesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 settings, list of patient profiles . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Printing setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Alarm history report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 system profiles (definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Calculations report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 system profiles, list of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Case summary report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 transferring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 503
continuous recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 PS250
Continuous waveform report . . . . . . . . . . . 514 power supply, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ECG report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 599, 601
Graph vitals report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Graphical Trend report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Pulse tone
OR report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 signal source (SpO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 290
Rest ECG report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 source, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
ST report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 PWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Tabular Trend report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Timed recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Q
Timed waveform report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
trend graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 QRS sync marker, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Ventilation/anesthesia report . . . . . . . . . . . 515 QuadHemo pod
Priority level of alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . 526 description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Priority, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Privacy alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Privacy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
R
Problem solving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 R50 recorder
Procedures, analysis tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
R50N recorder
description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
primary recorder, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
recording speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
secondary recorder, selecting . . . . . . . . . . 491
Recordings
alarm recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
alarm waveform on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
continuous recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
continuous recordings, requesting . . . . . . 511
delay setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482, 484
duration of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481, 482
remote recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
timed recordings, requesting . . . . . . . . . . 511
timed, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
waveform selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Index
Regional time/date selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Roller bypass pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Remote control
alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 S
from central station (ICS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Safety
Remote notification of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Remote view functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 C.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Removing the M540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 CCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Report connecting other equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Alarm history report, requesting . . . . . . . . . 515 defibrillator precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Calculations report, requesting . . . . . . . . . 515 electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Case summary report, requesting . . . . . . . 515 electrosurgery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Continuous waveform report, requesting . . . 514 IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
ECG report, requesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Graph vitals report, requesting . . . . . . . . . 514 pacemaker precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Graphical Trend report, requesting . . . . . . 514 patient safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
OR report, requesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Respiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 393, 399
Rest ECG report, requesting . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Safety checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
ST report, requesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Sample line
Tabular Trend report, requesting . . . . . . . . 514 use with Microstream MCable . . . . . . . . . 358
Timed waveform report, requesting . . . . . . 513 Saving calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Ventilation/anesthesia report, requesting . . . 515 Scio
reprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 Agent display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 agent parameter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
before . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 automatic agent identification . . . . . . . . . . 383
classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 CO2 alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
cleaning prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 CO2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 CO2 parameter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
disinfectants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590, 591 manual agent identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 mixed agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
surface disinfectants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 monitoring principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
validated procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 O2 alarm limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Reprocessing personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 O2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Respiration O2 parameter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Apnea archive selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Show all page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
coincidence detection on/off . . . . . . . . . . . 261 supported parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
color selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 xMAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
connecting leads, 12-lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 zeroing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
connecting leads, neonates . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Scio dialog
lead selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 396 using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
marker on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Scio modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
measuring modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Scio settings
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Screen brightness
monitoring on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
patient preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 393, 399 Screen layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
waveform size selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 IT tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Respiratory sweep speed, selecting . . . . . 63, 457 mini trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Rest ECG report, configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Restoring factory defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Secondary recorder, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Reviewing events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Sensitivity mode (SpO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Index
Sensor zeroing, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 T

Service personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Setting alarm limits, see Alarm limits Tabular trend report
Settings printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Install persist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 selecting interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Tabular trends in split screen mode . . . . . . . . 188
Show all page, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Technical data
Silencing alarm tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . 606
Silencing alarms (ahead of time) . . . . . . . . . . . 131 nurse call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Simulation mode, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 P2500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Single measurement mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 PS250 power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599, 601
Single parameter alarms, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . 139 R50 recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Six-lead ST monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 secondary display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Sound pressure, technical specifications . . . . 605 Temperature
Special alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 color, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 298
SpHb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Split screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 monitoring principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
tabular trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 parameter selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
SpO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Temporarily pausing alarm monitoring . . . . . . 134
alarm delay on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 TENS signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
averaging time, selecting . . . . . . . . . . 277, 280 Time zone, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277, 280 Timed recording duration . . . . . . . . . . . . 482, 484
desaturation alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Timed recordings, requesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
FastSat mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Tone volume
measurement method . . . . . . . . . . . . 264, 284 alarm tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 474
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 attention tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
patient preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 287 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 474
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 SpO2 pulse tone, on/off . . . . . . . . . . 276, 290
pulse tone on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 290 Touch screen calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
selecting signal source . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 290 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
sensitivity mode (SpO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Transferring patient data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SpO2 tone volume, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Transferring profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
waveform size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 290 Trend duration on report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
ST Trend graphs
12-lead ST monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 navigating through trend data . . . . . . . . . . 179
6-lead ST monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
alarm on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 trend scales, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
alarm setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Trend scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
event duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Trend Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
ISO points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 customizing tabular trends . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
measurement points, changing . . . . . . . . . 243 navigating trend data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 printing report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Standard labels, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Trends
Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 mini trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Stopping waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 trend graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Storing alarms, see Alarm archive Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Storing calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 TruST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Subnet mask, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 12-lead on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Symphony application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 Turning on the Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
System cable, connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Turning on the M540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Twelve-lead ST monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Types of reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Index
U zeroing, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Undocking the M540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 109

User groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Clinical users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Reprocessing personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Service personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
V
Validating alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Venous stasis on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Vent Central option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434, 446
Ventilator
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424, 437, 438, 450
monitoring principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434, 446
Ventilator loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425, 439, 451
Ventilator setup
color selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428, 441
Paw scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428, 441
Volume scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428, 442
Views
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
saving changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Virus protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Volume (vent) scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428, 442
W
Waveforms
left or right display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 460
number, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 460
SpO2 amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 290
stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Web browser
adding a page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
deleting a page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Wedge pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
X
xMAC, Scio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Z
Zeroing
a specific sensor, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
zeroing BP - effects on alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
These instructions for use only apply to
Infinity® Acute Care System –
Monitoring Applications – VG7.1
with the Serial No.:
If no Serial No. has been filled in by Dräger,
these instructions for use are provided for gener-
al information only and are not intended for use
with any specific machine or unit.
This document is provided for customer informa-
tion only, and will not be updated or exchanged
without customer requests.
Manufacturer
Draeger Medical Systems, Inc. Drägerwerk AG & Co. KGaA

3135 Quarry Road Moislinger Allee 53 - 55
Telford, PA 18969-1042 D-23542 Lübeck
U.S.A. Germany
(215) 721-5400 +49 451 8 82-0
(800) 4DRAGER FAX +49 451 8 82-20 80
(800 437-2437) http://www.draeger.com
FAX (215) 723-5935
http://www.draeger.com
3703497 – RI 02 en
© Drägerwerk AG & Co. KGaA
Edition: 3 – 2021-09
(Edition: 1 – 2018-07)
Dräger reserves the right to make modifications

to the equipment without prior notice.

contentDocumentsProductsiacs Vg71 Monitoring Applications Ifu 3703497 en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

contentDocumentsProductsiacs Vg71 Monitoring Applications Ifu 3703497 en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

contentDocumentsProductsiacs Vg71 Monitoring Applications Ifu 3703497 en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instructions for use

Infinity® Acute Care System

WARNING Monitoring Applications

The capnography component of this product is

Safety information definitions

WARNING Abbreviations and symbols

For your safety and that of your patients. . . 13 Profiles/status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Connecting the CO2 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 CCO/SvO2 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

CO2 parameter setup functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

For your safety and that of your patients

Mandatory reporting of adverse events . . . . . . 14

General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Mandatory reporting of adverse events Storing the instructions for use

Serious adverse events with this product must be WARNING

Accessories Restrictions for use

WARNING Connection to hospital network

General safety information

The following WARNING and CAUTION CAUTION

Not for use in areas of explosion hazard Operating location

WARNING Only use devices (monitor, MPod, MCable, and

Dräger makes the following security

The IACS and any connected optional hardware

The IACS is intended for multi-parameter, physio-

Infinity Medical Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Infinity PS250 power supply unit (PS250) . . . 27

Infinity P2500 power supply unit (P2500). . . 27

Infinity M540 patient monitor (M540) . . . . . . 28

Infinity M500 docking station (M500) . . . . . . 28

Device interface kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Infinity Medical Cockpit

The Infinity Medical Cockpit (referred to in this IFU NOTE

Infinity PS250 power supply unit (PS250)

Infinity P2500 power supply unit (P2500)

Infinity M540 patient monitor (M540)

Infinity M500 docking station (M500)

A D Pins for charging the battery of the M540 and

Rear view of the M500

A System cable connector

Additional hardware 302

The following table lists the additional devices that

Device Description Connection

Device Description Connection

Scio Four Measures the concentration of Connects directly to the CO2

Device Description Connection

Device interface kits

Third party devices

– BIS Vista (Medtronic) – Vigileo (Edwards)

Dräger Ventilators Dräger Anethesia devices

Warning! Strictly follow these Lower alarm limits

Consult instructions for use Upper alarm limits

Caution! Observe the Autoset alarm limits

Medical Device Alarm monitoring deactivated

Access to trend pages Alarm monitoring deactivated

The button next to this symbol Acoustic alarm signal paused

Access to alarm functions Acoustic alarm signal turned off

Access to the standby and privacy Change clinical password

Access to pre-configured views Lung symbol that pulsates with each

Access to parameter pages Heart blip that flashes with each

Adult patient category Pediatric patient category